2014-15 Ranger RZR-1000 XP XP4 Service Manual

2014-2015 RZR XP 1000 / RZR XP4 1000
Service Manual
FOREWORD
The information printed within this publication includes the latest product information at time of print. The most recent
version of this Service Manual is available in electronic format at www.polarisdealers.com.
This Service Manual is designed primarily for use by certified Polaris Master Service Dealer technicians in a properly
equipped shop and should be kept available for reference. All references to left and right side of the vehicle are from
the operator's perspective when seated in a normal riding position.
Some procedures outlined in this manual require a sound knowledge of mechanical theory, tool use, and shop
procedures in order to perform the work safely and correctly. Technicians should read the text and be familiar with the
service procedures before starting any repair. Certain procedures require the use of special tools. Use only the proper
tools as specified. If you have any doubt as to your ability to perform any of the procedures outlined in this Service
Manual, contact an authorized dealer for service.
We value your input and appreciate any assistance you can provide in helping make these publications more useful.
Please provide any feedback you may have regarding this manual. Authorized dealers can submit feedback using 'Ask
Polaris'. Click on 'Ask Polaris', and then click on 'Service Manual / Service Literature Question'.
Consumers, please provide your feedback in writing to: Polaris Industries Inc. ATTN: Service Publications Department,
2100 Hwy 55, Medina, MN 55340.
Publication Printed August 2014 (PN 9925724 R01)
Copyright 2014 Polaris Industries Inc. All information contained within this publication is based on the latest product information at the time of publication. Due to
constant improvements in the design and quality of production components, some minor discrepancies may result between the actual vehicle and the information
presented in this publication. Depictions and/or procedures in this publication are intended for reference use only. No liability can be accepted for omissions or
inaccuracies. Any reprinting or reuse of the depictions and/or procedures contained within, whether whole or in part, is expressly prohibited. Printed in U.S.A.
UNDERSTANDING SAFETY LABELS AND DIRECTIONS
Throughout this manual, important information is brought to your attention by the following symbols:
WARNING
SAFETY ALERT WARNING indicates a potential hazard that may result in severe injury or death to the operator,
bystander or person(s) inspecting or servicing the vehicle.
CAUTION
SAFETY ALERT CAUTION indicates a potential hazard that may result in minor personal injury or damage to the
vehicle.
CAUTION
CAUTION indicates special precautions that must be taken to avoid vehicle damage or property damage.
NOTE:
NOTE provides key information by clarifying instructions.
IMPORTANT:
IMPORTANT provides key reminders during disassembly, assembly and inspection of components.
TRADEMARKS
POLARIS ACKNOWLEDGES THE FOLLOWING PRODUCTS MENTIONED IN THIS MANUAL:
Loctite, Registered Trademark of the Loctite Corporation
Nyogel, Trademark of Wm. F. Nye Co.
Fluke, Registered Trademark of John Fluke Mfg. Co.
Mity-Vac, Registered Trademark of Neward Enterprises, Inc.
Torx, Registered Trademark of Textron
Hilliard, Trademark of the Hilliard Corporation
Warn, Trademark of Warn Industries
FOX, Registered Trademark of FOX RACING SHOX
RydeFX, Registered Trademark of ArvinMeritor
Some Polaris factory publications can be downloaded from www.polarisindustries.com, purchased from
www.purepolaris.com or by contacting the nearest Polaris dealer.
GENERAL INFORMATION 1
MAINTENANCE 2
ENGINE / COOLING SYSTEM 3
FUEL SYSTEM 4
PVT SYSTEM 5
TRANSMISSION 6
FINAL DRIVE 7
STEERING / SUSPENSION 8
BRAKE SYSTEM 9
BODY / FRAME 10
ELECTRICAL 11
GENERAL INFORMATION
CHAPTER 1 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2
MODEL NUMBER DESIGNATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2
MODEL NUMBER DESIGNATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) DESIGNATION (2015+) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
VEHICLE AND ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER LOCATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4
VEHICLE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5
REPLACEMENT KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5
PUBLICATION NUMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.10
2014-2015 RZR XP 1000 / EPS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.10
RZR XP 1000 CLUTCH CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.11
2014-2015 RZR XP 4 1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.13
2014-2015 RZR 1000 XP4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.14
2015 RZR XP 1000 EPS HIGH LIFTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.16
2015 RZR XP 1000 HIGH LIFTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.18
2015 RZR XP 1000 DESERT EDITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.18
2015 RZR XP 1000 DESERT EDITION CLUTCH CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.20
MISC. SPECIFICATIONS AND CHARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.21
MASTER TORQUE TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.21
CONVERSION TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.23
STANDARD BOLT TORQUE SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.24
METRIC BOLT TORQUE SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.24
SAE TAP / DRILL SIZES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.25
METRIC TAP / DRILL SIZES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.25
DECIMAL EQUIVALENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.26
1.1
9925724 R01 - 2014-2015 RZR XP 1000 / RZR XP4 1000 Service Manual
Copyright 2014 Polaris Industries Inc.
GENERAL INFORMATION
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
Model Number Designation
Example: Z14ST1EAL
MODEL
GROUP CHASSIS DRIVELINE ENGINE CATEGORY OPTION REGION
YEAR
2/3rd
1st digit 4th digit* 5th digit* 6th digit* 7th digit* 8th digit 9th digit** 10th digit
digit
Displacement in cc A = ORV
11 divided by 10 and
J = RZR XP E = 4x4 Shaft / IRS rounded to two digits E = EU On-road
12 V = RZR H = 4x4 Shaft / IRS F = INTL
Z = RZR 13 (i.e. 50 = 498cc) M = Military C = Calif.
X = Multi- T = 4x4 Shaft /
14 pass RZR Trailing Arm - - OR - - S=
15 6 = 570 Scandinavian
E = EPS V = EU On-road
7 = 760
F=D+E
9 = 875
* = digits that would transfer to 17 digit VIN and are used in digits 4-8 respectively
** = 9th digit will be used on color/featured versions of models (not including the base)
First 3 digits and 9th digit are used in model number only. They are not used with the 17 digit VIN.
Model Number Designation

Example: A15SEA57AD
GROUP MODEL YEAR MAKE / CHASSIS CODE ENGINE CODE REGION OPTION
1st 2nd 3rd 4th* 5th* 6th* 7th* 8th* 9th 10th**
A 1 5 S E A 5 7 A D
* = digits that would transfer to 17 digit VIN and are used in digits 4-8 respectively
** = 10th digit will be used on color/featured versions of models (not including the base)
First 3 digits and 10th digit are used in model number only. They are not used with the 17 digit VIN.
Digits 1 through 8 determine Digital Wrench calibration.
1.2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Vehicle Identification Number
Example: 4XAKA09A0F3000000 1
VEHICLE DESCRIPTORS VEHICLE IDENTIFIERS
MFG. LOCATION
MODEL YEAR *
CHECK DIGIT
ENGINE SIZE
CATEGORY
DRIVELINE
MODIFIER
CHASSIS
ENGINE
WORLD MFG. ID
INDIVIDUAL SERIAL NO.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
4 X A K A 0 9 A 0 F 3 0 0 0 0 0 0
* Model Year: A = 2010; B = 2011; C = 2012; D = 2013; E = 2014; F = 2015
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) Designation (2015+)

Example: 4XARH57A0F3000000
VEHICLE DESCRIPTORS VEHICLE IDENTIFIERS
ENGINE MODIFIER
MFG. LOCATION
MODEL YEAR *
CHECK DIGIT
ENGINE SIZE
CATEGORY
DRIVELINE
CHASSIS
WORLD MFG. ID
INDIVIDUAL SERIAL NO.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
4 X A R H 5 7 A 0 F 3 0 0 0 0 0 0
* Model Year: A = 2010; B = 2011; C = 2012; D = 2013; E = 2014; F = 2015
1.3
GENERAL INFORMATION
Vehicle and Engine Serial Number Location
Whenever corresponding about a Polaris ORV, refer to the vehicle identification number (VIN) and the engine serial
number.
The VIN can be found stamped on a portion of the left rear frame, behind the lower shock mounting location. Refer to
Figure 1-1.
The engine serial number can be found on a decal applied to the front of the engine crankcase (A) or stamped into the
crankcase on the PTO side of the engine (B). Refer to Figure 1-2.
1.4
GENERAL INFORMATION
VEHICLE INFORMATION
Replacement Keys 1
Replacement keys can be made from the original key. To identify which series the key is, take the first two digits on the
original key and refer to the chart to the right for the proper part number.
SERIES# PART NUMBER
20 4010278
21 4010278
22 4010321
23 4010321
27 4010321
28 4010321
31 4110141
32 4110148
67 4010278
68 4010278
Publication Numbers
MODEL OWNERS MANUAL PARTS MANUAL
2014 RZR XP 1000 9924687 9924688
2014 RZR XP 1000 EPS 9924687 9924688
2014 RZR XP 1000 INTL 9924687 9924688
2014 RZR XP 4 1000 9924687 9924688
2015 RZR XP 1000 EPS 9925838 9925754
2015 RZR XP 1000 INTL 9925838 9925858
2015 RZR XP4 1000 9925838 9925795
2015 RZR XP 1000 EPS High Lifter 9925836 9925754
NOTE: When ordering service parts be sure to use the correct parts manual.
Polaris factory publications can be found at www.polaris.com or purchased from www.purepolaris.com.
1.5
GENERAL INFORMATION
SPECIAL TOOLS
Special tools may be required while servicing this vehicle. Some of the tools listed or depicted are mandatory, while
other tools may be substituted with a similar tool, if available. Polaris recommends the use of Polaris Special Tools
when servicing any Polaris product. Dealers may order special tools through Polaris official tool supplier.
Bosch Automotive Service Solutions:
1-800-345-2233 or http://polaris.service-solutions.com/
1.6
GENERAL INFORMATION
2200421 2460761 2870341-A 2870386 2870630
Gas Shock Hall Sensor Probe Drive Clutch Spider Piston Pin Puller Timing Light
Recharging Kit Harness Remover/Installer 1
2870910-A 2870975 2871056 2871226 2871282

Roller Pin Tool Mity-Vac Pressure Driven Clutch Puller Clutch Bushing Transmission Seal
Test Tool Replacement Tool Kit Driver (50 MM)
2871351 2871358-B 2871702 2871745 2872085

IFP Depth Tool Drive Clutch Holding Shaft Drive Static Timing Light Drive Clutch Puller
Fixture Transmission and Harness
Front Gearcase Tool
Kit
2872608 2876389 2877408 8700226 9314177-A

Roll Pin Removal Tool Combination Pliers Spanner Wrench / CV Boot Clamp Pliers Drive Clutch Holding
(27) Clutch Spreader (ear) Tool
1.7
GENERAL INFORMATION
PA-49316 PA-50231 PS-45908 PU-43506-A PU-45281A
Water Pump Drive & Snorkel Driver T-Handle Tool Fuel Pressure Gauge Shock Body Holding
Rotor Removal Tool Kit Tool
PU-47471 PU-48951 PU-49466 PU-50105 PU-50296

Smartlink Module Kit CV Boot Clamp Pliers Relay Bypass Oil Filter Wrench Battery Tester
(Stepless)
PU-50338 PU-50518 PU-50562 PU-50563 PU-50564

Hydrometer Clutch Compressor Engine Stand Adapter Cylinder Holding & Water Pump Seal
Camshaft Timing Installer
Plate
PU-50565 PU-50566 PU-50578 PU-50624 PU-50625

Oil Pressure Gauge Transmission Nut Clutch Spider Nut Rolling Engine Stand Engine Stand Adapter
Adapter (1/2 NPT) Socket Socket Sleeve (2)
1.8
GENERAL INFORMATION
PU-50658 PU-50931 PU-50939 PU-51024 PU-51039
Clutch Center Shock Rod Holding Shock Seal Protector Shock Rod Holding Gas Shock Fill Tool
Distance Tool Tool (3/4) Sleeve (5/8) Tool 1
PV-1253 PV-43513-A PV-43526 PV-43531 PV-43568

Valve Spring Valve Spring Connector Test Kit Oil Presure gauge Fluke Multimeter
Compressor Compressor Adapter
PV-43570 PV-48656 PW-47053 PW-47054

Piston Ring Fuel Pressure Gauge Bench Mount Engine Engine Stand Adapter
Compressor Pliers Adapter Stand Sleeve (2 3/8)
1.9
GENERAL INFORMATION
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
2014-2015 RZR XP 1000 / EPS
CATEGORY DIMENSION / CAPACITY

Length 119 / 302.2 cm
Width 64 / 162.5 cm
Height 73.75 / 187.3 cm
Wheel Base 90 / 228.6 cm
Ground Clearance 13.5 / 34.3 cm
Dry Weight 1379 lbs. / 625.5 kg
Gross Vehicle Weight 2200 lbs. / 998 kg
Cargo Box Capacity 300 lbs. / 136 kg
740 lbs. / 335.6 kg

Maximum Weight Capacity (Payload) (Includes riders, cargo and
accessories)
Hitch Towing Capacity

This vehicle is not equipped with
a hitch for towing loads. Do not
use this vehicle for towing. Do not
Hitch Tongue Capacity modify the vehicle by adding a
hitch.
1.10
GENERAL INFORMATION
ENGINE DRIVETRAIN
Platform
Domestic Twin Cyl., 4Stroke,
DOHC
Transmission Type Polaris Automatic PVT 1
Shift Type In Line Shift - P/ H / L / N / R
Engine Displacement 999cc
Transmission Gear Ratios:
Number of Cylinders 2 High 10.73:1
Bore & Stroke 93 x 73.5 mm Low 22.79:1
Reverse 20.41:1
Compression Ratio 11:1
Front Gearcase Lubricant Demand Drive
Engine Idle Speed 1200 +/- 100 RPM Requirement 8.5 oz. (250 ml)
Engine Max Speed 8800 RPM Transmission Lubricant Full Synthetic AGL
Valve Clearance (Intake) 0.005-0.007 (0.125-0.175 mm) Requirement 44 oz. (1300 ml)
Valve Clearance (Exhaust) 0.009-0.011 (0.229-0.275 mm) Drive Belt 3211148
Engine Hot Light Instrument Cluster Indicator
STEERING / SUSPENSION
Lubrication Wet Sump
Toe Out 1/8 - 3/16 (3.2 - 4.8 mm)
Oil Requirements PS4 Front Suspension Independent Dual A-arm
Oil Capacity 2.5 qts. (2.4 L) Walker Evans 2.0
Coolant Capacity 5.44 qt (5.1 L) Front Travel 16 (40.6 cm)
Rear Suspension Independent Trailing Arm
FUEL SYSTEM Walker Evans 2.5
Type Bosch ME17 EFI Rear Travel 18 (45.7 cm)
Fuel Delivery Electronic Fuel Pump (in-tank) Spring Adjustment Threaded Spanner Wrench
Adjustment
Fuel Pressure 58 2 PSI (400 14 kPa)
Fuel Capacity / 9.5 gal. (36 L) WHEELS / BRAKES
Requirement 87 Octane (minimum)
Front Rim / Size Aluminum 14 x 6
Rear Rim / Size Aluminum 14 x 8
ELECTRICAL
Front Tire Make / Model / Maxxis Bighorn
Alternator Max Output 560 Watts @ 3000 RPM Size 29 x 9 R14
Lights: Main Headlights Dual Beam LED cluster Rear Tire Make / Model / Maxxis Bighorn
Taillights 0.2 Watt LED cluster Size 29 x 11 R14
Brake Lights 2.9 Watt LED cluster Front 16 psi (110 kPa)
Tire Air Pressure
Ignition System ME17 ECU Rear 16 psi (110 kPa)
Spark Plug / Gap XG4YCX / 0.70.8 mm Brake System Foot Actuated 4 Wheel
Front & Rear Hydraulic Dual Bore Caliper
Battery / Amp Hr 12v Flooded, 575 CCA
Brake Fluid DOT 4
DC Outlet Standard 12 Volt
Relays Fan, EFI, Fuel Pump, Chassis,
EPS (if appl.)
Circuit Breaker 20A Cooling Fan
Fuses 20A EFI
10A Fuel Pump
5A Brake Light
20A Accessory
10A Drive
10A Lights
20A EPS (if appl.)
RZR XP 1000 CLUTCH CHART

MODEL ALTITUDE SHIFT WEIGHT DRIVE SPRING DRIVEN SPRING
Meters 0-1800 26-61 White / Orange Red
2014 XP 1000 (Feet) (0-6000) (1323098) (7043924) (3234452)
1.11
GENERAL INFORMATION
1800-3700 26-55 White / Orange Red
(6000 - 12000) (1322982) (7043924) (3234452)
0-1800 26-63 Orange / Black Red
Meters (0-6000) (1323176) (1323176) (3234452)
2015 XP 1000 (Feet) 1800-3700 26-59 Orange / Black Red
(6000-12000) (1322981) (7044338) (3234452)
1.12
GENERAL INFORMATION
2014-2015 RZR XP 4 1000
1
Length 146 / 370.8 cm
Width 64 / 162.5 cm
Height 73.75 / 187.3 cm
Dry Weight 1596 lbs. / 724 kg
900 lbs. / 408 kg

accessories)
Hitch Towing Capacity This vehicle is not equipped with

hitch.
1.13
GENERAL INFORMATION
ENGINE DRIVETRAIN
Domestic Twin Cyl., 4Stroke, Transmission Type Polaris Automatic PVT
Platform
DOHC Shift Type In Line Shift - P/ H / L / N / R
Reverse 22.92:1
Toe Out 1/8 - 3/16 (3.2 - 4.8 mm)
Adjustment
ELECTRICAL
Tire Air Pressure
Brake Fluid DOT 4
EPS (if appl.)
Fuses 20A EFI
10A Fuel Pump
5A Brake Light
20A Accessory
10A Drive
10A Lights
20A EPS (if appl.)
2014-2015 RZR 1000 XP4

Meters 0-1800 26-67 White / Orange Red
2014 XP4 1000 (Feet) (0-6000) (1323177) (7043924) (3234452)
1.14
GENERAL INFORMATION
1800-3700
(6000 - 12000)
26-61
(1323098)
White / Orange
(7043924)
Red
(3234452)
1
Meters (0-6000) (1323260 (7043924) (3234452)
2015 XP4 1000 (Feet)
(6000 - 12000) (1322981) (7043924) (3234452)
1.15
GENERAL INFORMATION
2015 RZR XP 1000 EPS High Lifter

Length 122 / 310 cm
Width 66 / 167.6 cm
Height 74.5 / 189.2 cm
Dry Weight 1545 lbs. / 701 kg
740 lbs. / 335.6 kg

accessories)
Hitch Towing Capacity The tow loop on the rear of the

vehicle is provided for recovery
use ONLY. Tow a vehicle ONLY of
equal or lesser size and weight.
When towing a disabled RZR
Hitch Tongue Capacity vehicle, place the disabled
vehicles transmission in neutral.
Do not operate the vehicle faster
than 10 MPH (16 km/h) when
towing.
1.16
GENERAL INFORMATION
ENGINE DRIVETRAIN
Platform
Domestic Twin Cyl., 4Stroke,
DOHC
Transmission Type Polaris Automatic PVT 1
Shift Type In Line Shift - P/ H / L / N / R
Reverse 22.92:1
Toe Out 1/8 - 3/16 (3.2 - 4.8 mm)
PS-4 5W-50 4-Cycle Oil and
Front Suspension Independent Dual A-arm
Oil Requirements PS-4 Extreme Duty 10W-50 4-
Walker Evans 2.0
Cycle Oil
Front Travel 16 (40.6 cm)
Oil Capacity 2.5 qts. (2.4 L)
Coolant Capacity 5.44 qt (5.1 L) Walker Evans 2.5
Rear Travel 18 (45.7 cm)
FUEL SYSTEM Spring Adjustment Threaded Spanner Wrench
Type Bosch ME17 EFI Adjustment
Fuel Delivery Electronic Fuel Pump (in-tank)
Fuel Pressure 58 2 PSI (400 14 kPa) WHEELS / BRAKES
Fuel Capacity / 9.5 gal. (36 L) Front Rim / Size Aluminum 14 x 6
Requirement 87 Octane (minimum) Rear Rim / Size Aluminum 14 x 6
Front Tire Make / Model / High Lifter Outlaw2
ELECTRICAL Size 29.5 x 9.5 R14
Alternator Max Output 560 Watts @ 3000 RPM Rear Tire Make / Model / High Lifter Outlaw2
Size 29.5 x 9.5 R14
Lights: Main Headlights Dual Beam LED cluster
Front 18 psi (124 kPa)
Taillights 0.2 Watt LED cluster Tire Air Pressure
Rear 18 psi (124 kPa)
Brake Lights 2.9 Watt LED cluster
Brake System Foot Actuated 4 Wheel
Ignition System ME17 ECU Front & Rear Hydraulic Dual Bore Caliper
Spark Plug / Gap XG4YCX / 0.70.8 mm Brake Fluid DOT 4
EPS (if appl.)
Fuses 10A EFI
10A Fuel Pump
5A Brake Light
10A Accessory
10A Drive
10A Lights
20A EPS (if appl.)
1.17
GENERAL INFORMATION
2015 RZR XP 1000 High Lifter
High Lifter Meters 0-1800 26-61 White / Orange Red
Edition (Feet) (0-6000) (1323260) (7043924) (3234452)
2015 RZR XP 1000 Desert Edition
1.18
GENERAL INFORMATION

Length 119 / 302.2 cm 1
Width 64 / 162.5 cm
Height 73.75 / 187.3 cm
Dry Weight 1379 lbs. / 625.5 kg
740 lbs. / 335.6 kg

accessories)
Hitch Towing Capacity This vehicle is not equipped with

hitch.
1.19
GENERAL INFORMATION
ENGINE DRIVETRAIN
Domestic Twin Cyl., 4Stroke, Transmission Type Polaris Automatic PVT
Platform
DOHC Shift Type In Line Shift - P/ H / L / N / R
Reverse 20.41:1
Toe Out 1/8 - 3/16 (3.2 - 4.8 mm)
Adjustment
ELECTRICAL
Tire Air Pressure
Brake Fluid DOT 4
EPS (if appl.) 2015 RZR XP 1000 Desert Edition Clutch
Circuit Breaker 20A Cooling Fan Chart
Fuses 20A EFI
10A Fuel Pump DRIV-
SHIFT DRIVE
5A Brake Light MOD- EN
ALTITUDE WEIG- SPRIN-
20A Accessory EL SPRIN-
HT G
10A Drive G
10A Lights White /
20A EPS (if appl.) 26-61 Red
Desert Meters 0-1800 (13231-
Orange
(323445-
Edition (Feet) (0-6000) 76)
(70439-
2)
24)
1.20
GENERAL INFORMATION
MISC. SPECIFICATIONS AND CHARTS
Master Torque Table ITEM TORQUE 1
Drive Clutch Shift Weight 20 in-lb (2 Nm)
ITEM TORQUE Fasteners
A-Arm Bolt 290 ft-lb (393 Nm)
42 ft-lb (57 Nm)
(front) (Apply 0.4 mL Loctite 7088
Drive Clutch Spider
42 ft-lbs (57 Nm) Primer and 0.4 mL Loctite
Ball Joint Fasteners
620)
Battery Mount Bracket 8 ft-lbs (11 Nm)
Fasteners 250 ft-lb (339 Nm)
Drive Clutch Spider Jamb (Apply 0.1 mL Loctite 7088
Battery Terminal Fasteners 60 in-lbs (7 Nm) Nut Primer and 0.1 mL Loctite
Step 1: 24 in-lbs (3 Nm) 620)
Beadlock Screws Step 2: 7 ft-lbs (10 Nm) Driven Clutch Retaining 55 ft-lb (75 Nm)
Brake Disc Mounting Bolts 30 ft-lb (41 Nm) Bolt
Brake Bleed Screws 48 in-lb (5 Nm) Driven Clutch Helix
48 in-lb (5 Nm)
Retaining Screws
Brake Caliper Mounting 40 ft-lbs (54 Nm)
Bolts ECU Mounting Screws 24 in-lb (3 Nm)
Brake Line Banjo Bolts 15 ft-lbs (20 Nm) Engine Mount (front) 40 ft-lbs (54 Nm)
Brake Line Flare Fittings 15 ft-lbs (20 Nm) Engine Oil Plug 12 ft-lbs (16 Nm)
Brake Pedal Mount Bracket Step 1-2: 64 ft-lb (87 Nm)
16 ft-lbs (22 Nm) Engine/Transmission Step 3: 5 ft-lb (7 Nm)
Bolts
15 ft-lbs (20 Nm) Mounting Bolts Step 4-7: 44 ft-lb (60 Nm)
Brake Switch
*see procedure for illustration
Cab Frame Bolts 40 ft-lb (54 Nm)
ETC Mounting Bolts 7 ft-lb (10 Nm)
Cam Chain Tensioner 29 ft-lb (40 Nm)
Exhaust Head Pipe Bolts 18 ft-lb (24 Nm)
Camshaft Carrier Bolts 7 ft-lb (10 Nm)
Floor Screws 8 ft-lb (11 Nm)
Camshaft Sprocket Bolts 14 ft-lb (19 Nm)
Flywheel Bolt 133 ft-lbs (180 Nm)
Clutch Cover (outer) 50 in-lbs (5 Nm)
Screws Frame Bolts (front to rear) 40 ft-lb (54 Nm)
Step 1: 9 ft-lbs (12 Nm) Front Bumper / Fender 8 ft-ln (11 Nm)
Connecting Rod Bolts Step 2: 13 ft-lb (18 Nm) Screws
Step 3: Tighten addn 105 Front Gearcase Cover 11 ft-lbs (15 Nm)
89 in-lb (10 Nm) Plate Screws
Coolant Bleed Screw
Front Gearcase Drain/Fill
Coolant Temperature 10 ft-lbs (14 Nm)
17 ft-lb (23 Nm) Plugs
Sensor
CPS Retaining Bolt 9 ft-lb (12 Nm) Front Gearcase Mounting 30 ft-lbs (41 Nm)
Bolts
Step 1: 9 ft-lb (12 Nm) Fuel Pump PFA Nut 70 ft-lbs (95 Nm)
Crankcase Bolts M10 Step 2: 21 ft-lb (28 Nm)
Step 3: Tighten addn 90 Fuel Rail Mounting Screws 44 in-lb (5 Nm)
Crankcase Bolts M8 26 ft-lb (35 Nm) Fuel Tank Block-off Panel 8 ft-lbs (11 Nm)
Crankcase Bolts M6 9 ft-lb (12 Nm) Fuel Tank Strap Screw 8 ft-lbs (11 Nm)
Crankcase Oil Gallery Plug 11 ft-lbs (15 Nm) Hip Bolster Bolts 14 ft-lb (19 Nm)
Torque in sequence Hose Clamp 35 in-lb (4 Nm)
Step 1: 9 ft-lbs (12 Nm) Hub Castle Nut (front and
Step 2: 26 ft-lb (35 Nm) 110 ft-lbs (149 Nm)
Cylinder Head Bolts rear)
Step 3: Additional 180
Step 4: M6 bolts: 7 ft-lb (10 Intake Plenum Mount 22 ft-lb (30 Nm)
Nm) Screw
Differential Cover Screws Master Cylinder Mount 23 ft-lbs (31 Nm)
22 ft-lb (30 Nm) Bolts
(INTL)
Oil Cooler Bolts 7 ft-lb (10 Nm)
Door Fasteners 8 ft-lb (11 Nm)
Oil Pump Mounting Bolts 7 ft-lbs (10 Nm)
Drive Clutch Retaining Bolt 96 ft-lb (130 Nm)
Oil Pump Pickup Screws 7 ft-lb (10 Nm)
Drive Clutch Cover Plate 9 ft-lb (12 Nm)
Screw Oil Sump Cover M8 Bolts 26 ft-lb (35 Nm)
1.21
GENERAL INFORMATION
ITEM TORQUE ITEM TORQUE
Oil Sump Cover M6 Bolts 106 in-lb (12 Nm) Steering Shaft to EPS Unit 15 ft-lbs (20 Nm)
Oxygen Sensor 13 ft-lb (18 Nm) Steering Shaft to Steering 42 ft-lb (57 Nm)
Rack
Parking Brake Caliper
37 ft-lb (50 Nm) Steering Wheel Nut 65 ft-lbs (88 Nm)
Assembly Bolts
Parking Brake Disc Thermostat Cover Bolts 7 ft-lb (10 Nm)
14 ft-lb (20 Nm)
Mounting Bolts (INTL) Throttle Pedal Mounting 18 ft-lb (24 Nm)
Parking Brake Lever Fasteners
16 ft-lb (22 Nm)
Mounting Bolts Tie Rod End to Knuckle 15 ft-lbs (20 Nm) + 90
Power Steering Cover 8 ft-lb (11 Nm) Tie Rod Jamb Nuts 14 ft-lbs (19 Nm)
Screws
Trailing Arm to Frame 70 ft-lb (95 Nm)
Power Steering Bracket to 16 ft-lb (22 Nm)
Frame Nuts Trailing Arm to Bearing 42 ft-lb (54 Nm)
Carrier Fasteners
Power Steering Unit to 30 ft-lb (41 Nm)
Mount Bracket Transmission Bell Crank 18 ft-lb (24 Nm)
Nut
Prop Shaft Support Bearing 35 ft-lb (47 Nm)
Fasteners Transmission Case Screws 20 ft-lbs (27 Nm)
PVT Inner Cover Bolts 12 ft-lb (16 Nm) Transmission Drain / Fill
14 ft-lbs (19 Nm)
Plugs
PVT Outer Cover Screws 48 in-lb (5 Nm)
Transmission Isolator Bolt
Radius Rod Fasteners 40 ft-lb (54 Nm) 40 ft-lb (54 Nm)
(rear)
Seat Base to Seat Frame 8 ft-lbs (11 Nm) Transmission Rear Mount
Fasteners 17 ft-lb (23 Nm)
Bracket Fasteners
Seat Base to Frame (front) 14 ft-lb (19 Nm) Transmission Joint Bracket 44 ft-lb (60 Nm)
Seat Base to Frame (rear) 30 ft-lb (41 Nm) Bolts
Seat Belt Mounting Transmission Park Flange 10 ft-lb (14 Nm)
40 ft-lbs (54 Nm) Screws
Fasteners
Seat Slider Plate Screws 4 ft-lb (5 Nm) Transmission Sector Gear 12 ft-lb (16 Nm)
Cover
Shift Cable Bracket Bolts 17 ft-lb (23 Nm)
Transmission Shift Fork 10 ft-lb (14 Nm)
Shock Guard Screws 14 in-lbs (2 Nm) Screws
Shock Mount (front) 44 ft-lb (60 Nm) Transmission Snorkel Tube
10 ft-lb (14 Nm)
Locking Screw
Shock Mount (rear) 70 ft-lbs (95 Nm)
Valve Cover Bolts 7 ft-lbs (10 Nm)
Shock Reservoir Mounting
35 in-lb (4 Nm)
Clamps (rear) Visor Mounting Screws 8 ft-lb (11 Nm)
Skid Plate Fasteners 8 ft-lbs (11 Nm) Voltage Regulator 5 ft-lb (7 Nm)
Fasteners
Spark Plug 7 ft-lbs (10 Nm)
7 ft-lb (10 Nm)
Speed Sensor Screw 12 ft-lb (16 Nm) Water Pump Impeller (Apply Loctite 204 to bolt
Stabilizer Bar Linkage threads)
40 ft-lbs (54 Nm)
(rear) 7 ft-lb (10 Nm)
Stabilizer Bar Mounting Water Pump Cover Bolts (Apply Loctite 204 to bolt
17 ft-lb (23 Nm) threads)
Bracket Bolts (rear)
Stabilizer Bar Locating Wheel Lug Nuts 120 ft-lbs (163 Nm)
10 ft-lb (14 Nm)
Clamp Bolts
Starter Mounting Bolts 7 ft-lb (10 Nm)
Starter One-Way Clutch 9 ft-lb (12 Nm)
Screws
Stator Cover Screws 9 ft-lb (12 Nm)
Steering Tilt Shock 7 ft-lb (10 Nm)
Fastener
Steering Pivot Tube 8 ft-lb (11 Nm)
Fasteners
Steering Rack Mounting 16 ft-lbs (22 Nm)
Bolts
1.22
GENERAL INFORMATION
Conversion Table
UNIT OF MEASURE MULTIPLIED BY CONVERTS TO 1
ft-lbs x 12 = in-lbs
in-lbs x 0.0833 = ft-lbs
ft-lbs x 1.356 = Nm
in-lbs x 0.0115 = kg-m
Nm x 0.7376 = ft-lbs
kg-m x 7.233 = ft-lbs
kg-m x 86.796 = in-lbs
kg-m x 10 = Nm
inch x 25.4 = mm
mm x 0.03937 = inch
inch x 2.54 = cm
mile (mi) x 1.6 = km
km x 0.6214 = mile
ounces (oz) x 28.35 = grams (g)
fluid ounces (fl oz) x 29.57 = cubic centimeters (cc)
cubic centimeters (cc) x .03381 = fluid ounces
grams (g) x 0.035 = ounces
pounds (lb) x 0.454 = kg

kilogram (kg) x 2.2046 = lbs
cubic inches (cu in) x 16.387 = cc
cubic centimeters (cc) x 0.061 = cubic inches

US quarts x 0.946 = liters (L)
liters (L) x 1.057 = US quarts
US gallons x 3.785 = liters (L)
liters (L) x 0.264 = US gallons
PSI x 6.895 = kilopascals (kPa)
kilopascals (kPa) x 0.145 PSI
(3.14) x Radius x Height = = cylinder volume
C to F: 9/5 (C + 32) = F
F to C: 5/9 (F 32) = C
1.23
GENERAL INFORMATION
Standard Bolt Torque Specification
GRADE 2 GRADE 5 GRADE 8

BOLT SIZE FT. LBS. (NM) FT. LBS. (NM) FT. LBS. (NM)
1/4-20 5 (7) 8 (11) 12 (16)
1/4-28 6 (8) 10 (14) 14 (19)
5/16-18 11 (15) 17 (23) 25 (35)
5/16-24 12 (16) 19 (26) 29 (40)
3/8-16 20 (27) 30 (40) 45 (62)
3/8-24 23 (32) 35 (48) 50 (69)
7/16-14 30 (40) 50 (69) 70 (97)
7/16-20 35 (48) 55 (76) 80 (110)
1/2-13 50 (69) 75 (104) 110 (152)
1/2-20 55 (76) 90 (124) 120 (166)
Metric Bolt Torque Specification
GRADE
BOLT 4.6 4.8 8.8 / 8.9 10.9 12.9
SIZE
FT. LBS. (NM) DRY THREADS
M3 0.3 (0.5) 0.5 (0.7) 1 (1.3) 1.5 (2) 1.5 (2)
M4 0.8 (1.1) 1 (1.5) 2 (3) 3 (4.5) 4 (5)
M5 1.5 (2.5) 2 (3) 4.5 (6) 6.5 (9) 7.5 (10)
M6 3 (4) 4 (5.5) 7.5 (10) 11 (15) 13 (18)
M8 7 (9.5) 10 (13) 18 (25) 26 (35) 33 (45)
M10 14 (19) 18 (25) 37 (50) 55 (75) 63 (85)
M12 26 (35) 33 (45) 63 (85) 97 (130) 11 (150)
M14 37 (50) 55 (75) 103 (140) 151 (205) 177 (240)
M16 59 (80) 85 (115) 159 (215) 232 (315) 273 (370)
M18 81 (110) 118 (160) 225 (305) 321 (435) 376 (510)
1.24
GENERAL INFORMATION
SAE Tap / Drill Sizes Metric Tap / Drill Sizes
THREAD THREAD NEAREST

1
SIZE DRILL SIZE SIZE DRILL SIZE TAP SIZE DRILL SIZE DECIMAL FRACTION
#080 3/64 1/213 27/64 3 x .50 #39 0.0995 3/32
#164 53 1/220 29/64 3 x .60 3/32 0.0937 3/32
#172 53 9/1612 31/64 4 x .70 #30 0.1285 1/8
#256 51 9/1618 33/64 4 x .75 1/8 0.125 1/8
#264 50 5/811 17/32 5 x .80 #19 0.166 11/64
#348 5/64 5/818 37/64 5 x .90 #20 0.161 5/32
#356 45 3/410 21/32 6 x 1.00 #9 0.196 13/64
#440 43 3/416 11/16 7 x 1.00 16/64 0.234 15/64
#448 42 7/89 49/64 8 x 1.00 J 0.277 9/32
#540 38 7/814 13/16 8 x 1.25 17/64 0.265 17/64
#544 37 18 7/8 9 x 1.00 5/16 0.3125 5/16
#632 36 112 59/64 9 x 1.25 5/16 0.3125 5/16
#640 33 1 1/87 63/64 10 x 1.25 11/32 0.3437 11/32
#832 29 1 1/812 1 3/64 10 x 1.50 R 0.339 11/32
#836 29 1 1/47 1 7/64 11 x 1.50 3/8 0.375 3/8
#1024 24 1 1/412 1 11/64 12 x 1.50 13/32 0.406 13/32
#1032 21 1 1/26 1 11/32 12 x 1.75 13/32 0.406 13/32
#1224 17 1 1/212 1 27/64
#1228 4.6 mm 1 3/45 1 9/16
1/420 7 1 3/412 1 43/64
1/428 3 24 1/2 1 25/32
5/1618 F 212 1 59/64
5/1624 I 2 1/44 1/2 2 1/32
3/816 O 2 1/24 2 1/4
3/824 Q 2 3/44 2 1/2
7/1614 U 34 2 3/4
7/1620 25/64
1.25
GENERAL INFORMATION
Decimal Equivalents
FRACTION DECIMAL MM TO INCHES FRACTION DECIMAL MM TO INCHES

1/64 0.0156 41/64 0.6406
1/32 0.0312 1 mm = 0.0394 21/32 0.6563 17 mm = 0.6693
3/64 0.0469 43/64 0.6719
1/16 0.0625 11/16 0.6875
5/64 0.0781 2 mm = 0.0787 45/64 0.7031 18 mm = 0.7087
3/32 0.0938 23/32 0.7188
7/64 0.1094 3 mm = 0.1181 47/64 0.7344 19 mm = 0.7480
1/8 0.1250 3/4 0.750
9/64 0.1406 49/64 0.7656
5/32 0.1563 4 mm = 0.1575 25/32 0.7813 20 mm = 0.7874
11/64 0.1719 51/64 0.7969
3/16 0.1875 5 mm = 0.1969 13/16 0.8125 21 mm = 0.8268
13/64 0.2031 53/64 0.8281
7/32 0.2188 27/32 0.8438
15/64 0.2344 6 mm = 0.2362 55/64 0.8594 22 mm = 0.8661
1/4 0.25 7/8 0.875
17/64 0.2656 7 mm = 0.2756 57/64 0.8906 23 mm = 0.9055
9/32 0.2813 29/32 0.9063
19/64 0.2969 59/64 0.9219
5/16 0.3125 8 mm = 0.3150 15/16 0.9375 24 mm = 0.9449
21/64 0.3281 61/64 0.9531
11/32 0.3438 9 mm = 0.3543 31/32 0.9688 25 mm = 0.9843
23/64 0.3594 63/64 0.9844
3/8 0.375 1 1.000
25/64 0.3906 10 mm = 0.3937
13/32 0.4063
27/64 0.4219 11 mm = 0.4331
7/16 0.4375
29/64 0.4531
15/32 0.4688 12 mm = 0.4724
31/64 0.4844
1/2 0.500 13 mm = 0.5118
33/64 0.5156
17/32 0.5313
35/64 0.5469 14 mm = 0.5512
9/16 0.5625
37/64 0.5781 15 mm = 0.5906
19/32 0.5938
39/64 0.6094
5/8 0.625 16 mm = 0.6299
1.26
MAINTENANCE
CHAPTER 2
MAINTENANCE
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE CHART. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3 2
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3
BREAK-IN PERIOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3
MAINTENANCE CHART KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3
PRE-RIDE - 50 HOUR MAINTENANCE INTERVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4
50 - 500 HOUR MAINTENANCE INTERVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5
MAINTENANCE QUICK REFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6
MAINTENANCE QUICK REFERENCE, CONTINUED... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7
GREASE LUBRICATION POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8
LUBRICANTS / SERVICE PRODUCTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9
POLARIS LUBRICANTS, MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE PRODUCTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9
GENERAL VEHICLE INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.10
PRE-RIDE / DAILY INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.10
SHIFT CABLE INSPECTION / ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.10
FUEL SYSTEM AND AIR INTAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.12
FUEL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.12
FUEL TANK VENT LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.12
FUEL PUMP / FUEL FILTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.13
FUEL LINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.13
THROTTLE PEDAL INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.14
ENGINE INTAKE PRE-FILTER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.14
AIR FILTER SERVICE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.15
INTAKE DUCT DRAIN INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.15
AIR BOX / AIR FILTER ASSEMBLY VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.16
ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.17
ENGINE OIL LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.17
ENGINE OIL AND FILTER CHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.18
ENGINE CRANKCASE BREATHER HOSE INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.19
ENGINE CYLINDER LEAKDOWN TEST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.20
VALVE CLEARANCE INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.20
TRANSMISSION AND FRONT GEARCASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.23
SPECIFICATION CHART. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.23
TRANSMISSION LUBRICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.23
FRONT GEARCASE LUBRICATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.24
COOLING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.26
COOLING SYSTEM OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.26
COOLANT STRENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.26
COOLANT LEVEL INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.26
COOLING SYSTEM PRESSURE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.27
COOLING SYSTEM HOSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.27
RADIATOR INSPECTION / CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.28
COOLANT DRAIN / FILL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.29
2.1
MAINTENANCE
PVT / FINAL DRIVE / WHEEL AND TIRE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.30
DRIVE CLUTCH / DRIVEN CLUTCH / BELT SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.30
PVT INTAKE PRE-FILTER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.30
PVT DRYING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.30
DRIVE SHAFT BOOT INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.31
WHEEL AND HUB TORQUE TABLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.31
WHEEL REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.31
WHEEL INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.32
TIRE INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.32
TIRE PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.32
BEADLOCK RIMS (DESERT EDITION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.33
ELECTRICAL AND IGNITION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.34
BATTERY MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.34
BATTERY CHARGING / OFF SEASON STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.34
BATTERY REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.34
BATTERY INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.35
ENGINE / CHASSIS ELECTRICAL GROUND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.35
SPARK PLUG SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.36
STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.37
STEERING INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.37
STEERING WHEEL FREEPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.37
TIE ROD END / WHEEL HUB INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.38
WHEEL TOE ALIGNMENT INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.38
WHEEL TOE ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.39
SUSPENSION (WALKER EVANS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.40
SPRING ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.40
SHOCK COMPRESSION ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.41
BRAKE SYSTEM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.42
BRAKE FLUID INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.42
BRAKE PAD / DISC INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.42
BRAKE HOSE AND FITTING INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.43
2.2
MAINTENANCE
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE CHART
Periodic Maintenance Overview
Inspection, adjustment and lubrication of important components are explained in the periodic maintenance chart.
Inspect, clean, lubricate, adjust and replace parts as necessary. When inspection reveals the need for replacement
parts, use genuine Pure Polaris parts available from your Polaris dealer. 2
NOTE: Service and adjustments are critical. If youre not familiar with safe service and adjustment
procedures, have a qualified dealer perform these operations.
Maintenance intervals in the following chart are based upon average riding conditions and an average vehicle speed of
approximately 10 miles per hour. Vehicles subjected to severe use must be inspected and serviced more frequently.
Severe Use Definition
Frequent immersion in mud, water or sand
Racing or race-style high RPM use
Prolonged low speed, heavy load operation
Extended idle
Short trip cold weather operation
Pay special attention to the oil level. A rise in oil level during cold weather can indicate contaminants collecting in the
oil sump or crankcase. Change oil immediately if the oil level begins to rise. Monitor the oil level, and if it continues to
rise, discontinue use and determine the cause or see your dealer.
Break-In Period
The break-in period consists of the first 25 hours of operation. Careful treatment of a new engine and drive
components will result in more efficient performance and longer life for these components.
Drive vehicle slowly at first while varying the throttle position. Do not operate at sustained idle.
Perform regular checks on fluid levels and other areas outlined on the daily pre-ride inspection checklist.
Change both the engine oil and filter after 25 hours or one month.
See Owners Manual for additional break-in information.
Maintenance Chart Key

The following symbols denote potential items to be aware of during maintenance:
= CAUTION: Due to the nature of these adjustments, it is recommended this service be performed by an
authorized Polaris dealer.
= SEVERE USE ITEM: See information provided above.
E = Emission Control System Service (California).

NOTE: Inspection may reveal the need for replacement parts. Always use genuine Polaris parts.
WARNING
Improperly performing the procedures marked could result in component failure and lead to serious injury or death.
Have an authorized Polaris dealer perform these services.
2.3
MAINTENANCE
Pre-Ride - 50 Hour Maintenance Interval
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
(WHICHEVER COMES FIRST)
MILES
HOURS CALENDAR (KM)
ITEM REMARKS
Steering - -
Front / Rear Suspension - -
Tires - -
Brake Fluid Level - -
Inspect or adjust as needed.
Brake Pedal Travel - Pre-Ride -
See Pre-Ride Checklist on Page 2.10.
Brake System - -
Wheels / Fasteners - -
Frame Fasteners - -
E Engine Oil Level - -
E Engine Intake Pre-Filter - Daily - Inspect and clean often
PVT Intake Pre-Filter - Daily - Inspect and clean often
Daily Inspect drain at the bottom of the air intake baffle box
Intake Baffle Box Drain - -
E for obstructions
Coolant Level - Daily - Check level daily
Suspension Bushings - Daily - Lubricate daily or after each use in mud or water
Clean daily when driving in mud and water; replace a
Spark Arrestor - Daily -
cracked or damaged arrestor before operating
Head Lights / Tail Lights - Daily - Check operation
Power Steering (if
- Daily - Inspect daily; clean often
equipped)
Brake Pad Wear / Inspect
Monthly 100 (160) Inspect periodically
Parking Brake Pads (INTL) 10 H
Inspect; cycle key to pressurize fuel pump; check

Fuel System 25 H Monthly -
lines and fittings for leaks and abrasion
Parking Brake Cable
Inspect; adjust tension after first 25 hours
25 H - -
Adjustment (INTL)
Monthly 250 (400) Inspect; replace as needed
Air Filter 25 H
E
- Engine Breather Filter (if
Monthly 150 (250) Inspect; replace if necessary
equipped) 25 H
E
Battery 25 H Monthly 250 (400) Check terminals; clean; test
Engine Oil & Filter Change Perform a break-in oil and filter change at 25 hours or
250 (400)
(Break-In Period) 25 H 1M one month; perform every 50 hours or 6 months
E
thereafter
Front Gearcase Lubricant
(Demand Drive) 25 H 1M 250 (400) Initial fluid level inspection; add lubricant if needed
Transmission Lubricant
(AGL) 25 H 1M 250 (400) Initial fluid level inspection; add lubricant if needed
General Lubrication 50 H 3M 500 (800) Lubricate all fittings, pivots, cables, etc.
Throttle Cable / Throttle
50 H 6M 500 (800) Inspect; adjust; replace if necessary
E Pedal
Throttle Body Intake Ducts/
E 50 H 6M 300 (500) Inspect ducts for proper sealing / air leaks
Flange
Shift Cable / Linkage 50 H 6M 500 (800) Inspect; adjust as needed
Steering 50 H 6M 500 (800) Lubricate (if applicable)
Front / Rear Suspension 50 H 6M 500 (800) Lubricate (if applicable)
Perform these procedures more often for vehicles subjected to severe use.
E Emission Control System Service (California)
2.4
MAINTENANCE
50 - 500 Hour Maintenance Interval
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
(WHICHEVER COMES FIRST)
MILES
HOURS CALENDAR (KM)
ITEM REMARKS
Cooling System 50 H 6M 500 (800)
Inspect coolant strength seasonally; pressure test 2
system yearly
Engine Oil/Filter Change 50 H 6M 1000 (1600) Perform a break-in oil change at 25 hours or one
month
Engine Oil Lines/Fasteners 50 H 6M 1000 (1600) Inspect for leaks and loose fittings
Parking Brake Cable
1000 (1600) Inspect; adjust tension as needed
Adjustment (INTL) 100 H 6M
Front Gearcase Lubricant

(Demand Drive) 100 H 12 M 1000 (1600) Change lubricant
Transmission Lubricant
100 H 12 M 1000 (1600) Change lubricant
(AGL)
Check for leaks at fill cap, fuel line / rail, and fuel
Fuel System 100 H 12 M 1000 (1600)
E pump.
Spark Plug Inspection 100 H 12 M 1000 (1600) Inspect; replace as needed; torque to specification
E
Radiator 100 H 12 M 1000 (1600) Inspect; clean external surfaces
Cooling Hoses 100 H 12 M 1000 (1600) Inspect for leaks; pressure test system
Engine Mounts 100 H 12 M 1000 (1600) Inspect, torque to specification
Exhaust Silencer / Pipe 100 H 12 M 1000 (1600) Inspect
Inspect for wear, routing, security; inspect
Wiring 100 H 12 M 1000 (1600)
connectors subjected to water, mud, etc.
Clutches (Drive and Driven) 100 H 12 M 1000 (1600) Inspect; clean; replace worn parts
Drive Belt 100 H 12 M 1000 (1600) Inspect; replace as needed
Front Wheel Bearings 100 H 12 M 1000 (1600) Inspect; replace as needed
Shocks 100 H - - Visually inspect shock seals
1500 (2400) Change shock oil and inspect seals
Shocks - 12 M
Brake Fluid 200 H 24 M 2000 (3200) Change every two years (DOT 4)
Clean daily when driving in mud and water; replace
Spark Arrestor 200 H 24 M 2000 (3200)
a cracked or damaged arrestor before operating
Valve Clearance 200 H - 2000 (3200) Inspect; adjust as needed

E
Spark Plug Replacement 500 H 36 M 5000 (8000) Replace; torque to specification

E
Coolant - 60 M - Replace coolant
Inspect periodically; adjust when parts are
Toe Adjustment -
replaced
Headlight Aim - Adjust as needed
Perform these procedures more often for vehicles subjected to severe use.
E Emission Control System Service (California)
2.5
MAINTENANCE
Maintenance Quick Reference
ITEM LUBE REC. METHOD FREQUENCY*
Oil Fill Cap 1 : Polaris PS-4 or Perform a break-in oil and
- Under Cargo Box Access Panel Add oil to proper level filter change at 25 hrs or
Polaris PS-4
Oil Filter 2 / Dipstick 3 : on dipstick one month; perform every
Extreme Duty
- Behind Engine Access Panel 50 hrs thereafter
Maintain coolant level Check level daily; change
Engine Coolant Polaris 60/40
in coolant reservoir coolant every two years
- Under Front Hood / Access Panel Coolant
bottle 4 .
* More often under severe use, such as operation in water or under severe loads.
2.6
MAINTENANCE
Maintenance Quick Reference, Continued...
ITEM LUBE REC. METHOD FREQUENCY*

Maintain fluid level between
Polaris DOT 4 Brake Check level during pre-ride inspection;
Brake Fluid MAX and MIN lines on the
Fluid change fluid every two years
master cylinder reservoir 1
2
Add lubricant until it is visible at
Polaris Demand the fill hole threads 2 ( 8.5 Initial level check at 25 hours or 1
Front Gearcase
Drive oz. (250 ml)) month; Change lubricant at 100 hours
or every 12 months, whichever comes
Add lubricant until it is visible at first
Transmission Polaris AGL
the fill hole threads 3
* More often under severe use, such as operation in water or under severe loads.
2.7
MAINTENANCE
Grease Lubrication Points
There are grease fittings at each front A-arm pivot point, each rear torsion bar bushing and on the front propshaft
yokes. Apply grease until all traces of water have been purged out at each of these areas.
ITEM METHOD RECOMMENDED LUBE FREQUENCY

Front A-arm Grease 3 fittings on each side
Pivot Bushings Polaris All Season Grease
of the vehicle 1
Grease middle and rear Grease fittings every 500
Propshaft Yokes Polaris Premium U-Joint Grease
fittings 2 miles (800 km); Grease
before long periods of
Front Stabilizer
Grease the fitting on each side storage, and after
Bar Bushings Polaris All Season Grease
of the vehicle 3 thoroughly washing or
(INTL)
submerging the vehicle
Rear Torsion Bar Grease 2 fittings through the
Bushings skid plate access holes on Polaris All Season Grease
each side of the vehicle 4
*There is no grease point on the upper control arm rear mount.
2.8
MAINTENANCE
LUBRICANTS / SERVICE PRODUCTS
Polaris Lubricants, Maintenance and Service Products
PART PART
DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION
NO. NO.
Engine Lubricant Additives / Sealants / Thread Locking Agents / 2
2870791 Fogging Oil (12 oz. Aerosol) Misc.
2876244 PS-4 Synthetic 4-Cycle Engine Oil (Quart) Loctite Threadlock 242
2871950 (6 ml.) (12 count)
2876245 PS-4 Synthetic 4-Cycle Engine Oil (Gallon)
Premium Carbon Clean
PS-4 Extreme Duty Synthetic 4-Cycle 2871326 (12 oz.) (12 count)
2878920 Engine Oil (Quart)
2870652 Fuel Stabilizer (16 oz.) (12 count)
PS-4 Extreme Duty Synthetic 4-Cycle
2878919 Engine Oil (Gallon) 2872189 DOT 4 Brake Fluid (12 count)
2540086 Engine Oil Filter Crankcase Sealant, 3-Bond 1215 (5 oz.)
2871557
2879723 Engine Oil Change Kit (PS-4)
2879324 Engine Oil Change Kit (PS-4 Extreme Duty) NOTE: The number count indicated by each part
number in the table above indicates the number of
Gearcase / Transmission Lubricants units that are shipped with each order.
2878068 AGL (1 Qt.) (12 Count)
2878069 AGL (1 Gal.) (4 Count)
AGL Gearcase Lubricant (2.5 Gal.) (2
2878070 Count)
2877922 Demand Drive (Quart)
2877923 Demand Drive (2.5 Gallon)
2870465 Oil Pump for 1 Gallon Jug
Grease / Specialized Lubricants
2871312 Grease Gun Kit
Premium All Season Grease
2871322 (3 oz. cartridge) (24 Count)
Premium All Season Grease
2871423 (14 oz. cartridge) (10 Count)
2871460 Starter Drive Grease (12 Count)
2871515 Premium U-Joint Lube (3 oz.) (24 Count)
2871551 Premium U-Joint Lube (14 oz.) (10 Count)
2871329 Dielectric Grease (Nyogel)
Coolant
2871323 60/40 Coolant (Gallon) (6 Count)
2871534 60/40 Coolant (Quart) (12 Count)
NOTE: Each item can be purchased separately at

your local Polaris dealer.
2.9
MAINTENANCE
GENERAL VEHICLE INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
Pre-Ride / Daily Inspection Shift Cable Inspection / Adjustment
Perform the following pre-ride inspection daily, and when Shift cable adjustment may be necessary if symptoms
servicing the vehicle at each scheduled maintenance. include:
Engine Oil - Check for proper level on dipstick (see No gear position or AWD display on instrument
Chapter 2 Engine Oil Level, page 2.17) cluster
Tires - check condition and pressures Ratcheting noise on deceleration
Fuel tank - fill to proper level Inability to engage into a gear
All brakes - check operation and fluid level and Excessive gear lash (noise)
adjustment (includes parking brake on INTL Gear selector moving out of desired range
Model)
Headlights/Taillights/Brakelights - also check 1. Locate the shift cable 1 attached to the transmission
operation of all indicator lights, instrument cluster case in the right rear wheel well area.
and switches 2. Inspect shift cable, clevis pin, pivot bushings 4 , and
Ignition switch - check for proper function dust boot 3 . Replace if worn or damaged.
Wheels - check for tightness of wheel nuts and

axle nuts; check to be sure axle nuts are secured
by cotter pins
Engine Intake Pre-Filter - Inspect pre-filter and
clean with soapy water and low pressure
compressed air if necessary
PVT Intake Pre-Filter - Inspect pre-filter and clean
with soapy water and low pressure compressed air
if necessary
Steering - check for free operation noting any
unusual looseness in any area
Loose parts - visually inspect vehicle for any
damaged or loose nuts, bolts or fasteners
Engine coolant - check for proper level at the 3. If adjustment is required, loosen the lower jam nut 6
recovery bottle and pull the cable out of the mount 2 to move the
Drive Shaft Boots - Inspect inner and outer boots upper jam nut 5 .
for tears or damage on both front and rear drive
shafts
Check all front and rear suspension components
for wear or damage.
4. Adjust the shift cable so there is the same amount of

cable travel when shifting slightly past HIGH gear
and PARK.
2.10
MAINTENANCE
5. Thread the upper or lower jam nut as required to
obtain proper cable adjustment.
NOTE: This procedure may require a few
attempts to obtain the proper adjustment.
6. Once the proper adjustment is obtained, place the

shift cable and upper jam nut into the mount. Tighten 2
the lower jam nut against the mount.
7. Start engine and shift through all gears to ensure the
shift cable is properly adjusted. If transmission still
ratchets after cable adjustment, the transmission will
require service.
2.11
MAINTENANCE
FUEL SYSTEM AND AIR INTAKE Fuel Tank Vent Line
Symptoms of a restricted fuel tank vent include the
Fuel System following: collapsing fuel tank, engine miss or hesitation,
loss of engine performance or high exhaust
temperatures.
WARNING 1. Remove the seats and the engine service panel.
2. Check the fuel tank vent line for signs of wear,
Gasoline is extremely flammable and explosive under deterioration or damage. Replace vent line if
certain conditions. necessary.
Always stop the engine and refuel outdoors or in a well 3. Be sure the vent line is routed properly and secured
ventilated area. with cable tie(s).
Do not smoke or allow open flames or sparks in or near NOTE: Make sure vent line is not kinked or
the area where refueling is performed or where pinched.
gasoline is stored.
Do not overfill the tank. Do not fill the tank neck.
If you get gasoline in your eyes or if you swallow
gasoline, seek medical attention immediately.
If you spill gasoline on your skin or clothing,
immediately wash it off with soap and water
and change clothing.
Never start the engine or let it run in an enclosed area.
Engine exhaust fumes are poisonous and can result in
loss of consciousness or
death in a short time.
Never drain the fuel when the engine is hot.
Severe burns may result.
2.12
MAINTENANCE
Fuel Pump / Fuel Filters Fuel Lines
The fuel pump assembly 1 is located in the fuel tank 1. Check the quick-connect fuel line 1 at the fuel tank
under the passenger seat. for signs of wear, deterioration, damage or leakage.
Replace line(s) if necessary.
The RZR XP 1000 EFI engine uses a serviceable, high-
volume, high-pressure, fuel pump that includes a
preliminary filter 2 and an internal fine filter 3 located
before the pump regulator.
2
2. Locate the fuel supply fitting 2 through the right rear

wheel well on the upper right side of the engine.
Check the line and quick-connect fitting for signs of
wear, deterioration, damage or leakage. Replace line
if necessary.
NOTE: Neither filter is serviceable individually. Must
replace the fuel pump as an assembly.
3. Be sure fuel lines are routed and retained properly.
Refer to Chapter 4 for fuel pump replacement and all NOTE: Make sure lines are not kinked or
other information related to the EFI System. pinched.
2.13
MAINTENANCE
Throttle Pedal Inspection Engine Intake Pre-Filter Service
This vehicle is equipped with Pedal Position Sensor 1 It is recommended that the engine intake pre-filter be
used to detect when the throttle pedal 2 is pushed or inspected daily. The filter should be inspected using the
released. following procedure:
1. The engine intake pre-filter is located just above the
right rear wheel fender.
2. Loosen the knob on top of the assembly and lift up to
disengage the tab from the cargo box.
The throttle pedal should move freely and always return

back to its idle position when released.
Check throttle pedal periodically.
3. Inspect the pre-filter. If necessary, clean with soapy

water and dry with low pressure compressed air.
2.14
MAINTENANCE
Air Filter Service 4. Inspect the air box for oil or water deposits. Wipe
Inspect the air filter at the intervals outlined in the away any deposits with a clean shop towel.
Periodic Maintenance Chart. In extremely dusty NOTE: If the filter has been soaked with fuel or
conditions, air filter replacement will be required more oil it must be replaced.
often.
5. Inspect the air filter and replace if necessary.
1. Remove the cargo box access panel 1 . 2
NOTE: DO NOT attempt to clean the air filter.
6. Place the air filter into the air box and reinstall the air
box cover.
NOTE: Be sure the lower tabs on the air box
cover are properly engaged into the airbox.
7. Engage the cover latches.

8. Reinstall the cargo box access panel.
Intake Duct Drain Inspection

It is recommended that the intake drain be inspected
daily.
1. Access the intake baffle box drain 1 through the left
2. Disengage the four cover latches 2 . rear wheel well.
3. Pull cover rearward far enough to remove air filter 3 . 2. Check the drain to ensure it is not plugged with
debris so it can drain properly. If needed, remove the
drain from the baffle box during inspection.
2.15
MAINTENANCE
Air Box / Air Filter Assembly View
1 Intake Airbox Hose 6 Airbox Clip (4)

2 Drain Cap 7 Vent Hose
3 Airbox 8 Intake Tubes
4 Air Filter 9 Engine Intake Housing
5 Airbox Cover
2.16
MAINTENANCE
ENGINE
Engine Oil Level 4. Reinstall the dipstick and push it into place. Do not
The 2014 RZR XP 1000 engine has a wet-sump design, lock the dipstick
meaning the engine oil is contained in the bottom of the NOTE: Make certain the dipstick is inserted all
crankcase. To check the oil level, follow the procedure the way into the dipstick tube to keep the depth
listed below: of the dipstick consistent. 2
Access the oil dipstick through the opening in front of the
passenger rear tire. 5. Remove the dipstick and check the oil level.
Access the oil fill cap through the cargo box access 6. Add the recommended oil as necessary to bring the
panel. oil level within the SAFE range on dipstick. Do not
overfill (see NOTE below).
Polaris recommends the use of PS-4 Synthetic or PS-4
Extreme Duty Synthetic 4-Cycle Engine Oil.
Recommended Engine Oil:
PS-4 (PN 2876244)

Ambient Temp Range: -35 F to 100 F
PS-4 Extreme Duty (PN 2878920)

Ambient Temp Range: 0 F to 120 F NOTE: A rising oil level between checks during
cold weather operation can indicate
Capacity: 2.5 Quarts (2.4 L) contaminants such as gas or moisture collecting
in the crankcase. If the oil level is over the upper
1. Position vehicle on a level surface and place the mark, change the oil immediately.
transmission in PARK.
7. Add engine oil through the oil fill cap 2 located on
2. Stop the engine and allow it to cool down before top of the valve cover, under the cargo box access
removing the dipstick. panel.
3. Unlock the dipstick lever 1 . Remove the dipstick and
wipe it dry with a clean cloth.
8. When finished, reinstall dipstick and lock the lever.
2.17
MAINTENANCE
Engine Oil and Filter Change 6. Using the Oil Filter Wrench (PU-50105), turn the oil
Always change engine oil and filter at the intervals filter 2 counter-clockwise to remove it.
outlined in the Periodic Maintenance Chart. Always
change the oil filter whenever changing the engine oil.
The engine oil dipstick is located on the front side of the
engine. Access the dipstick through the engine service
panel.
The engine oil fill cap is located on top of the valve cover.
Access the oil fill cap through the cargo box access
panel.
The crankcase drain plug is located on the bottom of the
crankcase. Access the drain plug through the skid plate
access hole located directly under the crankcase.
1. Position vehicle on a level surface and place the
transmission in PARK.
2. Stop the engine and allow it to cool down.
3. Clean the area around the crankcase drain plug. Oil Filter Wrench:
PU-50105: 2.5 (64 mm)
CAUTION
7. Using a clean dry cloth, clean the filter sealing
Use caution when performing this procedure. surface on the engine crankcase.
Do not allow hot engine oil to come into contact with 8. Lubricate the O-ring on the new oil filter with a film of
skin, as serious burns may result. fresh engine oil. Check to make sure the O-ring is in
good condition. Install it by hand until the O-ring
4. Place a drain pan under the engine crankcase and contacts the sealing surface, then turn an additional
remove the drain plug 1 . Allow the oil to drain 1/2 turn.
completely.
Oil Filter Torque:

Turn by hand until filter O-ring contacts sealing surface,
then turn an additional 1/2 turn.
9. Replace the sealing washer on drain plug.

NOTE: The sealing surface on the drain plug
should be clean and free of burrs, nicks or
scratches.
10. Reinstall the engine crankcase drain plug. Torque

drain plug to specification.
5. Remove the seats and engine service panel to

access the oil filter.
Engine Oil Drain Plug:

12 ft-lbs (16 Nm)
2.18
MAINTENANCE
11. Remove oil fill cap (see Chapter 2 Engine Oil Engine Crankcase Breather Hose
Level, page 2.17). Fill engine with 2.5 quarts (2.4 L) Inspection
of recommended engine oil.
The engine crankcase is equipped with a breather hose.
Inspect the breather hose for possible kinks or wear. The
hose is form fitted for proper fit.
Follow the breather hose 1 from the crankcase to the 2
engine intake duct.
Recommended Engine Oil:
PS-4 (PN 2876244)
Ambient Temp Range: -35 F to 100 F
PS-4 Extreme Duty (PN 2878920)

Ambient Temp Range: 0 F to 120 F
Capacity: 2.5 Quarts (2.4 L)
12. Verify the transmission is still in PARK.

13. Start the engine and allow it to idle for 30 seconds.
14. Stop the engine and inspect for oil leaks. Wait at
least 15 seconds before removing the dipstick.
15. Unlock the dipstick lever. Remove the dipstick and
wipe it dry with a clean cloth (see Chapter 2
Engine Oil Level, page 2.17). NOTE: Make sure hoses are not kinked or pinched.
16. Reinstall the dipstick and push it into place. Do not
lock the dipstick
NOTE: Make certain the dipstick is inserted all
the way into the dipstick tube to keep the depth
of the dipstick consistent.
17. Remove the dipstick and check the oil level.

18. Add the recommended oil as necessary to bring the
oil level within the SAFE range on dipstick. Do not
overfill.
19. When finished, reinstall the oil fill cap, oil dipstick and
lock the lever.
20. Reinstall the cargo box access panel, engine service
panel and seats.
21. Dispose of used oil and filter properly.
2.19
MAINTENANCE
Engine Cylinder Leakdown Test Valve Clearance Inspection
A cylinder leak-down test is the best indication of engine
NOTE: Valve clearance inspection should be
condition. Follow tester manufacturers instructions to
performed on a cold engine, at room temperature.
perform a cylinder leak-down test. Never use high
pressure leakage testers as crankshaft seals may
1. Remove the drivers seat. Disconnect the negative
dislodge and leak.
(-) battery cable.
Cylinder Leakage Service Limit: 20% 2. Remove the engine access panel.
3. Remove eight screws retaining the outer clutch
If leakage exceeds service limit, inspect the engine
cover.
for the cause.
4. Maneuver the outer clutch cover to allow access to
the drive clutch, in order to rotate the engine.
NOTE: Removal of left rear wheel or left rear

shock is NOT necessary to perform this
procedure.
5. Remove the spark plug wires to gain access to valve

cover as shown below.
2.20
MAINTENANCE
6. Remove the four T40 bolts retaining the valve cover. 9. Measure the valve clearance using a feeler gauge.
7. The engine will need to be rotated four times to 10. If the valve clearance is out of specification, see
inspect all eight valve clearances 13 . Two valves can Chapter 3 Valve Clearance Adjustment, page
be measured at each camshaft lobe position. 3.84.
Intake Valve Clearance (cold):

.006 .002 (0.15 0.05 mm)
Exhaust Valve Clearance (cold):
.008 .002 (0.20 0.05 mm)
11. Repeat steps 18-20 until all eight valves have been
inspected.
12. If previously removed, apply anti-seize compound to
the spark plug threads and reinstall the spark plugs.
Torque spark plugs to specification.
NOTE: Remove spark plugs to aid engine

rotation.
8. Rotate the drive clutch counter-clockwise until the

cam lobes 14 above the valves you are inspecting Spark Plug Torque:
are facing up. 7 ft-lbs (10 Nm)
13. Inspect the valve cover seal and replace if

necessary.
14. Install NEW isolators on the valve cover bolts. Install
the valve cover and the four T40 bolts. Torque bolts
to specification.
Valve Cover Bolts:

7 ft-lbs (10 Nm)
2.21
MAINTENANCE
15. Install the spark plug wires back into their correct
location.
16. Install the push rivet that retains the heat shield to
the frame cross member.
17. Install the spark plug wires. Ensure wires are
installed on their proper cylinder spark plug and
pushed down all the way so they engage onto the
spark plugs.
NOTE: The engine will misfire if the spark plug
wires are installed incorrectly. The spark plug
wires are marked with PTO and MAG and should
be installed to the corresponding cylinder.
18. Install outer clutch cover and eight retaining screws.

Torque screws to specification.
Outer Clutch Cover Screws:

50 in-lbs (5 Nm)
19. Connect the negative (-) battery cable to the battery

and install the seat.
20. Start the engine to ensure proper operation.
21. Install the engine access panel.
2.22
MAINTENANCE
TRANSMISSION AND FRONT GEARCASE
Specification Chart
GEARCASE LUBRICANT CAPACITY FILL / DRAIN PLUG TORQUE

without turf mode:
44 oz. (1300 ml) 2
Transmission AGL 14 ft-lbs (19 Nm)
with turf mode:
40.5 oz. (1200 mL)
Front Gearcase Demand Drive 8.5oz. (250 ml) 10 ft-lbs (14 Nm)
Transmission Lubrication 4. Reinstall the fill plug and torque to specification.
NOTE: It is important to follow the transmission

maintenance intervals described in the Periodic
Maintenance Chart. Regular lubricant level
inspections should be performed as well.
Transmission Fill / Drain Plug Torque:
The transmission lubricant level should be checked and 14 ft-lbs (19 Nm)
changed in accordance with the maintenance schedule.
Be sure vehicle is positioned on a level surface Transmission Lubricant Change
when checking or changing the lubricant.
The drain plug is located on the bottom of the
Check vent hose to be sure it is routed properly transmission gearcase. Access the drain plug
and unobstructed. through the drain hole in the skid plate.
5. Remove the fill plug (see Chapter 2 Transmission
Transmission Lubricant Level Check Lubrication, page 2.23).
The fill plug is located on the rear portion of the 6. Place a drain pan under the transmission drain plug.
transmission gearcase. Access the fill plug at the rear of
the vehicle. Maintain lubricant level even with the bottom 7. Remove drain plug 3 and allow lubricant to drain
of the fill plug hole. completely.
1. Position vehicle on a level surface.
2. Remove the fill plug 1 and check the lubricant level
2 .
8. Clean the drain plug magnetic surface.

9. Reinstall the drain plug and torque to specification.
3. If lubricant level is not even with bottom threads, add

recommended lubricant as needed. Do not overfill.
2.23
MAINTENANCE
10. Add the recommended amount of lubricant through Front Gearcase Lubrication
the fill plug hole. Maintain the lubricant level at the
bottom of the fill plug hole when filling the NOTE: It is important to follow the front gearcase
transmission. Do not overfill. maintenance intervals described in the Periodic
Maintenance Chart. Regular fluid level inspections
should be performed as well.
The front gearcase fluid level should be checked and

changed in accordance with the maintenance schedule.
Recommended Transmission Lubricant: Be sure vehicle is positioned on a level surface
AGL (PN 2878068) (Quart) when checking or changing the fluid.
Capacity: 44 oz. (1300 ml) Check vent hose to be sure it is routed properly
and unobstructed.
Capacity (INTL): 41 oz. (1200 ml)
Front Gearcase Fluid Level Check
11. Reinstall the fill plug and torque to specification.
The fill plug is located on the bottom right side of the front
gearcase. Access the fill plug through the right front
wheel well. Maintain fluid level even with the bottom of
the fill plug hole.
1. Position vehicle on a level surface.
Transmission Fill / Drain Plug Torque:
14 ft-lbs (19 Nm) 2. Remove the fill plug 1 and check the fluid level.
12. Check for leaks. Dispose of used lubricant properly.
3. If fluid level is not even with the bottom threads, add

the recommended fluid as needed. Do not overfill.
Front Gearcase Fill / Drain Plug Torque:

10 ft-lbs (14 Nm)
Front Gearcase Fluid Change:

The drain plug is located on the bottom of the front
gearcase. Access the drain plug through the access
hole in the frame underneath the front gearcase.
5. Remove the fill plug (see Chapter 2 Front
Gearcase Lubrication, page 2.24).
2.24
MAINTENANCE
6. Place a drain pan under the front gearcase drain
plug.
7. Remove the drain plug 2 and allow fluid to drain
completely.
8. Clean the drain plug magnetic surface.

9. Reinstall the drain plug and torque to specification.
10. Add the recommended amount of fluid through the fill
hole. Maintain the fluid level even with the bottom
threads of the fill plug hole.
Recommended Front Gearcase Fluid:

Polaris Demand Drive
(PN 2877922) (Quart)
Capacity: 8.5 oz. (250 mL)
Front Gearcase Fill / Drain Plug Torque:

10 ft-lbs (14 Nm)
12. Check for leaks. Dispose of used fluid properly.
2.25
MAINTENANCE
COOLING SYSTEM Coolant Level Inspection
The pressure cap 1 and recovery bottle 2 are located
Cooling System Overview under the front hood of the vehicle. The coolant level
The engine coolant level is controlled, or maintained, by must be maintained between the minimum and
the recovery system. The recovery system components maximum levels indicated on the recovery bottle.
are the recovery bottle, radiator filler neck, radiator
pressure cap and connecting hose.
As coolant operating temperature increases, the
expanding (heated) excess coolant is forced out of the
radiator past the pressure cap and into the recovery
bottle. As engine coolant temperature decreases the
contracting (cooled) coolant is drawn back up from the
tank past the pressure cap and into the radiator.
NOTE: Some coolant level drop on new machines is
normal as the system is purging itself of trapped air.
Observe coolant levels often during break-in period.
Overheating of engine could occur if air is not fully
purged from system.
Polaris Premium 50/50 Antifreeze is premixed and
ready to use. Do not dilute with water.
With the engine at operating temperature, the coolant
level should be between the upper and lower marks on
Coolant Strength the coolant recovery bottle. If not, perform the following
procedure:
Test the strength of the coolant using an antifreeze
hydrometer. 1. Position the vehicle on a level surface.
2. Remove the front hood.
3. View the coolant level in the recovery bottle.
4. If the coolant level is below the MIN line, inspect the
coolant level in the radiator.
NOTE: If overheating is evident, allow system to
cool completely and check coolant level in the
radiator and inspect for signs of trapped air in
system.
A 50/50 mixture of antifreeze and distilled water

will provide the optimum cooling, corrosion WARNING
protection, and antifreeze protection.
Do not use tap water, straight antifreeze or straight Never remove the pressure cap when the engine is
water in the system. Tap water contains minerals warm or hot. Escaping steam can cause severe burns.
and impurities which build up in the system. The engine must be cool before removing the pressure
cap.
Straight water or antifreeze may cause the system
to freeze, corrode, or overheat. 5. Remove the pressure cap. Using a funnel, add
coolant to the top of the filler neck.
Recommended Coolant:
Polaris Premium Pre-Mixed Antifreeze 6. Reinstall the pressure cap.
(PN 2880514) (Quart)
(PN 2880513) (Gallon) NOTE: Use of a non-standard pressure cap will
not allow the recovery system to function
properly.
7. Remove recovery bottle cap and add coolant using a

funnel.
2.26
MAINTENANCE
8. Fill recovery bottle to MAX level with recommended Cooling System Pressure Test
coolant or 50/50 or 60/40 mixture of antifreeze and
distilled water as required for freeze protection in Refer to ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM, page 3.13.
your area.
Cooling System Hoses
1. Inspect all vehicle hoses for cracks, deterioration,
abrasion or leaks. Replace if necessary. 2
Polaris Premium Pre-Mixed Antifreeze
PN 2871534 (Quart)
PN 2871323 (Gallon)
9. Reinstall the recovery bottle cap.

10. If coolant was required, start engine and check for
leaks. Make sure radiator fins are clean to prevent
overheating.
ITEM DESCRIPTION
1 Recovery Bottle
2 Engine Hoses
3 Radiator Hoses
4 To Thermostat Housing
5 To Waterpump
6 To Radiator
2.27
MAINTENANCE
2. Inspect all engine hoses for cracks, deterioration, Radiator Inspection / Cleaning
abrasion or leaks. Replace if necessary. 1. Check radiator air passages for restrictions or
damage.
ITEM DESCRIPTION
7 Bypass Hose ITEM DESCRIPTION
8 Waterpump Outlet Hose

1 Radiator
2 Shroud
9 Oil Cooler Inlet Hose
3 Fan
10 Oil Cooler Outlet Hose
2. Carefully straighten any bent radiator fins.
3. Check tightness and condition of all hose spring
clamps. Replace if necessary. 3. Remove any obstructions with low pressure
compressed air or low pressure water.
CAUTION
Washing the vehicle with a high-pressure washer could
damage the radiator fins and impair the radiators
effectiveness. Use of a high-pressure washer is not
recommended.
2.28
MAINTENANCE
Coolant Drain / Fill
1. Remove the front hood.
WARNING
Never drain the coolant when the engine and radiator

2
are warm or hot. Hot coolant can cause severe burns.
Allow engine and radiator to cool.
2. Slowly remove the pressure cap to relieve any

cooling system pressure.
3. Place a suitable drain pan underneath the radiator
fitting on the front right side of the vehicle.
4. Drain the coolant from the radiator by removing the
lower coolant hose from the radiator as shown 1 .
5. Allow coolant to drain completely. Properly dispose

of the used coolant.
6. Reinstall coolant hose and reposition the spring
clamp.
7. Remove the pressure cap. Using a funnel, add the
recommended coolant to the top of the filler neck
and fill the recovery bottle to the MAX level.
8. Refer to Cooling System Bleeding Procedure, page
3.18.
Polaris Premium Pre-Mixed Antifreeze
(PN 2871534) (Quart)
(PN 2871323) (Gallon)
2.29
MAINTENANCE
PVT / FINAL DRIVE / WHEEL AND TIRE
Drive Clutch / Driven Clutch / Belt Service PVT Drying
Refer to PVT SYSTEM SERVICE, page 5.8 for service
NOTE: After operating in water, the vehicles PVT
and removal procedures.
system should be checked immediately. Use the
following instructions to dry it out before operating.
PVT Intake Pre-Filter Service
It is recommended that the PVT intake pre-filter be The PVT drain plug is located at the bottom of the outer
inspected daily. The filter should be inspected using the clutch cover. Access the drain plug through the left rear
following procedure: wheel well.
1. The PVT intake pre-filter is located just above the left 1. Using a flat blade screwdriver, remove the PVT drain
rear wheel fender. plug 1 and O-ring from the outer clutch cover.
2. Loosen the knob on top of the assembly and lift up to
disengage the tab from the cargo box.
2. Allow the water to drain out completely.

3. Reinstall the drain plug and O-ring.
3. Inspect the pre-filter. If necessary, clean with soapy
water and dry with low pressure compressed air. 4. Place the transmission in PARK, apply the brake and
start the engine.
5. Apply varying throttle for 10-15 seconds to expel the
moisture and air-dry the belt and clutches.
NOTE: Do not hold the throttle pedal wide open
for more than 5 seconds.
6. Allow the engine RPM to return to idle, then shift the

transmission into low gear.
7. Test the PVT system for belt slippage. If the belt
slips, repeat the process or remove the outer clutch
cover to inspect the PVT system (see Chapter 4
PVT SYSTEM SERVICE, page 5.8 for service and
removal procedures).
NOTE: If the vehicle has ingested a large
amount of water into the PVT system and has not
been operated for a period of time, be sure to
check the PVT system components for water
damage.
2.30
MAINTENANCE
Drive Shaft Boot Inspection Wheel and Hub Torque Table
Inspect the front and rear drive shaft boots for
1
damage, tears, wear or leaking grease. If the boots ITEM SPECIFICATION

exhibit any of these symptoms, they should be replaced. Wheel Nuts
Check to see the boot clamps 2 are properly positioned. 120 ft-lbs (163 Nm)
(Cast Aluminum Wheels)
Refer to DRIVE SHAFT CV JOINT / BOOT
REPLACEMENT , page for drive shaft boot Hub Retaining Nuts
110 ft-lbs (149 Nm)
2
replacement. (Front and Rear)
Step 1: 24 in-lbs (3 Nm)
Beadlock Screws Step 2: 7 ft-lbs (10 Nm)
NOTE: Do not lubricate the stud or the lug nut.
Wheel Removal
1. Position the vehicle on a level surface.
2. Place the transmission in PARK and stop the engine.
3. Loosen the wheel nuts slightly. If wheel hub removal
is required, remove the wheel cap, cotter pin and
loosen the hub nut slightly.
4. Elevate the appropriate side of the vehicle by placing
a suitable stand under the frame.
5. Remove the wheel nuts and remove the wheel.
2.31
MAINTENANCE
Wheel Installation Tire Inspection
1. Verify the transmission is still in PARK. Improper tire inflation may affect vehicle
maneuverability.
2. Place the wheel in the correct position on the wheel
hub 5 . Be sure the valve stem 2 is toward the When replacing a tire always use original
outside and rotation arrows on the tire point toward equipment size and type.
forward rotation.
The use of non-standard size or type tires may
3. Attach the wheel nuts 1 and finger tighten them. affect vehicle handling.
4. Carefully lower the vehicle to the ground.
5. Torque the wheel nuts and/or hub nut 3 to the WARNING
proper torque specification (see Chapter 2 Wheel
and Hub Torque Table, page 2.31).
Operating with worn tires will increase the possibility of
6. If hub nut was removed, install a new cotter pin 4 the vehicle skidding easily with possible loss of control.
after the hub nut has been tightened. If the holes do
not line up, turn the hub nut counter-clockwise until Worn tires can cause an accident.
the cotter pin can be installed. Always replace tires when the usable tread depth has
worn out.
Tire Pressure
Remove the valve stem cap and check tire pressure
using the tire pressure gauge included in the vehicles
tool kit.
CAUTION
Maintain proper tire pressure.

Refer to the warning tire pressure decal
applied to the vehicle.
CAUTION TIRE PRESSURE INSPECTION (COLD)
If wheels are improperly installed it could affect vehicle Model Front Rear
handling and tire wear. On vehicles with tapered wheel XP 16 psi (110 kPa) 16 psi (110 kPa)
nuts, make sure tapered end of nut goes into taper on
wheel. XP4 19 psi (131 kPa) 21 psi (145 kPa)
High Lifter 18 psi (124 kPa) 18 psi (124 kPa)
2.32
MAINTENANCE
Beadlock Rims (Desert Edition)
The RZR XP Desert Edition model comes with Walker
Evans beadlock rims. The beadlock does not come set
up from factory, but may be changed to use the beadlock Beadlock Screws:
feature. Step 1: 24 in-lbs (3 Nm)
Step 2: 7 ft-lbs (10 Nm)
To make the beadlock rim functional: 2
1. Deflate the tire.
2. Remove the beadlock screws and beadlock ring.
3. Dismount the tire on the side with the beadlock holes.

4. Place the beadlock ring so the tire is sandwiched
between the rim and the ring making sure the valve
stem is aligned with the slot in the ring.
5. Install bolts and thread them to 24 in-lbs (3 Nm).
6. Tighten in a criss-cross pattern to 7 ft-lbs (10 Nm).
NOTE: Beadlock bolts should be checked and

retorqued every 300 miles (450 km).
7. Seat bead and inflate to 16 psi.
2.33
MAINTENANCE
ELECTRICAL AND IGNITION SYSTEM Battery Charging / Off Season Storage
Refer to Charging Procedure , page 11.37and Battery
Battery Maintenance Off Season Storage, page 11.36.
Keep battery terminals and connections free of
corrosion. If cleaning is necessary, remove the corrosion Battery Removal
with a stiff wire brush. Wash with a solution of one
tablespoon baking soda and one cup water. Rinse well 1. Remove the drivers seat to access the battery 1 .
with tap water and dry off with clean shop towels. Coat NOTE: Battery is located under left rear seat on
the terminals with dielectric grease or petroleum jelly. RZR XP 4 1000
WARNING
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:

Batteries, battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds, and
other chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm.
WASH HANDS AFTER HANDLING.
WARNING
Battery electrolyte is poisonous. It contains sulfuric 2. Disconnect the black (negative) battery cable(s).
acid. Serious burns can result from contact with skin,
eyes or clothing. Antidote: 3. Disconnect the red (positive) battery cable(s).
External: Flush with water.
Internal: Drink large quantities of water or milk. Follow CAUTION
with milk of magnesia, beaten egg, or vegetable oil. Call
physician immediately. To reduce the chance of sparks: Whenever removing
the battery, disconnect the black (negative) cable first.
Eyes: Flush with water for 15 minutes and get prompt When reinstalling the battery, install the black
medical attention. (negative) cable last.
Batteries produce explosive gases.
Keep sparks, flame, cigarettes, etc. away. Ventilate 4. Remove the battery hold-down bracket 2 .
when charging or using in an enclosed space. Always
shield eyes when
working near batteries.
KEEP OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN.
NOTE: Batteries must be fully charged before use

or battery life will be reduced by 10-30% of full
potential. Charge battery according to Charging
Procedure, page 11.37. Do not use the vehicles
stator/alternator to charge a new battery.
5. Lift the battery out of the vehicle.
2.34
MAINTENANCE
Battery Installation Engine / Chassis Electrical Ground
Inspect the ground cable connections. Remove ground
NOTE: Using a new battery that has not been fully terminals and clean if necessary.
charged can damage the battery and result in a
shorter life. It can also hinder vehicle performance. 1. The chassis ground connection 1 , located below the
Refer to Charging Procedure , page 11.37before start solenoid 2 , can be accessed through the left
installing the battery. rear wheel area. 2
1. Ensure the battery is fully charged.
2. Place the battery in the battery holder and secure
with hold-down strap.
3. Coat the terminals with dielectric grease or
petroleum jelly.
4. Connect and tighten the red (positive) cable(s) first.
5. Connect and tighten the black (negative) cable (s)
last.
2. Inspect the chassis ground terminals. Be sure the

grounds are clean and tight.
6. Verify that cables are properly routed and reinstall

the drivers seat.
2.35
MAINTENANCE
Spark Plug Service 5. Remove spark plugs using a 5/8 spark plug socket
Inspect and replace the spark plugs at the intervals with an extension.
outlined in the Periodic Maintenance Chart. 6. Inspect electrodes for wear and carbon buildup.
1. Remove the cargo box access panel 1 . Look for a sharp outer edge with no rounding or
erosion of the electrodes.
7. Clean with electrical contact cleaner or a glass bead

spark plug cleaner only. CAUTION: A wire brush or
WARNING coated abrasive should not be used.
8. Measure gap with a wire gauge. Adjust gap if
A hot engine can cause serious burns. Allow engine to
necessary by carefully bending the side electrode.
cool or wear protective gloves when removing the spark
plugs. 9. If necessary, replace spark plug with proper type.
CAUTION: Severe engine damage may occur if the
2. Remove both spark plug caps 2 . incorrect spark plug is used.
Recommended Spark Plug:

Champion RG4YCX
10. Apply anti-seize compound to the spark plug

threads.
11. Install spark plugs and torque to specification.
Spark Plug Torque:

7 ft-lbs (10 Nm)
12. Install the plug caps to the appropriate cylinder by

referencing the MAG and PTO spark plug wire
NOTE: Note MAG and PTO reference decals on decals. Ensure wires are pushed down all the way so
spark plug wires for reassembly. they engage onto the spark plugs.
3. Clean out plug wells with compressed air to remove 13. Reinstall the cargo box access panel.
any loose dirt or debris.
4. Rinse plug wells with water and dry with compressed
air.
NOTE: Spark plug wells have drain holes built
into the cylinder head to allow water to drain out.
2.36
MAINTENANCE
STEERING Steering Wheel Freeplay
Check steering wheel for specified freeplay and
Steering Inspection operation.
The steering components should be checked periodically 1. Position the vehicle on level ground.
for loose fasteners, worn tie rod ends, ball joints and
damage. Also check to make sure all cotter pins are in 2. Lightly turn the steering wheel left and right.
place. If cotter pins are removed, they must be replaced. 3. There should be 0.8-1.0 (20-25 mm) of freeplay.
2
Replace any worn or damaged steering components. 4. If there is excessive freeplay or the steering feels
Steering should move freely through the entire range of rough, inspect the following components.
travel without binding. Check routing of all cables, hoses,
and wiring to be sure the steering mechanism is not Tie Rod Ends 1
restricted or limited.
Steering Shaft U-Joints 2
NOTE: Check front end alignment whenever Steering Gearbox 3

steering components are replaced.
WARNING
Due to the critical nature of the procedures outlined in

this chapter, Polaris recommends steering component
repair and adjustment be performed by an authorized
Polaris MSD certified technician.
2.37
MAINTENANCE
Tie Rod End / Wheel Hub Inspection Wheel Toe Alignment Inspection
To check for play in the tie rod end, grasp the 1. Place machine on a smooth level surface and set
steering tie rod, pull in all directions feeling for steering wheel in a straight ahead position. Secure
movement. the steering wheel in this position.
2. Place a chalk mark on the center line of the front
tires approximately 10 (25.4 cm) from the floor or as
close to the hub/axle center line as possible (1).
Replace any worn steering components. Steering

should move freely through entire range of travel
without binding.
Elevate front end of machine so front wheels are
off the ground. Check for any looseness in front NOTE: It is important the height of both marks
wheel/hub assembly by grasping the tire firmly at be equally positioned to get an accurate
top and bottom first, and then at front and rear. Try measurement.
to move the wheel and hub by pushing inward and
pulling outward. 3. Measure the distance between the marks and record
the measurement. Call this measurement 2.
If abnormal movement is detected, inspect the hub

4. Rotate the tires 180 by moving the vehicle forward.
and wheel assembly to determine the cause
Position chalk marks facing rearward, even with the
(loose wheel nuts or loose front hub nut).
hub/axle center line.
Refer to Chapter 7 Final Drive for front hub
service procedures.
2.38
MAINTENANCE
5. Again measure the distance between the marks and Wheel Toe Adjustment
record. Call this measurement 3. Subtract
measurement 3 from measurement 2. The If toe alignment is incorrect, repeat steps 3-5 of Wheel
Toe Alignment Inspection, but instead measure the
difference between measurements 2 and 3 is the
distance between each wheel and the vehicle center.
vehicle toe alignment. The recommended vehicle toe
This will tell you which tie rod needs adjusting.
tolerance is 1/8 to 3/16 (3.2 to 4.8 mm) toe out. This
means the measurement at the front of the tire (2) is
1/8 to 3/16 (3.2 to 4.8 mm) wider than the
2
measurement at the rear (3).
Wheel Toe-Out:
(2) - (3) = 1/8" to 3/16 (3.2 to 4.8 mm)
NOTE: Be sure steering wheel is straight ahead

before determining which tie rod needs adjustment.
CAUTION
During tie rod adjustment, it is very important that the

following precautions be taken when tightening tie rod
end jam nuts.
If the rod end is positioned incorrectly it will not pivot,
and may break.
To adjust toe alignment:

Hold tie rod end to keep it from rotating.
Loosen jam nuts at both end of the tie rod.
Shorten or lengthen the tie rod until alignment is
as required to achieve the proper toe setting as
specified in Wheel Toe Alignment.
IMPORTANT: When tightening the tie rod end jam
nuts, the rod ends must be held parallel to prevent
rod end damage and premature wear. Damage
may not be immediately apparent if done
incorrectly.
After alignment is complete, torque jam nuts to
specification.
Tie Rod Jamb Nut:

14 ft-lbs (19 Nm)
2.39
MAINTENANCE
SUSPENSION (WALKER EVANS)
Spring Adjustment 2. Using the shock spanner/spreader tool (PN
The front and rear shocks have a ride height adjustment. 2878925) included in the vehicles tool kit, turn the
Suspension springs may be adjusted to suit different adjustment collar 1 to increase or decrease ride
riding conditions or vehicle payloads. height.
WARNING
Uneven adjustment may cause poor handling of the

vehicle, which could result in an accident and serious
injury or death. Always adjust both the left and right
spring equally.
Spring Adjustment - Factory Setting

FRONT REAR
RZR XP 1000: 16.625 RZR XP 1000: 22.430
(42.228 cm) (56.972 cm)
Shock Spanner / Clutch Spreader Tool:
RZR XP 4 1000: 15.600 RZR XP 4 1000: 21.918 PN 2878925
(39.625 cm) (55.671 cm)
RZR XP High Lifter: RZR XP High Lifter:
14.444 (36.689 cm) 21.547 (54.73 cm) NOTE: DO NOT increase the spring adjustment
by more than one inch (25.4 mm) over the factory
setting.
NOTE: Refer to the shock illustrations within this
procedure for spring measurement location.
The factory setting is appropriate for nearly all riding

conditions. Since this vehicle is equipped with full skid
plates, adjustment is not necessary.
If desired, the spring setting may be adjusted to maintain
vehicle clearance height when carrying loads.
1. Raise and safely support front or rear of the vehicle
off the ground to allow the suspension to fully extend.
NOTE: Always return the spring preload to the

factory setting after the load is removed from the
vehicle. The increased suspension height will
negatively impact vehicle stability when
operating without a load.
2.40
MAINTENANCE
Shock Compression Adjustment
The compression damping adjustment is located on the
shock Piggyback reservoir of each shock. Damping
adjustments can be made without using any tools.
NOTE: When the adjuster knob is turned counter-
clockwise until it stops, the damping is in the fully 2
open position (softest).
Turn the adjuster knob clockwise to increase

compression damping. Turn the adjuster knob counter-
clockwise to decrease compression damping.
NOTE: The recommended factory setting for the
front and rear shocks are provided in the following
compression adjustment tables.
Walker Evans 2.0" Front Shock:

Compression Adjustment Table
SETTING COMPRESSION DAMPING
Softest Full counter-clockwise position
Factory 6 clicks from softest position
Firmest Full clockwise position
Walker Evans 2.5" Rear Shock:

Compression Adjustment Table
SETTING COMPRESSION DAMPING
Softest Full counter-clockwise position
Factory 7 clicks from softest position
Firmest Full clockwise position
The rear shock adjuster can be found on the remote

reservoir. Clockwise will increase damping and counter-
clockwise will decrease damping.
2.41
MAINTENANCE
BRAKE SYSTEM
Brake Fluid Inspection Brake Pad / Disc Inspection
Always check the brake pedal travel and inspect the 1. Check the brake pads for wear, damage, or
brake fluid reservoir level before each operation. If the looseness 1 .
fluid level is low, add DOT 4 brake fluid only.
2. Inspect the brake pad surface for excessive wear.
Brake fluid should be changed every two years. The fluid
3. Pads should be changed when the friction material 1
should also be changed anytime the fluid becomes
contaminated, the fluid level is below the minimum level, is worn to 0.040 (1 mm).
or if the type and brand of the fluid in the reservoir is
unknown.
The brake fluid master cylinder reservoir can be
accessed through the left front wheel well.
1. Position the vehicle on a level surface.
2. Place the transmission in PARK.
3. View the brake fluid level in the reservoir 1 . The
level should be between the MAX and MIN level
lines.
Brake Pad Thickness

Service Limit: 0.040 (1 mm)
4. Check surface condition of the brake discs.

5. Measure the thickness of the front and rear brake
discs.
4. If the fluid level is lower than the MIN level line, add
brake fluid until it reaches the MAX level line.
5. Install the reservoir cap and apply the brake pedal
forcefully for a few seconds and check for fluid
leakage around the master cylinder fittings and the
brake caliper fittings.
2.42
MAINTENANCE
6. The disc (s) should be replaced if thickness is less Brake Hose and Fitting Inspection
than 0.170 (4.32 mm).
Check brake system hoses and fittings for cracks,
deterioration, abrasion, and leaks. Tighten any loose
fittings and replace any worn or damaged parts.
Brake Disc Thickness

Service Limit: 0.170 (4.32 mm)
2.43
MAINTENANCE
NOTES
2.44
ENGINE / COOLING SYSTEM
CHAPTER 3
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3
ENGINE LUBRICATION SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3
OIL PRESSURE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4
ENGINE OIL FLOW CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5
3
ENGINE SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6
ENGINE DETAIL - TORQUE VALUES / SEQUENCES / ASSEMBLY NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8
MAIN ENGINE COMPONENTS - TORQUE SPECIFICATION AND SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8
BALANCE SHAFT / CONNECTING RODS / CRANKCASE / CRANKSHAFT / PISTONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9
CYLINDER / OIL COOLER / OIL FILTER / OIL PUMP / OIL SUMP / WATER PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.10
CAMSHAFTS / CYLINDER HEAD / FLYWHEEL / IDLER GEARS / STATOR COVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11
SPARK PLUGS / STARTER / THERMOSTAT HOUSING / THROTTLE BODY / VALVE COVER . . . . .3.12
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.13
COOLING SYSTEM PRESSURE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.13
COOLING SYSTEM PRESSURE CAP TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.14
RADIATOR REMOVAL / INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.14
THERMOSTAT REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.15
COOLING SYSTEM ASSEMBLY VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.17
COOLING SYSTEM BLEEDING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.18
WATER PUMP REMOVAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.19
WATER PUMP INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.19
WATER PUMP SERVICE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.21
ENGINE SERVICE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.24
ACCESSIBLE ENGINE COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.24
TOP-END SERVICE (ENGINE IN CHASSIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.24
ENGINE REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.24
ENGINE INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.28
ENGINE MOUNTING AND TORQUE VALUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.31
ENGINE BREAK-IN PERIOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.32
ENGINE LUBRICATION SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.32
ENGINE DISASSEMBLY / INSPECTION - TOP END . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.33
VALVE COVER REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.33
CAMSHAFT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.33
CAMSHAFT SPROCKET INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.35
CAMSHAFT / CAMSHAFT BORE INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.35
CYLINDER HEAD REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.37
CYLINDER HEAD WARP INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.37
CYLINDER HEAD DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.38
VALVE INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.39
COMBUSTION CHAMBER CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.40
VALVE SEALING TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.40
3.1
VALVE SEAT RECONDITIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.41
ENGINE DISASSEMBLY / INSPECTION - LOWER END . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.44
STATOR COVER REMOVAL / INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.44
WATER PUMP HOUSING REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.45
FLYWHEEL REMOVAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.46
STARTER ONE-WAY CLUTCH DISASSEMBLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.47
CRANKCASE DISASSEMBLY / INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.48
BALANCE SHAFT REMOVAL / INSPECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.50
CRANKSHAFT REMOVAL / INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.51
CRANKCASE INSPECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.54
CYLINDER INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.55
CYLINDER / PISTON REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.56
PISTON DISASSEMBLY / INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.57
PISTON RING REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.58
PISTON RING TO GROOVE CLEARANCE INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.58
PISTON RING INSTALLED GAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.59
PISTON-TO-CYLINDER CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.59
CONNECTING ROD INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.60
ENGINE ASSEMBLY - LOWER END . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.62
BEARING SELECTION IDENTIFICATION LETTERS AND NUMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.62
CONNECTING ROD BEARING SELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.63
CRANKSHAFT MAIN BEARING SELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.63
UPPER CRANKCASE PREPARATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.64
PISTON RING INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.64
PISTON / CONNECTING ROD ASSEMBLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.66
CYLINDER / PISTON INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.67
CRANKSHAFT INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.68
BALANCE SHAFT INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.70
LOWER CRANKCASE PREPARATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.70
CRANKCASE ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.71
STARTER ONE-WAY CLUTCH ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.75
FLYWHEEL INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.76
STATOR COVER INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.76
ENGINE ASSEMBLY - TOP END . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.77
CYLINDER HEAD ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.77
CYLINDER HEAD INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.78
CAMSHAFT INSTALLATION / TIMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.79
CAMSHAFT TIMING - QUICK REFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.83
VALVE CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.84
INTAKE VALVE LASH - TAPPET SELECTION MATRIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.86
EXHAUST VALVE LASH - TAPPET SELECTION MATRIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.87
VALVE COVER INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.88
TROUBLESHOOTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.89
ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.89
COOLING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.90
3.2
GENERAL INFORMATION Engine Lubrication Specifications
Special Tools
TOOL DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER

Bench Mount Engine Stand
Adapter PW-47053 Oil Capacity *
Approx. 2.5 Quarts (2.4 L)
Clutch Center Distance Tool PU-50658
Oil Filter Wrench
Cylinder Holding & Camshaft
Timing Plate PU-50563 PU-50105 or 2.5 (64 mm)
3
Oil Filter
Engine Stand (2 Bore) PU-50624 PN 2540086
Engine Stand Adapter (Mounts
To The Engine) PU-50562 Oil Type
PS-4 PSynthetic Engine oil
Engine Stand Sleeve Adapter (PN 2876244) (Quart)
(Use With 2 Bore Stand) PU-50625 (-35 F to 100 F)
Engine Stand Sleeve Adapter PS-4 Extreme Duty
(Use With 2.375 Bore Stand) PW-47054
Synthetic Engine Oil
(PN 2878920) (Quart)
Flywheel Puller PA-49316 (0 F to 120 F)
Mity Vac Pressure Test Tool 2870975
Oil Pressure Minimum Specification
Oil Filter Wrench PU-50105 (using Polaris engine oil at operating temperature)
10 PSI @ 1200 RPM
Oil Pressure Gauge PV-43531 40 PSI @ 7000 RPM
Oil Pressure Gauge Adapter PU-50565
*Additional oil may be required after complete
Piston Ring Compressor Pliers PV-43570-1 engine disassembly. Check level after filling and add
oil as needed.
PV-1253 or PV-4019
Valve Spring Compressor
(Quick Release)
Valve Spring Compressor
Adapter PV-43513-A
Water Pump Mechanical Seal

PU-50564
Installer
Bosch Automotive Service Solutions: 1-800-345-

2233 or http://polaris.service-solutions.com/
3.3
Oil Pressure Test 5. Start engine and allow it to reach operating
1. Attach the Oil Pressure Gauge Adapter (PU-50565) temperature, monitoring gauge indication.
to the Oil Pressure Gauge (PV-43531). NOTE: Test results are based on the use of the
recommended engine oil (Polaris PS-4 or PS-4
Extreme Duty) at operating temperature, and may
vary considerably if any other oil is used or if
engine is not up to temperature.
Oil Pressure Specification (Engine Hot):

Minimum @ 1200 RPM: 10 PSI
Minimum @ 7000 RPM: 40 PSI
6. Upon assembly, torque the crankcase gallery plug to

specification.
Crankcase Oil Gallery Plug:

Oil Pressure Gauge Adapter: PU-50565 11 ft-lbs (15 Nm)
Oil Pressure Gauge: PV-43531
2. Remove the seats, engine service panel, and divider

panel heat shield.
3. Clean the area around the main oil gallery plug ,
located in the upper crankcase on the MAG side of
the engine.
4. Remove the crankcase gallery plug 1 and insert the
oil pressure adapter.
3.4
Engine Oil Flow Chart
3.5
ENGINE SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS

Engine Specifications
CAMSHAFT / CYLINDER HEAD / CYLINDER

ITEM STANDARD SERVICE LIMIT
Cam Lobe Height - Intake 1.5390 - 1.5429" (39.09 - 39.19 mm) 1.5370" (39.04 mm)
Cam Lobe Height - Exhaust 1.5142 - 1.5181" (38.46 - 38.56 mm) 1.5122" (38.41 mm)
Camshaft Journal O.D. - All 0.9036 - 0.9055" (22.954 - 22.999 mm) 0.9033" (22.944 mm)
Camshaft
Camshaft Carrier Bore I.D. - All 0.9055 - 0.9063" (23.000 - 23.021 mm) 0.9072" (23.044 mm)
Camshaft Oil Clearance 0.0000 - 0.0026" (0.001 - 0.067 mm) 0.0039" (0.1 mm)
Camshaft End Play 0.0040 - 0.0100" (0.101 - 0.254 mm) 0.0157" (0.4 mm)
Cylinder - Surface Warp Limit (cylinder head

- 0.002 (0.05 mm)
surface)
Cylinder Bore - Standard 3.6614 0.0003" (93 mm 0.008 mm) -

Cylinder
Cylinder Out of Round Limit - 0.001 (0.025 mm)
Cylinder Taper Limit - 0.001 (0.025 mm)
Cylinder to Piston Clearance 0.0009 - 0.0019" (0.025 - 0.050 mm) -
Cylinder Head - Surface Warp Limit - 0.0039 (0.1 mm)

Cylinder
Head Cylinder Head - Standard Height 4.717 0.0019" (119.82 0.05 mm) -
Valve Lash (Cold) - Intake 0.006 0.002" (0.15 0.05 mm) -
Valve Lash (Cold) - Exhaust 0.008 0.002" (0.20 0.05 mm) -
Valve Stem Diameter - Intake 0.2155 - 0.2161" (5.475 - 5.490 mm) -
Valve Stem Diameter - Exhaust 0.2147 - 0.2153" (5.455 - 5.470 mm) -

Valve
Valve Stem Oil Clearance - Intake 0.0003 - 0.0015" (0.010 - 0.040 mm) -
Valve Stem Oil Clearance - Exhaust 0.0011 - 0.0023" (0.030 - 0.060 mm) -
Valve Stem Overall Length - Intake 3.7704" (95.77 mm) -
Valve Stem Overall Length - Exhaust 3.8023" (96.58 mm) -
Valve 0.2165 - 0.2171" (5.500 - 5.515 mm) -

Valve Guide Inner Diameter
Guide
Valve Seat - Contacting Width - Intake 0.0393 0.0039" (1.0 0.10 mm) 0.0551" (1.4 mm)
Valve Seat - Contacting Width - Exhaust 0.0590 0.0039" (1.5 0.10 mm) 0.0748" (1.9 mm)
Valve Seat
30.0 1.5
Valve Seat Angles 45.0 0.5 -
60.0 1.5
3.6
PISTON / RINGS / CONNECTING ROD / CRANKSHAFT / BALANCE SHAFT

ITEM STANDARD SERVICE LIMIT
Standard O.D. - Measured 90 to pin, 0.39
3.6597 0.0003" (92.959 0.008 mm) -
in. (10 mm) up from piston skirt
Piston Piston Pin Bore I.D. (Standard) 0.7877 - 0.7881" (20.009 - 20.018 mm) 0.7893" (20.05 mm)
Piston Pin O.D. 0.7873 - 0.7875" (20.000 - 20.005 mm) 0.7866" (19.98 mm)
Top Ring 0.010 - 0.014" (0.25 - 0.35 mm) 0.0196" (0.5 mm)
Installed
Gap
Second Ring 0.015 - 0.025" (0.37 - 0.63 mm) 0.028" (0.70 mm) 3
Piston Ring Oil Control Rails 0.008 - 0.028" (0.20 - 0.70 mm) 0.0354" (0.9 mm)
Ring to Top Ring

Groove 0.0007 - 0.0023" (0.020 - 0.060 mm) 0.0047" (0.12 mm)
Clearance Second Ring
Connecting Rod Small End I.D. 0.7879 - 0.7885" (20.015 - 20.030 mm) 0.7897" (20.06 mm)
1 - Marking Conn. Rod Big End Bore I.D. 1.7318 - 1.7321" (43.989 - 43.996 mm) -
Connecting
Rod 2 - Marking Conn. Rod Big End Bore I.D. 1.7321 - 1.7323" (43.996 - 44.003 mm) -
3 - Marking Conn. Rod Big End Bore I.D. 1.7323 - 1.7326" (44.003 - 44.010 mm) -
B - Marking Main Journal O.D. 1.6140 - 1.6143" (40.996 - 41.004 mm) 1.6129" (40.970 mm)
G-
Main Journal O.D. 1.6137 - 1.6140" (40.988 - 40.995 mm) 1.6129" (40.970 mm)
Marking
Y - Marking Main Journal O.D. 1.6134 - 1.6137" (40.980 - 40.987 mm) 1.6129" (40.970 mm)
B - Marking Rod Journal O.D. 1.6118 - 1.6122" (40.942 - 40.950 mm) 1.6104" (40.906 mm)
Crankshaft
G-
Rod Journal O.D. 1.6115 - 1.6118" (40.934 - 40.941 mm) 1.6104" (40.906 mm)
Marking
Y - Marking Rod Journal O.D. 1.6112 - 1.6115" (40.926 - 40.933 mm) 1.6104" (40.906 mm)
Less than 0.001

Crankshaft Runout Limit (PTO and MAG) -
(0.025 mm)
Balance Bearing Journal O.D. (Standard) 1.4939 - 1.4946" (37.946 - 37.962 mm) 1.4921" (37.900 mm)
Shaft
3.7
ENGINE DETAIL - TORQUE VALUES / SEQUENCES / ASSEMBLY NOTES
Main Engine Components - Torque Specification and Sequence
3.8
Balance Shaft / Connecting Rods / Crankcase / Crankshaft / Pistons
3.9
Cylinder / Oil Cooler / Oil Filter / Oil Pump / Oil Sump / Water Pump
3.10
Camshafts / Cylinder Head / Flywheel / Idler Gears / Stator Cover
3.11
Spark Plugs / Starter / Thermostat Housing / Throttle Body / Valve Cover
3.12
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
Cooling System Specifications Cooling System Pressure Test
1. Remove the hood from the front cab.
CONDITION COOLANT TEMP F (C)
Room Temperature 68 F (20 C)
WARNING
Thermostat Open 180 F (82 C)
Fan Off 192 F (89 C) Never remove pressure cap when engine is warm or
hot. The cooling system is under pressure and serious
Fan On 198 F (92 C) burns may result. 3
Allow the engine to cool before servicing.
Thermostat Full Open 203 F (95 C)
Engine Temperature 2. Remove pressure cap and pressure test the cooling
233 F (112 C) system using a commercially available pressure
Overheat Indicator
tester.
Engine Protection
236 F (113 C)
Ignition Misfire
Engine Protection 257 F (125 C)
Shutdown
ITEM SPECIFICATION
Cooling System Capacity 4.9 qts. (4.6 L)
Pressure Cap Relief 13 PSI
Polaris Premium Antifreeze

2871534 - Quart
2871323 - Gallon
Recommended Coolant
Use only high quality antifreeze/coolant mixed with
distilled water in a 50/50 or 60/40 ratio, depending on
freeze protection required in your area.
CAUTION: Using tap water in the cooling system will
lead to a buildup of deposits which may restrict coolant
flow and reduce heat dissipation, resulting in possible
engine damage. Polaris Premium 60/40 Antifreeze/
Coolant is recommended for use in all cooling systems 3. The system must maintain 10 psi for five minutes or
and comes pre-mixed, ready to use. longer. If pressure loss is evident within five minutes,
check the filler neck, radiator, hoses, clamps and
water pump weep hole for leakage.
3.13
Cooling System Pressure Cap Test Radiator Removal / Installation
1. Remove the hood from the front cab. 1. Remove the hood and front bumper (See Chapter 10
Hood and Front Body Work, page 10.20and Front
Bumper, page 10.19).
WARNING 2. Remove the four fasteners that secure the front
bumper support to the main frame.
Never remove pressure cap when engine is warm or
hot. The cooling system is under pressure and serious
burns may result. Allow the engine to cool before
servicing.
2. Remove pressure cap 1 and test using a pressure

cap tester (commercially available).
3. Drain radiator by removing lower radiator hose 1 . Be

sure to catch and dispose of coolant properly.
3. The pressure cap relief pressure is 13 psi. Replace

cap if it does not meet this specification.
WARNING
The cooling system is under pressure and serious

burns may result.
4. Disconnect cooling fan electrical connector.

5. Remove the upper radiator hose from the radiator.
3.14
6. Remove the four upper radiator support fasteners 2 Thermostat Replacement
and disconnect the small radiator bypass hose 3 . 1. Remove the hood from the front cab.
WARNING
The cooling system is under pressure and serious

burns may result.
2. Remove the pressure cap to relieve any system 3

pressure (see Chapter 3 Cooling System Pressure
Cap Test, page 3.14).
3. Drain coolant to a level below the thermostat
housing.
4. Remove upper coolant hose from thermostat
7. Lift radiator up to disengage it from its lower housing 1 .
mounting points. Tilt top of radiator outward and
remove the radiator from the vehicle.
8. Separate the fan motor assembly from the radiator.
Inspect fan blades for damage.
9. Reverse this procedure for installation. Be sure to
properly fill and bleed cooling system as outlined in
this chapter.
5. Remove the rear bolt 2 retaining the thermostat

cover.
6. Remove the cargo box access panel.
7. Using an 8 mm swivel socket and long extension,
remove the front bolt 3 retaining the thermostat
cover.
3 Upper Radiator Hose 6 To Radiator Fitting

4 Lower Radiator Hose 7 Fan Motor Assembly
5 Recovery Bottle 8 Radiator
3.15
8. Lift the cover from the housing and remove the
thermostat.
NOTE: Thermostat has a pop-off relief to allow
the bypass system to operate until thermostat
opens.
9. Install a new thermostat with the bleed hole 4
positioned closest to the engine.
NOTE: Image shown above is with engine

removed for clarity.
10. Reverse this procedure for installation. Torque

thermostat cover bolts to specification.
Thermostat Cover Bolts:

7 ft-lb (10 Nm)
11. Be sure to properly fill and bleed cooling system as

outlined in this chapter.
3.16
Cooling System Assembly View
1 Thermostat housing 6 Filler Neck 11 Oil Cooler Inlet Hose

2 Water Pump 7 Radiator 12 Oil Cooler Outlet Hose
3 Engine Hoses 8 Pressure Cap 13 Bypass Hose
4 Lower Radiator Hose 9 Upper Radiator Hose 14 Water Pump Outlet Hose
5 Fan Assembly 10 Recovery Bottle
3.17
Cooling System Bleeding Procedure 6. Open the bleed screw 3 to allow any trapped air to
escape. Close the bleed screw once a steady stream
of coolant begins to drain out.
WARNING
Always wear safety glasses and proper shop clothing

when performing the procedures in this manual. Failing
to do so may lead to possible injury or death.
CAUTION
Use caution when performing these procedures.

Coolant may be hot and may cause
severe injury or burns.
NOTE: If the coolant level is LOW in the radiator, or 7. Tighten the bleed screw to specification, top off
if there are leaks in the system, the coolant system coolant and properly install the pressure cap.
will not draw coolant from the reservoir tank.
1. Allow engine and cooling system to cool down.
CAUTION Coolant Bleed Screw:

89 in-lb (10 Nm)
Be sure the engine has cooled and no pressure is built
up in the cooling system before removing the pressure 8. Start the engine and allow it to idle until the coolant
cap. The coolant may be hot and could cause severe fan has cycled two times.
injury or burns.
9. Allow engine and cooling system to completely cool
2. Remove the hood. down (see CAUTION).
3. Remove the recovery bottle cap 1 and fill the bottle 10. Remove the pressure cap. Add the necessary
to the MAX line. amount of Polaris Premium Antifreeze to the radiator
filler neck.
11. Open the bleed screw to allow any trapped air to
escape. Close the bleed screw once a steady stream
of coolant begins to drain out.
12. Tighten the bleed screw to specification, top off
coolant and properly install the pressure cap.
Coolant Bleed Screw:

89 in-lb (10 Nm)
13. Fill the recovery bottle to the MAX line.

4. Remove the pressure cap 2 and add the necessary 14. Reinstall the hood.
amount of Polaris Premium Antifreeze to the radiator 15. Reinstall the seats and engine service panel.
filler neck.
5. Remove the seats, engine service panel and divider
panel heat shield to access the coolant bleed screw.
3.18
Water Pump Removal Water Pump Installation
1. Allow engine and cooling system to cool down. 1. Replace the two sealing O-rings on the water pump
housing.
CAUTION NOTE: Do not reuse the water pump O-rings.
Always use NEW O-rings each time the water
Be sure the engine has cooled and no pressure is built pump is removed.
up in the cooling system before removing the pressure
cap. The coolant may be hot and could cause severe 2. Lubricate new O-rings 1 with fresh engine oil.
injury or burns.
2. Remove drivers seat. 3

3. Disconnect the (-) negative battery cable.
4. Remove all debris and thoroughly clean water pump
area and RH side of engine block.
5. Remove the hood.
6. Remove the pressure cap from the filler neck.
7. Drain cooling system as outlined in this chapter.
8. Elevate the rear of the vehicle off the ground using a
suitable ATV lift and remove the right rear wheel.
9. Remove the right rear shock lower mounting bolt.
Discard the nut. Swing and support right rear shock
rearward to gain access to water pump area. 3. Remove the shop towel from the water pump drive
access hole in the engine block.
10. Remove the five coolant hoses that are attached to
the water pump. Note location and routing for 4. Clean the O-ring sealing surface 2 in the engine
installation. Be sure to catch and dispose of coolant block using a clean shop towel.
properly.
11. Remove the three bolts 1 & 2 retaining water pump
to engine block. Note different bolt lengths for
installation.
5. Use a shop light to illuminate the water pump drive

access hole in engine crankcase and note
orientation of the water pump drive slot 3 .
12. Remove water pump from engine by gently twisting

and rocking the water pump housing while pulling
outward.
13. Maneuver water pump downward and remove it
through the access hole in the skid plate.
14. Plug the water pump drive access hole in the engine
block with a clean shop towel.
3.19
6. Rotate water pump drive tab 4 so it matches the 10. Install the three water pump mounting bolts 5 & 6
angle of the drive slot in the engine. and torque to specification.
NOTE: Install different bolt lengths as shown.

CAUTION
The water pump drive tab and slot must be aligned
properly during installation. Severe engine or water
pump damage will occur if the tab and slot are not in
alignment during water pump installation.
Water Pump Mounting Bolts:
7 ft-lb (10 Nm)
7. Maneuver water pump up through the access hole in (Apply Loctite 204 to bolt threads)
the skid plate on the RH side of the vehicle.
8. Slide water pump into engine crankcase. 11. Install the four coolant hoses 7 10 that attach to the
9. Be sure water pump is fully seated and the drive tab water pump. Be sure orientation and routing are
and slot are properly engaged. correct.
12. Install the right rear lower shock bolt and new nut.
Torque mounting bolt to specification.
Rear Shock Mounting Bolt:

70 ft-lbs (95 Nm)
3.20
13. Install the right rear wheel. Torque wheel nuts to Water Pump Service
specification.
NOTE: The water pump cover gasket can be
replaced while the water pump housing is still
installed in the engine.
1. Remove water pump assembly as outlined in this

Wheel Nuts: chapter.
120 ft-lbs (163 Nm)
2. Remove the three bolts retaining water pump cover
1 to water pump housing 2 . Discard cover gasket 3
14. Connect the (-) negative battery cable.
15. Fill and bleed cooling system as outlined in this
.
3
chapter.
16. Install the hood, engine service panel and seats.
3. Place the water pump drive tab 4 vertically into a

soft jaw vice.
4. Remove the bolt and washer retaining the water
pump impeller to the shaft. Inspect the impeller veins
and water pump housing for damage. Replace if
needed.
NOTE: The water pump impeller bolt 5 is left
hand thread (reverse thread).
5. Remove impeller from water pump shaft.

6. Using an appropriate arbor press, properly support
the water pump housing and press out the water
pump shaft from the impeller side.
3.21
7. Extract the mechanical seal and the oil seal from the 14. Install a NEW mechanical seal into the water pump
water pump housing. housing using special tool PU-50564. Press the new
mechanical seal in until it is flush with the water
NOTE: A 5/32" (4 mm) diameter punch 6 will fit pump housing.
in the lubrication slot to aid in the removal of the
oil seal. Be sure not to damage the water pump
shaft bearing surface.
15. Rotate water pump shaft after seal installation to

verify free movement.
16. Place impeller onto the water pump shaft.
8. Inspect the water pump shaft bore for excessive
wear or damage. Replace water pump housing 17. Apply Loctite 204 to the threads of the impeller
assembly if necessary. bolt. Install washer and impeller bolt and torque to
specification.
9. Clean and inspect water pump shaft for excessive
wear or damage. Replace water pump housing
assembly if necessary, as shaft can not be
purchased separately.
10. Thoroughly clean mechanical seal and oil seal
bores. Water Pump Impeller Bolt:
7 ft-lb (10 Nm)
11. Install a NEW oil seal into the water pump housing (Apply Loctite 204 to bolt threads)
until fully seated.
12. Fully install the water pump shaft and two washers 18. Clean cover 1 and housing gasket surfaces 2 .
into the housing.
19. Install a new water pump cover gasket 3 .
13. Place water pump drive tab vertically into soft jaw
vice as previously shown in this procedure.
3.22
20. Install the water pump cover and three retaining bolts
8 . Torque bolts in sequence to specification.
Water Pump Cover Bolts:

7 ft-lb (10 Nm)
(Apply Loctite 204 to bolt threads)
21. Install two new water pump (O-rings) and lubricate

them with fresh engine oil.
22. Install water pump assembly into engine as shown in
the Water Pump Installation procedure. 3
9 Bolt 13 Washers 17 Oil Seal

10 Loctite 204 14 Drive Tab 18 Impeller
11 Mechanical Seal 15 Water Pump Shaft 19 Washer
12 O-Rings 16 Water Pump Housing
3.23
ENGINE SERVICE
Accessible Engine Components Top-End Service (Engine in Chassis)
The following components can be serviced or removed Some top-end engine components can be serviced while
with the engine installed: the engine is mounted in the chassis.
Camshaft(s) To service the top-end of the engine refer to Valve
Clearance Inspection, page 2.20, which provides
Camshaft Sprocket(s) detailed steps to access the valve cover.
Cylinder Head
Flywheel Engine Removal
Oil Cooler NOTE: Some engine repair procedures can be
Starter Motor / Idler Gear Asm performed without removing the engine assembly
from the vehicle. Refer to Accessible Engine
Stator (Alternator) Components, page 3.24 for further information.
Thermostat The use of an overhead or portable engine hoist is
the only recommended method for removing and
Valve Cover installing the engine.
Water Pump Have an assistant help guide the engine in and out of
the vehicle while using an engine hoist to prevent
The following components require engine removal for personal injury or damage to vehicle components.
service:
Camshaft Timing Chain
Connecting Rod(s) WARNING
Counterbalance Shaft / Bearings
Always wear safety glasses and proper shop clothing
Crankcase when performing the procedures in this Service
Crankshaft / Main Bearings Manual. Failing to do so may lead to possible injury.
Crankshaft Seal (PTO) 1. If vehicle was recently operated, allow it to cool down
Cylinder before attempting to perform any work.
Oil Pump / Oil Pump Sprocket or Chain 2. Thoroughly clean the engine and chassis.
Piston / Rings 3. Drain the engine oil and coolant prior to engine
removal (See Chapter 2 Coolant Drain / Fill, page
2.29).
4. Remove the seats.
5. Disconnect the (-) negative battery cable from the
battery.
6. Remove the rear bumper and cargo box (see
Chapter 10 Cargo Box Assembly Removal, page
10.22).
7. Remove the air box assembly.
8. Elevate the rear of the vehicle off the ground using a
suitable lift and remove the left rear wheel.
WARNING
Use care when supporting vehicle so that it does not tip

or fall.
Serious injury may occur if vehicle tips or falls.
3.24
9. Remove lower mounting bolt 1 from the left rear 12. Disconnect the TMAP sensor 3 , fuel injector
shock and discard the nut. Install a new nut upon harness leads 4 , CPS 5 , ECT sensor 6 , and
assembly. ignition coil harness lead. Remove wire ties retaining
harness to the fuel rail and rear cross member.
10. Remove the outer clutch cover screws 2 and
remove the cover from the vehicle.
13. Disconnect the stator harness.

11. Remove drive belt, drive clutch, driven clutch, inner
clutch cover and clutch outlet duct (see Chapter 5 14. Remove (+) positive cable from the starter motor.
PVT Disassembly, page 5.11). 15. Remove (-) negative cable from the starter mounting
bolt.
CAUTION 16. Disconnect fuel lines and remove throttle body
assembly (See Chapter 4 Fuel Line Removal /
Correct Drive Clutch Puller P/N 2872085 Installation, page 4.10 Fuel Line Removal /
Installation, page 4.10 Throttle Body Removal, page
4.34). Make note of line routing for installation.
17. Remove spark plug wires from the engine.
NOTE: The spark plug wires are marked with
MAG and PTO. Note during installation
procedure.
18. Remove the breather hose 7 from the crankcase.
NOTE: Be sure to use the correct Drive Clutch

Puller (PN 2872085) to prevent damage to
crankshaft.
3.25
19. Remove the six fasteners that attach the exhaust 21. Place a suitable drain pan under the vehicle and
head pipe to the engine. Remove the two exhaust remove the thermostat housing coolant hose 14 and
springs 8 that attach the head pipe 9 to the muffler. the water pump coolant hose 15 from the engine.
Remove exhaust head pipe towards the front of the Dispose of engine coolant properly.
vehicle. Discard exhaust gaskets 10 .
20. Remove the four fasteners retaining the box support 22. Use an overhead or portable engine hoist and
11 and the two fasteners retaining the box support suitable engine straps to secure engine in its current
bracket 12 . Remove the push rivet that attaches the position.
heat shield 13 to the rear cross member. 23. Remove the four rear mounting bolts 16 that attach
the rear of the engine to the transmission.
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the bolts

that retain the bracket 17 to the transmission.
3.26
24. Remove the four front engine mounting bolts 18 and 30. Place engine onto the engine stand (PU- 50624) for
nuts 19 . service.
25. With the help of an assistant and the engine hoist,

raise the engine vertically out of the vehicle frame.
NOTE: Have an assistant help guide the engine
in and out of the vehicle while using an engine
hoist to prevent personal injury or damage to
vehicle components.
26. Remove the starter motor bolts 20 and starter motor

from the engine.
27. Remove the six transmission joint bracket bolts 21
and transmission joint bracket 22 from the engine.

28. Install the engine stand adapter (PU-50562) onto the
engine where the starter motor was located.
29. Select the proper engine stand sleeve adapter and
install it onto the engine stand adapter.
Sleeve adapter for a 2 bore engine stand:
(PU-50625)
Sleeve adapter for a 2.375 bore engine stand:
(PW-47054)
3.27
Engine Installation 4. Use the overhead or portable engine hoist and
Use the following procedure to reinstall the engine suitable engine straps to lower the engine into the
assembly. vehicle frame.
1. Attach engine with suitable lifting straps to an NOTE: Have an assistant help guide the engine
overhead or portable engine hoist. in and out of the vehicle while using an engine
hoist to prevent personal injury or damage to
2. Remove the engine stand adapter plate and install vehicle components.
the starter motor back onto engine. Torque starter
motor bolts to specification. 5. Align both the front and rear engine mounting
3. Install transmission joint bracket onto engine and locations. Install and hand tighten the four front
torque fasteners to specification in sequence. engine mounting nuts 1 and bolts 2 .
NOTE: DO NOT torque fasteners at this time.
6. Align transmission joint mounting holes with the

transmission front mounting holes.
Starter Motor Bolts:

7 ft-lb (10 Nm)
Trans Joint Bracket Bolts:

44 ft-lb (60 Nm)
3.28
7. Install the Clutch Center Distance Tool (PU-50658) 10. Install the two bolts 6 retaining the transmission joint
onto the crankshaft 3 and transmission input shaft to bracket to the engine on the right side. Hand tighten
properly position the clutch center distance. The the bolts so they remain loose at this time.
pictures below show the tool (PU-50658) properly
installed 4 . NOTE: DO NOT torque fasteners at this time.
11. Install the two longer bolts into left side mounting
holes. Torque left side mounting bolts to specification
using the numbered sequence shown.
12. Torque right side mounting bolts to specification

8. Loosen the two bolts 5 retaining transmission joint

bracket to the transmission on the right side.
Engine / Transmission Mounting Bolts:

Step 1-2: 64 ft-lb (87 Nm)
Step 3: 5 ft-lb (7 Nm)
Step 4-7: 44 ft-lb (60 Nm)
13. Remove the clutch center distance tool.

9. Align the front transmission mounting holes with
transmission joint bracket mounting holes on engine.
3.29
14. Torque the four front engine mount fasteners to 24. Install the throttle body assembly and connect fuel
specification. lines. Install throttle cable retaining clip.
25. Secure wire harness in the routing clip on the rear
cross member.
26. Install (+) positive cable to the starter motor.
Front Engine Mount Fasteners: 27. Install (-) negative cable to the starter motor
40 ft-lbs (54 Nm) mounting bolt.
28. Properly route and connect the harness leads for the
15. Remove the lifting straps and overhead or portable stator, CPS, TMAP sensor, ECT sensor, fuel injectors
engine hoist. and ignition coil.
16. Install the two coolant hoses onto the engine. 29. Install the air box assembly as outlined in the EFI
Chapter (See Chapter 4 ETC Replacement, page
17. Install front support bracket and rear support
7 8
4.36).
onto the vehicle frame. Torque fasteners to
specification. 30. Install the inner clutch cover, drive clutch, driven
clutch, drive belt, outer clutch cover and clutch outlet
duct (see Chapter 6 PVT Disassembly, page 5.11).
31. Install the left rear shock lower mounting bolt and
new nut. Torque to specification.

70 ft-lbs (95 Nm)
32. Install the left rear wheel and torque wheel nuts to
specification.
18. Install push rivet through heat shield 9 into rear

cross member.
19. Install the exhaust heat shield and push rivets.
Wheel Nuts:
20. Replace exhaust gaskets (seals). Install exhaust 120 ft-lbs (163 Nm)
head pipe. Install the six fasteners that attach the
exhaust head pipe to the engine and torque to 33. Install the rear bumper and cargo box as an
specification. assembly.
NOTE: Be sure to connect the engine intake
hose and clutch air intake hose to the rear cargo
box asm upon installation.
Exhaust Head Pipe Bolts: 34. Connect the (-) negative battery cable.
18 ft-lb (24 Nm) 35. Remove the pressure cap and fill the cooling system
through the filler neck with properly mixed anti-freeze
21. Install the two exhaust springs that attach the head / coolant.
pipe to the muffler.
36. Install a new oil filter. Lubricate the seal with engine
22. Install the breather hose to the crankcase. oil prior to installation (see Chapter 2 Engine Oil
23. Install the spark plug wires to the appropriate and Filter Change, page 2.18).
cylinder by referencing the MAG and PTO spark plug 37. Add approximately 2.5 quarts (3.3 L) of Polaris PS-4
wire decals. or PS-4 Extreme Duty Synthetic Engine Oil to the
engine. Additional oil may be required after complete
NOTE: Ensure plug wires caps are pushed down engine disassembly. Check level after filling and add
all the way so they engage onto the spark plugs. oil as needed.
3.30
38. Follow the Cooling System Bleeding Procedure, 41. Check the engine oil level.
page 3.18 as outlined in this chapter.
42. Refer customer to Engine Break-In Period upon
39. Install the seats. returning vehicle to customer.
40. Start engine and check for any oil or coolant leaks.
Engine Mounting and Torque Values
3.31
Engine Break-In Period Engine Lubrication Specifications
The break-in period consists of the first 25 hours of
operation, or the time it takes to use 15 gallons (57 liters)
of fuel. Careful treatment of a new engine and drive
components will result in more efficient performance and
longer life for these components.
Oil Capacity *
Approx. 2.5 Quarts (2.4 L)
CAUTION
Oil Filter Wrench
Use only Polaris PS-4 or PS-4 Extreme Duty Synthetic PU-50105 or 2.5 (64 mm)
4-Cycle Engine Oil.
Never substitute or mix oil brands. Serious engine Oil Filter
damage and voiding of warranty can result. PN 2540086
Do not operate at full throttle or high speeds for
extended periods during the first three hours of use. Oil Type
Excessive heat can build up and cause damage to Ambient Temp Range:
close fitted engine parts. -35 F to 100 F
PS-4 Synthetic Engine oil
1. Fill fuel tank with unleaded fuel which has a (PN 2876244) (Quart)
minimum pump octane number of 87 = (R + M)/2.
Ambient Temp Range:
2. Refer to Engine Oil Level, page 2.17. Check oil level 0 F to 120 F
indicated on dipstick. Add oil if necessary. PS-4 Extreme Duty
3. Drive slowly at first to gradually bring engine up to Synthetic Engine Oil
operating temperature. (PN 2878920) (Quart)
4. Vary throttle positions. Do not operate at sustained Oil Pressure
idle or sustained high speed. Minimum Specification
5. Perform regular checks on fluid levels, controls and (using Polaris engine oil at operating temperature)
all important bolt torques. 10 PSI @ 1200 RPM
40 PSI @ 7000 RPM
6. Change oil and oil filter after 25 hour break-in period.
* Additional oil may be required after complete
engine disassembly. Check level after filling and add
oil as needed.
3.32
ENGINE DISASSEMBLY / INSPECTION - TOP END
Valve Cover Removal Camshaft Removal
NOTE: The valve cover can be removed with the NOTE: The camshafts can be removed with the
engine installed in the chassis. engine installed in the chassis.
1. Remove the four valve cover shoulder bolts 1 and 1. Rotate the engine so the PTO cylinder is at Top
isolators 2 using a T40 driver. Dead Center (TDC) to relieve most of the valve
spring pressure. The camshaft lobes should face out
1 and the slots on the end of the camshafts should
line up. 3
2. Replace isolators 2 when they are removed and

replace valve cover seal 3 if oil leaks are evident.
3. Remove the spark plugs 4 . Stuff spark plug holes
with shop towels to prevent anything from falling into 2. Remove the hydraulic cam chain tensioner 2 from
the combustion chamber. the cylinder. Replace the sealing washer 3 upon
reassembly.
3.33
3. Remove the two bolts retaining the fixed cam chain 7. Lift the chain and sprockets off the camshafts to
guide 4 and remove the assembly from the engine. allow each sprocket to be removed.
8. Using a paperclip or other tool, hold cam chain up to
keep it from falling down into the crankcase.
NOTE: The crankcase has a built-in lower guide
to prevent the chain from falling off the
crankshaft.
9. Evenly loosen the four bolts retaining each rear

camshaft carrier 10 and carefully lift the carriers off
the camshafts.
4. Remove the remaining two bolts that retain the front

camshaft carrier 5 and carefully lift the carrier off the
camshafts.
10. Mark the intake 11 and exhaust 12 camshafts to

ensure proper assembly.
11. Carefully remove camshafts from the cylinder head.
5. Hold camshafts 6 with an open-end wrench, and

remove the top bolt 7 from the camshaft sprockets
8 .
6. Rotate the engine using the flywheel and remove the

remaining bolt from each camshaft sprocket.
3.34
Camshaft Sprocket Inspection Camshaft / Camshaft Bore Inspection
Inspect cam sprocket teeth 1 for wear or damage. Inspect all main journals and cam lobes as described
Replace timing chain and sprockets if worn or damaged. below and compare to specifications. Replace camshaft
(s) or cylinder head if worn beyond service limit or if any
surface is pitted or damaged.
1. Visually inspect each cam lobe for wear or damage.
2. Measure the height of each cam lobe from the base
circle to highest point on the lobe using a
micrometer. Compare to specification.
3
NOTE: Replace camshafts if damaged or if any

part is worn past the service limit.
Camshaft Lobe Height:

Intake: 1.5390 - 1.5429" (39.09 - 39.19 mm)
Service Limit: 1.5370" (39.04 mm)
Exhaust: 1.5142 - 1.5181" (38.46 - 38.56 mm)

3. Visually inspect each camshaft journal for scoring,

wear or damage.
3.35
4. Measure the diameter of the camshaft journals using 6. Measure camshaft bore and compare to
a micrometer. Compare to specification. specifications.
NOTE: Replace camshafts if damaged or if any

part is worn past the service limit. NOTE: Replace cylinder head if camshaft journal
bores are damaged or if worn past the service
limit.
Camshaft Journal O.D.:

0.9036 - 0.9055" (22.954 - 22.999 mm) Camshaft Carrier Bore I.D.:
0.9055 - 0.9063" (23.000 - 23.021 mm)
0.9033" (22.944 mm)
0.9072" (23.044 mm)
5. Temporarily install the camshaft carriers to measure
the camshaft bore. Torque bolts in sequence to 7. Calculate oil clearance by subtracting camshaft
specification. Replace cylinder head if worn. journal O. D. s from camshaft carrier bore I. D. s.
Compare to specification.
Calculated Camshaft Oil Clearance:

0.0000 - 0.0026" (0.001 - 0.067 mm)
0.0039" (0.1 mm)
Camshaft Carrier Bolts:

89 in-lbs (10 Nm)
3.36
Cylinder Head Removal Cylinder Head Warp Inspection
Thoroughly clean cylinder head surface to remove all
NOTE: The cylinder head can be serviced with the traces of gasket material and carbon.
engine installed in the chassis.
1. Remove the two outer M6 bolts 1 that retain the

cylinder head 2 to the cylinder. CAUTION
Use care not to damage gasket sealing surface. All

gasket surfaces must be clean, dry and free of any oil
or grease upon assembly. Clean sealing surfaces with
rubbing alcohol or electrical contact cleaner. Do not 3
touch sealing surfaces of the new head gasket.
1. Lay a straight edge 1 across the surface of the

cylinder head at several different points and measure
warp by inserting a feeler gauge between the straight
edge and the cylinder head surface. If warp exceeds
the service limit, replace the cylinder head.
2. Loosen the six cylinder head bolts 3 evenly 1/8 turn

at a time until all are loose.
3. Remove and discard the cylinder head bolts.
4. Tap cylinder head lightly with a soft faced hammer
until loose.
5. Tap only in reinforced areas or on thick parts of the
cylinder head casting.
6. Remove the cylinder head and head gasket 4 .
NOTE: Once the cylinder head is removed,
nothing retains the cylinder to the engine. DO
NOT rotate the engine without using the Cylinder
Holding & Camshaft Timing Plate (PU-50563).
Refer to Cylinder / Piston Removal, page 3.56.
Cylinder Head Warp Limit:
0.0039 (0.1 mm)
3.37
Cylinder Head Disassembly 2. Compress the valve spring by hand using valve
spring compressor adapter (PV-43513-A).
WARNING
Wear eye protection during cylinder head disassembly

and reassembly or when working with the valve springs.
NOTE: Keep mated parts together and in order with

respect to their location in the cylinder head for
assembly purposes. It is important to install cylinder
head components back in the same location. Mark
each component or place them in an organized rack
as you remove them.
1. Remove the valve tappet 1 from the cylinder head.

Note the tappet size 2 engraved on the underside of
the bucket.
3. Push down on spring and remove split keepers 3 .
4. Slowly release valve spring pressure and remove the

compressor adapter.
5. Remove the valve retainer 4 , valve spring 5 , valve
stem seal 6 and valve spring seat 7 . Discard the
valve seal.
NOTE: Replace valve seals whenever cylinder
head is disassembled. Hardened, cracked or
worn seals will cause excessive oil consumption.
6. Lift up the cylinder head and push the valve 8 out,

keeping it in order for reassembly in the same valve
guide.
7. Repeat the previous steps to remove the remaining
valves.
8. Clean the combustion chamber and head gasket
surface.
9. Check the condition of each valve spring. Replace if
wear or cracking is present on the spring.
3.38
Valve Inspection 5. Measure diameter of valve stem with a micrometer in
1. Remove all carbon from valves with a soft wire wheel three places, then rotate 90 and measure again
or brush. (take six measurements total). Compare to
specifications.
2. Check valve face for runout, pitting, and burnt spots.
To check for bent valve stems, mount valve in a drill
or use V blocks and a dial indicator.
3. Check the end of the valve stem for flaring, pitting,

wear or damage.
Valve Stem Diameter:
Intake:0.2155 - 0.2161" (5.475 - 5.490 mm)
Exhaust: 0.2147 - 0.2153" (5.455 - 5.470 mm)
6. Measure valve guide inside diameter at the top,

middle and end of the guide using a small hole
gauge and a micrometer. Measure in two directions.
4. Inspect split keeper groove for wear or flaring in the

keeper seat area.
NOTE: The valves can be re-faced or end
ground, if necessary. They must be replaced if
extensively worn, burnt, bent or damaged.
Valve Guide I.D.:

0.2165 - 0.2171" (5.500 - 5.515 mm)
3.39
7. Be sure to measure each guide and valve Valve Sealing Test
combination individually.
1. Clean and dry the combustion chamber area 1 .
NOTE: The valve guides cannot be replaced. 2. Pour a small amount of clean solvent into each
intake port 2 and check for leakage around the
valves. The valve seats should hold fluid with no
Combustion Chamber Cleaning seepage.
WARNING
Wear eye protection during combustion chamber

cleaning.
1. Clean all accumulated carbon deposits from

combustion chambers and valve seat area 1 .
3. Repeat for exhaust valves by pouring fluid into each

exhaust port 3 .
NOTE: Carbon Clean Fuel Treatment (2871326)

can be used to help remove carbon deposits.
Do not use a metal scraper, a coarse wire brush
or abrasive cleaners to clean the cylinder head.
Damage may result.
2. Visually inspect cylinder head gasket surface and

combustion chamber for cracks or damage. Pay
close attention to areas around spark plug and valve
seats.
3.40
Valve Seat Reconditioning 4. Inspect the cut area of the seat:
Valve seat reconditioning should be performed by a * If the contact area is less than 75% of the
technician proficient in cylinder head reconditioning circumference of the seat, rotate the pilot 180 and
techniques. Reconditioning techniques vary, so follow make another light cut.
the instructions provided by the valve reconditioning
equipment manufacturer. Do not grind seats more than * If the cutter now contacts the uncut portion of the
necessary to provide proper seat surface, width, and seat, check the pilot. Look for burrs, nicks, or runout.
contact point on valve face. If the pilot is bent it must be replaced.
* If the contact area of the cutter is in the same place,
the valve guide is distorted from improper
WARNING installation. 3
* If the contact area of the initial cut is greater than
Wear eye protection or a face shield during cylinder 75%, continue to cut the seat until all pits are
head disassembly and reassembly. removed and a new seat surface is evident.
NOTE: Remove only the amount of material
Valve Seat Inspection necessary to repair the seat surface.
Inspect valve seat in cylinder head for pitting, burnt 5. To check contact area of the seat on the valve face,
spots, roughness, and uneven surface. If any of the apply a thin coating of Prussian Blue paste to the
above conditions exist, the valve seat must be valve seat. If using an interference angle (46) apply
reconditioned. If the valve seat is cracked the cylinder black permanent marker to the entire valve face 1 .
head must be replaced.
Valve seat width and point of contact on the valve face is
very important for proper sealing. The valve must contact
the valve seat over the entire circumference of the seat,
and the seat must be the proper width all the way
around. If seat is uneven, compression leakage will
result. If seat is too wide, seat pressure is reduced,
causing carbon accumulation and possible compression
loss. If seat is too narrow, heat transfer from valve to seat
is reduced. The valve may overheat and warp, resulting
in burnt valves.
6. Insert valve into guide and tap valve lightly into place
a few times.
Renewing Valve Seats

1. Install pilot into valve guide.
2. Apply cutting oil to valve seat and cutter.
3. Place 46 cutter on the pilot and make a light cut.
3.41
7. Remove valve and check where the Prussian Blue Intake Seat Cutter Diameter: 1.567 (39.80 mm)
indicates seat contact on the valve face. The valve
seat should contact the middle of the valve face or
slightly above, and must be the proper width.
* If the indicated seat contact is at the top edge of the
valve face and contacts the margin area 2 it is too
high on the valve face. Use the 30 cutter to lower
the valve seat.
* If too low, use the 60 cutter to raise the seat. When
contact area is centered on the valve face, measure
seat width.
* If the seat is too wide or uneven, use both top and
bottom cutters to narrow the seat.
* If the seat is too narrow, widen using the 45 cutter
and re-check contact point on the valve face and
seat width after each cut.
NOTE: When using an interference angle, the
seat contact point on the valve will be very
narrow, and is a normal condition. Look for an
even and continuous contact point all the way
around the valve face 3 . Exhaust Seat Cutter Diameter: 1.364 (34.65 mm)
Valve Seat Width:

Intake: 0.0393 0.0039" (1.0 0.10 mm)
Exhaust: 0.0590 0.0039" (1.5 0.10 mm)

3.42
8. Clean all filings from the area with hot soapy water.
Rinse and dry with compressed air.
9. Lubricate valve guides with clean engine oil and
apply oil or water based lapping compound to the
face of the valve.
NOTE: Lapping is not required if an interference
angle reconditioning method is used.
10. Insert the valve into its respective guide and lap
using a lapping tool or a section of fuel line
connected to the valve stem. 3
11. Rotate the valve rapidly back and forth until the cut
sounds smooth. Lift the valve slightly off of the seat,
rotate 1/4 turn, and repeat the lapping process. Do
this four to five times until the valve is fully seated,
and repeat process for the other valve(s).
12. Thoroughly clean cylinder head and valves.
3.43
ENGINE DISASSEMBLY / INSPECTION - LOWER END
Stator Cover Removal / Inspection 2. Carefully pry the stator cover off the engine using the
two pry areas as shown.
NOTE: The stator cover can be removed with the
engine installed in the chassis.
1. Remove the thirteen screws retaining the stator

cover.
CAUTION
The flywheel contains powerful magnets. Use caution
when removing and installing the stator cover. DO NOT
place fingers between cover and crankcase at any time
during the removal / installation process or injury could
result.
3. Inspect the condition of the stator windings 1 and

output wires 2 . If replacement is required, refer to
Chapter 10.
3.44
4. Inspect the ball bearing 3 that supports the starter 3. Remove the water pump assembly from the engine
motor shaft. by using a twisting motion as you pull out on the
housing.
5. If bearing replacement is required, remove the
retaining ring and heat the stator cover around the
bearing evenly with a heat gun. Tap cover on a soft
work surface to remove the bearing from the
housing. A blind bearing puller can also be used.
Replace bearing if removed.
Water Pump Housing Removal

3
NOTE: The water pump housing can be serviced
with the engine installed in the chassis (see Chapter
3 Water Pump Removal, page 3.19).
1. Remove the coolant lines from the thermostat

housing, cylinder inlet and oil cooler. Leave them all
attached to the water pump housing.
4. If water pump service is required (impeller or
mechanical seal), refer to Water Pump Service,
page 3.21.
2. Remove the three long gold colored bolts retaining

the water pump housing to the engine 1 .
3.45
Flywheel Removal 6. Hold puller body and tighten the center bolt to
remove the flywheel.
NOTE: The flywheel can be serviced with the engine
installed in the chassis.
1. Remove the stator cover assembly.

2. Remove the starter torque limit gear as an assembly.
Starter One-Way Clutch Inspection

NOTE: The starter one-way clutch can be
serviced with the engine installed in the chassis.
7. Remove the stator cover and flywheel (see Chapter

3. Inspect gear teeth for damage. Inspect fit of shaft 3 Stator Cover Removal / Inspection, page
inside gear and replace gear assembly is clearance 3.44and Flywheel Removal, page 3.46).
is excessive. Inspect the shaft and bearing surfaces
in the crankcase and stator cover for excessive wear. 8. Place flywheel on a work bench with the one-way
clutch facing up. Grasp clutch gear and rotate
4. Using a commercially available strap wrench 1 , hold clockwise. It should turn smoothly without binding.
the flywheel and remove the flywheel retaining bolt 2
. 9. Rotate one-way gear counterclockwise 5 . The gear
should immediately lock in position and not slip.
10. Inspect the one-way gear bushing 4 for wear or
galling. If service is required, see chapter 3 Starter
One-Way Clutch Disassembly, page 3.47.
5. Fully install Flywheel Puller (PA-49316) 3 on the

threads of the flywheel (left hand thread - turn
flywheel puller counterclockwise to install).
3.46
Starter One-Way Clutch Disassembly 4. Inspect drive surface of starter gear 3 and bushing
4 for wear, damage or uneven surface. If any starter
1. Lift up to remove starter one-way gear.
one-way clutch component is worn or damaged,
replace the clutch and starter gear as an assembly.
2. Remove the three one-way clutch retaining screws.
3. Remove the one-way clutch and inspect both sides

of drive rollers 1 . Inspect the roller contact surface 2
inside the hub for wear, damage or uneven surface.
3.47
Crankcase Disassembly / Inspection 5. Rotate engine to access the crankcase sump cover.
1. Remove the oil cooler 1 from the crankcase. 6. Remove the thirteen M6 5 and three M8 bolts 6
retaining the sump cover 4 to the crankcase.
2. Remove the crankcase drain plug 2 . Drain any oil

remaining in the engine. 7. Remove the sump cover 7 from the crankcase.
3. Remove the oil filter. 8. Remove and clean oil pump pick-up 8 .
4. Install the Cylinder Holding & Camshaft Timing Plate 9. Remove the three bolts 9 that retain the oil pump 10
(PU-50563) 3 onto the cylinder. The cylinder holding to the crankcase.

tool retains the cylinder and pistons when the engine
is rotated.
3.48
10. Use one of the oil pump retaining bolts or a pen 12. Visually inspect the oil pump and drive sprocket 12
magnet to extract the dowel pins 11 from the oil for wear or damage. Replace oil pump drive chain
pump. Doing so allows for oil pump removal without and sprocket if worn or damaged. If any part of the
having to remove the pump drive sprocket. oil pump is damaged, the entire assembly must be
replaced. Replace the oil pump seal 13 during
crankcase assembly.
NOTE: If unable to extract the dowel pins from

the oil pump, the oil pump sprocket must be
removed. Access the sprocket bolt by removing NOTE: Oil pump assembly is non-serviceable
the case plug.
13. Rotate the engine so the cylinder is facing up.
11. Lift the oil pump drive chain and remove the oil
pump. 14. Remove the eleven M6 14 and two M8 15 upper
crankcase bolts.
15. Rotate the engine so the cylinder is facing down.
3.49
16. Remove the eight M10 17 , two M8 18 and one M6 16 Balance Shaft Removal / Inspection
lower crankcase bolts. Discard the eight M10 bolts. 1. Perform Crankcase Disassembly / Inspection, page
3.48 procedure.
2. Note timing marks on balance shaft and crankshaft
drive gears. Shafts must be properly timed upon
assembly.
17. Tap on the lower crankcase in reinforced areas with

a soft faced hammer to loosen. Carefully lift up and
remove the lower crankcase half.
3. Carefully rotate the balance shaft 2 and remove it

from the crankcase.
4. Inspect the balance shaft gear teeth for damage.
3.50
5. Measure each bearing journal in two locations, 90 Crankshaft Removal / Inspection
degrees apart. Replace balance shaft if either journal 1. Perform Crankcase Disassembly / Inspection, page
is worn below the service limit specification. If worn 3.48 procedure.
past the service limit, replace the balance shaft
assembly. 2. Perform Balance Shaft Removal / Inspection, page
3.50 procedure.
3. For ease of assembly, mark each connecting rod and
end cap.
4. Loosen, remove and discard the four connecting rod
bolts 1 . Remove the end caps from the crankshaft.
3
Balance Shaft Diameter (MAG & PTO)

1.4939 - 1.4946" (37.946 - 37.962 mm)
5. Carefully lift the crankshaft 2 out of the crankcase.
3.51
6. Remove the cam chain 3 , oil pump drive chain 5 9. Support crankshaft on V-blocks or on-centers in a
and PTO main seal 4 from the crankshaft. crankshaft stand or lathe. Measure crankshaft run-
out and replace if run-out exceeds maximum listed
below.
7. Inspect the crankshaft gear 7 and auxiliary sprocket

6 for broken or worn teeth.
Crankshaft Maximum Runout:

Less than 0.001 (0.025 mm)
10. Visually inspect surface of crankshaft main and

connecting rod journals. Replace crankshaft if any
journal is scratched or pitted.
8. If the crankshaft gear or sprocket is damaged, the

crankshaft assembly must be replaced.
3.52
11. Measure each main journal and connecting rod 13. Use the table below to see if the crankshaft bearing
journal in two locations, 90 degrees apart. Replace journals are within specification. If worn past the
crankshaft if any journal is worn below the service service limit, replace the crankshaft assembly.
limit specification.
CRANKSHAFT BEARING JOURNAL
DIAMETERS
B
1.6140 - 1.6143"
Standard (40.996 - 41.004
Main mm)
Bearing
1.6129" (40.970
3
Service Limit mm)
1.6118 - 1.6122"
Standard (40.942 - 40.950
Conn Rod mm)
Bearing
1.6104" (40.906
Service Limit mm)
G
8 MAG End 12Journal 4 (Rod
Bearing) 1.6137 - 1.6140"
Standard (40.988 - 40.995
9 Journal 1 (Main 13 Journal 5 (Main Main mm)
Bearing) Bearing) Bearing
1.6129" (40.970
10Journal 2 (Rod 14Journal 6 (Main Service Limit mm)
Bearing) Bearing)
1.6115 - 1.6118"
11Journal 3 (Main 15 PTO End Standard (40.934 - 40.941
Bearing) Conn Rod mm)
Bearing
12. Refer to the six letters stamped onto the PTO end of 1.6104" (40.906
Service Limit mm)
the crankshaft.
Y
1.6134 - 1.6137"
Standard (40.980 - 40.987
Main mm)
Bearing
1.6129" (40.970
Service Limit mm)
1.6112 - 1.6115"
Standard (40.926 - 40.933
Conn Rod mm)
Bearing
1.6104" (40.906
Service Limit mm)
14. Whether installing a new crankshaft or re-installing

the original, refer to the bearing selection chart
provided in the Crankshaft Main Bearing Selection,
page 3.63 and Connecting Rod Bearing Selection,
page 3.63 procedures.
3.53
Crankcase Inspection 5. Remove and discard the plain bearings located in
1. Remove the oil drain diverter 1 from the upper the upper crankcase 2 , lower crankcase 3 and
crankcase. connecting rods 4 . Replace the crankcase assembly
if a bearing bore is galled or if bearing inserts have
rotated in the case. Refer to bearing selection
procedures upon assembly.
2. Remove all traces of crankcase sealer from the

crankcase mating surfaces. Inspect the surfaces
closely for nicks, burrs or damage.
3. Be sure alignment pins are in place where used.
4. Be sure oil passages are clean and free of any
cleaning solvent (see Chapter 3 Engine Oil Flow
Chart, page 3.5).
NOTE: Always replace plain bearings when the

crankcase or connecting rods have been
disassembled. Refer to Bearing Selection
Identification Letters and Numbers, page 3.62.
3.54
Cylinder Inspection 3. Inspect cylinder for taper and out of round with a dial
bore gauge. Measure in two different directions (front
1. Lay a straight edge 1 across the top surface of the
to back and side to side), on three levels (0.59 in.
cylinder at several different points and measure warp
down from top, the middle, and 1.54 in. up from
by inserting a feeler gauge between the straight
bottom). Record measurements. If cylinder is
edge and the cylinder surface. If warp exceeds the
tapered or out of round beyond 0.001", the cylinder
service limit, replace the cylinder.
must be replaced.
Cylinder Warp Limit:

0.002 (0.05 mm)
2. Inspect cylinder for wear, scratches, or damage.

NOTE: DO NOT hone the cylinders or attempt to
repair a damaged cylinder by honing.
Cylinder Taper:
0.001 (0.025 mm)
Cylinder Out of Round:

0.001 (0.025 mm)
Standard Bore Size:

3.6614 0.0003" (93 mm 0.008 mm)
3.55
Cylinder / Piston Removal 5. Remove the piston / connecting rod assemblies from
the cylinder.
CAUTION
Pistons must be removed from the cylinders with the

connecting rods attached.
DO NOT attempt to service the cylinder or pistons
without disassembling the crankcase. Although you can
remove the cylinder and pistons without disassembly,
you will not be able to reassemble the engine because
of the unique cylinder skirt and crankcase design.
1. Perform ENGINE DISASSEMBLY / INSPECTION -

TOP END, page 3.33 and the ENGINE
DISASSEMBLY / INSPECTION - LOWER END,
page 3.44 procedures.
3. Remove the Cylinder Holding & Camshaft Timing NOTE: If the pistons are to be reused, mark the
Plate (PU-50563) 1 from the cylinder. pistons so they are reassembled in the same
cylinder bore and direction from which they were
removed (MAG / PTO).
4. Carefully lift the cylinder and pistons from the upper

crankcase.
3.56
Piston Disassembly / Inspection 3. Measure piston pin bore I. D. in two directions (90
apart). Replace piston and piston pin if out of
NOTE: New pistons are directional (intake vs. specification.
exhaust), but can be placed in either cylinder.
1. Note location of the piston circlip gap 1 at the top

(12:00 position) or bottom (6:00 position).
2. Remove piston circlip and push piston pin out of

Piston Pin Bore I.D.:
piston. If necessary, heat the crown of the piston
0.7877 - 0.7881" (20.009 - 20.018 mm)
slightly with a heat gun if pin cannot be removed by
Service Limit:0.7893" (20.05 mm)
hand. Discard circlips.
4. Measure piston pin O.D. in two directions (90 apart)
at three locations on the length. Replace piston and
piston pin if out of specification.
CAUTION
DO NOT apply heat to piston rings or a loss of radial

tension could result.
Piston Pin O.D.:

0.7873 - 0.7875" (20.000 - 20.005 mm)
3.57
Piston Ring Removal Piston Ring to Groove Clearance Inspection
1. Carefully remove top compression ring 1 by hand or 1. Measure piston ring to groove clearance 1 by
using a ring removal pliers. placing the ring in the ring land and measuring with a
thickness (feeler) gauge. Replace piston and rings if
ring-to-groove clearance exceeds service limits.
CAUTION
DO NOT expand the ring more than necessary to

remove it from the piston or the ring may break or lose
radial tension.
Piston ring pliers: Carefully expand ring and lift it

off the piston.
By hand: Placing both thumbs on the ring ends,
spread the ring open and push up on opposite
side. Do not scratch ring lands.
Piston Ring to Groove Clearance:

Top / Second Ring:
0.0007 - 0.0023" (0.020 - 0.060 mm)
2. Repeat procedure for second compression ring 2 .

3. The oil control ring 3 is a three piece design
consisting of a top and bottom steel rail and a center
expander section. Remove top rail first, then bottom
rail, then the expander.
3.58
Piston Ring Installed Gap Piston-to-Cylinder Clearance
1. Place each piston ring 1 inside the cylinder . Use
2
Measure piston outside diameter at a point 10 mm 1 up
the piston to push the ring squarely into cylinder, as from the bottom of the piston, at a right angle to piston
shown below. pin bore.
2. Measure installed gap with a feeler gauge 3 at both Subtract measurement from maximum measurement
the top and bottom of the cylinder. obtained in Step 4 of Cylinder Inspection, page
3.55Cylinder Inspection procedure.
NOTE: A difference between top and bottom end
gap measurements is a general indication of
cylinder taper (wear). The cylinder should be
measured for taper and out of round. 3
3. If the installed gap measurement exceeds the Piston O.D. (Standard):

service limit, replace the rings. 3.6597 0.0003" (92.959 0.008 mm)
Piston Ring Installed Gap:

Top Ring: 0.010 - 0.014" (0.25 - 0.35 mm) Piston to Cylinder Clearance:
Service Limit: 1.6118 - 1.6122" (40.942 - 40.950 mm) 0.0009 - 0.0019" (0.025 - 0.050 mm)
Second Ring: 1.6118 - 1.6122" (40.942 - 40.950 mm)

Oil Control Rails: 0.008 - 0.028" (0.20 - 0.70 mm)

NOTE: Always check piston ring installed gap

when installing new rings and/or a new cylinder.
3.59
Connecting Rod Inspection 4. Measure small end I. D. in two directions as shown.
1. The 5 digit numbers stamped onto the intake side of Record measurements and compare to
the connecting rod are serial numbers used to match specifications. Replace connecting rod if worn past
the rod stem with the rod cap. the service limit specification.
2. The number and letter stamped onto the exhaust Connecting Rod Small End I.D.:
side of the connecting rod represent the bore 0.7879 - 0.7885" (20.015 - 20.030 mm)
diameter and weight grading of the connecting rod. Service Limit: 0.7897" (20.06 mm)
5. Install matching rod cap on connecting rod (without

bearings) and install the bolts.
6. Tighten bolts snug, then torque to 13 ft-lbs (18 Nm).
7. Using a dial bore gauge, measure big end I.D. in two
directions shown. Record measurements and
compare to specifications.
3. Inspect the small end and big end of connecting rod

(and matching rod cap) for damage, galling of
surface or pitting.
3.60
8. Refer to the number stamped onto the exhaust side
of the connecting rod. This number represents the
bore diameter.
9. The table below lists the big end bore diameter

specifications.
Bearing Selection Chart Rod Bearings
CONNECTING ROD BIG END BORE
DIAMETERS
1 2 3
1.7318 - 1.7321 - 1.7323 -
1.7321" 1.7323" 1.7326"
(43.989 - (43.996 - (44.003 -
43.996 mm) 44.003 mm) 44.010 mm)
10. Whether using new connecting rods or re-installing

the original ones, refer to the bearing selection chart
provided in the Connecting Rod Bearing Selection,
page 3.63 procedure.
3.61
ENGINE ASSEMBLY - LOWER END
Bearing Selection Identification Letters and
Numbers
1 Connecting Rod Bearing 2 Crankcase Bearing Identification 3 Crankshaft Bearing Identification
Identification Number ( one number) Number (six numbers) Letters (six letters)
3.62
Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Crankshaft Main Bearing Selection
In order to select the proper bearing for the connecting In order to select the proper main bearings for the
rods, you must reference the number on each crankshaft, you must reference the six numbers on the
connecting rod 7 & 8 and match that up with the rod crankcase 8 and match that up with the main journal
journal letters on the crankshaft 9 . letters on the crankshaft 7 .
In this example, you would use the number 2 as the In this example, you would use the number 2 as the
connecting rod code. You would use letters G and G as crankcase codes (case journals 1, 2, 3, 4). You would
the crankshaft codes (crank journals 2 and 4). Based off use letters G, Y, G, Y as the crankshaft codes (crank
the bearing selection chart, you would use a Green journals 1, 3, 5 and 6). Based off the bearing selection
bearing for each connecting rod chart, you would use:
Bearing Selection Chart Rod Green bearing for Main #1

Yellow bearing for Main #2
Crankshaft
Green bearing for Main #3
Code B G Y
Yellow bearing for Main #4
1 Blue Blue Green
Rod Bearing Selection Chart Main Bearings
2 Blue Green Yellow
3 Green Yellow Yellow Crankshaft
Code B G Y
1 Blue Blue Green
Case
2 Blue Green Yellow
3 Green Yellow Yellow
3.63
Upper Crankcase Preparation Piston Ring Installation
NOTE: Always replace plain bearings when the NOTE: Apply clean engine oil to all ring surfaces
crankcase or connecting rods have been and ring lands upon installation. Always check
disassembled. Refer to bearing selection piston ring installed gap before rings are installed on
procedures. piston (see Chapter 3 Piston Ring Installed Gap,
page 3.59). Clean accumulated carbon from piston
1. Remove all traces of crankcase sealer from the ring grooves and oil ring lube holes if piston has
crankcase mating surfaces. Inspect the surfaces been in service.
2. Clean bolt hole threads to remove any oil or
crankcase sealant.
3. Inspect crankcase bearing bores. Replace the
crankcase assembly if a bearing bore is galled or if
bearing inserts have rotated in the case.
5. Refer to Engine Oil Flow Chart, page 3.5 at the
beginning of this chapter and trace the oil paths
through the crankcase and cylinder.
6. Flush all oil passages with solvent and then warm
soapy water. Rinse with clear, warm water and dry
with compressed air.
7. Be sure passages are clean and dry before
assembling the upper crankcase.
1 Top Ring 5 Upper Rail
2 Marking Up 6 Spring Expander
3 Marking Up 7 Lower Rail
4 Second Ring
1. Place oil control ring expander in oil ring groove.

Rotate expander in groove until butt ends are on
PTO side of piston (see illustration below).
NOTE: Ends must butt squarely together and
must not overlap.
2. Install lower rail with end gap positioned on the

intake side of piston.
3.64
3. Install upper rail with end gap positioned on the 5. Install top ring with mark facing top of piston. Rotate
exhaust side of piston. ring to position the end gap toward exhaust side of
piston as shown below.
6. Be sure top and second rings rotate freely in their

grooves and do not bind when compressed by hand.
4. Install second ring with marking facing top of piston.

Rotate ring to position the end gap toward intake
side of piston as shown below.
3.65
Piston / Connecting Rod Assembly 3. Place piston 1 on connecting rod 2 . Push piston pin
1. Lubricate connecting rod small end, piston pin bore
3 through rod and piston until it seats against the
and piston pin with engine oil. installed circlip.
CAUTION
Do not re-use circlips. Circlips become deformed during
the removal process.
Do not compress the new clip more than necessary to
prevent loss of radial tension. Severe engine damage
may result if circlips are re-used or deformed during
installation.
2. Install a new circlip on one side of piston with gap at

the top (12:00 position) or bottom (6:00 position).
NOTE: Do not tap on pin or cause any sideways

force to connecting rod. Warm piston crown with
a heat gun if pin cannot be installed by hand, or
use a piston pin installation tool.
CAUTION
DO NOT apply heat to piston rings or a loss of radial

tension could result.
4. Install the remaining circlip 4 with gap at the top

NOTE: Never re-use a piston pin circlip. (12:00 position) or bottom (6:00 position). Push the
If reinstalling the original connecting rods, piston pin in both directions to make sure the clips
orientate the rods the same as when removed. If are properly seated in the groove.
new connecting rods are being installed, they
can be installed either way (there is no piston pin
offset in the rod), however it is recommended
they be installed with rods facing the same
direction.
3.66
Cylinder / Piston Installation 4. Carefully compress the piston rings with your fingers
and install the piston / connecting rod assemblies
into the cylinder from the bottom side.
CAUTION
Pistons must be installed into the cylinders with the

connecting rods attached.
DO NOT attempt to service the cylinder or pistons
without disassembling the crankcase. Although you can
remove the cylinder and pistons without disassembly,
you will not be able to reassemble the engine because
of the unique cylinder skirt and crankcase design. 3
NOTE: If the pistons are being reused, reassemble

in the same cylinder bore and direction from which
they were removed (MAG / PTO).
New pistons are directional (intake vs. exhaust), but
can be placed in either cylinder.
1. Apply clean engine oil to each piston assembly, NOTE: Use a slight front to back rocking motion
cylinder bore and bottom tapered portion of each until all rings are captive in cylinder and past the
cylinder sleeve. cylinder sleeve opening 1 .
2. Verify that all ring end gaps are correctly located on 5. Rotate the engine so the crankcase to cylinder
each piston (see Chapter 3 Piston Ring mounting surface is facing up.
Installation, page 3.64).
6. Clean base gasket sealing surface on cylinder and
3. Note the piston orientation mark (arrow) located on crankcase to remove all oil and grease.
top of the piston. Arrow should point toward the
exhaust side. NOTE: Base gasket and surfaces must be DRY
and oil free. Use care upon assembly to keep oil
away.
7. Reinstall dowel pins in crankcase if previously

removed.
8. Install a new cylinder base gasket.
9. Verify piston orientation (arrow pointing toward
exhaust) one last time prior to installation.
NOTE: Orientation arrow is also located on the

bottom side of piston as an additional reference.
3.67
10. Carefully place the cylinder and pistons into the Crankshaft Installation
upper crankcase.
NOTE: Whether installing a new crankshaft or re-
installing the original, refer to the bearing selection
charts (see Chapter 3 Crankshaft Main Bearing
Selection, page 3.63 and Connecting Rod Bearing
Selection, page 3.63 ).

2. Clean the bearing bore surfaces of upper crankcase
(main bearings), connecting rods and connecting rod
caps.
3. Align tab of new main bearing 1 with the slot in main
bearing bore of crankcase. Press bearing insert
firmly into place. Repeat for all main bearings.
4. Align tab of new connecting rod bearings 2 with the
slot in the connecting rod stem and connecting rod
11. Install the Cylinder Holding & Camshaft Timing Plate end cap. Press bearing insert firmly into place.
2 (PU-50563) onto the cylinder. The cylinder holding Repeat for the other connecting rod.
tool retains the cylinder and pistons when the engine
is rotated.
5. Install oil drain diverter 3 into the upper crankcase.
3.68
6. Apply Polaris PS-4 engine oil to each rod bearing 10. Adjust the PTO crankshaft seal so it rests properly in
journal 4 and main bearing journal 5 of crankshaft. the upper crankcase.
11. Clean bolt hole threads in connecting rod to remove
all oil.
12. Install matching rod cap on connecting rod with 5
digit serial number stampings aligned.
7. Loop cam chain 6 and oil pump drive chain 8 over

crankshaft sprockets.
8. Apply Polaris PS-4 engine oil to the new crankshaft
oil seal 7 and install the seal on the PTO end of the
crankshaft.
13. Install new bolts 11 and tighten evenly until snug.
9. Carefully lower the crankshaft into upper crankcase.

Guide connecting rods onto the rod journals of
crankshaft as necessary.
14. Torque connecting rod bolts to specification.
Connecting Rod Bolts:

Step 3: Tighten addn 105
3.69
Balance Shaft Installation 5. Install the balance shaft, placing the tooth with the
1. Clean the upper crankcase balance shaft bearing alignment dot 5 in-line with the dot 4 on the
bore surfaces. crankshaft gear (see reference images below).
2. Align tab of new balance shaft bearings 1 with the

slot in each bearing bore of crankcase. Press
bearing insert firmly into place.
Lower Crankcase Preparation

NOTE: Always replace plain bearings when the
3. Rotate the crankshaft until the alignment dot 3 on
crankcase or connecting rods have been
the crankshaft MAG end gear is visible.
disassembled. Refer to bearing selection
4. Apply Polaris PS-4 engine oil to both balance shaft procedures.
journals 2 .
1. Remove all traces of crankcase sealant from the
crankcase mating surfaces. Inspect the surfaces
2. Clean bolt hole threads to remove any oil or
crankcase sealant.
3. Inspect crankcase bearing bores. Replace the
crankcase assembly if a bearing bore is galled or if
bearing inserts have rotated in the case.
5. Refer to Engine Oil Flow Chart, page 3.5 at the
beginning of this chapter and trace the oil paths
through the crankcase and cylinder.
6. Flush all oil passages with solvent and then warm
soapy water. Rinse with clear, warm water and dry
with compressed air.
7. Be sure passages are clean and dry before
assembling the crankcase.
3.70
Crankcase Assembly 6. Carefully place lower crankcase on upper case,
1. Check to be sure the PTO crankshaft seal is resting making sure the oil pump drive chain is fed through
properly in the upper crankcase. the lower crankcase.
2. Align tab of new main bearings 1 and new balance

shaft bearings 2 with the slot in each bearing bore of
the lower crankcase. Press bearing inserts firmly into
place.
7. Tap lower crankcase with a rubber hammer to seat

the case halves together.
8. Inspect crankcase mating surfaces to be sure they
are joined properly. Investigate the cause of any
gaps.
3. Apply Polaris PS-4 engine oil to the new bearings
installed in the lower crankcase half. 9. Install the eight M10 5 , two M8 7 and one M6 6
lower crankcase bolts. Tighten all bolts lightly by
4. Clean crankcase mating surfaces to remove any oil. hand.
5. Apply a thin, continuous film of Crankcase Sealant
(PN 2871557) to upper crankcase mating surface 3
as shown. Do not allow sealant to dry before
assembly.
NOTE: Install new M10 lower crankcase bolts.
NOTE: DO NOT block oil passages 4 with

crankcase sealant.
3.71
10. Torque lower crankcase bolts in sequence to 13. Torque the upper crankcase bolts in sequence to
specification. Repeat sequence to verify final torque. specification (start with #12). Repeat the sequence
to verify final torque.
Lower Crankcase Bolts:

M10 Bolts: Upper Crankcase Bolts:
Step 1: 9 ft-lb (12 Nm) M8 Bolts: 26 ft-lb (35 Nm)
Step 2: 21 ft-lb (28 Nm) M6 Bolts: 9 ft-lb (12 Nm)
Step 3: Tighten addn 90
M8 Bolts: 26 ft-lb (35 Nm)
M6 Bolts: 9 ft-lb (12 Nm) 15. Install a new seal on the oil pump.
16. Lift the oil pump drive chain and install the oil pump.
12. Install the eleven M6 9 and two M8 8 upper
crankcase bolts. Tighten all bolts lightly by hand.
3.72
17. Install dowel pins 10 into oil pump mounting holes. 21. Apply a thin, continuous film of Crankcase Sealant
(PN 2871557) to sump cover mating surface 14 as
shown. Do not allow sealant to dry before assembly.
18. Install the three bolts 13 that retain oil pump 12 to the
crankcase. Torque mounting bolts to specification.
22. Install the oil sump cover 15 onto the crankcase.
23. Install the thirteen M6 16 and three M8 bolts that

retain the oil sump cover 17 to the crankcase.
Oil Pump Mounting Bolts:

7 ft-lbs (10 Nm)
19. Reinstall oil pump pick-up 11 . Torque mounting

screws to specification.
Oil Pump Pick-Up Retaining Screws:

7 ft-lb (10 Nm)
20. Clean the gasket sealing surfaces on oil sump cover

and crankcase to remove old gasket material and
any oil.
NOTE: Gasket surfaces must be DRY and oil
free. Use care upon assembly to keep oil away.
3.73
24. Torque the oil sump cover bolts in sequence to 26. Reinstall the oil cooler 18 , if previously removed. Use
specification. Repeat the sequence to verify final new O-rings 19 upon installation. Torque fasteners to
torque. specification
Oil Sump Cover Bolts: Oil Cooler bolts:

7 ft-lbs (10 Nm)
M8 Bolts:
26 ft-lb (35 Nm) 27. Proceed to Flywheel Installation, page 3.76 and
then Cylinder Head Installation, page 3.78.
M6 Bolts:
106 in-lb (12 Nm)
25. Reinstall the crankcase drain plug if previously

removed. Torque drain plug to specification.
Crankcase Drain Plug:

12 ft-lbs (16 Nm)
3.74
Starter One-Way Clutch Assembly 4. Reassemble starter one-way clutch and gear using
1. Install one-way clutch in clutch hub with flange of the following illustration.
clutch 1 engaged in recess.
1 Torque Limit Gear 5 Flywheel

2. Clean screw threads in flywheel to remove all oil or
Pin
grease.
3. Place one-way clutch on flywheel and install the
2 Starter Gear 6Screws 9 ft-lb (12
three screws. Torque screws to specification. Nm)
3 One Way Clutch 7 Torque Limit Gear
Asm. Asm.
4Bolt 133 ft-lbs (180
Nm)
One-Way Clutch Retaining Screws:
9 ft-lb (12 Nm) 5. If starter gear was replaced, inspect the torque limit
gear.
6. After assembly, be sure the starter gear rotates in the
clockwise direction only.
3.75
Flywheel Installation 7. Install the starter torque limit gear as an assembly.
1. If previously removed, reinstall the flywheel key.
2. Clean taper of crankshaft to remove all oil or grease.
3. Clean flywheel taper to remove all oil or grease.
4. Apply a drop of Loctite 641 (yellow) to the tapers
before assembly. Loctite 603 (green) can be used if
641 is not available.
5. Align flywheel key-way with key and install the
flywheel, seating it fully on taper.
6. Install flywheel retaining bolt. Using a commercially
available strap wrench 2 , hold flywheel and torque
the retaining bolt 1 to specification.
NOTE: If the Cylinder Holding & Camshaft
Timing Plate (PU-50563) is installed, remove it
before tightening the flywheel.
Stator Cover Installation
1. Apply gasket tack adhesive to help hold gasket in
place during assembly.
2. Install a new stator cover gasket over alignment pins.
CAUTION
The flywheel contains powerful magnets. Use caution
when removing and installing the stator cover. DO NOT
place fingers between cover and crankcase at any time
during the removal / installation process or injury could
result.
3. Install stator cover and thirteenscrews. Torque

screws in sequence to specification.
Flywheel Retaining Bolt:

133 ft-lbs (180 Nm)
Stator Cover Screws:

9 ft-lb (12 Nm)
3.76
ENGINE ASSEMBLY - TOP END
Cylinder Head Assembly 6. Install the valve spring with widely spaced coils 6 on
the top and tightly spaced coils 7 facing down
NOTE: Assemble the valves one at a time to toward the cylinder head.
maintain proper order.
WARNING
Wear eye protection during cylinder head disassembly

3
and reassembly or when working with the valve springs.
1. Apply engine oil to valve guides and seats.

2. Coat valve stem with Premium Starter Grease
(2871460).
3. Install the valve 1 in the cylinder head, through the
guide.
NOTE: Valve springs to be installed with paint

mark facing up 8 .
7. Place the valve retainer on the spring.

8. Compress the valve spring by hand using valve
spring compressor adapter (PV-43513-A). Compress
spring only enough to allow split keeper installation.
4. Dip the new valve seat/seal 2 in clean engine oil and

carefully install the valve seat/seal on the valve guide
with a rotating motion. Push firmly until seated in
retaining groove and square with the guide
NOTE: Valve seals should be installed AFTER
the valves are in the head to avoid valve seal
damage.
5. Dip the valve spring 3 and retainer 4 in clean

engine oil.
NOTE: To prevent damage to the valve seals, do
not compress the valve spring more than
necessary to install the keepers.
9. Install split keepers 5 with gap even on both sides.

10. Repeat this procedure for remaining valves.
3.77
11. Install the valve adjustment tappet 8 for each valve Cylinder Head Installation
in the order they were removed. 1. Rotate the engine so the cylinder is facing up.
2. Remove the Cylinder Holding & Camshaft Timing
Plate (PU-50563) 1 from the cylinder.
NOTE: Refer to Valve Clearance Adjustment,

page 3.84 procedure for proper tappet selection.
NOTE: If any valve train components were

NOTE: Once the cylinder head is removed,
replaced, refer to Valve Clearance Adjustment,
nothing retains the cylinder to the engine. DO
page 3.84 procedure prior to Camshaft
NOT rotate the engine without using the Cylinder
Installation / Timing, page 3.79 procedure.
Holding & Camshaft Timing Plate (PU-50563).
3. Prepare cylinder head gasket sealing surfaces by

cleaning thoroughly to remove all residue. The head
gasket must be installed clean and dry, free from oil
or grease.
NOTE: Do not touch sealing surfaces of gasket.
4. Guide cam chain 2 through a new head gasket 3

and install the gasket on the cylinder, locating it on
the alignment pins.
5. Carefully set the cylinder head 4 in place on

alignment pins.
6. Install new bolts and finger tighten the six cylinder
head bolts 5 evenly.
3.78
7. Install and finger tighten the two outer M6 bolts 6 Camshaft Installation / Timing
evenly.
NOTE: If any valve train components were replaced,
NOTE: Install new cylinder head bolts. refer to Valve Clearance Adjustment, page 3.84
procedure prior to Camshaft Installation / Timing,
8. Torque cylinder head bolts in sequence to page 3.79.
specification.
1. Rotate the engine until the flywheel Top Dead Center
(TDC) mark 1 is aligned or centered in the
Crankshaft Position Sensor (CPS) mounting hole 2 .
This places the PTO cylinder at TDC for camshaft
installation. 3
Cylinder Head Torque Procedure:

Torque in sequence
Step 1: 9 ft-lbs (12 Nm) NOTE: DO NOT use the V mark located on the
Step 2: 26 ft-lb (35 Nm) flywheel opposite of the I mark. Only the I
Step 3: Additional 180 mark should be used as a TDC reference.
Step 4: M6 bolts: 7 ft-lb (10 Nm)
2. Reference the intake and exhaust markings made
during disassembly. If installing new camshafts or if
camshafts were not marked, you can reference the
part number stamped on the end of the shafts.
Intake Camshaft - PN 1204784

Exhaust Camshaft - PN 1204786
3. Lubricate all camshaft lobes and bearing journal

surfaces with Polaris PS-4 engine oil prior to
installation.
3.79
4. Carefully install the camshafts into the cylinder head. 7. Install the Cylinder Holding & Camshaft Timing Plate
The PTO camshaft lobes 5 should face out as (PU-50563) into the end of camshafts as shown. Use
shown. a 13/16 open-end wrench to rotate camshafts
slightly if needed.
5. Carefully install the rear camshaft carriers onto the

camshafts. Carrier openings should face each other
8. Verify the TDC mark on the flywheel is still properly
when installed properly.
aligned (see Step 1).
6. Install the four bolts that retain each rear camshaft
9. Pull cam chain upward, making sure it is engaged
carrier 6 and tighten the bolts evenly until snug.
with the drive sprocket on the crankshaft.
10. While lifting the cam chain up, engage the cam
sprockets into the chain with the I and E marks
facing out.
11. Install the sprockets onto the camshafts and align
the sprocket marks with the valve cover gasket
surface (see Chapter 3 Camshaft Timing - Quick
Reference, page 3.83).
NOTE: Intake cam sprocket should have I
marks aligned with gasket surface and the
exhaust cam sprocket should have E marks
aligned with gasket surface.
Install the exhaust cam sprocket first (opposite
the cam chain tensioner) to ensure proper cam
timing.
3.80
12. Use new camshaft sprocket retaining bolts upon 13. Verify cam timing is correct. Flywheel TDC mark
assembly. Install the top bolt 8 in each camshaft should still be aligned (see Step 1) and cam sprocket
sprocket 7 . Do not torque the bolts at this time. markings should line up as shown.
NOTE: Use new sprocket retaining bolts upon

assembly.
3.81
14. If timing marks are not aligned, remove sprockets 20. Torque the camshaft carriers bolts in sequence to
and correct alignment. specification.
15. Remove the Cylinder Holding & Camshaft Timing
Plate (PU-50563) from the end of the camshafts.
16. Rotate the engine using the flywheel and install the
remaining bolt in each camshaft sprocket. Torque the
sprocket bolts to specification.
Camshaft Sprocket Bolts:

14 ft-lb (19 Nm)
17. Rotate the engine using the flywheel and torque the
remaining sprocket bolts to specification.
18. Install the front camshaft carrier 9 and two outer
retaining bolts.

7 ft-lb (10 Nm)
21. Apply Polaris PS-4 engine oil to the cam chain

tensioner bore prior to assembly. Use a new
tensioner sealing washer 12 .
22. Install the hydraulic cam chain tensioner 11 into the
cylinder and torque to specification.
19. Install the fixed cam chain guide 10 and two retaining
bolts.
Cam Chain Tensioner:

29 ft-lb (40 Nm)
23. Rotate crankshaft through two revolutions and verify

camshaft timing is correct.
3.82
Camshaft Timing - Quick Reference
1 Intake Cam 4 Align marks with surface

2 Exhaust Cam 5 CPS Mounting Hole
3 Align marks with surface 6 Align Flywheel Mark in Mounting Hole
Important
DO NOT use the V mark located on the flywheel opposite of the I mark. Only the I mark should be used as a TDC
reference
3.83
Valve Clearance Adjustment 5. Install the four bolts that retain each rear camshaft
carrier 4 & 5 and tighten the bolts evenly to
NOTE: Always inspect valve clearance prior to specification.
camshaft installation or final engine assembly.
1. Reference the camshaft intake and exhaust

markings made during disassembly. If installing new
camshafts or if camshafts were not marked, you can
reference the part number stamped on the end of the
shafts.
Intake Camshaft - PN 1204784

Exhaust Camshaft - PN 1204786
2. Lubricate the camshaft bearing journal surfaces with

Polaris PS-4 engine oil prior to installation.
3. Carefully install the camshafts into the cylinder head.
The PTO camshaft lobes 3 should face out as
shown.

7 ft-lb (10 Nm)
6. Rotate the camshaft until the cam lobes above the

valves you are inspecting are facing up 6 .
4. Carefully install the rear camshaft carriers onto the

camshafts. Carrier openings should face each other
when installed properly.
7. Measure the valve clearance 7 using a thickness

(feeler) gauge. Record the measurement if clearance
is out of specification.
3.84
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until all eight valves have been 11. Record the 3 digit number on the bottom of the
inspected. tappet. 8 .

0.006 0.002" (0.15 0.05 mm)
Exhaust Valve Clearance (cold):

0.008 0.002" (0.20 0.05 mm)
9. If any of the valve clearance measurements are out 12. Reference the valve clearance measurement
of specification, remove the camshaft carriers and recorded for that valve, along with the 3-digit tappet
camshafts and proceed with this procedure. number.
NOTE: If all valve clearance measurements are 13. Refer to the appropriate tappet selection matrix
within specification, remove the camshaft (Intake or Exhaust) on the following pages and select
carriers and proceed to Camshaft Installation / the proper tappet.
Timing, page 3.79.
14. Install the proper tappet.
10. Remove the valve tappet from a valve that was out of NOTE: Lubricate the outer portion of the valve
specification. tappet upon installation.
15. Repeat steps 10-14 until all necessary valves have

been adjusted.
16. Reinstall the camshafts and camshaft carriers and
tighten the bolts evenly to specification.

7 ft-lb (10 Nm)
17. Measure and confirm that valve clearance is now

within specification for each valve.
NOTE: Keep mated parts together and in order 18. If valve clearance is not within specification, repeat
with respect to their location in the cylinder head this procedure.
for assembly purposes. Mark each component or 19. If all valve clearance measurements are now within
place them in an organized rack as you remove specification, remove the camshaft carriers and
them. proceed to Camshaft Installation / Timing, page
3.79.
3.85
Intake Valve Lash - Tappet Selection Matrix
Tappet Thickness: Example 440 equals thickness of 4.40
mm. Part Number: 5138477-XXX (Xs represent 3 digits
on tappet)
.006 .002 (0.150 .05 mm)
Existing Valve Lash Tappet Marking (3 digits on tappet)

440 442 445 448 450 452 455 458 460 462 465 468 470 472 475 478 480 482 485 488 490 492 495 498 500 502 505 508 510 512 515 518 520 522 525
Correct Valve Lash Tappet Marking (3 digits on tappet)

0.000-0.024 428 430 432 435 438 440 442 445 448 450 452 455 458 460 462 465 468 470 472 475 478 480 482 485 488 490 492 495 498 500 502 505 508 510 512
0.025-0.049 430 432 435 438 440 442 445 448 450 452 455 458 460 462 465 468 470 472 475 478 480 482 485 488 490 492 495 498 500 502 505 508 510 512 515
0.050-0.074 432 435 438 440 442 445 448 450 452 455 458 460 462 465 468 470 472 475 478 480 482 485 488 490 492 495 498 500 502 505 508 510 512 515 518
0.075-0.099 435 438 440 442 445 448 450 452 455 458 460 462 465 468 470 472 475 478 480 482 485 488 490 492 495 498 500 502 505 508 510 512 515 518 520
Intake Valve Clearance Before Adjusting (mm)
0.100-0.200
(Standard)
0.201-0.225 448 450 452 455 458 460 462 465 468 470 472 475 478 480 482 485 488 490 492 495 498 500 502 505 508 510 512 515 518 520 522 525 528 530 532
0.226-0.250 450 452 455 458 460 462 465 468 470 472 475 478 480 482 485 488 490 492 495 498 500 502 505 508 510 512 515 518 520 522 525 528 530 532 535
0.251-0.275 452 455 458 460 462 465 468 470 472 475 478 480 482 485 488 490 492 495 498 500 502 505 508 510 512 515 518 520 522 525 528 530 532 535 538
0.276-0.300 455 458 460 462 465 468 470 472 475 478 480 482 485 488 490 492 495 498 500 502 505 508 510 512 515 518 520 522 525 528 530 532 535 538 540
0.301-0.325 458 460 462 465 468 470 472 475 478 480 482 485 488 490 492 495 498 500 502 505 508 510 512 515 518 520 522 525 528 530 532 535 538 540 542
0.326-0.350 460 462 465 468 470 472 475 478 480 482 485 488 490 492 495 498 500 502 505 508 510 512 515 518 520 522 525 528 530 532 535 538 540 542 545
0.351-0.375 462 465 468 470 472 475 478 480 482 485 488 490 492 495 498 500 502 505 508 510 512 515 518 520 522 525 528 530 532 535 538 540 542 545
0.376-0.400 465 468 470 472 475 478 480 482 485 488 490 492 495 498 500 502 505 508 510 512 515 518 520 522 525 528 530 532 535 538 540 542 545
0.401-0.425 468 470 472 475 478 480 482 485 488 490 492 495 498 500 502 505 508 510 512 515 518 520 522 525 528 530 532 535 538 540 542 545
0.426-0.450 470 472 475 478 480 482 485 488 490 492 495 498 500 502 505 508 510 512 515 518 520 522 525 528 530 532 535 538 540 542 545
0.451-0.475 472 475 478 480 482 485 488 490 492 495 498 500 502 505 508 510 512 515 518 520 522 525 528 530 532 535 538 540 542 545
0.476-0.500 475 478 480 482 485 488 490 492 495 498 500 502 505 508 510 512 515 518 520 522 525 528 530 532 535 538 540 542 545
0.501-0.525 478 480 482 485 488 490 492 495 498 500 502 505 508 510 512 515 518 520 522 525 528 530 532 535 538 540 542 545
0.526-0.550 480 482 485 488 490 492 495 498 500 502 505 508 510 512 515 518 520 522 525 528 530 532 535 538 540 542 545
0.551-0.575 482 485 488 490 492 495 498 500 502 505 508 510 512 515 518 520 522 525 528 530 532 535 538 540 542 545
0.576-0.600 485 488 490 492 495 498 500 502 505 508 510 512 515 518 520 522 525 528 530 532 535 538 540 542 545
0.601-0.625 488 490 492 495 498 500 502 505 508 510 512 515 518 520 522 525 528 530 532 535 538 540 542 545
0.626-0.650 490 492 495 498 500 502 505 508 510 512 515 518 520 522 525 528 530 532 535 538 540 542 545
0.651-0.675 492 495 498 500 502 505 508 510 512 515 518 520 522 525 528 530 532 535 538 540 542 545
0.676-0.700 495 498 500 502 505 508 510 512 515 518 520 522 525 528 530 532 535 538 540 542 545
0.701-0.725 498 500 502 505 508 510 512 515 518 520 522 525 528 530 532 535 538 540 542 545
0.726-0.750 500 502 505 508 510 512 515 518 520 522 525 528 530 532 535 538 540 542 545
0.751-0.775 502 505 508 510 512 515 518 520 522 525 528 530 532 535 538 540 542 545
0.776-0.800 505 508 510 512 515 518 520 522 525 528 530 532 535 538 540 542 545
0.801-0.825 508 510 512 515 518 520 522 525 528 530 532 535 538 540 542 545
0.826-0.850 510 512 515 518 520 522 525 528 530 532 535 538 540 542 545
0.851-0.875 512 515 518 520 522 525 528 530 532 535 538 540 542 545
0.876-0.900 515 518 520 522 525 528 530 532 535 538 540 542 545
0.901-0.925 518 520 522 525 528 530 532 535 538 540 542 545
0.926-0.950 520 522 525 528 530 532 535 538 540 542 545
0.951-0.975 522 525 528 530 532 535 538 540 542 545
0.976-1.000 525 528 530 532 535 538 540 542 545
3.86
Exhaust Valve Lash - Tappet Selection
Matrix
Example:
Tappet Thickness: Example 440 equals thickness of 4.40 Exhaust Valve Clearance (cold):
mm. Part Number: 5138477-XXX (Xs represent 3 digits 0.012 0.002 (0.300 .05 mm)
on tappet)
Existing Valve Lash Tappet Marking (3 digits on tappet)

445 448 450 452 455 458 460 462 465 468 470 472 475 478 480 482 485 488 490 492 495 498 500 502 505 508 510 512 515 518 520 522 525 528 530
3
0.000-0.024 440 442 445 448 450 452 455 458 460 462 465 468 470 472 475 478 480 482 485 488 490 492 495 498 500
0.025-0.049 440 442 445 448 450 452 455 458 460 462 465 468 470 472 475 478 480 482 485 488 490 492 495 498 500 502
0.050-0.074 440 442 445 448 450 452 455 458 460 462 465 468 470 472 475 478 480 482 485 488 490 492 495 498 500 502 505
Exhaust Valve Clearance Before Adjusting (mm)
0.075-0.099 440 442 445 448 450 452 455 458 460 462 465 468 470 472 475 478 480 482 485 488 490 492 495 498 500 502 505 508
0.100-0.124 440 442 445 448 450 452 455 458 460 462 465 468 470 472 475 478 480 482 485 488 490 492 495 498 500 502 505 508 510
0.125-0.149 440 442 445 448 450 452 455 458 460 462 465 468 470 472 475 478 480 482 485 488 490 492 495 498 500 502 505 508 510 512
0.150-0.174 440 442 445 448 450 452 455 458 460 462 465 468 470 472 475 478 480 482 485 488 490 492 495 498 500 502 505 508 510 512 515
0.175-0.199 440 442 445 448 450 452 455 458 460 462 465 468 470 472 475 478 480 482 485 488 490 492 495 498 500 502 505 508 510 512 515 518
0.200-0.224 440 442 445 448 450 452 455 458 460 462 465 468 470 472 475 478 480 482 485 488 490 492 495 498 500 502 505 508 510 512 515 518 520
0.225-0.249 440 442 445 448 450 452 455 458 460 462 465 468 470 472 475 478 480 482 485 488 490 492 495 498 500 502 505 508 510 512 515 518 520 522
0.2500.350
(standard)
0.351-0.375 450 452 455 458 460 462 465 468 470 472 475 478 480 482 485 488 490 492 495 498 500 502 505 508 510 512 515 518 520 522 525 528 530 532 535
0.376-0.400 452 455 458 460 462 465 468 470 472 475 478 480 482 485 488 490 492 495 498 500 502 505 508 510 512 515 518 520 522 525 528 530 532 535 538
0.401-0.425 455 458 460 462 465 468 470 472 475 478 480 482 485 488 490 492 495 498 500 502 505 508 510 512 515 518 520 522 525 528 530 532 535 538 540
0.426-0.450 458 460 462 465 468 470 472 475 478 480 482 485 488 490 492 495 498 500 502 505 508 510 512 515 518 520 522 525 528 530 532 535 538 540 542
0.451-0.475 460 462 465 468 470 472 475 478 480 482 485 488 490 492 495 498 500 502 505 508 510 512 515 518 520 522 525 528 530 532 535 538 540 542 545
0.476-0.500 462 465 468 470 472 475 478 480 482 485 488 490 492 495 498 500 502 505 508 510 512 515 518 520 522 525 528 530 532 535 538 540 542 545
0.501-0.525 465 468 470 472 475 478 480 482 485 488 490 492 495 498 500 502 505 508 510 512 515 518 520 522 525 528 530 532 535 538 540 542 545
0.526-0.550 468 470 472 475 478 480 482 485 488 490 492 495 498 500 502 505 508 510 512 515 518 520 522 525 528 530 532 535 538 540 542 545
0.551-0.575 470 472 475 478 480 482 485 488 490 492 495 498 500 502 505 508 510 512 515 518 520 522 525 528 530 532 535 538 540 542 545
0.576-0.600 472 475 478 480 482 485 488 490 492 495 498 500 502 505 508 510 512 515 518 520 522 525 528 530 532 535 538 540 542 545
0.601-0.625 475 478 480 482 485 488 490 492 495 498 500 502 505 508 510 512 515 518 520 522 525 528 530 532 535 538 540 542 545
0.626-0.650 478 480 482 485 488 490 492 495 498 500 502 505 508 510 512 515 518 520 522 525 528 530 532 535 538 540 542 545
0.651-0.675 480 482 485 488 490 492 495 498 500 502 505 508 510 512 515 518 520 522 525 528 530 532 535 538 540 542 545
0.676-0.700 482 485 488 490 492 495 498 500 502 505 508 510 512 515 518 520 522 525 528 530 532 535 538 540 542 545
0.701-0.725 485 488 490 492 495 498 500 502 505 508 510 512 515 518 520 522 525 528 530 532 535 538 540 542 545
0.726-0.750 488 490 492 495 498 500 502 505 508 510 512 515 518 520 522 525 528 530 532 535 538 540 542 545
0.751-0.775 490 492 495 498 500 502 505 508 510 512 515 518 520 522 525 528 530 532 535 538 540 542 545
0.776-0.800 492 495 498 500 502 505 508 510 512 515 518 520 522 525 528 530 532 535 538 540 542 545
0.801-0.825 495 498 500 502 505 508 510 512 515 518 520 522 525 528 530 532 535 538 540 542 545
0.826-0.850 498 500 502 505 508 510 512 515 518 520 522 525 528 530 532 535 538 540 542 545
0.851-0.875 500 502 505 508 510 512 515 518 520 522 525 528 530 532 535 538 540 542 545
0.876-0.900 502 505 508 510 512 515 518 520 522 525 528 530 532 535 538 540 542 545
0.901-0.925 505 508 510 512 515 518 520 522 525 528 530 532 535 538 540 542 545
0.926-0.950 508 510 512 515 518 520 522 525 528 530 532 535 538 540 542 545
0.951-0.975 510 512 515 518 520 522 525 528 530 532 535 538 540 542 545
0.976-1.000 512 515 518 520 522 525 528 530 532 535 538 540 542 545
3.87
Valve Cover Installation
1. Apply anti-seize compound to spark plug threads.
2. Install spark plugs 1 and torque to specification.
3. Prepare valve cover sealing surfaces by cleaning
thoroughly to remove all residue.
4. Install valve cover seal 2 .
5. Install the four valve cover shoulder bolts 3 and new
isolators 4 using a T40 driver.
6. Torque valve cover bolts to specification.
Spark Plugs:
7 ft-lbs (10 Nm)
Valve Cover Bolts:

7 ft-lbs (10 Nm)
3.88
TROUBLESHOOTING Obstruction in air intake
Air box removed (reinstall all intake components)
Engine
Incorrect ignition timing
Spark Plug Fouling
Restricted exhaust system
Spark plug cap loose or faulty
Cam worn excessively
Incorrect spark plug heat range or gap
PVT system calibrated incorrectly/ components Engine Has Low Power
worn or mis-adjusted
Spark plug fouled
Fuel quality poor (old) or octane too high
Cylinder, piston, ring, or valve wear or damage
3
Low compression (check compression)
Restricted exhaust PVT not operating properly
Weak ignition (loose coil ground, faulty coil, or Restricted exhaust muffler
stator)
Cam worn excessively
Restricted air filter (main or pre-cleaner) or
breather system Piston Failure - Scoring
Improperly assembled air intake system
Lack of lubrication
Restricted engine breather system
Dirt entering engine through cracks in air filter or
Oil contaminated with fuel ducts
Engine oil dirty or contaminated
Engine Turns Over But Fails To Start
No fuel Excessive Smoke and Carbon Buildup
Dirt in fuel line or filter Excessive piston-to-cylinder clearance
Fuel will not pass through fuel valve Wet sumping
Fuel pump inoperative/restricted Worn rings, piston, or cylinder
Tank vent plugged or pinched Worn valve guides or seals
Engine flooded Restricted breather
Low compression (high cylinder leakage) Air filter dirty or contaminated
No spark (Spark plug fouled) ignition component
failure Piston Failure - Scoring
Lack of lubrication
Engine Does Not Turn Over
Dirt entering engine through cracks in air filter or
Dead battery ducts
Starter motor does not turn Engine oil dirty or contaminated
Engine seized, rusted, or mechanical failure
Excessive Smoke and Carbon Buildup
Engine Runs But Will Not Idle Excessive piston-to-cylinder clearance
Restricted fuel supply Wet sumping due to over-full crankcase
Low compression Worn rings, piston, or cylinder
Crankcase breather restricted Worn valve guides or seals
Restricted breather
Engine Idles But Will Not Accelerate
Air filter dirty or contaminated
Spark plug fouled/weak spark
Broken throttle cable Low Compression
3.89
Cylinder head gasket leak Cooling System
No valve clearance (cam wear) Overheating
Cylinder or piston worn Low coolant level
Piston rings worn, leaking, broken, or sticking Air in cooling system
Bent valve or stuck valve Wrong type/mix of coolant
Valve spring broken or weak Faulty pressure cap or system leaks
Valve not seating properly (bent or carbon Restricted system (mud or debris in radiator fins
accumulated on sealing surface) causing restriction to air flow, passages blocked in
radiator, lines, pump, or water jacket, accident
Rocker arm sticking
damage)
Backfiring Lean mixture (vents, fuel pump or fuel valve)
Fouled spark plug or incorrect plug or plug gap Fuel pump output weak
Intake system air leaks Electrical malfunction

Exhaust system air leaks Water pump failure/ Loose impeller
Valve sticking Thermistor failure
Ignition system faulty: Cooling fan inoperative or turning too slowly

(perform current draw test)
Spark plug cap cracked / broken
Low oil level
Ignition coil faulty
Spark plug incorrect heat range
Ignition or kill switch circuit faulty
Faulty hot light circuit
Poor connections in ignition system
Thermostat stuck closed or not opening
Ignition timing incorrect completely
Sheared flywheel key Radiator is missing its internal diverter plate not
allowing coolant to flow through entire radiator
Temperature Too Low

Thermostat stuck open
Leak at Water Pump Weep Hole

Faulty water pump mechanical seal (coolant leak)
Faulty pump shaft oil seal (oil leak)
3.90
FUEL SYSTEM
CHAPTER 4
FUEL SYSTEM
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3
EFI SERVICE NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5
EFI SYSTEM ASSEMBLY VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6
EFI SYSTEM COMPONENT LOCATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
FUEL TANK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9
ASSEMBLY VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9
FUEL LINE REMOVAL / INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.10 4
FUEL TANK REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.10
FUEL TANK INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.13
FUEL TANK REMOVAL RZR XP 4 1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.14
FUEL TANK INSTALLATION RZR XP 4 1000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.16
ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.17
PRINCIPAL COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.17
EFI OPERATION OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.17
INITIAL PRIMING / STARTING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.17
ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT (ECU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.18
OPERATION OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.18
ECU SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.18
ECU REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.18
FUEL INJECTORS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.20
FUEL INJECTOR TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.20
FUEL INJECTOR TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.21
FUEL INJECTOR REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.21
FUEL PUMP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.25
FUEL SENDER TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.25
FUEL PUMP TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.26
FUEL PUMP REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.27
TEMPERATURE / MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (T-MAP) SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.31
T-MAP TEST / REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.31
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.32
CPS TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.32
CPS REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.33
THROTTLE BODY ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.34
THROTTLE BODY SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.34
THROTTLE BODY REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.34
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL (ETC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.36
4.1
FUEL SYSTEM
OPERATION OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.36
ETC TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.36
ETC REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.36
PEDAL POSITION SENSOR (PPS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.37
OPERATION OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.37
LOCATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.37
PPS TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.37
PPS REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.37
OXYGEN SENSOR (MY15 ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.39
OXYGEN SENSOR INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.39
EFI DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.40
TROUBLE CODE DISPLAY (ETC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.40
EFI TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.45
DIGITAL WRENCH OPERATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.46
DIGITAL WRENCH DIAGNOSTIC SOFTWARE OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.46
SPECIAL TOOLS (ALSO REFER TO THE BEGINNING OF THIS CHAPTER). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.46
DIGITAL WRENCH SOFTWARE VERSION AND UPDATE ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.47
DIGITAL WRENCH UPDATES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.47
DIGITAL WRENCH COMMUNICATION ERRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.48
DIGITAL WRENCH - DIAGNOSTIC CONNECTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.48
GUIDED DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.49
DIGITAL WRENCH SERIAL NUMBER LOCATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.49
DIGITAL WRENCH FEATURE MAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.50
ECU REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.51
ECU REPROGRAMMING (REFLASH). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.51
4.2
FUEL SYSTEM
GENERAL INFORMATION Special Tools
PART
TOOL DESCRIPTION
NUMBER
WARNING
PU-43506-A Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit
* Gasoline is extremely flammable and explosive PV-48656 Fuel Pressure Gauge Adapter
under certain conditions.
* EFI components are under high pressure. Digital Wrench Diagnostic Software
Verify system pressure has been (Includes most recent version of
relieved before disassembly. PU-47063-B software w/serial number, standard
* Never drain the fuel system when the engine is hot. interface cable, USB-Serial Adaptor
Severe burns may result. cable and SmartLink Module Kit)
* Do not overfill the tank. The tank is at full capacity
when the fuel reaches the bottom of the filler neck. Digital Wrench SmartLink Module Kit
PU-47471 (PU-47470, PU-47469, PU-47468)
Leave room for expansion of fuel.
* Never start the engine or let it run in an enclosed area.
4
Digital Wrench
Gasoline powered engine exhaust fumes are PU-47470
PC Interface Cable
poisonous and can cause loss of consciousness
and death in a short time. Digital Wrench
PU-47469
* Do not smoke or allow open flames or sparks in or Vehicle Interface Cable
near the area where refueling is performed or where
gasoline is stored. Digital Wrench
PU-47468
* If you get gasoline in your eyes or if you should SmartLink Module
swallow gasoline, seek medical attention immediately.
* If you spill gasoline on your skin or clothing, Bosch Automotive Service Solutions: 1-800-345-
immediately wash with soap and water 2233 or http://polaris.service-solutions.com/
and change clothing. Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit - PU-43506-A
* Always stop the engine and refuel outdoors
or in a well ventilated area. NOTE: The EFI fuel system remains under high
pressure, even when the engine is not running.
Before attempting to service any part of the fuel
system, pressure should be relieved. The Fuel
Pressure Gauge Kit has an integrated pressure relief
valve that can be used to bleed off pressure once
you have completed the fuel pressure test.
Fuel Pressure Gauge Adapter - PV-48656
4.3
FUEL SYSTEM
Digital Wrench - Diagnostic Connector
Located under the hood connected to a sealed plug.
Digital Wrench Diagnostic Software - PU-47063-B Digital Wrench - Download Website

This dealer-only software installs on laptop computers Located at: www.polaris.diagsys.com
equipped with a CD drive and is designed to replace
multiple shop tools often used to test EFI components. It
also includes step-by-step diagnostic procedures to aid
technician repair and troubleshooting.
NOTE: If the PC you are using is not equipped with
a 9-pin serial port, a USB to serial port adapter will
be necessary. A USB to serial port adapter can be
purchased through Bosch Automotive Service
Solutions (PU-50621) or DSA at: www.diagsys.com
Digital Wrench SmartLink Module Kit - PU-47471

This module kit contains the necessary cables and
hardware to communicate between the vehicle ECU and
the Digital Wrench diagnostic software. Polaris dealers
can also order the following kit components separately:
SmartLink Module PU-47468, Vehicle Interface Cable
PU-47469 and PC Interface Cable PU-47470. This Download Digital Wrench Updates:
module kit is used on all 8 pin connector-based Polaris
EFI systems. This kit is available to Polaris dealers
through our tool supplier Bosch at http://polaris. service-
solutions.com or (1-800-345-2233).
NOTE: For the most recent information on Digital

Wrench software and update downloads please
visit the website: www.polaris.diagsys.com
4.4
FUEL SYSTEM
EFI Service Notes
For more convenient and accurate testing of EFI components, it is recommended dealers utilize the Digital
Wrench Diagnostic Software (dealer only). Some testing may be done manually using the procedures
provided in this chapter.
80% of all EFI problems are caused by wiring harness connections.
For the purpose of troubleshooting difficult running issues, a known-good ECU from another RZR of the same
model and year may be used without damaging system or engine components.
Never attempt to service any fuel system component while engine is running or ignition switch is "on."
Cleanliness is essential and must be maintained at all times when servicing or working on the EFI system. Dirt,
even in small quantities, can cause significant problems.
Do not use compressed air if the system is open. Cover any parts removed and wrap any open joints with plastic
if they will remain open for any length of time. New parts should be removed from their protective packaging just
prior to installation.
4
Clean any connector before opening to prevent dirt from entering the system.
Although every precaution has been taken to prevent water intrusion failure, avoid direct water or spray contact
with system components.
Do not disconnect or reconnect the wiring harness connector to the control unit or any individual components
with the ignition "on." This can send a damaging voltage spike through the ECU.
Do not allow the battery cables to touch opposing terminals. When connecting battery cables attach the positive
(red) cable to positive (+) battery terminal first, followed by negative (black) cable to negative (-) battery terminal.
Never start the engine when the cables are loose or poorly connected to the battery terminals.
Never disconnect battery while engine is running.
Never use a battery boost-pack to start the engine.
Do not charge battery with key switch "on."
Always disconnect negative (-) battery cable lead before charging battery.
Always unplug ECU from the wire harness before performing any welding on the unit.
4.5
FUEL SYSTEM
EFI System Assembly View
1 Electronic Control Unit (ECU) 7 Fuel Pump / Regulator

2 Crankshaft Position Sensor (CPS) 8 Fuel Level Sender
3 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECT) 9 Fuel Filter
4 Dual Throttle Body Assembly 10 Fuel Supply Line
5 Fuel Injectors 11 T-MAP Sensor
6 Fuel Rail / Regulator 12 Electronic Throttle Control
4.6
FUEL SYSTEM
EFI System Component Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor (CPS) 3
Electronic Control Unit (ECU) 1

Located on top of the stator cover.
Behind drivers seat. Behind LR seat on RZR XP 4
1000.
Temperature and Manifold Absolute Pressure

(TMAP) Sensor 4
Located on the Mag side of the throttle body.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) 2
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECT) 5
Located on the PTO side of the throttle body Located on the left side of the thermostat housing.
assembly. The sensor can be accessed with the air box
assembly removed.
4.7
FUEL SYSTEM
Dual Throttle Body Assembly 6 Ignition Coil / High Tension Leads 9
Located between the air box assembly and rubber Located behind the engine service panel on the
cylinder head adapters. drivers side of the vehicle.
Fuel Injectors 7 Fuel Pump / Regulator / Fuel Sender Assembly

10
Located on the top of the throttle body in the intake
track, retained on top by the fuel rail. Under the passenger seat.
Fuel Rail / Regulator 8
Located on the throttle body, on top of the fuel

injectors.
4.8
FUEL SYSTEM
FUEL TANK
Assembly View
1 PFA Nut 5 Preliminary Filter

2 Fuel Sender Float Arm 6 Fuel Tank Vent
3 PFA Gasket (replace if removed) 7 Fuel Tank Assembly
4 Fuel Pump / Regulator
4.9
FUEL SYSTEM
Fuel Line Removal / Installation 5. Place the fuel line back over the fitting and slide the
green connector locking mechanism back into place.
Verify the connector tabs snap back into place.
6. Be sure fuel line is routed and retained properly.
Fuel Tank Removal

NOTE: Syphon as much fuel from the tank as
possible before attempting to remove it from the
vehicle.
WARNING
Always wear safety goggles when working with high

pressure or flammable fluids. Failure to do so could
1. Place a shop towel around the fuel line to catch any result in serious injury or complications.
dripping fuel.
2. If removing either end of supply line 2 , pull open 1. Remove the driver and passenger seats.
tabs while moving green connector out to release the
line. 2. Disconnect the negative and positive battery cables
from the battery, located under the drivers seat.
Remove the bolt retaining the battery bracket and
remove the battery from the vehicle.
3. While holding a shop towel over the fuel line
connectors, disconnect the fuel supply line 1 from
the pump (see Chapter 2 Fuel Lines, page 2.13 for
specific removal procedure).
NOTE: A small amount of fuel may come out of

the fuel lines or pump fitting. Properly drain fuel
into a suitable container.
4. Disconnect the fuel pump electrical harness 2 .
3. Pull on the fuel line for removal.

4. To install the line, verify the connections are clean
and free of debris.
4.10
FUEL SYSTEM
5. Remove the push rivets and Torx screws retaining 7. Remove the shift knob 6 using a flat blade
the right-hand rocker panel using the multi-function screwdriver and T25 Torx driver. Remove the Torx
pliers and a T40 Torx driver. Remove the rocker screws retaining the center console. Remove the
panel 4 from the vehicle. console from the vehicle.
6. Remove the fastener 5 retaining the seat belt 8. Remove the shift linkage from the shifter.
mechanism to the frame near the right rear portion of 9. Remove the two bolts 7 and two T40 Torx screws 9
the fuel tank. Once removed, place the mechanism retaining the front of the seat base frame and two
in the rear cargo box to keep it out of the way. rear bolts 8 . Remove the rear seat base assembly
from the vehicle.
4.11
FUEL SYSTEM
10. Remove the T-40 Torx screw 10 retaining the fuel 13. Remove the fuel tank vent line from the tank fitting.
tank strap to the seat base frame. Remove the strap
from the other side of the seat base frame as well.
14. Lift the rear of the fuel tank up first. Carefully pull the
fuel tank out of the vehicle.
11. Remove the Torx screws 11 and plastic rivets 12
retaining the block-off panel using a T40 Torx driver.
Remove the panel from the vehicle.
12. Remove the nuts 13 retaining the regulator and Torx

screws 14 retaining the fuse box.
4.12
FUEL SYSTEM
Fuel Tank Installation 10. Reinstall right rocker panel and all previously
1. Carefully reinstall the fuel tank assembly. Install the removed fasteners.
inner tank bracket with the fuel tank to ensure the 11. Reconnect the fuel line and fuel pump electrical
bracket is inserted properly into the lower fuel tank harness. Verify connections are secure.
mount.
12. Reinstall the battery and battery bracket. Torque
2. Reinstall the fuel tank bracket and fasteners. fastener to specification.
3. Install the vent line.
4. Reinstall block-off panel. Secure with plastic rivets
and torque screws to specification.
Battery Bracket:
8 ft-lbs (11 Nm)
Block-off Panel Screws

13. Install both seats and test the fuel pump by turning
the ignition key on and listening for the pump to
4
8 ft-lbs (11 Nm) activate. Check the fuel line fittings for leaks.
5. Reinstall the seat base frame and torque fasteners to

specification.
Seat Base Frame fasteners

8 ft-lbs (11 Nm)
6. Install regulator and fuse box to the block-off panel.

Torque fasteners to specification.
Regulator/Fuse Box fasteners

5 ft-lb (7 Nm)
7. Install fuel tank strap screw. Torque screw to

specification.
Fuel Tank Strap Screw

8 ft-lbs (11 Nm)
8. Reinstall center console, shift knob and screws.

9. Reinstall seat belt mechanism. Torque bolt to
specification.
Seat Belt Mechanism Bolt:

40 ft-lbs (54 Nm)
4.13
FUEL SYSTEM
Fuel Tank Removal RZR XP 4 1000
WARNING
Always wear safety goggles when working with high

pressure or flammable fluids. Failure to do so could
result in serious injury or complications.
NOTE: Syphon as much fuel from the tank as

possible before attempting to remove it from the
vehicle.
1. Remove the front and rear seats.

2. Disconnect the negative and positive battery cables 7. Remove the front and rear console assembly (see
from the battery, located under the left rear seat. Chapter 10 Rocker Panels, Console and Floor XP /
Remove the bolt retaining the battery bracket and High Lifter, page 10.23).
remove the battery from the vehicle.
8. Remove the two M10x1.5x55 bolts 4 and two
3. While holding a shop towel over the fuel line M8x1.25x20 bolts 5 retaining the front of the rear
connectors, disconnect the fuel supply line 1 from seat base frame. Remove the rear seat base
the pump (see Chapter 2 Fuel Lines, page 2.13 for assembly from the vehicle.
specific removal procedure).
9. Remove the T-40 Torx screw 6 retaining the fuel tank

NOTE: A small amount of fuel may come out of strap to the seat base frame. Remove the strap from
the fuel lines or pump fitting. Properly drain fuel the other side of the seat base frame as well.

5. Remove the right-hand rocker panel (see Chapter
10).
6. Remove the fastener 3 retaining the seat belt
mechanism to the frame near the right rear portion of
the fuel tank. Once removed, place the mechanism in
the rear cargo box to keep it out of the way.
4.14
FUEL SYSTEM
10. Remove the Torx screws 7 and push rivets 8 13. Lift the rear of the fuel tank up first. Carefully pull the
4
retaining the lower rear close-off panel using a T40 fuel tank out of the vehicle.
Torx driver. Remove the panel from the vehicle.
11. Remove the nuts 9 retaining the regulator and bolts

10 retaining the fuse box.
12. Remove the fuel tank vent line 11 from the tank fitting.
4.15
FUEL SYSTEM
Fuel Tank Installation RZR XP 4 1000
1. Carefully reinstall the fuel tank assembly. Install the
inner tank bracket with the fuel tank to ensure the
bracket is inserted properly into the lower fuel tank Seat Belt Mechanism Bolt:
mount. 40 ft-lbs (54 Nm)
2. Reinstall the fuel tank bracket and fasteners.
10. Reinstall right rocker panel and all previously
3. Install the vent line. removed fasteners.
4. Reinstall lower rear close-off panel. Secure with 11. Reconnect the fuel line and fuel pump electrical
plastic rivets and torque screws to specification. harness. Verify connections are secure.
12. Reinstall the battery and battery bracket. Torque
fastener to specification.
Block-off Panel Screws

8 ft-lbs (11 Nm)
Battery Bracket:
5. Reinstall the seat base frame and torque fasteners to 8 ft-lbs (11 Nm)
specification.
13. Install seats and test the fuel pump by turning the
ignition key on and listening for the pump to activate.
Check the fuel line fittings for leaks.
Seat Base Frame fasteners

8 ft-lbs (11 Nm)
6. Install regulator and fuse box to the block-off panel.

Regulator/Fuse Box fasteners

5 ft-lb (7 Nm)
7. Install fuel tank strap screw. Torque screw to

specification.
Fuel Tank Strap Screw

8 ft-lbs (11 Nm)
8. Reinstall rear and front center console, shift knob and

screws.
9. Reinstall seat belt mechanism. Torque bolt to
specification.
4.16
FUEL SYSTEM
ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION The ECU controls the amount of fuel being injected and
the ignition timing by monitoring the primary sensor
Principal Components signals for intake air temperature, manifold absolute
pressure (load), engine temperature, engine speed
The Electronic Fuel Injection (EFI) system is a complete (RPM) and throttle position. These primary signals are
engine fuel and ignition management design. This compared to the programming in the ECU computer
system includes the following principal components: chip, and the ECU adjusts the fuel delivery and ignition
Check Engine Light timing based on these values.
Crankshaft Position Sensor (CPS) During operation, the ECU has the ability to re-adjust
temporarily; providing compensation for changes in
Dual Throttle Body / lntake Adapter overall engine condition and operating environment, so it
Engine Control Unit (ECU) will be able to maintain the ideal air/fuel ratio.
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECT) During certain operating periods such as cold starts,
warm up, acceleration, etc., a richer air / fuel ratio is
Fuel Filter(s) automatically calculated by the ECU.
Fuel Injectors
4
Initial Priming / Starting Procedure
Fuel Pressure Regulators
Fuel Pump NOTE: The injection system must be purged of all
air prior to the initial start up, and / or any time the
Fuel Rail system has been disassembled.
Fuel Supply/Return Lines
If the EFI system is completely empty of fuel or has been
Idle Air Control Valve (IAC) disassembled and repaired:
Ignition Coil 1. Cycle the key switch from OFF to ON 6 times,
waiting for approximately 3 seconds at each ON
Temperature and Manifold Pressure Sensor
cycle to allow the fuel pump to cycle and shut down.
(TMAP)
2. Once step 1 is completed, turn the key switch to
Wire Harness Assembly
START until the engine starts or 5 seconds has
passed.
EFI Operation Overview 3. If the engine failed to start, repeat step 1 for 2 more
cycles and attempt to start the engine.
The EFI system is designed to provide peak engine
performance with optimum fuel efficiency and lowest If the engine fails to start, a problem may still exist,
possible emissions. The ignition and injection functions and should be diagnosed.
are electronically controlled, monitored and continually
corrected during operation to maintain peak NOTE: Accurate testing of EFI components is
performance. recommended utilizing the Digital Wrench
Diagnostic Software (dealer only).
The central component of the system is the Bosch ME17
Electronic Control Unit (ECU) which manages system
operation, determining the best combination of fuel
mixture and ignition timing for the current operating
conditions.
An electric fuel pump is used to move fuel from the tank,
through the fuel supply line, to the fuel rail. Fuel pressure
regulators located in the tank and on the end of the fuel
rail, maintain system operating pressure and return
excess fuel back into the fuel tank. At the engine, fuel fed
through the fuel rail supplies fuel to the injectors, which
inject into the intake ports. The ECU controls the amount
of fuel by varying the length of time that the injectors are
"on." This range can vary depending on fuel
requirements. The controlled injection of the fuel occurs
every other crankshaft revolution, or once for each 4-
stroke cycle. When the intake valve opens, the fuel/air
mixture is drawn into the combustion chamber, ignited
and burned.
4.17
FUEL SYSTEM
ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT (ECU) ECU Service
Never attempt to disassemble the ECU. It is sealed to
Operation Overview prevent damage to internal components. Warranty is
The ECU 1 is the brain or central processing computer void if the case is opened or tampered with in any way.
of the entire EFI fuel/ignition management system. All operating and control functions within the ECU are
During operation, sensors continuously gather data pre-set. No internal servicing or readjustment may be
which is relayed through the wiring harness to input performed. If a problem is encountered, and you
circuits within the ECU. Signals to the ECU include: determine the ECU to be faulty, contact the Polaris
ignition power (on/off), intake air temperature, manifold Service Department for specific handling instructions. Do
absolute pressure (load), engine coolant temperature, not replace the ECU without factory authorization.
crankshaft position and engine speed (RPM), throttle
position and battery voltage. The ECU compares the For the purpose of troubleshooting, a known-good ECU
input signals to the programmed maps in its memory and from another Polaris RZR XP 1000 of the same model
determines the appropriate fuel and ignition may be used without system or engine component
requirements for the immediate operating conditions. damage.
The ECU then sends output signals to set injector
duration and ignition timing. ECU Replacement
Although the need for ECU replacement is unlikely, a
specific replacement procedure is required to ensure that
all essential data contained within the original ECU is
transferred to the replacement ECU.
NOTE: Refer to this procedure and carefully follow
all instructions provided in Digital Wrench.
1. Carefully follow the ECU replacement instructions

provided in Digital Wrench to ensure that all
essential data contained within the original ECU is
transferred to the replacement ECU.
2. Remove the black plastic cover by lifting up on the
tab. Remove the retaining screw that attaches the
ECU to the left rear fender well.
During operation, the ECU continually performs a

diagnostic check of itself, each of the sensors, and
system performance. If a fault is detected, the ECU turns
on the Check Engine light on the instrument cluster and
stores the fault code in its fault memory. Depending on
the significance or severity of the fault, normal operation
may continue, or "Fail-Safe" operation (slowed speed,
richer running) may be initiated. A technician can
determine the cause of the Check Engine light by
referencing the Instrument Cluster Trouble Code
Display and Diagnostic Trouble Code Table or by using
Digital Wrench. The ECU requires a minimum of 7.0
volts to operate. The memory in the ECU is operational
the moment the battery cables are connected.
To prevent engine over-speed and possible failure, an
RPM limiting feature is programmed into the ECU. If the
maximum RPM limit is exceeded, the ECU suppresses
the injection signals, cutting off the fuel flow and retards
the ignition timing. This process repeats it self in rapid
succession, limiting operation to the preset maximum.
RPM Limit: 8300
4.18
FUEL SYSTEM
3. With the ignition turned off, disconnect the wire
harness from the ECU. Lift the connector locking
lever and rotate it up until the connector is free from
the ECU.
NOTE: Upon removing the ECU connector, you
should hear a click when the connector is fully
open.
4. To install, reverse the procedure and tighten the

mounting screws to specification.
NOTE: Upon installing the ECU connector, you
should hear a click when the connector is fully
closed.
ECU Retaining Screws:

24 in-lb (3 Nm)
4.19
FUEL SYSTEM
FUEL INJECTORS Fuel Injector Troubleshooting
Injector problems typically fall into three general
Operation Overview categories- electrical, dirty / clogged, or leakage. An
The fuel rail 1 , located on the intake manifold, retains electrical problem usually causes one or both of the
the fuel injectors 2 to the intake assembly. O-rings on injectors to stop functioning. Several methods may be
both ends of the injectors prevent external fuel leaks and used to check if the injectors are operating.
also insulate the injectors from heat and vibration.
With the engine running at idle, feel for operational
vibration, indicating that they are opening and
closing.
When temperatures prohibit touching, listen for a
buzzing or clicking sound with a screwdriver or
mechanic's stethoscope.
Disconnect the electrical connector from an
injector and listen for a change in idle performance
(only running on one cylinder) or a change in
injector noise or vibration.
NOTE: Do not apply voltage directly to the fuel
injector(s). Excessive voltage will burn out the
injector (s). Do not ground the injector (s) with
the ignition on. lnjector (s) will open/turn on if
relay is energized.
When the key switch is on, the fuel rail is pressurized,
and the EFI relay provides voltage to the injectors.
If an injector is not operating, it can indicate either a bad
During engine operation, the ECU completes the ground
injector, or a wiring/electrical connection problem. Check
circuit, energizing the injectors. The valve needle in each
as follows:
injector is opened electromagnetically, and the pressure
in the fuel rail forces fuel down through the inside. The Injector leakage is very unlikely, but in rare instances it
director plate at the tip of the injector contains a series can be internal (past the tip of the valve needle), or
of calibrated openings which directs the fuel into the external (weeping around the injector body). The loss of
intake port in a cone-shaped spray pattern. system pressure from the leakage can cause hot restart
problems and longer cranking times.
The amount of fuel injected is controlled by the ECU and
determined by the length of time the valve needle is held Injector problems due to dirt or clogging are unlikely due
open, also referred to as the injection duration or pulse to the design of the injectors, the high fuel pressure, the
width. It may vary in length depending on the speed and use of filters and the detergent additives in the gasoline.
load requirements of the engine. Symptoms that could be caused by dirty/clogged
injectors include rough idle, hesitation/stumble during
The ECU gathers fuel injection timing information from
acceleration, or triggering of fault codes related to fuel
the Crankshaft Position Sensor (CPS) and the Pedal
delivery. Injector clogging is usually caused by a buildup
Position Sensor (PPS) to allow for sequential fuel
of deposits on the director plate, restricting the flow of
injection.
fuel, resulting in a poor spray pattern. Some contributing
factors to injector clogging include; dirty air filters, higher
than normal operating temperatures, short operating
intervals and dirty, incorrect, or poor quality fuel.
Cleaning of clogged injectors is not recommended; they
should be replaced. Additives and higher grades of fuel
can be used as a preventative measure if clogging has
been a problem.
4.20
FUEL SYSTEM
Fuel Injector Test Fuel Injector Replacement
1. Remove the cargo box assembly (see Chapter 10
NOTE: Take note of PTO and MAG fuel injector Cargo Box Assembly Removal, page 10.22).
harness connectors before disconnecting them. The
harness leads are marked with PTO and MAG 2. Be sure the engine has cooled enough to work on.
identifiers. 3. Loosen the hose clamps 1 retaining the intake
plenum 2 to the throttle body.
The fuel injectors are non-serviceable. If diagnosis

4. Remove the two screws 3 retaining the intake
indicates a problem with either injector, test the plenum.
resistance of the fuel injector (s) by measuring between
the two pin terminals 2 :
5. Remove the drivers seat and disconnect the

negative battery cable.
Fuel Injector Resistance Specification:
11.4 - 12.6
NOTE: Be sure to connect the PTO harness lead to

the PTO injector and the MAG harness lead to the
MAG injector to ensure proper engine operation.
4.21
FUEL SYSTEM
6. Disconnect the fuel injector harness leads 4 . 9. Carefully pull up on the fuel rail 7 and injectors and
remove them from the throttle body as an assembly.
Take care not to damage the fuel injector ends
during removal.
7. Hold a shop towel over the fuel line fitting and

remove the fuel supply line 5 from the fuel rail.
10. Pull out on the fuel injector retaining clip and pull the
injector out of the fuel rail. Repeat on the other
injector if removal is necessary.
8. Remove tie strap retaining the injector harness leads

to the fuel rail. Remove the two screws 6 that mount
the fuel rail to the throttle body using a 5 mm Allen
wrench.
11. Upon installation of the new fuel injectors, lightly

lubricate the injector O-rings to aid installation.
4.22
FUEL SYSTEM
12. Install the new injector (s) into the fuel rail and 21. Reinstall the intake plenum assembly and fasten the
reinstall the retaining clip. lower mount to the transmission mount bracket.
Be sure the lower air box post is placed properly
into the rubber grommet.
NOTE: Be sure the retaining clip is positioned

on the injector and fuel rail as shown above. Be sure the air box boots fully seat onto the dual
throttle body before tightening the hose clamps 16 .
13. Thoroughly clean the area around the fuel injector
ports on the throttle body.
14. Lightly lubricate the injector O-rings and reinstall the
fuel rail / injector assembly into the throttle body.
15. Install the fuel rail mounting screws and torque to
specification.
Fuel Rail Mounting Screws:

44 in-lb (5 Nm)
16. Reinstall the fuel line to the fuel rail.

17. Connect the harness leads to the fuel injectors.
NOTE: Be sure to connect the PTO harness lead
to the PTO injector and the MAG harness lead to
the MAG injector to ensure proper engine
operation. Hose Clamps:
35 in-lb (4 Nm)
18. Use a tie strap to retain the harness leads to the fuel
rail. Intake Plenum Mount Screw:
22 ft-lb (30 Nm)
19. Reconnect the negative battery cable and reinstall
the drivers seat.
22. Reinstall the breather into the air box and tighten the
20. Turn key on to allow the fuel system to prime and hose clamps retaining the air box to the throttle body
inspect the fuel rail and injectors for fuel leaks. assembly.
23. Reinstall the two screws retaining the air box
assembly.
24. Position the intake hose onto the air box and tighten
the hose clamp.
4.23
FUEL SYSTEM
25. Reinstall the cargo box access panel.
4.24
FUEL SYSTEM
FUEL PUMP If the engine is stopped with the key switch "on"
(as in the case of an accident).
Operation Overview
An electric fuel pump assembly is used to transfer fuel to In these situations, the check engine light will go on, but
the EFI system from inside the fuel tank. This assembly will turn off after 4 cranking revolutions if system function
includes the fuel pump, fuel filters, regulator and fuel is OK. Once the engine is running, the fuel pump
gauge sender. The pump is rated for a minimum output remains on.
of 25 liters per hour at 58 2 psi (400 14 kPa) and has
two non-serviceable fuel filters. Fuel Sender Test
If the fuel gauge reading on the instrument cluster is not
working, or if the display reading differs in large
comparison to the fuel in the tank, perform a resistance
test on the fuel sender.
Disconnect the fuel pump / sending unit connection and
measure the resistance between pins 1 . If out of 4
specification, replace the fuel pump assembly.
Fuel Sender Resistance Specifications:

Full 2 : 100 3
Empty 3 : 450 5
1 Fuel Line Connection 4 Pump / Sending Unit
Electrical Connection
2 Fuel Pump 5 Regulator
3 Fuel Pick-up Filter
When the key switch is turned to "ON", the ECU

activates the fuel pump, which pressurizes the system
for start-up.
The ECU switches off the pump preventing the continued
delivery of fuel in these instances:
If the key switch is not promptly turned to the
"start" position.
If the engine fails to start.
4.25
FUEL SYSTEM
Fuel Pump Test 6. If the pump did not activate (Step 5), disconnect the
If a fuel delivery problem is suspected, make certain the harness connector from the fuel pump. Connect a
fuel pump filters are not plugged, that the pump is being DC voltmeter across terminals 3 and 4 in the plug
activated through the ECU, all electrical connections are on the vehicle fuel pump harness. Turn on the key
properly secured, the fuses are good, and a minimum of switch and observe voltage to ensure a minimum of
7.0 volts is being supplied. If during starting the battery 7 volts is present.
voltage drops below 7.0 volts, the ECU will fail to operate
the system.
WARNING
Fuel is extremely flammable and may cause severe

burns, injury, or death.
Do not use any device that produces a flame or
electrical devices that may spark around
fuel or fuel vapors.
1. Remove the passenger seat from the vehicle.

2. Cover the fuel line connection at the fuel tank with a
shop towel and disconnect the line from the fuel
pump outlet.
3. Install the Fuel Pressure Gauge Adapter (PV-48656)
in-line between the fuel pump outlet and fuel line.
4. Connect the hose from the Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit
(PU-43506-A) to the test valve on the Fuel Pressure NOTE: If the voltage was below 7 VDC, test the
Gauge Adapter (PV-48656). Route clear hose into a battery, ignition switch, relay (s), wiring harness
portable gasoline container or the vehicles fuel tank. and ECU.
5. Turn on key switch to activate the pump and check 7. If the reading is between 7 and 14 volts, turn key
the system pressure on the gauge. If system switch off and connect an ohmmeter between
pressure of 58 2 psi (400 14 kPa) is observed, terminals 3 and 4' at the white fuel pump
the ignition switch, ECU, fuel pump, and pressure connector to check for continuity within the fuel
regulator are working properly. Turn the key switch pump.
off and depress the valve button on the tester to
relieve the system pressure. NOTE: If there was no continuity between the
pump terminals, replace the fuel pump assembly.
Fuel Pressure:
58 2 psi (400 14 kPa). 8. If voltage at the plug was within the specified range,
and there was continuity across the pump terminals,
reconnect the plug to the fuel pump, making sure
NOTE: If the fuel pressure is out of specification, you have a clean connection. Turn on the key switch
replace the fuel pump assembly. and listen for the pump to activate.
NOTE: If the pump starts, repeat steps 3, 4 and 5
to verify correct pressure.
9. If the pump still does not operate, check for correct

ECU operation by plugging in a known-good ECU of
the same model.
NOTE: If the pump still does not operate, replace
the fuel pump assembly.
4.26
FUEL SYSTEM
Fuel Pump Replacement 5. While holding a shop towel over the fuel line
1. Move the vehicle to a well ventilated area. Shift the connectors, disconnect the fuel supply line 2 from
transmission into Park and turn the ignition key off. the pump and the fuel return line (B) from the tank
(see Chapter 2 Fuel Lines, page 2.13 for specific
2. Remove the passenger seat to access the fuel removal procedures).
pump.
CAUTION
WARNING It is possible for pressurized fuel to be present when
disconnecting the fuel line.
Always wear safety goggles when working with high It is recommended to allow the vehicle to sit for a period
pressure or flammable fluids. Failure to do so could of one hour after shutting off the engine before
result in serious injury or complications. servicing the fuel pump. This allows the exhaust to cool
and fuel pressure to drop.
3. Be sure the top of the fuel tank is clean 1 . If it
requires cleaning, hand wash the top of the tank to 4
ensure no debris will enter the fuel system when the NOTE: A small amount of fuel may come out of
fuel pump is removed. the fuel lines or pump fitting. Properly drain fuel
WARNING
Failure to clean area around fuel pump may lead to

debris entering the fuel tank during service. Excessive
debris in fuel tank may cause premature wear of fuel
pump and/or clogging of internal fuel filters.
4. Ensure that static has been discharged by touching a

ground source such as the engine or frame.
4.27
FUEL SYSTEM
7. Place the Fuel Pump Service Tool (PU-50326) over 8. Carefully lift the fuel pump out of the fuel tank. As the
the fuel pump PFA nut 4 . Using a 1/2 drive ratchet fuel pump assembly is being removed, be aware of
or breaker bar, loosen and remove the PFA nut. float arm and pump pre-filter. Hold the float arm to
Discard the PFA nut. the pump body as you lift and tilt the pump to ensure
that the float arm is not bent when removed from the
tank.
NOTE: Apply downward force on the fuel pump

flange while removing the fuel pump PFA nut.
9. Transfer old fuel pump to a suitable container

capable of safely holding fuel. The fuel pump will
retain some fuel.
10. Inspect the inside of the fuel tank for debris (may
require flashlight and mirror). If debris like mud or
sand is present, fuel tank should be flushed and
cleaned out prior to installation of new fuel pump
assembly.
NOTE: It is recommended to remove the fuel
tank from the vehicle and rinse it with a small
amount of clean fuel. Do not use water or any
other chemicals to remove debris.
4.28
FUEL SYSTEM
11. Remove new fuel pump assembly 5 , gasket 6 and 16. Roughly align orientation mark on fuel pump
PFA nut 7 from packaging. Use care not to bend between the orientation marks on fuel tank to ensure
float arm 8 during un-packaging. Do not lift or carry float arm does not get bent or snagged.
fuel pump assembly by the float arm.
WARNING
Failure to align the orientation marks may lead to

interferences with the fuel level float arm
and cause incorrect function.
17. While maintaining downward pressure, thread new

PFA nut onto fuel tank and hand tighten. Use care
when starting PFA nut, ensuring threads are properly
aligned. Verify orientation marks are still aligned
between fuel pump and fuel tank.
18. Torque PFA nut to specification using the Fuel Pump
Service Tool (PU-50326) and a calibrated torque
wrench.
Fuel Pump PFA Nut:

70 ft-lbs (95 Nm)
12. Use cleaning wipes provided to clean fuel tank 19. Verify alignment of fuel pump and tank orientation
surface and threads 9 . Remove all debris, grease marks.
and oil. Allow surfaces to dry completely.
20. Connect the fuel supply line to the pump (see
13. Install new PFA gasket onto fuel pump assembly Chapter 2 Fuel Lines, page 2.13 for specific
using care not to damage gasket or bend float arm. installation procedures).
14. Install fuel pump into fuel tank, hold float arm to the
NOTE: Be sure to engage the retainers on each
pump body and tilt assembly to ensure float arm
fuel line until each snaps into place. Pull on fuel
does not get caught or bent during installation.
lines lightly to confirm connection.
15. Gently push down on fuel pump flange ensuring
flange is centered. 21. Install the fuel tank vent line onto the tank fitting.
22. Connect the fuel pump electrical harness.
4.29
FUEL SYSTEM
23. Test the fuel pump by turning on the key and
listening for the pump to activate. Cycle the key
several times to prime the system.
24. Install the passenger seat / storage box.
4.30
FUEL SYSTEM
TEMPERATURE / MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (T-MAP) SENSOR
Operation Overview T-MAP Test / Replacement
Mounted on the end of the intake, the T-MAP 1 performs The T-MAP is a non-serviceable item and can only be
two functions in one unit. The T-MAP detects intake air tested using Digital Wrench. If the sensor is faulty, it
temperature as well as manifold absolute pressure. must be replaced.
NOTE: This sensor should only be tested using
Digital Wrench Diagnostic Software (dealer only).
These sensor signals, comprised of separate intake air

temperature and manifold absolute pressure readings
are processed by the ECU and compared to its
programming for determining the fuel and ignition
requirements during engine operation. The T-MAP
provides the ECU with engine load data.
4.31
FUEL SYSTEM
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CPS)
Operation Overview CPS Test
Mounted on top of the stator cover, the crankshaft The CPS is a sealed, non-serviceable assembly. If fault
position sensor 1 is essential to engine operation, code diagnosis indicates a problem with this sensor, test
constantly monitoring the rotational speed (RPM) and as follows:
position of the crankshaft. 1. Locate the CPS harness connector above the
transmission on the RH side of the vehicle and
disconnect the harness.
2. Connect an ohmmeter between the CPS pin
terminals shown below. A resistance value of 1000
10% at room temperature should be obtained.
A ferromagnetic 35-tooth encoder ring with a missing

tooth is built onto the flywheel. The inductive speed
sensor is mounted 1.0 0.26 mm (0.059 0.010 in.)
away from the encoder ring. During rotation, an AC pulse
is created within the sensor for each passing tooth. The
ECU calculates engine speed from the time interval
between the consecutive pulses.
The encoder ring missing tooth creates an interrupt
input signal, corresponding to specific crankshaft CPS Resistance Specification:
position. This signal serves as a reference for the control 1000 10%
of ignition timing by the ECU. Synchronization of the
CPS and crankshaft position takes place during the first
3. If the resistance is correct:
two revolutions each time the engine is started. This
sensor must be properly connected at all times. If the Test the main harness circuit between the sensor
sensor fails or becomes disconnected for any reason, connector terminals and the corresponding pin
the engine will stop running. terminals at the ECU (see wiring diagram).
Check the sensor mounting, air gap, flywheel
encoder ring for damage or runout, and flywheel
key. Follow the CPS Replacement procedure to
inspect CPS and flywheel encoder ring for
damage.
4. If the resistance is incorrect, follow the CPS
Replacement, page 4.33 procedure.
4.32
FUEL SYSTEM
CPS Replacement
1. If not done already; disconnect the CPS harness
connector (see Chapter 4 CPS Test, page 4.32).
2. Using an 8mm socket, remove the CPS retaining bolt
1 and remove the sensor 2 from the stator cover.
3. Unclip the wire harness retainer 3 and remove the

CPS harness from the retainer to allow replacement.
4. Install new sensor using a light coating of oil on the
O-ring to aid installation.
5. Torque the CPS retaining bolt to specification.
CPS Retaining Bolt:

9 ft-lb (12 Nm)
4.33
FUEL SYSTEM
THROTTLE BODY ASSEMBLY Throttle Body Removal
1. Remove the cargo box assembly (See Chapter 10
Operation Overview Cargo Box Assembly Removal, page 10.22).
Mounted to the cylinder head, the dual throttle body 1 2. Be sure the engine has cooled enough to work on.
assembly provides the proper air/fuel ratio needed for
engine operation. 3. Loosen the hose clamps 1 retaining the intake
plenum 2 to the throttle body.
The throttle body assembly also includes the Electronic 4. Remove the two screws 3 retaining the intake
Throttle Control and Idle Air Control. plenum.
Throttle Body Service

The throttle body assembly is a non-serviceable
component. However, the fuel rail, fuel injectors, and the
Temperature and Manifold Pressure Sensor (TMAP) can
be serviced separately (see Chapter 4 FUEL
INJECTORS, page 4.20 and Temperature / Manifold
Absolute Pressure (T-MAP) Sensor, page 4.31).

negative battery cable.
4.34
FUEL SYSTEM
6. Disconnect the wire harness from the ETC 4 and the 10. Upon installation of the fuel rail and injectors, lightly
TMAP 5 located on the ends of the throttle body lubricate injector O-rings to aid installation. Torque
assembly. the fuel rail mounting screws to specification.
Fuel Rail Mounting Screws:

44 in-lb (5 Nm)
7. Loosen the two hose clamps 6 that retain the dual

throttle body assembly 7 to the intake adapters.
Carefully lift the throttle body assembly out of the
intake adapters.
8. Remove the two screw retaining the fuel rail to the

throttle body. Lift the fuel rail and injectors out of the
throttle body assembly taking care not to damage the
fuel injector ends.
NOTE: It is not necessary to disconnect fuel
lines or the injector harnesses to perform this
procedure.
9. Reverse the previous steps to reinstall the throttle

body.
4.35
FUEL SYSTEM
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL ETC Test
(ETC) Never attempt to disassemble the ETC assembly.
Warranty is void if the end cover is opened or tampered
Operation Overview with in any way.
All operating and control functions within the ETC are
NOTE: DO NOT attempt to service the ETC 1 . The
pre-set. No internal servicing or adjustments may be
ETC is a non-serviceable component and can only
performed. If a problem is encountered, and you
be tested using Digital Wrench. If the ETC is faulty,
determine the ETC to be faulty, contact the Polaris
the entire assembly must be replaced.
Service Department for specific handling instructions. Do
not replace the ETC without factory authorization.
Use Digital Wrench to perform all troubleshooting of
this component. Use a Volt Ohm meter to test the vehicle
harness continuity between the ETC connector and ECU
connector. Refer to the wire diagram for pin-out details. If
the ETC is faulty, the entire ETC assembly must be
replaced (see Chapter 4 ETC Replacement, page
4.36).
ETC Replacement
1. Remove the cargo box access panel.
2. Remove wire harness from the ETC 1 .
Mounted to the intake plenum, the ETC acts as an

electronically controlled throttle body. The ETC controls
engine throttle operation to provide the proper air/fuel
ratio needed for engine operation at all RPM ranges. The
ETC controls engine RPM based off input provided by
the Pedal Position Sensor (PPS) and Electronic Control
Unit (ECU).
3. Remove the four bolts retaining the ETC housing to

intake plenum.
4. Remove the ETC housing and gasket from intake
plenum.
5. Reverse these steps for installation. Torque the ETC
housing retaining bolts and intake boot clamp to
specification.
ETC Housing Retaining Bolts:

7 ft-lb (10 Nm)
Intake Boot Clamp:

35 in-lb (4 Nm)
4.36
FUEL SYSTEM
PEDAL POSITION SENSOR (PPS) PPS Test
The PPS can be tested utilizing Digital Wrench by
Operation Overview verifying that throttle position readout varies as the pedal
is pressed. Reference the Data Display section and be
NOTE: DO NOT attempt to service the PPS. The PPS sure Throttle Position is displayed. With the ignition key
is a non-serviceable component and can only be on for at least 15 seconds and engine not running, the
tested using Digital Wrench. If the PPS is faulty, the Throttle Position will read approximately 9.6% when the
entire throttle pedal assembly must be replaced. pedal is released. With the pedal fully depressed, the
Throttle Position will vary depending on what gear you
Mounted to the throttle pedal assembly, the PPS acts as have selected.
a throttle position sensor. The PPS provides throttle
pedal position to the Electronic Control Unit (ECU) to High/Neutral/Park/Invalid 70%.
increase or decrease engine RPM using the Electronic Low 60%
Throttle Control (ETC). The PPS is the primary input
used to control engine speed during vehicle operation. Reverse 32%
4
Location The Pedal Position Sensor is calibrated to the throttle
The ETC switch 1 is located in the drivers foot control pedal. If the PPS is faulty, the throttle pedal assembly
area, mounted on the top of the throttle pedal assembly. must be replaced (see Chapter 4 PPS Replacement,
page 4.37).
PPS Replacement
NOTE: The PPS is calibrated to the throttle pedal. If
the PPS is faulty, the throttle pedal assembly must
be replaced.
1. Disconnect the PPS harness connection 2 located

on the throttle pedal.

negative (-) battery cable.
4.37
FUEL SYSTEM
3. Remove the three bolts 3 securing the throttle pedal
assembly to the frame support.
4. Remove the pedal assembly from the vehicle.

ETC Installation
5. Place the throttle pedal assembly on the mounting
studs and loosely install the three fasteners.
6. Torque the three mounting bolts to specification and
connect the PPS harness connection.
Throttle Pedal Mounting fasteners:

18 ft-lb (24 Nm)
7. Manually cycle the throttle pedal to verify the throttle

pedal moves freely.
8. Connect the negative (-) battery cable and install the
drivers seat.
4.38
FUEL SYSTEM
OXYGEN SENSOR (MY15 ONLY)
Oxygen Sensor Information
The 2015 RZR XP / XP4 1000 has a 4 wire heated
oxygen sensor. (see table 1.)
Table 1
CONNECTOR WIRE PIN AND WIRE

PIN COLOR CONNECTION
A Purple Heater Power
B White Heater Ground

4
Gray Sensor Output
C
D Black Sensor Ground
There are no valid static tests to perform on the oxygen

sensor. The sensor should be diagnosed using Digital
Wrench.
First, verify if there are any stored codes for the oxygen
sensor.
NOTE: The ECU must first run though the O2 sensor
time delay before a trouble code will be set. This may
take several minutes at idle to occur.
Short drive cycles and cold temperatures will both affect

the delay time of the O2 sensor (increases the delay).
The delay time ensures the oxygen sensor heater has
run long enough to provide accurate data.
4.39
FUEL SYSTEM
EFI DIAGNOSTICS 3. A set of three numbers will appear in the information
area.
Trouble Code Display (ETC) The first number (located far left) can range from 0
to 9. This number represents the total number of
NOTE: The diagnostic mode is accessible only trouble code present (example: 2 means there are
when the check engine MIL has been activated. 3 codes present).
Use the following procedure to display diagnostic trouble The second number (located top right) can be 2 to
codes that were activated during current ignition cycle 6 digits in length. This number equates to the
causing the MIL to illuminate. Diagnostic trouble codes suspected area of fault (SPN).
will remain stored in the gauge (even if MIL turns off) until
the key is turned off. The third number (located bottom right) can be 1
to 2 digits in length. This number equates to the
NOTE: If there is a diagnostic problem with the fault mode (FMI).
power steering system, the power steering MIL will
illuminate and blink in place of the check engine MIL.
1. If the trouble code (s) are not displayed, use the

MODE button to toggle until CK ENG displays on
the information display area.
4. If more than one code exists, press the MODE

button to advance to the next trouble code.
2. Press and hold the MODE button to enter the
5. To exit the diagnostic mode, press and hold the
diagnostics code menu.
MODE button or turn the ignition key OFF once the
codes are recorded.
4.40
FUEL SYSTEM
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE TABLE
COMPONENT CONDITION SPN FMI P-CODE
Voltage Too High 3 P1228
Accelerator Position 2 Voltage Too Low 29 4 P1227
Not Plausible 2 P1225
Throttle Position Sensor 1 Voltage Too Low 51 4 P0122
Signal Out of Range 2 P0121
Data Erratic or Intermittent (or
missing) 2 P0503
Vehicle Speed Signal 84
Received Vehicle Speed Has Error 19 C1069
Accelerator Position 1 Voltage Too Low 91 4 P0227
4
Not Plausible 2 P0225
Manifold Absolute Pressure Voltage Too High 3 P0108
Sensor (T-MAP) 102
Voltage Too Low 4 P0107
Intake Air Temperature (T- Voltage Too High 3 P0113
MAP) 105
Voltage Too Low 4 P0112
Engine Temperature Sensor Voltage Too Low 4 P0117
(ECT) 110
Temperature Too High 16 P0217
Engine Overheat Shutdown 0 P1217
P0563
System Power Voltage Too High 3
C1063
(Battery Potential / Power 168
Input) P0562
Voltage Too Low 4
C1064
Engine Speed (This is Error in Engine Speed
applicable when the EPS Computation 31 P121C
module gets the engine speed 190
from the ECM) Received Engine Speed Has Error 19 C1066
Error in Engine Speed
Engine Speed 400 31 P121D
Computation
Gear Sensor Signal Voltage Too Low 523 4 P0916
ECU Memory EEPROM: Read/Write Failure 628 12 C1073
Calibration Checksum/CRC Error 630 13 C1074
Crankshaft Position Sensor
Plausibility Fault 636 2 P0335
(CPS)
Camshaft Phase Sensor Circuit Fault 637 8 P0340
Driver Circuit Open / Grounded 5 P0261
Injector 1 (MAG) Driver Circuit Short to B+ 651 3 P0262
Driver Circuit Grounded 4 P1262
Injector 2 (PTO) Driver Circuit Short to B+ 652 3 P0265
Rear Differential Output 746
Driver Circuit Short to B+ 3 P1692
4.41
FUEL SYSTEM
Fan Relay Driver Circuit Driver Circuit Short to B+ 1071 3 P1482
Ignition Coil Primary Driver 1
(MAG) Driver Circuit Short to B+ 1268 3 P1353
Ignition Coil Primary Driver 2
(PTO) Driver Circuit Short to B+ 1269 3 P1354
Fuel Pump Driver Circuit Driver Circuit Short to B+ 1347 3 P0232
Voltage Too High 3 P16A2
ECU Output Supply Voltage 1 3597
Voltage Too Low 4 P16A1
Voltage Too High 3 P16A9
Voltage Too Low 4 P16A8
Voltage Too High 3 P17AA
Voltage Too Low 4 P17AB
ETC Accelerator Position
Sensor Outputs 1 & 2 Correlation Fault 65613 2 P1135
Correlation
Throttle Position Sensor 2 Voltage Too Low 520198 4 P0222
Signal Out of Range 2 P0221
All Wheel Drive Control Circuit
(AWD) Driver Circuit Short to B+ 520207 3 P1835
Steering Over Current Shut Current Above Normal or
520221 6 C1050
Down Grounded
Steering Excessive Current Current Above Normal or
520222 6 C1051
Error Grounded
Steering Torque Partial Failure Condition Exists 520223 31 C1052
Steering Torque Full Failure Condition Exists 520224 31 C1053
Greater than 110 C (230 F) 16 C1054
EPS Inverter Temperature 520225
Greater than 120 C (248 F) 0 C1055
EPS CAN Communications No RX Message for 2 Seconds 520226 2 U0100
Receive Error
EPS CAN Communications No TX Message for 2 Seconds 520227 2 U1100
Transmit Error
Position Encoder Error Position Encoder Error 520228 11 C1065
EPS Software Error Software Error 520229 12 C1070
IC CAN Communication with EPS Off Line (EPS DM1 not seen) 520230 31 U0131
EPS
EPS: Key On, Engine Off, 5 Minute
EPS Power Save Condition 520231 31 C1071
Power Save/Timeout
Idle Air Control Valve (IAC)
M17; IAC Stepper Pin 3 Driver Circuit Short to B+ 520268 3 P1519
4.42
FUEL SYSTEM
Accelerator Position / Brake
Condition Exists 520275 31 P150A
Position Interaction
Neither Position Sensor Passed
Throttle Position Sensor
(1 or 2 Indeterminable)
Test 520276
12 P150B 4
Position Sensor Correlation Fault 2 P150C
Maximum 3 P150D
Minimum 4 P150E
Throttle Body Control - Power Not Plausible 2 P151A
Stage 520277
Signal Error 8 P151B
Deactivated power stages due to
5V sensor supply error 31 P153F
Throttle Body Control - Return
Spring Check Failed Condition Exists 520278 31 P151C
Throttle Body Control -
Adaptation Aborted Condition Exists 520279 31 P151D
Throttle Body Control - Limp
Condition Exists 520280 31 P151E
Home Position Check Failed
Mechanical Stop Adaptation Condition Exists 520281 31 P152A
Failure
Repeated Adaptation Failed Condition Exists 520282 31 P152B
Maximum 3 P152C
Throttle Body Control Minimum 520283 4 P152D
Outside of Pedal Range (Level 1) 2 P152F
Condition Exists 520284 31 P152E
Position Deviation Fault
Brake Switch (1 or 2
Indeterminable) Brake Switch Correlation Fault 520285 2 P153E
ECU Monitoring Error Condition Exists 520286 31 P1540
ECU Monitoring Error (Level
3) Condition Exists 520287 31 P1541
ECU Monitoring of Injection
Cut Off (Level 1) Condition Exists 520288 31 P1542
ECU Monitoring of Injection
Cut Off (Level 2) Condition Exists 520289 31 P1543
Controller Option Setting Not
Programmed Out of Calibration 520290 13 P1544
4.43
FUEL SYSTEM
Requested Throttle Angle Not Condition Exists 520305 31 P1530
Plausible
ECU Analog to Digital
Condition Exists 520306 31 P1531
Converter Fault - No Load
ECU Analog to Digital
Converter Fault - Voltage Condition Exists 520307 31 P1532
Accelerator Sensor
Synchronicity Fault Sensor Condition Exists 520308 31 P1533
Difference Exceeds Limit
ECU Fault - ICO Condition Exists 520309 31 P1534
ECU Fault - Hardware
Disruption Condition Exists 520311 31 P1537
Data Erratic, Intermittent or
2 P0130
Incorrect
Voltage Above Normal or Shorted
Oxygen Sensor 1 3056 3 P0132
to High Source
Voltage Below Normal or Shorted
4 P0131
to Low Source
Voltage Above Normal or Shorted
to High Source 3 P0032
Oxygen Sensor Heater 1 Voltage Below Normal or Shorted 520209 4 P0031

to Low Source
Current below Normal or Open
5 P0030
Circuit
4.44
FUEL SYSTEM
EFI Troubleshooting Ignition timing incorrect
Fuel Starvation / Lean Mixture Belt dragging
Symptoms: Hard start or no start, bog, backfire, popping Dirty air filter
through intake / exhaust, hesitation, detonation, low
High percentage of cylinder leakdown (worn
power, spark plug erosion, engine runs hot, surging, high
engine)
idle, idle speed erratic.
Low compression (worn engine)
No fuel in tank
Spark plug(s) fouled
Restricted tank vent, or routed improperly
Spark plug wires loose or worn
Fuel lines or fuel injectors restricted
Faulty electrical connection
Fuel filter plugged
Fuel pump inoperative
Air leak in system 4
Intake air leak (throttle shaft, intake ducts, air box
cover)
Rich Mixture
Symptoms: Fouls spark plugs, black, sooty exhaust
smoke, rough idle, poor fuel economy, engine runs
rough/ misses, poor performance, bog, engine loads up,
backfire.
Air intake restricted (inspect intake duct)
Air filter dirty/plugged
Poor fuel quality (old fuel)
Fouled spark plug
Injector failure
Poor Idle
Symptom: Idle Too High (if > 1400 RPM when warm).
Throttle stop screw tampering
Throttle cable sticking, improperly adjusted, routed
incorrectly
Faulty electrical connection
Symptom: Idle Too Low (if < 1100 RPM when warm).
Plugged air filter
Leaking injector (rich condition)
Belt dragging
Throttle stop screw tampering
Symptom: Erratic Idle.

Throttle cable incorrectly adjusted
Air Leaks, dirty injector
TMAP damaged (check with Digital Wrench)
Tight valves (low compression or high leakdown)
4.45
FUEL SYSTEM
DIGITAL WRENCH OPERATION
Digital Wrench Diagnostic Software
Overview
NOTE: Refer to Section 2, 3 and 4 in the Instruction Manual provided in the Digital Wrench Diagnostic Kit to
install the Polaris Digital Wrench diagnostic software on your computer.
The Digital Wrench diagnostic software allows the technician to perform the following tests and observations:
View or clear trouble codes Create customer service account records
Analyze real-time engine data Perform output state control tests (some models)
Reflash ECU calibration files
Perform guided diagnostic procedures
Special Tools (also refer to the beginning of this chapter)
DIGITAL WRENCH DIAGNOSTIC SOFTWARE PART NUMBER

Digital Wrench Diagnostic Kit PU-47063-B
Digital Wrench Software: PU-48731
Standard Interface Cable: PU-47151
PU-47063-B (listed above) INCLUDES:
SmartLink Module Kit: PU-47471
USB-Serial Adapter Cable: PU-50621
Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit PU-43506-A
Fuel Pressure Gauge Adapter PV-48656
Fluke 73 Digital Multi-Meter or Fluke 77 DMM PV-43546 (Fluke 77: PV-43568)
Commercially Available (refer to diagnostic software
Laptop or Desktop Computer user manual or HELP section for minimum
requirements)
4.46
FUEL SYSTEM
Digital Wrench Software Version and Digital Wrench Updates
Update ID Updates are released for Digital Wrench via the
Always use the most current version of the Digital Internet at: http://polaris. diagsys. com. The Digital
Wrench software to ensure you have the latest updates Wrench website can also be accessed through the
or enhancements. New reprogramming files and guided dealer website at: www.polarisdealers.com.
diagnostic procedures are added to these updates as NOTE: Only authorized Polaris dealers and
they become available. distributors can access the dealer website.
Knowing what Digital Wrench version and update is
installed will help determine which updates are required. 1. Log on to www.polarisdealers.com.
2. Locate the Service and Warranty drop-down
NOTE: Versions and updates are subject to change.
menu.
1. Open the Digital Wrench software. Locate the 3. Click on Digital Wrench Updates.
version ID shown on the lower right side of the Digital
Wrench start-up screen.
4
4. The Digital Wrench portal website should appear in

a new web browser.
5. Click on Digital Wrench Version Updates.
2. Proceed to http://polaris. diagsys. com to see if a

newer update is available.
NOTE: You must already have the current

version installed before adding an update.
Updates will not install if you are using an older
version loaded on your PC.
3. If a newer update is available, it should be
downloaded before using Digital Wrench (see 6. If the update file date listed is newer than your
Chapter 4 Digital Wrench Updates, page 4.47. current version and update (see Chapter 4 Digital
Wrench Software Version and Update ID, page 4.47,
download the file.
7. Click on the link shown above, save the file to your
hard disk and then double-click the icon to start the
update process.
NOTE: Do not "run" or "open" the file from
where they are. Select "save" and download
them to your PC before running the install.
4.47
FUEL SYSTEM
8. When the update is complete, the version shown on Digital Wrench - Diagnostic Connector
the right side of the Digital Wrench start-up screen
Located under the hood connected to a sealed plug 1 .
should match the update you just downloaded.
NOTE: Versions and updates are subject to

change.
Follow these steps to connect the diagnostic interface
cable to the vehicle to allow Digital Wrench use:
Digital Wrench Communication Errors 1. Assemble the SmartLink Module and attach the PC
Interface Cable to your laptop.
If you experience problems connecting to a vehicle or
any Digital Wrench related problem, visit the Digital 2. Remove the protective cap from the Digital Wrench
Wrench Knowledge Base for the most current connector.
troubleshooting information, FAQs, downloads and 3. Connect the Vehicle Interface Cable to the Digital
software updates at: http://polaris.diagsys.com/. Wrench diagnostic connector.
4. Turn the ignition key to the ON position, select the
appropriate vehicle and wait for the status to display
Connected in the lower left corner of the screen.
5. Once connected, proceed with using Digital
Wrench.
4.48
FUEL SYSTEM
Guided Diagnostics Digital Wrench Serial Number Location
Guided diagnostics are available within Digital Wrench Open the configuration screen by clicking on the wrench
for all supported Trouble Codes (that is, any fault that will icon. The serial number is located on the right side of the
turn on the Check Engine indicator). screen.
In addition, guided diagnostics are also available for
many other electrical sub systems.
Diagnostic procedures are added to subsequent
versions of Digital Wrench as they become available.
Check your release version often and upgrade when
available to be sure you are using the most current
software available.
4.49
FUEL SYSTEM
Digital Wrench Feature Map
View, or clear trouble codes in the Enter / Edit / Change Vehicle

Engine Controller Memory. Information
This is the most viewed screen. View Enter customer and vehicle
sensor and ECU information in a grid, information and view ECU
meter, or chart format. Identification.
View information from the main ECU Load the Vehicle Home Page.
sensors.
Set up data capture and record Open the Software Configuration

functions. Screen.
Perform specialized testing and

Run the Help System.
adjustment functions service reports.
Prints the current screen as a

Open the ASSERT ASK form.
formatted printout.
4.50
FUEL SYSTEM
ECU Replacement CLOSE NON-ESSENTIAL PROGRAMS: Polaris
recommends that you DO NOT install non-
Although the need for ECU replacement is unlikely, a essential programs on a Service Department
specific replacement procedure is required to ensure that laptop. Camera detection software, Virus
all essential data contained within the original ECU is Scanners, Tool Bars, etc. may clog up memory if
transferred to the replacement ECU. running in the background and make it harder for
Refer to procedure and carefully follow all instructions the diagnostic software to operate.
provided in Digital Wrench. KNOW THE PROCESS: If you are not familiar with
the entire reprogramming process, review the
ECU Reprogramming (Reflash) HELP section of the diagnostic software before
Process Overview you attempt reprogramming. Click on the ? on the
tool bar or press F11. The information in the on-
The reprogramming feature is in the Special Tests menu line help is the most current and complete
on the Digital Wrench screen. Start Digital Wrench information available. This should be your first
and click on the Special Tests menu icon (red tool box). A step until you are familiar with the process.
technician should be familiar with the process and with
computer operation in general before attempting to COMMUNICATION PROBLEMS: If you have had 4
reprogram an ECU. problems communicating with a vehicle while
performing diagnostic functions, do not attempt
The Digital Wrench Engine Controller Reprogramming reprogramming until the cause has been identified
(or Reflash) feature allows reprogramming of the ECU and fixed. Check all connections, and be sure
fuel and ignition map. To successfully reprogram the battery voltage is as specified.
ECU, an Authorization Key must be obtained by entering
a Request Code in the box provided on the Reflash
Authorization site. The Request Code is automatically Proceed to http://polaris. diagsys. com for specific
generated by Digital Wrench during the reprogramming information and FAQs on how to troubleshoot
process. The Reflash Authorization site is located under communication problems.
the Service and Warranty drop down menu on the
dealer website at: www.polarisdealers.com.
NOTE: Failure to follow the reprogramming
instructions completely and correctly can result in
an engine that does not run! Replacement ECUs are
programmed as no-start and require a reflash for
them to work.
Reprogramming (Reflash) Tips:

BATTERY VOLTAGE: The majority of problems
with reprogramming can be attributed to a low
battery. Be sure the battery voltage (no load) is at
least 13 volts and at least 12.5 volts with the key DONT DISTURB THE PC: While reprogramming
ON. Connect a battery charger if necessary to is in progress, dont move the mouse and dont
bring voltage level above minimum. Fully charge touch the keyboard. The process only takes a few
the battery before you attempt to reprogram. minutes, and is best left alone until complete.
DEDICATED LAPTOP: Best results are obtained
using a laptop computer that is dedicated to Reprogramming (Reflash) Procedure:
Digital Wrench. A laptop that is used by a If you are not familiar with the reprogramming process,
variety of people and in several applications review the Reprogramming (Reflash) Tips before you
around the dealership is more likely to cause a begin. Follow the on-screen instructions as you progress
reprogramming problem than one dedicated to through the steps. If you encounter a problem, always
Digital Wrench diagnostics only. check the On-Line help for current tips and information.
OBTAINING THE LATEST UPDATE: 1. Verify the most current update has been downloaded
Reprogramming updates are provided periodically and loaded into Digital Wrench. See
and contain the most recent calibrations (see
Chapter 4 Digital Wrench Updates, page 4.47. 2. Connect SmartLink Module cables to PC and
vehicle. See, page 4.48
3. Open the Digital Wrench program.
4.51
FUEL SYSTEM
4. Select the model year, product line and vehicle 8. Copy (CTRL +C) the Request Code that will be
description by selecting the Change Vehicle Type required on the dealer website in the next step. DO
icon. NOT CLOSE Digital Wrench or the Request Code
will be invalid. NOTE: All characters are letters;
there are no numbers in a request code.
5. Select the Special Tests icon.
NOTE: Request Codes and Authorization Keys

must be entered EXACTLY as they appear on the
6. Select Engine Controller Reprogramming. screen.
9. Go to www.polarisdealers.com and click on ReFlash

Authorization from the Service and Warranty drop-
down menu.
10. Enter or paste the Request Code into the box.

7. Select the file you want to load into the ECU then
click the Continue icon to proceed to the Integrity
Check and obtain a Request Code.
4.52
FUEL SYSTEM
11. Select the same file type from the list that you 14. At this point the reflash process will begin. Do not
selected previously while in Digital Wrench. Enter touch the vehicle or PC during the process.
the VIN along with the customers name and
address. When completed, click the Authorize button
once to proceed.
15. Once the ECU reprogramming procedure is

complete, click the Finish button on the screen.
Verify the reflash was a success by starting the
vehicle.
4
12. An Authorization Key will appear in the upper left
corner of the screen. Copy this key exactly as it
appears.
13. Enter or paste the Authorization Key in the box

located on the Digital Wrench screen. Click the
Continue button and follow instructions provided on
the screen to complete reprogramming procedure.
4.53
FUEL SYSTEM
NOTES
4.54
PVT SYSTEM
CHAPTER 5
PVT SYSTEM
SPECIAL TOOLS AND SUPPLIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2
PVT SYSTEM TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2
RZR XP 1000 CLUTCH CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3
2014-2015 RZR 1000 XP4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3
2015 RZR XP 1000 HIGH LIFTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3
PVT SYSTEM OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4
GENERAL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4
DRIVE CLUTCH OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4
DRIVEN CLUTCH OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
PVT BREAK-IN (DRIVE BELT / CLUTCHES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
MAINTENANCE / INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6 5
OVERHEATING / DIAGNOSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7
PVT SYSTEM SERVICE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8
PVT COVERS AND DUCT COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8
2015 XP / XP4 PVT COVERS AND DUCTING COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9
PVT COVERS AND DUCTING COMPONENTS (HIGH LIFTER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.10
PVT DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.11
PVT ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.13
DRIVE BELT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.15
BELT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.15
BELT INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.16
BELT INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.16
PVT BREAK-IN (DRIVE BELT / CLUTCHES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.16
DRIVE CLUTCH SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.17
DRIVE CLUTCH ASSEMBLY VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.17
DRIVE CLUTCH DISASSEMBLY / INSPECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.18
NEEDLE BEARING INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.19
SHIFT WEIGHT INSPECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.20
BUTTON TO TOWER CLEARANCE INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.20
SPIDER REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.21
ROLLER, PIN, AND THRUST WASHER INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.21
CLUTCH INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.22
MOVEABLE SHEAVE BUSHING INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.23
BUSHING SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.23
DRIVE CLUTCH ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.25
DRIVEN CLUTCH SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.28
CLUTCH DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.28
BUSHING SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.31
CLUTCH ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.32
ASSEMBLY VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.36
TROUBLESHOOTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.37
5.1
PVT SYSTEM
GENERAL INFORMATION PVT System Torque Specifications
SPECIAL TOOLS AND SUPPLIES ITEM TORQUE VALUE
PART NUMBER TOOL DESCRIPTION Drive Clutch Retaining Bolt 96 ft-lb (130 Nm)
2872085 Drive Clutch Puller Driven Clutch Retaining Bolt 55 ft-lb (75 Nm)
2871056 Driven Clutch Puller
PVT Inner Cover Bolts 12 ft-lb (16 Nm)
9314177 Clutch Holding Wrench
PVT Outer Cover Screws 48 in-lb (5 Nm)
2871358-A Clutch Holding Fixture
250 ft-lb (339 Nm)
PU- 50578 Spider Jam Nut Socket
(Apply 0.1 mL
Clutch Spider Removal and Spider Jamb Nut Loctite 7088 Primer
2870341 and 0.1 mL Loctite
Installation Tool
620)
2870910 Roller Pin Tool
Drive Clutch Bushing Replacement 290 ft-lb (393 Nm)
2871226 (Apply 0.4 mL
Tool Kit
Drive Clutch Spider Loctite 7088 Primer
2870386 Piston Pin Puller
and 0.4 mL Loctite
PU-50518 Driven Clutch Compression Tool 620)
2878925 Shock Spanner / Clutch Spreader Drive Clutch Cover Plate 9 ft-lb (12 Nm)
Bosch Automotive Service Solutions: 1-800-345- Shift Weight Fasteners 20 in-lb (2 Nm)
Driven Clutch Helix
48 in-lb (5 Nm)
SPECIAL SUPPLIES PART Retaining Screws
NUMBER
Loctite 620 648 and 7088 N/A
Primer
RTV Silicone Sealer 8560054
5.2
PVT SYSTEM
RZR XP 1000 CLUTCH CHART
Meters (0-6000) (1323098) (7043924) (3234452)
2014 XP 1000 (Feet) 1800-3700 26-55 White / Orange Red
(6000 - 12000) (1322982) (7043924) (3234452)
0-1800 26-63 Orange / Black Red
Meters (0-6000) (1323176) (1323176) (3234452)
2015 XP 1000 (Feet) 1800-3700 26-59 Orange / Black Red
(6000-12000) (1322981) (7044338) (3234452)
2014-2015 RZR 1000 XP4

Meters (0-6000) (1323177) (7043924) (3234452)
2014 XP4 1000 (Feet)
(6000 - 12000) (1323098) (7043924) (3234452)
0-1800 26-65 White / Orange Red 5
Meters (0-6000) (1323260 (7043924) (3234452)
2015 XP4 1000 (Feet)
(6000 - 12000) (1322981) (7043924) (3234452)
2015 RZR XP 1000 High Lifter

High Lifter Meters 0-1800 26-61 White / Orange Red
Edition (Feet) (0-6000) (1323260) (7043924) (3234452)
5.3
PVT SYSTEM
PVT SYSTEM OVERVIEW Drive Clutch Operation
Drive clutches primarily sense engine RPM. The two
General Operation major components which control its shifting function are
the shift weights and the coil spring. Whenever engine
RPM is increased, centrifugal force is created, causing
the shift weights to push against rollers on the moveable
WARNING sheave, which is held open by coil spring preload. When
this force becomes higher than the preload in the spring,
All PVT maintenance or repairs should be performed by the outer sheave moves inward and contacts the drive
a certified Polaris Master Service Dealer (MSD) belt. This motion pinches the drive belt between the
technician who has received the proper training and spinning sheaves and causes it to rotate, which in turn
understands the procedures outlined in this manual. rotates the driven clutch.
Because of the critical nature and precision
balance incorporated into the PVT components, it is At lower RPM, the drive belt rotates low in the drive
absolutely essential that no disassembly or repair clutch sheaves. As engine RPM increases, centrifugal
be made without factory authorized special tools force causes the drive belt to be forced upward on drive
and service procedures. clutch sheaves.
The Polaris Variable Transmission (PVT) consists of

three major assemblies:
1) The Drive Clutch
2) The Driven Clutch
3) The Drive Belt
The internal components of the drive clutch and driven
clutch control engagement (initial vehicle movement),
clutch upshift and backshift. During the development of
the Polaris vehicle, the PVT system is matched first to
the engine power curve; then to average riding
conditions and the vehicles intended usage. Therefore,
modifications or variations of components at random are
never recommended. Proper clutch setup and careful
inspection of existing components must be the primary
objective when troubleshooting and tuning.
5.4
PVT SYSTEM
Driven Clutch Operation PVT Break-In (Drive Belt / Clutches)
Driven clutches primarily sense torque, opening and A proper break-in of the clutches and drive belt will
closing according to the forces applied to it from the drive ensure a longer life and better performance. Break in the
belt and the transmission input shaft. If the torque clutches and drive belt by operating at slower speeds
resistance at the transmission input shaft is greater than during the 10 hours as recommended (see Chapter 3
the load from the drive belt, the drive belt is kept at the Engine Break-In Period, page 3.32 for break-in
outer diameter of the driven clutch sheaves. example). Avoid aggressive acceleration and high speed
operation during the break-in period. After installation of
As engine RPM and horsepower increase, the load from
a new drive belt, break-in new drive belts by operating at
the drive belt increases, resulting in the belt rotating up
slower speeds during the break-in period ~50 miles.
toward the outer diameter of the drive clutch sheaves
Carry only light loads. Avoid aggressive acceleration,
and downward into the sheaves of the driven clutch. This
high speed operation, and extended time at a specific
action, which increases the driven clutch speed, is called
RPM during the break-in period. In addition, when
upshifting.
operating in sand/dune environments, avoid extended
Should the throttle setting remain the same and the low speed operation at high throttle.
vehicle is subjected to a heavier load, the drive belt
rotates back up toward the outer diameter of the driven
clutch and downward into the sheaves of the drive clutch.
This action, which decreases the driven clutch speed, is
called backshifting.
In situations where loads vary (such as uphill and
5
downhill) and throttle settings are constant, the drive and
driven clutches are continually shifting to maintain
optimum engine RPM. At full throttle a perfectly matched
PVT system should hold engine RPM at the peak of the
power curve. This RPM should be maintained during
clutch upshift and backshift. In this respect, the PVT
system is similar to a power governor. Rather than vary
throttle position, as a conventional governor does, the
PVT system changes engine load requirements by either
upshifting or backshifting.
5.5
PVT SYSTEM
Maintenance / Inspection
Under normal use the PVT system will provide years of
trouble free operation. Periodic inspection and
maintenance is required to keep the system operating at
peak performance. The following list of items should be
inspected and maintained to ensure maximum
performance and service life of PVT components. Refer
to the troubleshooting checklist at the end of this chapter
for more information.
1. Belt Inspection.
2. Drive and Driven Clutch Buttons and Bushings,
Drive Clutch Shift Weights and Pins, Drive Clutch
Spider Rollers and Roller Pins, Drive and Driven
Clutch Springs.
3. Sheave Faces. Clean and inspect for wear.
4. PVT System Sealing. Refer to the appropriate
illustration (s) on the following pages. The PVT
system is air cooled by fins on the drive and driven
clutch stationary sheaves. The fins create a low
pressure area in the crankcase casting, drawing air
into the system through an intake duct. The opening
for this intake duct is located at a high point on the
vehicle (location varies by model). The intake duct
draws fresh air through a vented cover. All
connecting air ducts (as well as the inner and outer
covers) must be properly sealed to ensure clean air
is being used for cooling the PVT system and also to
prevent water and other contaminants from entering
the PVT area. This is especially critical on units
subjected to frequent water forging.
5.6
PVT SYSTEM
Overheating / Diagnosis
During routine maintenance, or whenever PVT system overheating is evident, its important to check the inlet and
outlet duct for obstructions. Obstructions to air flow through the ducts will significantly increase PVT system operating
temperatures. The vehicle should be operated in Low when extended low vehicle speed operation is anticipated.
CLUTCH DRIVE BELT & COVER RELATED ISSUES: DIAGNOSIS

POSSIBLE CAUSES SOLUTIONS / WHAT TO DO
Loading the vehicle into a tall trailer Shift transmission to Low during loading of the vehicle to prevent belt
when in high range. burning.
Starting out going up a steep incline When starting out on an incline, use Low gear. Shift transmission to Low
from a stopped position. during loading of the vehicle to prevent belt burning.
Driving at low RPM or low ground Drive at higher speed or use Low. The use of Low is highly recommended
speed (at approximately 3-7 MPH). for cooler PVT operating temperatures and longer component life.
Warm engine at least 5 min., then with transmission in neutral, advance
Insufficient engine warm-up when
throttle to approx. 1/8 throttle in short bursts, 5 to 7 times. The belt will
exposed to low ambient temperatures.
become more flexible and prevent belt burning.
Slow and easy clutch engagement. Fast, effective use of the throttle for efficient engagement. 5
Shift the transmission to Low, carefully use fast, aggressive throttle
Stuck in mud or snow. application to engage clutch. WARNING: Excessive throttle may cause
loss of control and vehicle overturn.
Climbing over large objects from a Shift the transmission to Low, carefully use fast, aggressive, brief throttle
stopped position. application to engage clutch. WARNING: Excessive throttle may cause
loss of control and vehicle overturn.
Remove the PVT drain plug. Shift the transmission to neutral. Using the
throttle, vary the engine rpm from idle to full throttle. Repeat several times
Belt slippage from water or snow
as required. During this procedure, the throttle should not be held at the
ingestion into the PVT system.
full position for more than 10 seconds. Clutch seals should be inspected
for damage if repeated leaking occurs.
Clutch component inspection should be performed by a Polaris MSD
Clutch malfunction.
certified technician.
Fouled spark plugs, foreign material in fuel tank, restricted fuel lines, or
Poor engine performance.
faulty fuel pump may cause symptoms similar to clutching malfunction.
Low: Basic operational speeds less than 7 MPH, riding through rough
terrain (swamps, mountains, ect.), or low ground speeds and when
GENERAL RANGE OPERATION continuously operating at speeds less than 30 mph in sand/dune
GUIDELINES: environments.
High: High ground speeds, or speeds above 7 MPH.
Operating in Low Gear

Low gear should be used when riding through rough terrain or when basic operational ground speeds are less than 7
MPH. Use High gear when basic operational ground speeds are more than 7 MPH.
General Sand / Dune Driving
The use of Low gear when continuously operating at speeds less than 30 mph will greatly increase belt life in sand/
dune environments. Note: Do not shift from Low to High without coming to a complete stop.
NOTE: Using High gear for heavy loads, hilly terrain, sand/dune environments, or in wet, muddy conditions
will increase the chance of drive belt burning.
5.7
PVT SYSTEM
PVT SYSTEM SERVICE
PVT Covers and Duct Components
1 CLUTCH DUCT INTAKE ASSEMBLY 11 BRACKET, COVER GUARD

2 CLAMP, WORM 12 AIR INLET DUCT
3 DECAL, CAUTION 13 SCREW
4 BOLT and WASHER 14 SCREW
5 COVER ASSEMBLY, OUTER 15 NUT, NYLOK
6 O-RING 16 BRACKET, BELT SCREEN
7 DRAIN PLUG, COVER 17 HOSE, AIR OUTLET
8 SEAL, COVER 18 INTAKE BOOT
9 SCREW 19 SEAL, COVER
10 COVER ASSEMBLY
5.8
PVT SYSTEM
2015 XP / XP4 PVT Covers and Ducting Components
1 Inlet Duct 10 Outer Cover Seal

2 Band Clamp 11 Inner Cover Seal
3 Intake Hose 12 Guard Plate
4 Boot 13 Outlet Duct Screen
5 Clutch Outlet Duct 14 Intake Hose Bracket
6 Inlet Duct 15 Outer Cover Screws (8 ft-lbs, 11 Nm)
7 Outlet Duct 16 Clutch Cover Drain Screw
8 Outer Clutch Cover 17 Inner Cover Screws (8 ft-lbs, 11 Nm)
9 Inner Clutch Cover
5.9
PVT SYSTEM
PVT Covers and Ducting Components (High Lifter)
1 Inlet/Outlet Duct 11 Screw, Inlet Duct

2 Band Clamp 12 Retaining Bracket, Upper Exhaust Hose
3 Upper Intake Hose 13 Inner Cover Seal
4 Upper Exhaust Hose 14 Inner Clutch Cover
5 Middle Intake Hose 15 Guard Plate
6 Lower Intake Hose 16 Inner Clutch Cover Screw (7)
7 Lower Exhaust Hose 17 Outer Cover Seal
8 Outlet Duct 18 Outer Clutch Cover
9 Inlet Duct 19 Outer Clutch Cover Screw (8)
10 Boot 20 PVT Drain Screw
5.10
PVT SYSTEM
PVT Disassembly 7. Remove the eight clutch cover screws 2 and remove
the outer clutch cover from the vehicle.
CAUTION
Correct Drive Clutch Puller P/N 2872085
8. Mark the drive belt direction of rotation and remove

drive belt (see Chapter 5 Belt Removal, page
5.15). 5
9. Remove the driven clutch retaining bolt and driven
clutch.
10. Install the Drive Clutch Holding Tool (9314177-A) on
1. Place transmission in neutral. the drive clutch.
2. Raise and support the vehicle.
CAUTION
Serious injury may result if machine tips or falls. Be
sure machine is secure before beginning this service
procedure.
3. Remove the left rear wheel.

4. Remove the lower mounting bolt and nut 1 from the
left rear shock. Discard the nut.
5. Swing shock outward toward the front of the vehicle.
6. If servicing a 2015 RZR XP4 1000, Loosen the hose
clamp attaching PVT intake hose to the outer clutch
cover and disengage the hose from the outer clutch
cover. Drive Clutch Holding Tool 9314177-A
5.11
PVT SYSTEM
11. Remove the drive clutch retaining bolt and remove 13. Loosen the hose clamp attaching PVT inlet duct to
the drive clutch using Drive Clutch Puller 2872085. the inner clutch cover. Disengage the hose from the
inner clutch cover.
Drive Clutch Puller 2872085 14. Loosen hose clamps 3 that attach clutch outlet duct
to inner clutch cover. Disengage hose from the
cover.
crankshaft.
12. Remove the four push rivets that secure the upper
guard plate to the top of the inner PVT cover. Make
note of the routing of the fuel lines, vent line, battery
cable and wire harness for proper assembly.
15. Remove the seven bolts 4 that retain inner clutch

cover to engine and transmission. Remove inner
clutch cover.
5.12
PVT SYSTEM
PVT Assembly 6. Install the protective cover and the four push rivets
1. Inspect inner clutch cover. Replace if cracked or that secure the cover to the top of the inner PVT
damaged. cover.
2. Inspect the seal on the transmission input shaft.

Replace if damaged.
3. Inspect inner clutch cover seal (engine side).
Replace if cracked, torn or damaged.
7. Install the four inner clutch cover bolts and washers

that retain the cover to the transmission. Torque bolts 5
to specification.
8. Install the three inner clutch cover bolts and washers
that retain the cover to the engine. Torque bolts to
4. Apply silicone around all seven screw holes on the specification.
inner clutch cover.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT apply silicone on drive
and driven shaft inner cover donuts.
5. Install and properly align the inner clutch cover. Be Inner Clutch Cover Bolts:
sure the fuel line, vent line and battery cables are 12 ft-lb (16 Nm)
properly routed through the guard plate as shown 1 .
9. Clean the splines inside the driven clutch and on the
transmission input shaft.
10. Apply a light film of grease to the splines on the
shaft.
11. Install the driven clutch, washer and retaining bolt.
Torque to specification.
Driven Clutch Retaining Bolt:

55 ft-lb (75 Nm)
12. Clean the end of the taper on the crankshaft and the
tapered bore inside the drive clutch.
13. Install the drive clutch onto the engine.
5.13
PVT SYSTEM
14. Install the Drive Clutch Holding Tool (9314177-A) 19. Install the left rear shock lower mounting bolt and the
and torque the retaining bolt to specification. left rear wheel. Torque fasteners to specification.

70 ft-lbs (95 Nm)
Wheel Nuts:
120 ft-lbs (163 Nm)
Drive Clutch Retaining Bolt:

96 ft-lb (130 Nm)
15. Install the drive belt noting direction of belt rotation

(see Chapter 5 Belt Installation, page 5.16). If a
new belt is installed, install so numbers can be easily
read.
16. Install a new outer clutch cover seal with the colored
stripe facing the inner clutch cover.
17. Reinstall outer clutch cover and secure with screws.
Outer Clutch Cover Retaining Screws:

48 in-lb (5 Nm)
18. Install inlet and outlet ducts and tighten hose clamps.
5.14
PVT SYSTEM
DRIVE BELT 4. Insert clutch spreader tool (2877408 or 2878925)
into the driven clutch as shown (tool included with
Belt Removal vehicles tool kit).
NOTE: Inspect the entire clutch outlet duct

(including the outlet duct screen) when replacing a
drive belt. Remove any debris found in the outlet
duct or outlet duct screen 1 .
5
NOTE: Make sure the tool is square with the
moveable sheave surface of the driven clutch.
5. Rotate tool towards the clutch to open the sheaves.

1. Remove the eight screws that retain the outer clutch
cover.
2. Maneuver the outer clutch cover outward as shown
below to access the drive belt.
6. Walk the belt out of the driven clutch and drive

clutch. Remove the belt from the vehicle.
NOTE: Removal of left rear wheel or left rear

shock is NOT necessary for belt replacement.
3. Mark the drive belt direction of rotation so that it can

be installed in the same direction.
5.15
PVT SYSTEM
Belt Inspection PVT Break-In (Drive Belt / Clutches)
1. Inspect belt for hour glassing (extreme circular wear A proper break-in of the clutches and drive belt will
in at least one spot and on both sides of the belt). ensure a longer life and better performance. Break in the
Hour glassing occurs when the drive train does not clutches and drive belt by operating at slower speeds
move and the drive clutch engages the belt. during the 10 hour break-in period as recommended (see
2. Inspect belt for loose cords, missing cogs, cracks, Chapter 3 Engine Break-In Period, page 3.32 for
abrasions, thin spots, or excessive wear. Compare break-in example). Pull only light loads. Avoid aggressive
belt measurements with a new drive belt. Replace if acceleration and high speed operation during the break-
necessary. in period.
3. Belts with thin spots, burn marks, etc., should be

replaced to eliminate noise, vibration, or erratic PVT
operation. See the Troubleshooting Chart at the end
of this chapter for possible causes.
Belt Installation
NOTE: Be sure to install belt in the same direction
as it was removed.
1. With the clutch spreader tool installed (2877408 or

2878925), loop the belt over the drive clutch and
over the driven clutch.
2. Rotate the driven clutch and walk the belt into the
clutch.
3. Remove the clutch spreader tool from driven clutch
4. Rotate / spin the driven clutch and belt approximately
5-7 times to properly seat the belt in the driven
clutch.
5. Install the outer clutch cover and eight screws.
Outer Clutch Cover Retaining Screws:

48 in-lb (5 Nm)
5.16
PVT SYSTEM
DRIVE CLUTCH SERVICE
Drive Clutch Assembly View
5.17
PVT SYSTEM
Drive Clutch Disassembly / Inspection 4. Inspect cover bushing 1 . The outer cover bushing is
manufactured with a Teflon coating. Wear is
determined by the amount of Teflon remaining on
the bushing.
WARNING
The clutch assembly is a precisely balanced unit. Never

replace parts with used parts from another clutch
assembly!
1. Using a permanent marker, mark the cover, spider,

moveable and stationary sheaves for reference, as
the cast in X's may not have been in alignment
before disassembly.
Cover Bushing Inspection:

Replace the cover bushing if more brass than
Teflon is visible on the bushing. Refer to bushing
replacement in this chapter.
5. Inspect area on shaft where bushing rides for wear,

galling, nicks, or scratches. Replace clutch assembly
if worn or damaged.
2. Mark the stationary sheave and clutch shaft to verify 6. Remove and inspect the clutch spring 2 . Refer to
the shaft has not rotated in the sheave after Drive Clutch Spring Inspection.
tightening the spider during clutch assembly.
7. Remove and inspect limiter spacer(s) 3 . Replace if

necessary.
NOTE: Upon reassembly, if the reference marks
created in step 2 are not in alignment, the clutch CAUTION
will not be in balance and the assembly MUST be
replaced. DO NOT reassemble the drive clutch without the limiter
spacer. Belt life will be greatly reduced.
3. Remove cover bolts evenly in a cross pattern and
remove cover plate.
Drive Clutch Spring Inspection
5.18
PVT SYSTEM
CAUTION Needle Bearing Inspection

1. Rotate the clutch bearing in both clockwise and
Never shim a drive clutch spring to increase its counter-clockwise directions. The non-braking
compression rate. This may result in complete stacking needle bearing should rotate in both directions on
of the coils and subsequent clutch cover failure. the shaft with only a slight amount of drag.
2. Verify there is no binding or rough spots. If problems
The drive clutch spring is one of the most critical are noted continue with disassembly.
components of the PVT system. It is also one of the
easiest to service. Due to the severe relaxation the
spring is subject to during operation, it should always
be inspected for tolerance limits during any clutch
operation diagnosis or repair.
Check to see that spring coils are parallel to one
another using a straight-edge. Distortion of the
spring indicates stress fatigue, requiring
replacement.
Drive Clutch Spring Specifications

Part Number 7043924
Color White / Orange
Free Length 3.563 (90.50 mm)
Spring Wire Diameter 0.177 (4.50 mm)
5.19
PVT SYSTEM
Shift Weight Inspection Button To Tower Clearance Inspection
1. Remove shift weight bolts and weights. Inspect the 1. Inspect the button to tower clearance as shown.
contact surface of each weight. The surface should Replace the drive clutch if clearance is beyond
be smooth and free of dents or gall marks. Inspect specification.
the weight pivot bore and bolts for wear or galling. If
weights or bolts are worn or broken, replace in sets
of three with new bolts and nuts.
WARNING
The clutch assembly is a precisely balanced unit. Never

replace parts with used parts from another clutch
assembly!
NOTE: A damaged shift weight is usually

caused by a damaged or stuck roller in the spider
assembly. See Drive Clutch Roller Pin and
Button Service.
Button to Tower Clearance:

0.000-.012 (.000-.304 mm)
2. Inspect the tower sheave surfaces. Replace the

drive clutch if worn, damaged or cracked.
5.20
PVT SYSTEM
Spider Removal Roller, Pin, and Thrust Washer Inspection
1. Install clutch onto holding fixture (2871358-A) and 1. Inspect all rollers, roller bushings and roller pins by
secure in bench vice. Loosen and remove the spider pulling a flat metal rod across the roller.
jam nut (counterclockwise) using the Clutch Spider
2. Turn roller with your finger. If you notice resistance,
Nut Socket (PU-50578).
galling, or flat spots, replace the drive clutch.
5
NOTE: Rollers, pins, thrust washers and buttons
Clutch Spider Nut Socket: PU-50578 are not serviceable at the time of this publication.
Clutch Holding Fixture: PN 2871358-A
2. Loosen and remove the spider (counterclockwise)

using Clutch Spider Removal / Installation Tool (PN
2870341).
Spider Removal / Installation Tool: 2870341

Clutch Holding Fixture: 2871358-A
5.21
PVT SYSTEM
Clutch Inspection 4. Inspect surface of shaft for pitting, grooves or
damage. Measure the outside diameter and
NOTE: Remove cover, spring, limiter spacer and compare to specifications. Replace the drive clutch
spider following the instructions for drive clutch assembly if shaft is worn or damaged.
disassembly, then proceed as follows:
1. Remove and inspect the moveable sheave spacer 1

. Visually inspect the spacer for damage and replace
if necessary.
Shaft Diameter:
Standard: 1.3725 - 1.3712
(34.8615 - 34.8488 mm)
5. Visually inspect the thrust washers for damage.

Measure the thickness and compare to specification.
Replace if worn or damaged.
Thrust Washer Thickness:

2. Remove the moveable clutch sheave. Standard: .030 (.76 mm)
3. Lift bearing 3 and thrust washers 2 off the shaft. Service Limit: .025 (.64 mm)
Replace as an assembly if worn, damaged, or if
operational problems were noted prior to
disassembly.
5.22
PVT SYSTEM
Moveable Sheave Bushing Inspection Bushing Service
Inspect the Teflon coating (arrow) on the moveable
NOTE: Special Tools Required
sheave bushing. Inspect both sheaves for signs of wear,
grooving or cracking. De-glaze sheave surfaces with a
3M Scotch-Brite Pad if needed. EBS Clutch Bushing Tool Kit - 2201379
Moveable Sheave Bushing Inspection: ITEM QTY. PART # TOOL DESCRIPTION
Replace the cover bushing if more brass than
Teflon is visible on the bushing. Refer to bush- A, B 1 5132027 EBS Puller Tool
ing replacement in this chapter.
C 1 5132501 EBS Puller Nut
D 1 5132029 EBS Main Adapter
EBS Bushing Removal
E 1 5132028
Tool Instructions
1 9915111 Instructions
Additional Special Tools

QTY. PART # TOOL DESCRIPTION 5
Clutch Bushing Replacement Tool
1 2871226
Kit
1 2870386 Piston Pin Puller
*Clutch Bushing Replacement Tool Kit (PN 2871226)
ITEM QTY. PART # TOOL DESCRIPTION

P-90 Drive/Driven
#2 1 5020628 Clutch Bushing Install
Tool
Drive Clutch Cover
#3 1 5020629 Bushing Removal
/Installation Tool
P-90 Driven Clutch
#5 1 5020631 Cover Bushing
Removal Tool
#8 1 5020632 Main Puller Adapter
#9 1 5010279 Adapter Reducer

Number Two Puller
#10 1 5020633 Adapter
5.23
PVT SYSTEM
5. Install main adapter (Item D) onto puller.
NOTE: Bushings are installed at the factory using

Loctite 648. In order to remove bushings it will be
necessary to apply heat evenly to the area around 6. With towers pointing toward the vise, slide sheave
each bushing. Clean all residual Loctite from onto puller rod.
bushing bore prior to installing new bushing. 7. Install removal tool (Item A, B) into center of sheave
with A side toward sheave.
NOTE: Use Bushing Tool PA-47336.
CAUTION
8. Install nut (C) onto end of puller rod and hand
Clutch components will be hot! In order to avoid serious tighten. Turn puller barrel to increase tension on
burns, wear insulated gloves during the removal sheave if needed. Using a hand held propane torch,
process. apply heat around outside of bushing until tiny
smoke tailings appear.
9. Turn sheave counterclockwise on puller rod until it
Moveable Sheave - Bushing Removal comes free. Lift sheave off puller.
1. Remove clutch as outlined previously in this chapter. 10. Remove nut from puller rod and set aside.
2. Install handle end of the Piston Pin Puller (PN 11. Pull bushing removal tool and adapter from puller
2870386) securely into bench vise and lightly grease rod. Remove bushing from tool and discard.
puller threads.
Moveable Sheave - Bushing Installation
12. Place main adapter 8 on puller.
Piston Pin Puller: PN 2870386
3. Remove nut from puller rod and set aside.

4. Install puller adapter 10 from kit PN 2871226.
5.24
PVT SYSTEM
13. Apply Loctite 648 evenly to bushing bore inside 31. Working from inside of cover, insert new bushing and
moveable sheave. bushing installation tool into center of clutch cover.
14. Set bushing in place on sheave. 32. With main adapter on puller, insert cover onto puller
rod, placing outside of cover toward vise.
15. Insert installation puller tool (Item A/B) with A side
down, into center of bushing. 33. Install nut on rod and hand tighten. Turn puller barrel
to apply more tension if needed.
16. With towers pointing upward, slide sheave, bushing
and tool onto puller rod. 34. Turn clutch cover counterclockwise on puller rod until
bushing is seated.
17. Install nut on puller rod and hand tighten. Turn barrel
to apply additional tension if needed. 35. Remove nut from puller rod. Take installation tool
and clutch cover off rod.
18. Turn sheave counterclockwise, making sure bushing
is drawn straight into bore. Continue until bushing is
seated. Drive Clutch Assembly
20. Remove sheave from puller. CAUTION
21. Remove installation tool.
Do not apply oil or grease to the bushings.
Cover Bushing Removal
5
22. Install main adapter 8 on puller. Reassemble the drive clutch in the following sequence.
Be sure marks that were made during disassembly are
aligned during each phase of assembly.
23. Install adapter reducer 9 . 1. Install the shift weights, bolts and nuts onto the
24. From outside of clutch cover, insert removal tool 3 moveable sheave. Torque shift weight bolts to
into cover bushing. specification.
25. With inside of cover toward vise, slide cover onto

puller.
26. Install nut onto puller rod and hand tighten. Turn
puller barrel to increase tension as needed.
Shift Weight Fasteners:
27. Turn clutch cover counterclockwise on puller rod until 20 in-lb (2 Nm)
bushing is removed and cover comes free.
29. Remove bushing and bushing removal tool from
puller. Discard bushing.
Cover Bushing Installation
30. Apply Loctite 648 evenly to bushing bore in the
cover.
5.25
PVT SYSTEM
2. Install the non-braking needle bearing 1 , the two 6. Install clutch onto holding fixture (PN 2871358-A)
washers 2 and the spacer 4 onto the stationary and secure in a bench vice. Tighten the spider using
sheave 3 . Clutch Spider Tool (PN 2870341). Torque spider to
specification.
3. Install moveable sheave onto stationary sheave

shaft. Be sure the moveable sheave slides freely on
the spacer.
4. Apply 0.4 mL of Loctite 620 and 0.4 mL of
Loctite 7088 Primer in 90 apart in vertical stripes
to the shaft threads.
Spider Assembly:
5. Install the spider assembly onto the shaft threads. Be
290 ft-lb (393 Nm)
sure all of the alignment marks 8 are in alignment.
(Apply 0.4 mL Loctite 7088 Primer and 0.4 mL
Loctite 620) in 90 apart in vertical stripes to the
shaft threads.
7. Apply 0.1mL of Loctite 620 and 0.1mL of

Loctite 7088 Primer in 90 apart to the threads of
the spider jamb nut. Install spider jamb nut onto
stationary shaft threads.
5 Moveable Sheave 6 Jam 7 Spider

Asm Nut
5.26
PVT SYSTEM
8. Tighten the spider jamb nut using Clutch Spider Nut 10. Install the limiter spacer 15 and the clutch spring 14 .
Socket (PU-50578). Torque jam nut to specification.
CAUTION
DO NOT reassemble the drive clutch without the limiter
5
spacer. Belt life will be greatly reduced.
Spider Jamb Nut: 11. Install the drive clutch cover 16 . Be sure all alignment
250 ft-lb (339 Nm) marts are in alignment.
(Apply 0.1 mL Loctite 7088 Primer and 0.1 mL
Loctite 620) in 90 apart to the threads of the
spider jamb nut.
9. After the spider and jamb nut have been torqued,

remove the clutch assembly from the holding fixture
and inspect the alignment marks made during
disassembly.
NOTE: If the marks illustrated below are not in
alignment upon assembly, the clutch will not be
in balance and the drive clutch assembly must
be replaced.
12. Install cover bolts and torque in a cross pattern

evenly to specification.
Drive Clutch Cover Bolts:

9 ft-lb (12 Nm)
5.27
PVT SYSTEM
DRIVEN CLUTCH SERVICE 3. Remove the four screws 1 that secure the cam
(helix) assembly using a T25 Torx driver.
Clutch Disassembly
1. Remove driven clutch from the transmission input
shaft. NOTE: If driven clutch is difficult to remove,
use 2871056 Driven clutch puller to remove driven
clutch. Do not attempt disassembly of the driven
clutch from the outside snap ring. The driven clutch
must be disassembled from the helix side.
4. Place the driven clutch into the Universal Clutch

Compressor PU-50518.
2. It is important to mark the position of the shaft, cam

cover and sheave before disassembly or use the Xs
on the components for reference. This will aid in
assembly and maintains clutch balance.
5.28
PVT SYSTEM
5. Press down on the top of the spider assembly, 7. Remove the inside spider plate 4 and spider
pushing the spider onto the shaft. Remove snap ring dampener 5 . Inspect the spider dampener for wear
2 and slowly release the assembly. and replace if needed.
8. Remove the E-clips 6 , washers 7 , and the clutch

rollers 8 . Inspect the rollers for wear; replace if worn. 5
6. Remove the spider assembly and spring 3 .

NOTE: Spring is compression only and has no
torsional wind.
9. Remove the clutch assembly from the holding tool.

10. Press out the spring pins 9 in the inner sheave.
5.29
PVT SYSTEM
11. Pull out the clutch roller pins 10 and rollers 11 . 14. Inspect the cam (helix) assembly bushing 14 for
wear. If the bushing is worn or the shaft does not fit
snug into the bushing, replace the cam (helix)
assembly.
12. Press the shaft and bearing out of the outer sheave
using an arbor press.
15. Inspect the sheaves for excessive wear or damage.
13. Inspect the bearing 12 for wear. Spin the bearing, if

the bearing does not spin smoothly, replace it. To
replace the bearing, remove the snap ring 13 from
the end of the shaft and press the bearing off the
shaft.
5.30
PVT SYSTEM
Bushing Service
NOTE: Special Tools Required
EBS Clutch Bushing Tool Kit - 2201379

ITEM QTY. PART # TOOL DESCRIPTION
A, B 1 5132027 EBS Puller Tool
C 1 5132501 EBS Puller Nut
D 1 5132029 EBS Main Adapter
EBS Bushing Removal
E 1 5132028
Tool Instructions
1 9915111 Instructions
NOTE: Bushings are installed at the factory using
Additional Special Tools Loctite 648. In order to remove bushings it will be
necessary to apply heat evenly to the area around
QTY. PART # TOOL DESCRIPTION each bushing. Clean all residual Loctite from 5
Clutch Bushing Replacement Tool bushing bore prior to installing new bushing.
1 2871226
Kit
Clutch Bushing Removal
1 2870386 Piston Pin Puller
1. Install main puller adapter 8 onto puller.
*Clutch Bushing Replacement Tool Kit (PN 2871226)
2. Install adapter reducer 9 .
ITEM QTY. PART # TOOL DESCRIPTION 3. Using a hand held propane torch, apply heat around
P-90 Drive/Driven outside of bushing until tiny smoke tailings appear.
#2 1 5020628 Clutch Bushing Install 4. Flip sheave over so bushing faces downward and
Tool install onto puller.
Drive Clutch Cover 5. Install bushing tool 2 .
#3 1 5020629 Bushing Removal/
Installation Tool
P-90 Driven Clutch
#5 1 5020631 Cover Bushing
Removal Tool
#8 1 5020632 Main Puller Adapter
#9 1 5010279 Adapter Reducer

Number Two Puller
#10 1 5020633 Adapter
6. Install left hand nut (C) and spacer onto puller rod
and tighten by hand. Turn puller barrel for further
tension if needed.
7. Turn clutch sheave counterclockwise until bushing is
removed and sheave comes free.
5.31
PVT SYSTEM
8. Remove nut (C) (left hand thread) from puller rod Clutch Assembly
and set aside. 1. Install a new bearing onto the clutch shaft using an
9. Remove adapters from puller. arbor press. Once bearing is fully seated, install a
new snap ring.
10. Remove bushing and removal tool from adapters.
Discard bushing.
Clutch Bushing Installation
11. Install puller adapter 10 onto puller.
12. Install adapter 9 onto puller.
2. Install the shaft and bearing assembly into the outer

sheave.
13. Apply Loctite 648 evenly to bushing bore inside

moveable sheave.
14. Install sheave face down on puller.
15. Install new bushing on installation tool 2 and install
assembly into sheave.
16. Install left hand thread nut (C) onto puller rod and
hand tighten against installation tool.
17. Turn clutch sheave counterclockwise, making sure
bushing is drawn straight into bore. Continue until NOTE: Press only on the outer race of the
bushing is seated. bearing during installation to prevent damaging
the bearing.
18. Remove nut (C) from puller rod and set aside.
19. Remove installation tool and clutch sheave from
puller.
5.32
PVT SYSTEM
3. Line up the X on the moveable sheave with the X 5. Install the roller pin into the sheave assembly on
on the stationary sheave or use the marks previously both sides. The flat side of the roller pin faces
used. Put the sheaves together. downward when the shaft side is laying flat on the
bench.
6. Install the spring pins (C) to secure the roller pins.

Install until flush with sheave surface.
5
7. Install the spring over the shaft.
4. Install the roller (A) onto the roller pin (B) on both
sides.
8. Install the clutch rollers (D) onto each side of the

outside spider. Install the washers (E) and E-clips (F)
to secure the rollers. The rollers should spin freely.
5.33
PVT SYSTEM
9. Install the spider dampener (G) inside the outer 12. Press down on the top of the spider assembly,
spider and install the inside spider plate (H). pushing the spider onto the shaft.
10. Install the spider assembly onto the shaft with the
retaining ring on top of the spider. NOTE: Use the
marks previously made to align the skip tooth spider,
or use the X on top of the spider and align it with
the skip tooth on the shaft.
13. Slowly compress the spider into place. If the spider

appears to bind while compressing, stop and make
sure the skip-tooth on the shaft and the spider are
aligned. Once the spider passes the retaining ring
notch on the shaft, install the retaining ring.
11. Place the driven clutch into the Universal Clutch

Compressor PU-50518.
14. Install the cam (helix) assembly over the shaft. Line
up the X on the cam, X on spider, and X on the
stationary sheave or use the marks previously made
before disassembly. NOTE: If the cam assembly
(helix) is difficult to install, be sure the sheaves are
aligned. To align the sheaves place the clutch
assembly on a flat surface with the cam assembly
(helix) side down. Press down on the moveable
sheave belt face with both hands and the helix will
release.
5.34
PVT SYSTEM
15. Use a T25 Torx driver to install the four helix
retaining screws 1 and torque to specification.
Helix Retaining Screws:

48 in-lb (5 Nm)
5.35
PVT SYSTEM
Assembly View
1 Snap Ring 8 Spring

2 Bearing 9 Spider Insert
3 Stationary Sheave 10 Spider Dampener
4 Pin 11 E-Clip
5 Roller 12 Washer
6 Moveable Sheave 13 Helix (Cam)
14 Helix Screws
7 Clutch Shaft 48 in-lb (5 Nm)
5.36
PVT SYSTEM
TROUBLESHOOTING
SITUATION PROBABLE CAUSE REMEDY

Wrong or broken drive clutch spring. Replace with recommended spring.
Engine RPM
below specified Install correct shift weight kit to match engine
Drive clutch shift weight too heavy.
operating range, application.
although engine
is properly tuned. Driven clutch spring broken or installed in Replace spring; refer to proper installation
wrong helix location. location.
Disassemble drive clutch; inspect shift weights
for wear and free operation.
Drive clutch binding. Clean and polish stationary shaft hub;
reassemble clutch without spring to determine
Erratic engine problem area.
operating RPM
during Belt worn unevenly - thin / burnt spots. Replace belt.
acceleration or
load variations. Replace ramp buttons.
Driven clutch malfunction.
5
Inspect movable sheave for excessive bushing
clearance.
Sheave face grooved. Replace the clutch.
Incorrect drive clutch spring (too high of Install correct recommended spring.
rate).
Drive clutch shift weights incorrect for Install correct recommended shift weights.
application (too light).
Disassemble and clean clutch, inspecting shift
Engine RPM weights and rollers. Reassemble without the
Drive clutch binding.
above specified spring and move sheaves through entire range
operating range. to further determine probable cause.
Disassemble, clean, and inspect driven clutch,
Driven clutch binding. noting worn sheave bushing and ramp buttons
and helix spring location.
Converter sheaves greasy; belt slipage. Clean sheaves with denatured alcohol or brake
cleaner, install new belt.
Drive belt worn too narrow. Replace belt.
Harsh drive clutch
engagement. Excessive belt / sheave clearance with new Perform belt / sheave clearance adjustment with
belt. shim washers beneath spider.
Drive belt turns Wrong belt for application. Replace with correct belt.
over
Abuse (continued throttle application when Caution operator to operate machine within
vehicle is stationary, excess load) guidelines.
Belt burnt, thin
Dragging brake Inspect brake system.
spots
Slow, easy clutch engagement Fast, effective use of throttle for efficient
engagement.
5.37
PVT SYSTEM
SITUATION PROBABLE CAUSE REMEDY

Plugged air intake or outlet. Clear obstruction
Belt slippage due to water, oil, grease, etc., Inspect system. Clean , repair or replace as
rubbing on cover. necessary. Seal PVT system ducts.
PVT cover
Clutches or weight being applied to cover Remove weight. Inform operator.
overheating
while in operation.
(melting)
Instruct operator on guidelines for operation in
High vs. low range. proper driving range for different terrain as
outlined in Owners Safety and Maintenance
Manual.
Cover seals or ducts leaking Find leak and repair as necessary.
Water ingestion Instruct operator on guidelines for operation in
Operator error wet terrain as outlined in Owners Safety and
Maintenance Manual.
Belt worn out Replace belt.
Belt slippage Water ingestion Inspect and seal PVT system.
Belt contaminated with oil or grease Inspect and clean.
Belt worn or separated, thin spots, loose belt Replace belt.
PVT noise Broken or worn clutch components, cover Inspect and repair as necessary.
hitting clutches
Replace belt. Refer to belt burnt troubleshooting
Engagement Thin spots on belt, worn belt
and instruct operator.
erratic or stabby
Drive clutch bushings stick Inspect and repair clutches.
5.38
TRANSMISSION
CHAPTER 6
TRANSMISSION
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2
LUBRICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2
TRANSMISSION MOUNTING AND TORQUE VALUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3
SHIFT LEVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4
SHIFT CABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5
INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5
ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5
TRANSMISSION SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6
TRANSMISSION REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6
TRANSMISSION INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9
TRANSMISSION DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.12
DIFFERENTIAL OPERATION (TURF MODE MODELS ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.16
6
PLANETARY DIFFERENTIAL DISASSEMBLY (TURF MODE MODELS ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.18
PLANETARY DIFFERENTIAL BUSHING REPLACEMENT (TURF MODE MODELS ONLY) . . . . . . . . .6.19
PLANETARY DIFFERENTIAL ASSEMBLY (TURF MODE MODELS ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.21
GEAR / SHAFT / BEARING INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.22
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY / SNORKEL GEAR BACKLASH PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.23
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.29
TRANSMISSION SERVICE (INTL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.31
DIFFERENTIAL OPERATION (TURF MODE MODELS ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.31
TRANSMISSION DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.32
PLANETARY DIFFERENTIAL DISASSEMBLY (TURF MODE MODELS ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.38
PLANETARY DIFFERENTIAL BUSHING REPLACEMENT (TURF MODE MODELS ONLY) . . . . . . . . .6.39
PLANETARY DIFFERENTIAL ASSEMBLY (TURF MODE MODELS ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.41
GEAR / SHAFT / BEARING INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.42
SNORKEL GEAR BACKLASH PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.43
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY VIEW (TURF MODE MODELS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.51
TROUBLESHOOTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.53
SHIFTING DIFFICULTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.53
6.1
TRANSMISSION
SPECIFICATIONS ITEM TORQUE VALUE
Special Tools Rear Transmission Mount 17 ft-lb (23 Nm)

Bracket Fasteners
PART NUMBER TOOL DESCRIPTION Refer to Snorkel Gear
Snorkel Tube Backlash Procedure,
PA-50231 Snorkel Tool
page
2871698
Rear Output Seal Driver Snorkel Tube
(Part of 2871702 Kit) 10 ft-lb (14 Nm)
Locking Screw
2871699
(Part of 2871702 Kit) Rear Driveshaft Seal Guide Shift Cable Bracket Bolts 17 ft-lb (23 Nm)
2871282 Bearing Seal Driver (50 mm) Shift Fork Screws 10 ft-lb (14 Nm)
PU-50566 Transmission Nut Socket Transmission Case Screws 20 ft-lbs (27 Nm)
PU-50658 Clutch Center Distance Tool Speed Sensor Screw 12 ft-lb (16 Nm)
Bosch Automotive Service Solutions: 1-800-345- Differential Cover Screw 22 ft-lb (30 Nm)
Torque Specifications Lubrication
ITEM TORQUE VALUE

Bell Crank Nut 18 ft-lb (24 Nm)
Fill / Drain Plugs 14 ft-lbs (19 Nm) Recommended Transmission Lubricant:
AGL (PN 2878068) (Quart)
Gear Sector Cover 12 ft-lb (16 Nm)
Park Brake Disc Capacity (Standard): 44 oz. (1300 ml)
14 ft-lb (20 Nm) Capacity (INTL): 41 oz. (1200 ml)
Mounting Bolt (INTL)
Park Flange Screws 10 ft-lb (14 Nm)
Rear Transmission 40 ft-lb (54 Nm)
Isolator Bolt
6.2
TRANSMISSION
Transmission Mounting and Torque Values
6.3
TRANSMISSION
SHIFT LEVER Installation
1. Perform the removal steps in reverse order to install
Removal the gear shift lever (lever, cable, console, shift knob).
1. Remove the shift knob cover 1 , retaining screw 2
and shift knob 3 from the shift lever 4 .
2. Remove the screws retaining the center console

using a T27 and T30 Torx driver. Remove the
console from the vehicle.
3. Remove the clip and washer retaining the shift cable
to the shift lever and disconnect the cable end from
the lever.
4. Remove the retaining ring 5 and slide the shift lever
6 off the mounting bracket and out from the frame.
5. Remove both bushings 7 from the shift lever and

service as needed.
6.4
TRANSMISSION
SHIFT CABLE Adjustment
1. Locate the shift cable attached to the transmission
Inspection case in the right rear wheel well area.
Shift cable adjustment may be necessary if symptoms 2. Inspect shift cable 1 , clevis pin, pivot bushings, and
include: dust boot 2 . Replace if worn or damaged.
No gear position or AWD display on instrument
cluster
Ratcheting noise on deceleration
Inability to engage into a gear
Excessive gear lash (noise)
Gear selector moving out of desired range
Inspect shift cable, clevis pins, and pivot bushings and

replace if worn or damaged.
3. If adjustment is required, loosen the lower jam nut 4

and pull the cable out of the mount 3 to move the
upper jam nut 5 .
6
4. Adjust the shift cable so there is the same amount of

cable travel when shifting slightly past HIGH gear
and PARK.
5. Thread the upper or lower jam nut as required to
obtain proper cable adjustment.
NOTE: This procedure may require a few
attempts to obtain the proper adjustment.
6. Once the proper adjustment is obtained, place the

shift cable and upper jam nut into the mount. Tighten
the lower jam nut against the mount.
7. Start engine and shift through all gears to ensure the
shift cable is properly adjusted. If transmission still
ratchets after cable adjustment, the transmission will
require service.
6.5
TRANSMISSION
TRANSMISSION SERVICE CAUTION
TRANSMISSION REMOVAL Correct Drive Clutch Puller P/N 2872085
CAUTION

sure machine is secure before beginning this
procedure. Always wear eye protection.
1. Remove the seats, console cover and engine service

panel (see Chapter 10 ).
2. Disconnect the (-) negative battery cable from the
battery.
3. Remove the rear bumper and cargo box as an
assembly (see Chapter 10 Cargo Box Assembly
Removal, page 10.22).
4. Remove the air box assembly (see Chapter 4 ETC
Replacement, page 4.36).
11. Loosely install the left rear shock bolt to hold left rear
5. Raise and support the vehicle. trailing arm up in position.
6. Remove the prop shaft from the transmission output 12. Remove the stabilizer bar mounting bolt and nut 1
shaft (see Chapter 7 Rear Prop Shaft Removal, from both sides. Discard nuts and replace with new
page 7.24). upon assembly.
7. Remove rear wheels from the vehicle.

8. If internal transmission repair is required, drain the
transmission lubricant (see Chapter 2
Transmission Lubrication, page 2.23).
9. Remove the lower mounting bolt from the left rear
shock. Swing shock outward.
10. Remove the outer clutch cover, drive belt, drive
clutch, driven clutch, inner clutch cover and clutch
outlet duct (see Chapter 5 PVT Disassembly, page
5.11).
crankshaft.
6.6
TRANSMISSION
13. Remove the four bolts ( 2 attaching the upper and 16. Place a spacer or support between the vehicle frame
lower radius rods to the bearing carriers (left and and engine to hold the engine up in position.
right side). Discard nuts and replace with new upon
assembly. Allow the radius rods swing downward.
17. Remove vent hose from transmission.

14. Remove both lower shock bolts (left and right side) 18. Remove the gear position switch connector 6 , speed
while supporting the trailing arms from underneath. sensor connector 5 , crankshaft position sensor
Lift training arms up and swing trailing arms outward connector 4 , shift bracket bolts and shift bracket 7 ,
to remove the drive shafts from the transmission. shift cable clevis pin and washer 8 from the
15. Maneuver the drive shafts out of the vehicle frame.
transmission. 6
Reinstall the lower shock bolts 3 to hold the trailing
arms up during the rest of the removal procedure.
6.7
TRANSMISSION
19. Remove the wire ties retaining harness to 22. Remove the two fasteners 11 attaching the rear
transmission and mounts. transmission mount bracket assembly to the frame.
Remove the fasteners 12 that attach the rear mount
to the transmission. Remove the mount assembly
from the vehicle.
20. Using a 15mm socket, remove the four bolts from the
left side 9 and right side 10 , securing the
transmission to the engine.
23. Slide transmission towards the rear of the vehicle.
Lift and rotate the top of the transmission towards
the left side of the vehicle. With the help of an
assistant, remove transmission from the left rear
wheel well area.
21. Remove the two rear exhaust springs securing the

muffler to the rear transmission mounting bracket.
6.8
TRANSMISSION
TRANSMISSION INSTALLATION 4. Install M10 bolt and nut securing the transmission
1. With the help of an assistant, position the bracket to the rear mount. Torque fasteners to
transmission into the vehicle frame through the left specification.
rear wheel well area.
2. Slide transmission towards rear of the vehicle and
rotate the top of the transmission toward the right
side of the vehicle.
Rear Transmission Isolator Fasteners 2 :
40 ft-lb (54 Nm)
5. Install the two rear exhaust springs securing the

muffler to the rear transmission mounting bracket.
6. Install the Clutch Center Distance Tool (PU-50658)
onto the crankshaft and transmission input shaft to
properly position the clutch center distance.
IMPORTANT: Tool should bottom out on the
transmission input shaft and lay flush on the
crankshaft.
7. Loosen the two bolts retaining the transmission

coupler bracket to the engine on the right side.
3. Install the rear transmission mount to the frame and

secure with M8 bolts and nuts. Torque nuts to 6
specification.
8. Align front transmission mounting holes with

transmission joint bracket mounting holes on engine.
9. Loosely install the two longer bolts into left side
mounting holes and two shorter bolts with washers
into right side mounting holes.
NOTE: DO NOT torque fasteners at this time.
Rear Transmission Mount Bracket Fasteners 1 :
17 ft-lb (23 Nm)
6.9
TRANSMISSION
10. Torque left side mounting bolts to specification in 13. Remove the spacer or support between the vehicle
sequence. frame and engine.
14. Install and properly route the gear position switch

11. Torque right side mounting bolts to specification
connector 5 , speed sensor connector 6 , crankshaft
position sensor connector 7 , shift bracket and shift
bracket bolts 8 , shift cable clevis pin and washer 9
onto the transmission.
15. Torque the two shift cable bracket bolts to

specification.
Engine / Transmission Mounting Bolts:
Step 1-2: 64 ft-lb (87 Nm)

Step 4-7: 44 ft-lb (60 Nm) Shift Cable Bracket Bolts:
17 ft-lb (23 Nm)
12. Remove the clutch center distance tool.
6.10
TRANSMISSION
16. Install three wire ties to retain wire harness to 23. Install the four rear radius rods to the bearing
transmission and mounts. carriers on each side. Use new retaining fasteners 12
. Torque to specification.
17. Install and properly route the vent hose.

18. Lubricate the transmission splines and mid propshaft 24. Install the stabilizer bar link mounting bolts and new
joint splines with Polaris All Purpose Grease. Install nuts 13 . Torque to specification.
the propshaft onto the transmission output shaft (see
Chapter 7 Rear Prop Shaft Installation, page
7.25).
19. Install inner clutch cover, outlet duct, drive clutch, 6
driven clutch, belt and outer clutch cover (see
Chapter 5 PVT Assembly, page 5.13).
20. Install new spring ring 10 on rear drive shafts. Apply
an anti-seize compound to the splines 11 .
25. Install rear wheels and wheel nuts. Torque to

specification.
Rear Shock Lower Bolt:

70 ft-lbs (95 Nm)
21. Remove lower shock mounting bolt and swing the
rear trailing arm out and up. Align the splines of the Outer Radius Rod Bolts:
drive shaft with the transmission splines. Push 40 ft-lb (54 Nm)
inward on the trailing arm assembly until the rear
drive shafts lock into the transmission splines. Stabilizer Bar Linkage:
22. Install the rear shocks onto the trailing arms and 40 ft-lbs (54 Nm)
install the lower mounting bolts with new retaining
nuts. Torque to specification. Wheel Nuts:
120 ft-lbs (163 Nm)
26. Properly lower the vehicle.
6.11
TRANSMISSION
27. Install the air box assembly as outlined in the EFI Transmission Disassembly
Chapter (see Chapter 4 ETC Replacement, page
4.36). NOTE: Refer to the exploded view at the end of this
chapter as a reference.
28. Install the rear bumper and cargo box as an
assembly (see Chapter 10 Cargo Box Assembly
1. Place transmission in High gear before disassembly.
Removal, page 10.22).
2. Drain and properly dispose of the transmission
29. Connect the (-) negative battery cable. lubricant (see Chapter 2 ).
30. Install the engine service panel, console cover and
3. Remove the bell crank nut 1 and bell crank 2 .
seats.
31. If transmission lubricant was drained, fill the
transmission with the specified amount of Polaris
AGL (see Chapter 2 Transmission Lubrication,
page 2.23).
Recommended Transmission Lubricant:

AGL (PN 2878068) (Quart)
Capacity (Standard): 44 oz. (1300 ml)

Capacity (INTL): 41 oz. (1200 ml)
4. Remove E-clip 3 that retains spring and flat washers
4 and gear switch 5 . Remove the switch.
5. Remove the sector cover bolts 6 and remove the

sector cover 7 .
NOTE: Removal can be aided by using your
thumbs to press in on the shafts while pulling out
the cover with your fingers.
6. Remove the compression spring 8 .
7. Remove the detent star 9 . Note how the detent star

fits onto the splined shaft with the raised edge facing
outward for reassembly.
8. Remove the spacer 10 .
6.12
TRANSMISSION
9. Remove the shift shaft 11 , detent pawl 12 and the shift 12. Lift up on the shift shaft rail 16 and move the rail
sector gears 13 & 14 . assembly rearward to allow the shift fork pins 17 to be
removed from the shift drum 18 . Remove the shift
NOTE: Note the timing marks on the shift gears drum from the transmission housing.
for reassembly purposes.
10. Remove the O-rings 15 from each shaft and discard.

Use new O-rings upon assembly.
11. Remove all the transmission case bolts. Using suit-
able pry bars, remove the cover using the designated
pry points (indicated by the black arrows in the illus-
tration below).
13. Remove the shift shaft rail 16 and shift forks from the
transmission housing as an assembly.
CAUTION
14. Remove the rear output shaft assembly 19 by lifting
Do not pry on case sealing surfaces. underneath the gear or by tapping the shaft from the
Use only the designated pry points on the opposite side.
transmission.
6.13
TRANSMISSION
15. Remove the input shaft 20 , gear cluster assembly 21 19. Remove the bearing from the reverse shaft using a
and idler gear shaft assembly 22 from the bearing puller. Remove the retaining ring and slide
transmission housing by pulling both assemblies the washers, high gear and needle bearing off the
straight up. reverse shaft.
16. Place the gear cluster assembly on a clean surface

for inspection. If disassembly is required, refer to
Gear Cluster Disassembly.
17. Using a 5 mm Allen wrench, remove the screws that
secure the pinion shaft assembly 23 . Lift the pinion
shaft assembly straight up to remove it from the
housing. Note the longer screw 24 that locks the
snorkel tube.
1 Bearing 6 Needle Bearing

2 Reverse Shaft 7 Engagement Dog
3 Retaining Ring 8 Sprocket
4 Washers 9 Silent Chain
5 High Gear 10 Input Shaft
20. Remove the retaining ring and engagement dog from

the reverse shaft.
18. Remove all seals from the gearcase halves and clean 21. Remove the retaining ring, washer, needle bearing,
the cases in preparation for assembly. and sprocket from the reverse shaft.
Gear Cluster Disassembly 22. Tilt the two shafts towards each other and remove the
silent chain from the two shafts.
6.14
TRANSMISSION
23. If necessary, disassemble the other end of the Snorkel Shaft Removal / Disassembly
reverse shaft. Remove the bearing , engagement dog
, retaining ring, washer, low gear 12 and needle
bearing 13 from the reverse shaft. CAUTION
The pinion shaft must be removed prior to removing the

snorkel shaft assembly. Failure to remove pinion shaft,
will result in damage to the snorkel shaft.
25. Extract the seal 26 from the snorkel shaft to access

the snorkel tube 27 for removal.
11 Reverse Shaft 15 Washer 6

12 Bearing 16 Low Gear
26. Using the Snorkel Tool (PA-50231), fully loosen the
13 Engagement Dog 17 Needle Bearing snorkel tube.
14 Snap Ring
24. To disassemble the shift shaft rail remove the snap

ring 25 from the end of the shift rail on either side.
CAUTION
Use caution when disassembling the shift rail. The

compressed springs on the shift rail may pop off
causing eye or face injury.
6.15
TRANSMISSION
27. Remove the snorkel tube and shaft assembly from 32. Remove the retaining ring to remove the remaining
the transmission case. washer, bearing and gear from the snorkel shaft.
28. Remove the snap ring 28 and shim 29 from the snorkel
shaft.
Differential Operation (Turf Mode Models

Only)
Transmissions equipped with Turf Mode have two
traction operational modes: Differential Lock and
Differential Unlock. Locking the rear differential is
beneficial in low traction and rough terrain conditions.
Unlocking the rear differential makes maneuvering easier
and minimizes damage to terrain.
29. Use an arbor press to remove the snorkel tube from
the snorkel shaft.
30. Remove the snap ring 30 and shim 31 retaining the
bearing in the snorkel tube.
When Differential-Unlock is selected, the rear

differential becomes unlocked for tighter turns. An
electrical solenoid mounted in the rear portion of the
31. Lightly tap on the bearing from the opposite side to gearcase actuates the shift fork. The solenoid plunger
remove it from the snorkel tube. extends out to move the fork and slides the engagement
dog away from the side gear that is part of the planetary
differential assembly. This unlocks the rear differential.
6.16
TRANSMISSION
The rear drive shafts are now dependent on the to retract. Spring tension moves the shift fork back into
differential allowing for tighter turns. place and mates the engagement dog to the side gear
that is part of the planetary differential assembly. This
locks the rear differential as a solid rear axle, increasing
traction.
When Differential-Lock is selected, power is removed

from the electrical solenoid allowing the solenoid plunger
6.17
TRANSMISSION
Planetary Differential Disassembly (Turf 3. Remove the six planet gears and each side gear
Mode Models Only) assembly from the ring gear.
NOTE: If the gearcase is completely assembled,

perform the Transmission Disassembly, page 6.32
procedure.
1. Use a scribe to mark the differential cover and ring

gear prior to disassembly.
4. Inspect the female side gear (A), male side gear (B),
planet gears (C) and ring gear (D). Replace
components or bushings as needed. Bushing
replacement can be performed on all necessary
differential components. If bushing replacement is
required, proceed to Planetary Differential Bushing
Replacement (Turf Mode Models Only), page 6.19.
2. Remove the six screws retaining the differential
cover and remove the cover.
6.18
TRANSMISSION
Planetary Differential Bushing Replacement 4. Install the bushing to the specified depth as shown.
(Turf Mode Models Only)
NOTE: If the differential is completely assembled,
perform the Planetary Differential Disassembly
procedure.
Ring Gear Bushing Replacement

1. Press the old bushing out of the ring gear.
2. Thoroughly clean the bore of the ring gear and check
for any unwanted burs.
3. Press the new bushing into the ring gear housing.
Planet Gear Bushing Replacement

5. Press the old bushing out of the planet gear.
6. Thoroughly clean the bore of the planet gear and
check for any unwanted burs.
6.19
TRANSMISSION
7. Press the new bushing into the planet gear until it is 11. Install the bushing to the specified depth as shown.
flush on each end. Repeat this procedure for the
remaining planet gears.
Differential Cover Bushing Replacement

8. Press the old bushing out of the differential cover.
9. Thoroughly clean the bore of the differential cover
and check for any unwanted burs.
10. Press the new bushing into the differential cover.
Female Side Gear Bushing Replacement

12. Locate the bushing split. Using a small chisel or flat
blade screwdriver, peel back and remove the old
bushing from the side gear, being careful not to
damage the side gear.
13. Thoroughly clean the bore of the side gear and

6.20
TRANSMISSION
14. Press the new bushing into the side gear until it Planetary Differential Assembly (Turf Mode
bottoms out. Models Only)
1. Thoroughly clean the differential components.
2. Assemble the side gears and place them onto the
ring gear along with the six planet gears.
3. Align and install the differential cover using the

previously made scribe marks. 6
4. Apply Loctite 2760 to cover screws.
5. Install screws hand tight. Place assembly in soft jaw
vise and torque to specification.
Differential Cover Screws:

22 ft-lb (30 Nm)
6.21
TRANSMISSION
Gear / Shaft / Bearing Inspection
6.22
TRANSMISSION
Transmission Assembly / Snorkel Gear 4. Apply a small amount of white lithium grease or Anti-
Backlash Procedure Seize on the threads 8 of the snorkel tube.
1. Reassemble the snorkel tube and snorkel shaft
assembly by reversing the disassembly procedure
(see Snorkel Shaft Removal / Disassembly in
Transmission Disassembly, page 6.12).
5. Install the snorkel shaft into the gearcase. Using the

Snorkel Tool (PA-50231), tighten the snorkel tube
until it is lightly seated in the transmission housing.
1 Seal 5 Snorkel Tube

2 Snap Ring 6 Snorkel Shaft
3 Washer 7 13T Gear
4 Bearing
2. After the 13T gear and bearing are pressed onto the
snorkel shaft (flush to the shoulder), install the
washer and new retaining ring.
3. Press the gear back towards the retaining ring. Avoid
excessive force so the retaining ring is not damaged
or pre-stressed significantly.
NOTE: Failure to press the gear back against the
washer and retaining ring will lead to a gear
backlash change after vehicle is placed into
service.
6.23
TRANSMISSION
6. Inspect the pinion shaft assembly. Replace bearings 9. Using a 5 mm Allen wrench, install only the three
if needed. Inspect each gear for damage, chips or screws 15 that secure the pinion shaft assembly as
abnormally worn teeth. shown below. Leave the longer locking screw 16 out
at this point. Torque the bearing cover retaining
screws to specification.
9 Bearing 12 Gear
10 Snap Ring 13 Bearing Cover Bearing Cover Retaining Screws:
10 ft-lb (14 Nm)
11 Washer 14 Pinion Shaft
IMPORTANT: DO NOT install the longer screw.
NOTE: If pinion shaft was disassembled, the Installing the longer screw will lock the snorkel
bearing cover must be installed on the shaft tube and not allow for backlash setting
before installing the gear. adjustment.
7. Install the pinion shaft assembly. Be sure to properly 10. Rotate the snorkel tube counterclockwise using the
mesh the snorkel shaft bevel gear with the pinion snorkel tool (PA-50231) until the snorkel gear and
shaft bevel gear. pinion gear have zero backlash.
8. Apply Loctite 242 to the threads of the bearing NOTE: DO NOT overtighten the snorkel tube. At
cover retaining screws. the 'zero' backlash position, you should still be
able to turn the snorkel shaft using your fingers,
but it will feel rough and may have some tight
spots.
6.24
TRANSMISSION
11. Look down into the transmission housing to see the 16. Assemble the reverse shaft assembly and input shaft
snorkel locking screw hole opening 17 to reference assembly if previously disassembled (see
your starting point. illustrations).
NOTE: If you have a hard time seeing into the

hole, insert a small Allen wrench, punch or
screwdriver into the hole to feel when the notch is
aligned with the hole.
12. Slowly rotate the snorkel tube clockwise while

counting the number of notches passing through the
6
hole opening as you rotate the tube. Rotate the
snorkel tube to the 3rd notch from the zero backlash
position obtained in step 11.
13. Check the pinion shaft gear backlash again by feel. If
the pinion shaft gear lash appears to be too tight,
rotate the snorkel shaft clockwise to the next notch
18 Reverse Shaft 23 Snap Ring
(4th notch). 19 Low Gear 24 Bearing
14. Once the backlash is set, apply Loctite 242 to the
threads and install the locking screw to secure the 20 Engagement Dog 25 High Gear
snorkel tube. Torque the locking screw to
specification.
21 Reverse Sprocket 26 Input Shaft
22 Silent Chain
17. Install the idler gear shaft assembly 27 , gear cluster

assembly 27 , and input shaft assembly 28 into the
transmission housing, all at the same time.
Snorkel Locking Screw:
10 ft-lb (14 Nm)
Transmission Assembly
NOTE: The snorkel shaft and pinion shaft must
be installed prior to transmission assembly. The
snorkel shaft cannot be installed after
assembling the transmission.
15. Clean both transmission case halves thoroughly.

Inspect case half mating surfaces for damage.
6.25
TRANSMISSION
18. Install the rear output shaft assembly 30 . 20. Install the shift shaft rail 31 and shift forks into the
transmission housing as an assembly. Be sure the
shift forks are engaged into the engagement dogs.
19. Assemble the shift shaft rail if previously

disassembled.
NOTE: Shift fork pins should be offset towards
the input shaft as shown above 32 .
21. Inspect the shift drum for any damage or wear.

Inspect the splines of the shift drum.
NOTE: Both shift forks need to be orientated the

same way, so that the shift fork pins are both
offset to the same side of the rail.
22. Install the shift drum into the transmission housing.

Lift up on the shift shaft rail and move the rail
assembly towards the shift drum to allow the shift fork
ends to be installed into the shift drum.
6.26
TRANSMISSION
23. Apply a continuous bead of Crankcase 3 Bond 25. Install new seals into the transmission case halves.
Sealant (PN 2871557) to left-hand transmission
mating surface. The snorkel shaft seal 33 , should be pressed in
until it seats against the housing counter-bore.
24. Install the transmission case cover and retaining
bolts. Torque bolts to specification.
The input shaft seal 34 , should be pressed in until it

seats flush with the housing.
The rear output shaft seals 35 , can be installed
using a standard bushing installation tool. Seals 6
should be installed just past the case lead-in
chamfer (0.070" or 1.8 mm from outer face of
bore).
26. Thoroughly clean the shift shaft housing.
Transmission Case Bolts:
20 ft-lbs (27 Nm) 27. Install the sector gear (16T) onto the shift drum shaft.
Install the shift shaft assembly and sector gear (11T)
into the bushing pocket on the left side. Align the
timing marks on the gears as shown.
28. Install the spacer and then the detent star onto the
shift drum shaft. Be sure to install the detent star with
the raised edge facing outward and skip-tooth
aligned.
6.27
TRANSMISSION
29. Install the detent pawl onto the shift shaft and 32. Apply Crankcase Sealant (3-Bond) (PN 2871557)
carefully install the compression spring. onto the cover and transmission case mating surface.
33. Install the sector cover and align the transmission
case dowel with the alignment hole. Install and torque
the bolts to specification.
Sector Gear Cover Bolts:

12 ft-lb (16 Nm)
34. Install the transmission drain plug and torque to

specification.
30. Install a new O-ring on each shift shaft. Apply a small

amount of white lithium grease on the O-rings, shift
shafts and component contact surfaces prior to
installing the sector cover. Fill / Drain Plug:
14 ft-lbs (19 Nm)
35. Install the bellcrank onto the shift shaft. Note the key
splined on the bellcrank and shift shaft. Install the nut
and torque to specification.
Bell Crank Nut:

18 ft-lb (24 Nm)
36. Refer to Transmission Installation, page to

complete the repair.
31. Clean the transmission and gear sector cover mating

surfaces thoroughly.
6.28
TRANSMISSION
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY VIEW
6.29
TRANSMISSION
REF. QTY. DESCRIPTION REF. QTY. DESCRIPTION
1. 1 Fill Plug 44. 1 Gear, Sector 16T
2. 1 Drain Plug, Magnetic 45. 1 Gear, Sector 31T
3. 14 Screw, M8 x 1.25 x 30 46. 1 Pawl, Detent
4. 6 Screw, M6 x 1 x 20 47. 1 Star, Detent
5 3 Screw, M8 x 50 48. 1 Plate, Park, 12-Face
6. 1 Screw, M6 x 1 x 40 49. 1 Shaft, Output 53T
7. 6 Screw, M6 x 1 x 18 50. 1 Shaft, Idler 29T
8. 1 Nut, NyLoc, M8 x 1.25 51. 1 Shaft, Reverse 29T
9. 2 Washer, Cup 52. 1 Shaft, Front Output
10. 3 Washer 53. 1 Shaft, Input Helical
11. 1 Washer 54. 1 Bellcrank
12. 1 Washer 55. 1 Collar, Shift
13. 2 Pin, Dowel 56. 1 Rail, Shift Shaft
14. 1 Pin, Spring 57. 1 Tube, Vent, 1/4 in.
15. 1 Retaining Ring, External 58. 1 Shift Dog, Park
16. 1 Snap Ring 59. 1 Gear, 44T
17. 1 Retaining Ring, External 60. 2 Fork, Shift
18. 1 Retaining Ring, External 61. 1 Sprocket, 48T, 6-Face
19. 1 Retaining Ring, Internal 62. 1 Gear, Low 67T
20. 2 Retaining Ring, External 63. 1 Engagement Dog, 6-Face
21. 2 Retaining Ring, External 64. 1 Gear, 53T
22. 3 Retaining Ring, External 65. 1 Shaft, Pinion 11T
23. 1 Retaining Ring, External 66. 1 Gear, 46T
24. 2 Washer, Thrust 67. 1 Gear, Snorkel 13T
25. 1 Washer, Thrust 68. 1 Shaft, Shift
26. 1 Shim 69. 1 Weldment, Rear Mount Bracket
27. 1 Shim 70. 1 Bracket, Rear Mount
28. 2 Bearing, Needle Cage 71. 1 Cover, Bearing, Center Drive
29. 2 Bearing, Ball 72. 1 Spacer
30. 2 Bearing, Ball 73. 1 Chain, Silent
31. 2 Bearing, Ball 74. 1 Switch, Rotary, 2-Pin
32. 3 Bearing, Ball 75. 1 O-Ring
33. 1 Bearing, Needle Cage 76. 1 O-Ring
34. 1 Bearing, Ball 77. 1 O-Ring
35. 2 Bearing, Ball 78. 1 Seal, Triple Lip
36. 2 Spring, Compression 79. 1 Seal, Dual Lip
37. 2 Spring, Compression 80. 2 Seal, Triple Lip
38. 1 Spring, Compression, Detent 81. - N/A
39. 1 Tube, Snorkel 82. 1 Sensor, Speed
40. 1 Cover, Sector Gears 85. 1 Bearing, Ball
41. 1 Case, RH 86. 1 Spring, Wave
42. 1 Case, LH 88. 1 Bracket, Wire Harness
43. 1 Drum, Shift 89. 1 Collar Sleeve, Input Shaft
6.30
TRANSMISSION
TRANSMISSION SERVICE (INTL)
Differential Operation (Turf Mode Models
Only)
Transmissions equipped with Turf Mode have two
traction operational modes: Differential Lock and
Differential Unlock. Locking the rear differential is
beneficial in low traction and rough terrain conditions.
Unlocking the rear differential makes maneuvering easier
and minimizes damage to terrain.
When Differential-Lock is selected, power is removed

from the electrical solenoid allowing the solenoid plunger
to retract. Spring tension moves the shift fork back into
place and mates the engagement dog to the side gear
that is part of the planetary differential assembly. This
locks the rear differential as a solid rear axle, increasing
traction.
When Differential-Unlock is selected, the rear

differential becomes unlocked for tighter turns. An
electrical solenoid mounted in the rear portion of the
gearcase actuates the shift fork. The solenoid plunger
extends out to move the fork and slides the engagement
dog away from the side gear that is part of the planetary
differential assembly. This unlocks the rear differential.
The rear drive shafts are now dependent on the
differential allowing for tighter turns.
6.31
TRANSMISSION
Transmission Disassembly 5. Remove the sector cover bolts 6 and remove the
sector cover 7 .
NOTE: Refer to the exploded view at the end of this
chapter as a reference. NOTE: Removal can be aided by using your
thumbs to press in on the shafts while pulling
1. Place transmission in High gear before disassembly. out the cover with your fingers.
2. Drain and properly dispose of the transmission 6. Remove the compression spring (H).
lubricant (see Chapter 2 Transmission Lubrication,
page 2.23).
3. Remove the bellcrank nut 1 and bellcrank 2 .
4. Remove E-clip 3 that retains spring washer 4 , flat 7. Remove the detent star (I). Note how the detent star
washer 4 and gear switch 5 . Remove the switch. fits onto the splined shaft with the raised edge facing
outward for reassembly.
8. Remove the spacer (J).
6.32
TRANSMISSION
9. Remove the shift shaft (K), detent pawl (L) and the 13. Lift up on the shift shaft rail (Q) and move the rail
shift sector gears (M and N). assembly rearward to allow the shift fork pins to be
removed from the shift drum (R). Remove the shift
NOTE: Note the timing marks on the shift gears drum (R) from the transmission housing.
(M and N) for reassembly purposes.
10. Remove the O-rings (P) from each shaft and discard.
Use new O-rings upon assembly.
11. Remove the bolt and washer retaining the brake disc
to transmission pinion shaft. Remove disc from shaft.
12. Remove all transmission case bolts. Using suitable
pry bars, remove the cover using the designated pry
points (indicated by black arrows in illustration
below).
14. Remove the shift shaft rail (Q) and shift forks from
the transmission housing as an assembly.
CAUTION
Do not pry on case sealing surfaces.
Use only the designated pry points
on the transmission.
6.33
TRANSMISSION
15. Remove the rear output shaft assembly (S) by lifting 19. Remove two screws and retaining plates, then lift
underneath the gear or by tapping the shaft from the shift fork (Y) and torsion spring out of transmission
opposite side. If use of a pry bar is necessary, take housing.
care not to pry on sealing surfaces of case.
20. Using a 5 mm Allen wrench, remove the screws that

16. Remove the idler gear shaft assembly (T) and gear secure the pinion shaft assembly (V). Lift the pinion
cluster assembly (U) from the transmission housing shaft assembly straight up to remove it from the
by pulling both assemblies straight up. housing. Note the longer screw (W) that locks the
snorkel tube.
17. Place the idler gear shaft assembly (T) and gear
cluster assembly (U) on a clean surface for 21. Remove all seals from the gearcase halves and
inspection. If disassembly is required, refer to Gear clean the cases in preparation for assembly.
Cluster Disassembly. Gear Cluster Disassembly
18. Slide engagement dog (X) off of shift fork guides.
6.34
TRANSMISSION
22. Remove the bearing from the reverse shaft using a 26. If necessary, disassemble the other end of the
bearing puller. Remove the retaining ring and slide reverse shaft. Remove the bearing, engagement
the washers, 53T gear and needle bearing off the dog, retaining ring, washer, gear and needle bearing
reverse shaft (see Figure 8-1). from the reverse shaft (see Figure 8-2).
27. To disassemble the shift shaft rail remove the snap

ring (X) from the end of the shift rail on either side. 6
23. Remove the retaining ring and engagement dog from

the reverse shaft (see Figure 8-1).
24. Remove the retaining ring, washer, needle bearing,
and sprocket from the reverse shaft (see Figure 8-1).
25. Tilt the two shafts towards each other and remove
the silent chain from the two shafts.
CAUTION
Use caution when disassembling the shift rail. The
compressed springs on the shift rail may pop off
causing eye or face injury.
Snorkel Shaft Removal / Disassembly
6.35
TRANSMISSION
30. Remove the snorkel tube and shaft assembly from
CAUTION the transmission case.
The pinion shaft must be removed prior to removing the

snorkel shaft assembly. Failure to remove pinion shaft,
will result in damage to the snorkel shaft.
28. Extract the seal from the snorkel shaft to access the
snorkel tube for removal.
31. Remove the snap ring (Y) and shim (Z) from the
snorkel shaft.
29. Using the Snorkel Tool (PA-50231), fully loosen the

snorkel tube.
32. Use an arbor press to remove the snorkel tube from

the snorkel shaft.
6.36
TRANSMISSION
33. Remove the snap ring (A) and shim (B) retaining the 35. Remove the retaining ring to remove the remaining
bearing in the snorkel tube. washer, bearing and gear from the snorkel shaft.
34. Lightly tap on the bearing from the opposite side to

remove it from the snorkel tube.
6.37
TRANSMISSION
Planetary Differential Disassembly (Turf 3. Remove the six planet gears and each side gear
Mode Models Only) assembly from the ring gear.
NOTE: If the gearcase is completely assembled,

perform the Transmission Disassembly, page 6.32
procedure.
1. Use a scribe to mark the differential cover and ring

gear prior to disassembly.
4. Inspect the female side gear (A), male side gear (B),
planet gears (C) and ring gear (D). Replace
components or bushings as needed. Bushing
replacement can be performed on all necessary
differential components. If bushing replacement is
required, proceed to Planetary Differential Bushing
Replacement (Turf Mode Models Only), page 6.19.
2. Remove the six screws retaining the differential
cover and remove the cover.
6.38
TRANSMISSION
Planetary Differential Bushing Replacement 4. Install the bushing to the specified depth as shown.
(Turf Mode Models Only)
NOTE: If the differential is completely assembled,
perform the Planetary Differential Disassembly
procedure.
Ring Gear Bushing Replacement

1. Press the old bushing out of the ring gear.
2. Thoroughly clean the bore of the ring gear and check
for any unwanted burs.
3. Press the new bushing into the ring gear housing.
Planet Gear Bushing Replacement

5. Press the old bushing out of the planet gear.
6. Thoroughly clean the bore of the planet gear and
6.39
TRANSMISSION
7. Press the new bushing into the planet gear until it is 11. Install the bushing to the specified depth as shown.
flush on each end. Repeat this procedure for the
remaining planet gears.
Differential Cover Bushing Replacement

8. Press the old bushing out of the differential cover.
9. Thoroughly clean the bore of the differential cover
and check for any unwanted burs.
10. Press the new bushing into the differential cover.
Female Side Gear Bushing Replacement

12. Locate the bushing split. Using a small chisel or flat
blade screwdriver, peel back and remove the old
bushing from the side gear, being careful not to
damage the side gear.
13. Thoroughly clean the bore of the side gear and

6.40
TRANSMISSION
14. Press the new bushing into the side gear until it Planetary Differential Assembly (Turf Mode
bottoms out. Models Only)
1. Thoroughly clean the differential components.
2. Assemble the side gears and place them onto the
ring gear along with the six planet gears.
3. Align and install the differential cover using the

previously made scribe marks. 6
4. Apply Loctite 2760 to cover screws.
5. Install screws hand tight. Place assembly in soft jaw
vise and torque to specification.
Differential Cover Screws:

22 ft-lb (30 Nm)
6.41
TRANSMISSION
Gear / Shaft / Bearing Inspection
6.42
TRANSMISSION
Snorkel Gear Backlash Procedure 5. Install the snorkel shaft into the gearcase. Using the
1. Reassemble the snorkel tube and snorkel shaft Snorkel Tool (PA-50231), tighten the snorkel tube
assembly by reversing the disassembly procedure until it is lightly seated in the transmission housing.
(see Snorkel Shaft Removal / Disassembly).
6. Inspect the pinion shaft assembly. Replace bearings

if needed. Inspect each gear for damage, chips or
abnormally worn teeth.
2. After the 13T gear and bearing are pressed onto the
snorkel shaft (flush to the shoulder), install the
washer and new retaining ring.
3. Press the gear back towards the retaining ring. Avoid
excessive force so the retaining ring is not damaged
or pre-stressed significantly.
NOTE: Failure to press the gear back against the
washer and retaining ring will lead to a gear
backlash change after vehicle is placed into
service.
4. Apply a small amount of white lithium grease or Anti-

Seize on the threads of the snorkel tube.
NOTE: If pinion shaft was disassembled, the

bearing cover must be installed on the shaft
before installing the 46T gear.
7. Install the pinion shaft assembly. Be sure to properly

mesh the snorkel shaft bevel gear with the pinion
shaft bevel gear.
8. Apply Loctite 242 to the threads of the bearing
cover retaining screws.
6.43
TRANSMISSION
9. Using a 5 mm Allen wrench, install only the three 13. Slowly rotate the snorkel tube clockwise while
screws that secure the pinion shaft assembly as counting the number of notches passing through the
shown below. Leave the longer locking screw (A) out hole opening as you rotate the tube. Rotate the
at this point. snorkel tube to the 3rd notch from the zero
backlash position obtained in step 11.
NOTE: DO NOT install the longer screw (A). 14. Check the pinion shaft gear backlash again by feel. If
Installing the longer screw will lock the snorkel the pinion shaft gear lash appears to be too tight,
tube and not allow for backlash setting rotate the snorkel shaft clockwise to the next notch
adjustment. (4th notch).
10. Torque the bearing cover retaining screws to 15. Once the backlash is set, apply Loctite 242 to the
specification. threads and install the locking screw to secure the
snorkel tube.
Bearing Cover Retaining Screws:

10 ft-lb (14 Nm)
11. Rotate the snorkel tube counterclockwise using the

snorkel tool (PA-50231) until the snorkel gear and
pinion gear have zero backlash.
NOTE: DO NOT overtighten the snorkel tube
when backing it out. At the 'zero' backlash
position, you should still be able to turn the
snorkel shaft using your fingers, but it will feel
rough and may have some tight spots.
12. Look down into the transmission housing to see the

snorkel locking screw hole opening to reference your
starting point.
NOTE: If you have a hard time seeing into the
hole, insert a small Allen wrench, punch or
screwdriver into the hole to feel when the notch
is aligned with the hole.
6.44
TRANSMISSION
16. Torque the locking screw to specification. 19. Apply Loctite 242to two screws (T) and install with
retaining plates over shift fork. Torque to
specification.
Snorkel Locking Screw:

10 ft-lb (14 Nm)
Shift Fork Screws: 6
10 ft-lb (14 Nm)
Transmission Assembly
NOTE: The snorkel shaft and pinion shaft must 20. Slide engagement dog (U) onto retaining pins of shift
be installed prior to transmission assembly. The fork.
snorkel shaft cannot be installed after
assembling the transmission.
17. Clean both transmission case halves thoroughly.

Inspect case half mating surfaces for damage.
18. Install shift fork (S) and torsion spring into
transmission housing as an assembly. Load spring
as shown in image below
6.45
TRANSMISSION
21. Assemble the reverse shaft assembly and input shaft 22. Install the idler gear shaft assembly (A) and gear
assembly if previously disassembled (see cluster assembly (B) into the transmission housing,
illustrations). all at the same time.
23. Install the rear output shaft assembly (C). Rotate

output shaft assembly to align slots with engagement
dog. Ensure bearing is fully seated upon assembly.
6.46
TRANSMISSION
24. Assemble shift shaft rail if previously disassembled. 26. Inspect the shift drum for any damage or wear.
Inspect the splines of the shift drum.
27. Install the shift drum (E) into the transmission

NOTE: Both shift forks need to be orientated the housing. Lift up on the shift shaft rail (D) and move
same way, so that the shift fork pins are both the rail assembly towards the shift drum to allow the
offset to the same side of the rail. shift fork ends to be installed into the shift drum (E).
25. Install the shift shaft rail (D) and shift forks into the
transmission housing as an assembly. Be sure the
shift forks are engaged into the engagement dogs.
6
28. Apply a continuous bead of Crankcase 3 Bond

Sealant (PN 2871557) to the left hand transmission
mating surface.
NOTE: Shift fork pins should be offset towards

the input shaft as shown above.
6.47
TRANSMISSION
29. Install the transmission case cover and retaining 30. Install new seals into the transmission case halves.
bolts. Torque bolts to specification.
The snorkel shaft seal (F), should be pressed in
until it seats against the housing counter-bore.
The input shaft seal (G), should be pressed in until
it seats flush with the housing.
The rear output shaft seals (H) and pinion shaft
seal (J) can be installed using a standard bushing
installation tool. Seals should be installed just past
the case lead-in chamfer (.070" or 1.8 mm from
outer face of bore).
Transmission Case Screws:

20 ft-lbs (27 Nm)
6.48
TRANSMISSION
31. Install the brake disc onto the pinion shaft. Install the 33. Install the sector gear (16T) onto the shift drum shaft.
washer and apply Loctite 262 or 2760 to the Install the shift shaft assembly and sector gear (11T)
mounting bolt threads. Torque the bolt to into the bushing pocket on the left side. Align the
specification. timing marks on the gears as shown.
34. Install the spacer onto the shift drum shaft.
Park Brake Disc Mounting Bolt:

14 ft-lb (20 Nm)
32. Thoroughly clean the shift shaft housing. Be sure

the transmission is in High gear prior to
reassembly.
35. Install the detent star onto the shift drum shaft. Be
sure to install the detent star with the raised edge
facing outward and skip-tooth aligned.
6.49
TRANSMISSION
36. Install the detent pawl onto the shift shaft and 38. Clean the transmission and gear sector cover mating
carefully install the compression spring. surfaces thoroughly.
39. Apply Crankcase Sealant (3-Bond) (PN 2871557)
onto the cover and transmission case mating
surface.
40. Install the sector cover and align the transmission
case dowel with the alignment hole. Install and
torque the bolts to specification.
Sector Cover Bolts:

12 ft-lb (16 Nm)
41. Install the transmission drain plug and torque to

specification.
37. Install a new O-ring on each shift shaft. Apply a small
amount of white lithium grease on the O-rings, shift
shafts and component contact surfaces prior to
installing the sector cover.
Fill / Drain Plug:
14 ft-lbs (19 Nm)
42. Install the bellcrank onto the shift shaft. Note the key
splined on the bellcrank and shift shaft. Install the nut
Bell Crank Nut:

18 ft-lb (24 Nm)
43. Refer to TRANSMISSION INSTALLATION, page 6.9

to complete the repair.
6.50
TRANSMISSION
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY VIEW (Turf Mode Models)
6.51
TRANSMISSION
REF. DESCRIPTION REF. DESCRIPTION REF. DESCRIPTION
1. Fill Plug 37. Bearing, Ball 72. Gear, Low 67T
2. Drain Plug, Magnetic 38. Bearing, Ball 73. Engagement Dog, 6-Face
4. Screw, M8 x 1.25 x 30 39. Bearing, Ball 74. Gear, 53T
5. Screw, M6 x 1 x 20 40. Spring, Compression 75. Gear, 46T
6. Screw, M8 x 50 41. Spring, Compression 76. Gear, Snorkel 13T
7. Screw, M6 x 1 x 40 42. Spring, Torsion 77. Shaft, Shift
Screw, M6 x 1 x 18 Spring, Compression Weldment, Rear Mount

8. 43. 78.
Bracket
9. Screw, M6 x 1 x 16 44. Spring, Compression, Detent 80. Retainer, Fork
10. Nut, NyLoc, M8 x 1.25 45. Spring, Washer 81. Bracket, Rear Mount
11. Washer, Cup 46. Tube, Snorkel 82. Cover, Bearing, Center Drive
12. Washer 47. Cover, Sector Gears 83. Spacer
13. Washer 48. Case, LH 84. Chain, Silent
14. Washer 49. Case, RH 85. Solenoid
15. Washer 50. Drum, Shift 86. Switch, Rotary, 2-Pin
16. Pin, Dowel 51. Gear, Sector 16T 87. O-Ring
17. Pin, Spring 52. Gear, Sector 31T 88. O-Ring
18. Retaining Ring, External 53. Pawl, Detent 89. O-Ring
19. Snap Ring 54. Star, Detent 90. Seal, Triple Lip
20. Retaining Ring, External 55. Plate, Park, 12-Face 91. Seal, Triple Lip
21. Retaining Ring, External 56. Shaft, Idler 29T 92. Seal, Dual Lip
22. Retaining Ring, Internal 57. Shaft, Reverse 29T 93. Seal, Triple Lip
23. Retaining Ring, External 58. Shaft, Front Output 95. Sensor, Speed
24. Retaining Ring, External 59. Shaft, Input Helical 98. Bracket, Wire Harness
25. Retaining Ring, External 60. Shaft, Pinion, 11T 99. Plug, Expansion
26. Retaining Ring, External 61. Disc, Brake 100. Side Gear, Male, 39T
27. Washer, Thrust 62. Bellcrank 101. Bearing, Plain
28. Washer, Thrust 63. Collar, Shift 102. Side Gear, Female, 39T
29. Shim 64. Rail, Shift Shaft 103. Diff Cover
30. Shim 65. Tube, Vent, 1/4 in. 104. Planet Gear
31. Bearing, Needle Cage 66. Fork, Pivot Shaft 105. Screw, M8 x 1.25 x 25
32. Bearing, Ball 67. Dog, Engagement 106. Ring Gear, 53T
33. Bearing, Ball 68. Shift Dog, Park 108. Bearing, Plain
34. Bearing, Ball 69. Gear, 44T 109. Collar Sleeve, Input Shaft
35. Bearing, Ball 70. Fork, Shift
36. Bearing, Needle Cage 71. Sprocket, 48T, 6-Face
6.52
TRANSMISSION
TROUBLESHOOTING
Shifting Difficulty
Check the following items when shifting difficulty is
encountered.
Shift cable adjustment/condition
PVT alignment (clutch center distance)
Idle speed (throttle cable routing)
Transmission lubricant type/quality
Loose fasteners on sector gear cover
Worn rod ends, clevis pins, or pivot arm bushings
Shift selector rail travel
Worn, broken or damaged internal transmission
components
NOTE: To determine if shifting difficulty or
problem is caused by an internal transmission
problem, isolate the transmission by
disconnecting the shift cable end from the
transmission bellcrank. Manually select each
gear range at the transmission bellcrank, and
test ride vehicle. If it functions properly, the
6
problem is outside the transmission.
If transmission problem remains, disassemble

transmission and inspect all gear dogs for
wear (rounding) or damage. Inspect all
bearings, circlips, thrust washers and shafts
for wear.
6.53
TRANSMISSION
NOTES
6.54
FINAL DRIVE
CHAPTER 7
FINAL DRIVE
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2
FINAL DRIVE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2
BEARING CARRIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3
FRONT BEARING CARRIER INSPECTION / REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3
FRONT BEARING REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4
FRONT BEARING CARRIER INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5
REAR BEARING CARRIER INSPECTION / REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6
REAR BEARING REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.8
REAR BEARING CARRIER INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.9
DRIVE SHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.11
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.11
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.12
REAR DRIVE SHAFT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.13
REAR DRIVE SHAFT INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.14
DRIVE SHAFT / CV JOINT HANDLING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.16
OUTER CV JOINT / BOOT REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.17
INNER PLUNGING JOINT / BOOT REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.19
DRIVE SHAFT ASSEMBLY VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.22
7
FRONT PROPSHAFT SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.23
FRONT PROPSHAFT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.23
FRONT PROP SHAFT INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.24
REAR PROP SHAFT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.24
REAR PROP SHAFT INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.25
REAR PROP SHAFT REMOVAL XP 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.26
REAR PROP SHAFT INSTALLATION XP 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.27
SUPPORT BEARING REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.28
PROP SHAFT U-JOINT SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.29
FRONT GEARCASE / CENTRALIZED HILLIARD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.30
CENTRALIZED HILLIARD ASSEMBLY VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.30
ALL WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.31
AWD DIAGNOSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.32
FRONT GEARCASE REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.33
FRONT GEARCASE DISASSEMBLY / INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.34
FRONT GEARCASE ASSEMBLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.37
FRONT GEARCASE INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.39
WHEEL HUBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.41
FRONT HUB ASSEMBLY VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.41
REAR HUB ASSEMBLY VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.41
BEADLOCK RIMS (DESERT EDITION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.42
7.1
FINAL DRIVE
GENERAL INFORMATION Final Drive Torque Specifications
SPECIAL TOOLS ITEM SPECIFICATION
PART NUMBER TOOL DESCRIPTION Wheel Lug Nuts 120 ft-lbs (163 Nm)
2872608 Roll Pin Removal Tool Hub Castle Nut

110 ft-lbs (149 Nm)
(front and rear)
CV Boot Clamp Pliers
8700226 (earless type) Ball Joint Pinch 42 ft-lbs (57 Nm)
Fasteners
PU-48951 Axle Boot Clamp Tool
Brake Caliper
40 ft-lbs (54 Nm)
Bosch Automotive Service Solutions: 1-800-345- Mounting Bolts
2233 or http://polaris.service-solutions.com/ Tie Rod End 15 ft-lbs (20 Nm) + 90
Fastener
Propshaft Support
35 ft-lb (47 Nm)
Bearing Fasteners
Front Gearcase 11 ft-lbs (15 Nm)
Cover Plate Screws
Front Gearcase
30 ft-lbs (41 Nm)
Mounting Bolts
Bearing Carrier to
42 ft-lb (54 Nm)
Trailing Arm Bolts
Radius Rod 40 ft-lb (54 Nm)
Fasteners
7.2
FINAL DRIVE
BEARING CARRIER 6. Remove and discard the two front brake caliper
mounting bolts and remove the caliper from the
Front Bearing Carrier Inspection / Removal brake disc (see Chapter 9 ).
1. Elevate front of vehicle and safely support machine 7. CAUTION: Do not hang the caliper by the brake line.
under the frame area. Use wire to hang caliper to prevent damage to the
brake line.
CAUTION 8. Remove the front wheel hub assembly.
Serious injury may result if machine tips or falls. Be 9. Remove and discard the upper and lower ball joint
sure machine is secure before beginning this service pinch bolts 4 .
procedure. Wear eye protection when removing
bearings and seals.
2. Check bearings for side play by grasping the top and

bottom of the tire firmly and checking for movement.
The tire should rotate smoothly without binding or
rough spots.
10. Using a soft faced hammer, lightly tap on the bearing

carrier while removing the upper and lower ball joint
ends.
7
11. Remove the bearing carrier from the front drive shaft.
12. Rotate bearing by hand and check for smooth
rotation. Visually inspect bearing for moisture, dirt, or
3. Remove the four wheel nuts and remove the front corrosion.
wheel.
NOTE: Due to extremely close tolerances and
4. Remove the cotter pin 1 and loosen the front wheel minimal wear, the bearings must be inspected
hub castle nut 2 . Remove the nut, and two cone visually, and by feel. While rotating bearings by
washers 3 from the front wheel hub assembly. hand, inspect for rough spots, discoloration, or
corrosion. The bearings should turn smoothly
and quietly, with no detectable up and down
movement and minimal movement sideways
between inner and outer race.
13. Replace bearing if moisture, dirt, corrosion, or

roughness is evident.
5. Remove the fastener retaining the steering tie rod

end to the front bearing carrier.
7.3
FINAL DRIVE
Front Bearing Replacement 7. Apply Loctite 603 retaining compound to the
Bearing Removal outer circumference of the new bearing 2 race and
carefully press the new bearing into the bearing
1. Remove the outer snap ring 1 . carrier housing.
2. From the back side of the bearing carrier, tap on the

outer bearing race with a drift punch in the reliefs as NOTE: Use care to not allow any of the Loctite
shown. compound to get in the bearing.
8. Wipe the housing clean of any excess compound

and install the snap ring 3 .
3. Drive bearing out evenly by tapping on outer race

only. Once bearing is at bottom of casting, support
casting on outer edges so bearing can be removed.
4. Inspect the bearing carrier housing for scratches,
wear or damage. Replace front bearing carrier if
damaged.
Bearing Installation
5. Thoroughly clean the front bearing carrier housing
and the outer race on the new bearing. Be sure that
all oil residue has been removed from each surface.
6. Support the bottom of the bearing carrier housing.
CAUTION
Use an arbor and press only on the outer race,
otherwise bearing damage may occur.
7.4
FINAL DRIVE
Front Bearing Carrier Installation 6. Install new brake caliper mounting bolts and torque
1. Install drive shaft axle through the backside of the to specification.
bearing carrier.
2. Install the upper and lower ball joint ends into the
front bearing carrier.
3. Install new pinch bolts 1 and nuts. Torque to
Front Caliper Mounting Bolts:
specification.
40 ft-lbs (54 Nm)
CAUTION
New bolts have a pre-applied locking agent which is
destroyed upon removal. Always use new brake caliper
mounting bolts
upon assembly.
7. Install the steering tie rod end 4 onto the front

bearing carrier.
NOTE: Refer to the photos below to ensure
proper placement of the tie rod end.
Ball Joint Pinch Bolts:

42 ft-lbs (57 Nm)
7
4. Apply Anti-Seize to drive shaft axle splines.
5. Install front wheel hub assembly 2 , cone washers 3 ,
and hand tighten the castle nut. Install washers with
domed side out.
8. Torque the tie rod end fastener 5 to specification

and install a new cotter pin 5 .
Tie Rod End Fastener:

15 ft-lbs (20 Nm) + 90
7.5
FINAL DRIVE
9. Torque wheel hub nut 6 to specification and install a Rear Bearing Carrier Inspection / Removal
new cotter pin 7 . Tighten nut slightly if necessary to 1. Elevate rear of vehicle and safely support machine
align cotter pin holes. Bend both ends of cotter pin under the frame area.
around end of spindle in different directions.
CAUTION
bearings and seals.
2. Check bearings for side play by grasping the top and

bottom of the tire firmly and checking for movement.
The tire should rotate smoothly without binding or
rough spots.
3. Remove the four wheel nuts and rear wheel.
4. Remove the cotter pin 1 and loosen the rear wheel
hub castle nut 2 . Remove the nut, and two cone
washers 3 from the rear wheel hub assembly.
Wheel Hub Castle Nut:

110 ft-lbs (149 Nm)
10. Install wheel and four wheel nuts. Torque wheel nuts
to specification.
Wheel Nuts:
120 ft-lbs (163 Nm)
11. Rotate wheel and check for smooth operation.

5. Remove the lower radius rod outer mounting bolt 4 ,
nut and washer from the bearing carrier. Swing
radius rod down. Discard the nut.
6. Remove the two brake caliper mounting bolts 5 .

Remove the rear brake caliper assembly.
7.6
FINAL DRIVE
7. CAUTION: Do not hang the caliper by the brake line. 11. Rotate bearing by hand and check for smooth
Use wire to hang caliper to prevent damage to the rotation. Visually inspect bearing for moisture, dirt, or
brake line. corrosion.
NOTE: Due to extremely close tolerances and
minimal wear, the bearings must be inspected
visually, and by feel. While rotating bearings by
hand, inspect for rough spots, discoloration, or
corrosion. The bearings should turn smoothly
and quietly, with no detectable up and down
movement and minimal movement sideways
between inner and outer race.
12. Replace bearing if moisture, dirt, corrosion, or

roughness is evident.
8. Remove the rear wheel hub and brake disk

assembly.
9. Remove the five remaining bolts 6 that attach the
rear bearing carrier to the trailing arm. Discard the
nuts.
10. Remove the bearing carrier from the rear drive shaft
and trailing arm.
7.7
FINAL DRIVE
Rear Bearing Replacement 7. Apply Loctite 603 retaining compound to the
Bearing Removal outer circumference of the new bearing race 2 and
carefully press the new bearing into the bearing
1. Remove the outer snap ring 1 . carrier housing 3 .
2. From the back side of the bearing carrier, tap on the

outer bearing race with a drift punch in the reliefs as NOTE: Use care to not allow any of the Loctite
shown. compound to get in the bearing.
8. Wipe the housing clean of any excess compound

and install the snap ring 4 .
3. Drive bearing out evenly by tapping on outer race

only. Once bearing is at bottom of casting, support
casting on outer edges so bearing can be removed.
4. Inspect the bearing carrier housing for scratches,
wear or damage. Replace rear bearing carrier if
damaged.
Bearing Installation
5. Thoroughly clean the rear bearing carrier housing
and the outer race on the new bearing. Be sure that
all oil residue has been removed from each surface.
6. Support the bottom of the bearing carrier housing.
CAUTION
Use an arbor and press only on the outer race,
otherwise bearing damage may occur.
7.8
FINAL DRIVE
Rear Bearing Carrier Installation 4. Install rear wheel hub assembly 2 , cone washers 3 ,
1. Install drive shaft through the backside of the bearing and hand tighten the castle nut. Install washers with
carrier. domed side out.
2. Install the four fasteners 1 that attach the rear 5. Install the rear brake caliper assembly and new bolts
4 . Torque to specification.
bearing carrier to the trailing arm. Install the one
fastener 2 that attaches the upper radius rod to the
bearing carrier. Torque bolts to specification.
NOTE: Use new nuts upon installation of the
rear bearing carrier.
Rear Caliper Mounting Bolts:

40 ft-lbs (54 Nm)
Bearing Carrier to Trailing Arm Bolts:

42 ft-lb (54 Nm)
Radius Rod to Bearing Carrier Fasteners:

40 ft-lb (54 Nm)
3. Apply anti-seize to drive shaft splines.
7.9
FINAL DRIVE
6. Torque wheel hub nut to specification and install a
new cotter pin 5 . Tighten nut slightly if necessary to
align cotter pin holes.
Hub Castle Nut:

110 ft-lbs (149 Nm)

to specification.
Wheel Nuts:
120 ft-lbs (163 Nm)
8. Rotate wheel and check for smooth operation. Bend

both ends of cotter pin around end of spindle in
different directions.
7.10
FINAL DRIVE
DRIVE SHAFT 7. Remove and discard the upper and lower ball joint
pinch bolts 4 and nuts.
Front Drive Shaft Removal
1. Elevate front of vehicle and safely support machine
under the frame area.
CAUTION
bearings and seals.
2. Remove the four wheel nuts and remove the front

wheel.
3. Remove the cotter pin 1 and loosen the front wheel
hub castle nut 2 . Remove the nut, and cone
washers 3 from the front wheel hub assembly. 8. Using a soft faced hammer, lightly tap on the bearing
carrier while removing the upper ball joint end.
9. Remove the drive shaft from the front bearing carrier.
4. Remove and discard the two front brake caliper

brake disc (see Chapter 9 Caliper Removal , page
9.23). 10. With a short, sharp jerk, remove drive shaft from the
front gearcase.
5. CAUTION: Do not hang the caliper by the brake line.
Use wire to hang caliper to prevent damage to the
brake line.
6. Remove the front wheel hub assembly.
7.11
FINAL DRIVE
Front Drive Shaft Installation 5. Install new pinch bolts and nuts 3 . Torque to
1. Install new spring ring 1 on drive shaft. Apply an specification.
anti-seize compound to the splines 2 .
2. Align splines of drive shaft with front gearcase and

reinstall the drive shaft. Use a rubber mallet to tap on
the outboard end of the drive shaft if necessary
Ball Joint Pinch Bolts:
42 ft-lbs (57 Nm)

7. Install front wheel hub assembly 4 , cone washers 5 ,
and hand tighten the castle nut. Install washers with
domed side out.
3. Install drive shaft into the front bearing carrier.
4. Install the upper and lower ball joint ends into the
front bearing carrier.
7.12
FINAL DRIVE
8. Torque wheel hub nut 6 to specification and install a Rear Drive Shaft Removal
new cotter pin 7 . Tighten nut slightly if necessary to 1. Raise and support the vehicle.
align cotter pin holes. Bend both ends of cotter pin
around end of spindle in different directions.
CAUTION
sure machine is secure before beginning this
procedure. Always wear eye protection.
2. Remove the four wheel nuts and rear wheel.

Wheel Hub Castle Nut:

110 ft-lbs (149 Nm)
9. Install new brake caliper mounting bolts and torque

to specification.
7
4. Remove the two bolts 4 retaining the upper and
lower radius rods to the bearing carrier. Discard the
nuts. Let the radius rods swing downward.
Front Caliper Mounting Bolts: 5. Remove the brake caliper mounting bolts 5 .
40 ft-lbs (54 Nm) Remove the rear brake caliper assembly.
6. CAUTION: Do not hang the caliper by the brake line.
CAUTION brake line.

mounting bolts
upon assembly.
to specification.
Wheel Nuts:
120 ft-lbs (163 Nm)
11. Rotate wheel and check for smooth operation. 7. Remove the rear hub assembly from the bearing
carrier.
7.13
FINAL DRIVE
8. Support the trailing arm from underneath. Rear Drive Shaft Installation
9. Remove the lower shock mounting bolt and nut 6 . 1. Install new spring ring 1 on drive shaft. Apply an
Swing the shock inward. Discard the nut. anti-seize compound to the splines 2 .
10. Remove the stabilizer bar mounting bolt, washer and
nut 7 . Discard the nut.
11. Lift the trailing arm assembly upward so the rear
drive shaft is parallel with the ground.
12. Leaving the drive shaft in the transmission, swing the
rear trailing arm assembly outward until it is free from
the rear drive shaft.
13. Lower the trailing arm.
2. Align splines of drive shaft with transmission splines

and reinstall the drive shaft. Use a rubber mallet to
tap on the outboard end of the drive shaft if
necessary.
14. With a short, sharp jerk, remove drive shaft from the
transmission splines.
3. Swing the rear trailing arm assembly outward and

upward until the rear axle can be inserted into the
bearing carrier. Support the trailing arm from
underneath.
7.14
FINAL DRIVE
4. Install the lower shock mounting bolt and new nut. 7. Install rear wheel hub assembly 3 . Install the two
Torque fastener to specification. cone washers 4 and castle nut. Torque castle nut to
specification. Install new cotter pin 5 .
Lower Shock Bolt to Trailing Arm:

70 ft-lbs (95 Nm)
5. Install the stabilizer bar mounting bolt, washer and

new nut. Torque fastener to specification.
Stabilizer Bar Linkage:

40 ft-lbs (54 Nm)
Rear Hub Castle Nut:

110 ft-lbs (149 Nm)
8. Install the radius rod bolts, washers and new nuts.

Radius Rods to Bearing Carrier:

40 ft-lb (54 Nm)
7.15
FINAL DRIVE
9. Install the rear brake caliper assembly and new bolts Drive Shaft / CV Joint Handling Tips
6 . Torque to specification.
Care should be exercised during drive shaft removal or
when servicing CV joints. Drive shaft components are
precision parts.
Cleanliness and following these instructions is very
important to ensure proper shaft function and a normal
service life.
The complete drive shaft and joint should be
handled by getting hold of the interconnecting
shaft to avoid disassembly or potential damage to
the drive shaft joints.
Over-angling of joints beyond their capacity could
result in boot or joint damage.
Make sure surface-ground areas and splines of
shaft are protected during handling to avoid
damage.
Do not allow boots to come into contact with sharp
edges or hot engine and exhaust components.
The drive shaft is not to be used as a lever arm to
Rear Caliper Mounting Bolts: position other suspension components.
40 ft-lbs (54 Nm) Never use a hammer or sharp tools to remove or
to install boot clamps.
to specification. Be sure joints are thoroughly clean and that the
proper amount and type of grease is used to refill
when joint boots are replaced and when joints are
cleaned. Refer to text for grease capacity of CV
joints and CV joint boots.
Wheel Nuts:
120 ft-lbs (163 Nm)
7.16
FINAL DRIVE
Outer CV Joint / Boot Replacement 4. Place the drive shaft in a soft-jawed vise. Using a
1. Use a side cutters to cut and discard the boot clamps soft-faced hammer, or brass drift, strike the inner
1 . race of the joint to drive the joint off the drive shaft.
Be sure to tap evenly around the joint to avoid
binding.
2. Remove the large end of the boot from the CV joint

and slide the boot down the shaft.
IMPORTANT: Tap on inner race only!
5. Make sure circlip 2 is on the shaft and not left in the

joint.
3. Clean the grease from the face of the joint.
7.17
FINAL DRIVE
6. Remove the CV boot from the shaft. 12. Grease the joint with the special CV joint grease
provided in the boot replacement kit. Fill the cavity
behind the balls and the splined hole in the joints
CAUTION inner race. Pack the ball tracks and outer face flush
with grease. Place any remaining grease into the
Complete disassembly of the CV joint is NOT
boot.
recommended. The internal components are precision
fit and develop their own characteristic wear patterns.
Intermixing the internal components could result in CAUTION
looseness, binding, and/or premature failure of the joint.
The grease provided in the replacement kit is specially
formulated for wear resistance and durability. DO NOT
IMPORTANT: If the grease in the joint is use substitutes or mix with other lubricants.
obviously contaminated with water and/or dirt,
the joint should be replaced.
NOTE: The amount of grease provided in the
boot kit is pre-measured. Use entire contents of
package.
13. Slide the joint onto the drive shaft splines and align
the circlip with the lead-in chamfer on the inner race
of the joint.
7. Thoroughly clean the joint with an appropriate

solvent and dry the joint to prevent any residual
solvent from being left in the joint upon reassembly.
8. Visually inspect the joint by tilting the inner race to
one side to expose each ball. Severe pitting, galling,
play between the ball and its cage window, any
cracking or damage to the cage, pitting or galling or 14. Use a soft-faced hammer to tap the joint onto the
chips in raceways call for joint replacement. drive shaft until it locks into place.
15. Pull on the joint to make sure it is securely locked in
NOTE: Shiny areas in ball tracks and on the place.
cage spheres are normal. Do not replace CV
joints because parts have polished surfaces. 16. Remove excess grease from the CV joint's external
Replace CV joint only if components are cracked, surfaces and place the excess grease in the boot.
broken, worn or otherwise unserviceable.
17. Pull the boot over the joint and position the boot lips
9. Clean the splines on the end of the shaft and apply a into the grooves on the joint housing and shaft. Make
light coat of grease prior to reassembly. sure the boot is not dimpled or collapsed.
10. Slide the small boot clamp and boot (small end first)
onto the drive shaft and position the boot in its
groove machined in the shaft.
11. Install a new circlip on the end of the shaft.
7.18
FINAL DRIVE
18. Install and tighten the large clamp 3 using the Inner Plunging Joint / Boot Replacement
appropriate clamp tool. 1. Use a side cutters to cut and discard the boot clamps
1 .
Axle Boot Clamp Tool: PU-48951 2. Remove the large end of the boot from the plunging
or joint and slide the boot down the shaft.
CV Boot Clamp Pliers: 8700226
19. While pulling out on the CV shaft, fully extend the CV

joint and slide a straight O-ring pick or a small slotted
screw driver between the small end of the boot and
the shaft. This will allow the air pressure to equalize
in the CV boot in the position that the joint will spend
most of its life. Before you remove your instrument,
be sure the small end of the boot is in its correct 7
location on the shaft.
20. Install and tighten the small clamp 4 on the boot
using the appropriate clamp tool.
3. Clean the grease from the face of the joint and place
the drive shaft in a soft-jawed vise.
Axle Boot Clamp Tool: PU-48951

or
7.19
FINAL DRIVE
4. Using a soft-faced hammer, or brass drift, strike the 6. Remove the boot from the shaft.
inner race of the joint to drive the joint off the shaft.
Be sure to tap evenly around the joint to avoid
binding. CAUTION
Complete disassembly of the plunging joint is NOT
recommended. The internal components are precision
fit and develop their own characteristic wear patterns.
Intermixing the internal components could result in
looseness, binding, and/or premature failure of the joint.
IMPORTANT: If the grease in the joint is

obviously contaminated with water and/or dirt,
the joint should be replaced.
IMPORTANT: Tap on inner race only!
5. Make sure the circlip 2 is on the shaft and not left in

the joint.
7. Thoroughly clean the joint with an appropriate

solvent and dry the joint to prevent any residual
solvent from being left in the joint upon reassembly.
8. Visually inspect the joint for damage. Replace if
needed.
9. Clean the splines on the end of the shaft and apply a
light coat of grease prior to reassembly.
10. Slide the small boot clamp and boot (small end first)
onto the drive shaft and position the boot in its
groove machined in the shaft.
11. Install a new circlip on the end of the shaft.
7.20
FINAL DRIVE
12. Grease the joint with the special joint grease 19. Install and tighten the small clamp 3 using the
provided in the boot replacement kit. Fill the cavity appropriate clamp tool.
behind the balls and the splined hole in the joints
inner race. Pack the ball tracks and outer face flush
with grease. Place any remaining grease into the
boot.
CAUTION
The grease provided in the replacement kit is specially
formulated for wear resistance and durability. DO NOT
use substitutes or mix with other lubricants.
NOTE: The amount of grease provided in the

boot kit is pre-measured. Use entire contents of
package.
13. Fully compress the joint and push the drive shaft
firmly into the inner race. Axle Boot Clamp Tool: PU-48951
14. Align the circlip with the lead-in chamfer. or
20. Pull out on the drive shaft to center the joint in the
housing. Slide a straight O-ring pick or a small
slotted screw driver between the large end of the
boot and the joint housing and lift up to equalize the
air pressure in the boot.
21. Position the boot lip in its groove. Install and tighten
the large clamp 4 using the appropriate clamp tool. 7
15. Use a soft-faced hammer to tap the joint onto the

drive shaft until you reach the end of the splines and
the joint locks in place.
16. Pull on the joint to test that the circlip is seated and
that the joint is securely fastened to the shaft.
17. Remove excess grease from the plunging joints
external surfaces and place the excess grease in the
boot.
18. Pull the boot over the joint and position the boot lips
into the grooves on the joint housing and shaft. Make Axle Boot Clamp Tool: PU-48951
sure the boot is not dimpled or collapsed. or
7.21
FINAL DRIVE
Drive Shaft Assembly View
7.22
FINAL DRIVE
FRONT PROPSHAFT SERVICE 3. Slide the front propshaft 5 off the rear propshaft 6
and remove it from the vehicle.

Front Propshaft Removal
1. Remove the center console.
4. Proceed to Front Prop Shaft Installation, page 7.24.
1 Cap 3 Torx Screw

2 Shifter 4 Push Rivet
2. Locate the prop shaft roll pin and use the Roll Pin
Removal Tool (PN 2872608) to remove the roll pin.
Discard roll pin. Push the front prop shaft rearward to
remove it from the front gearcase input shaft.
7
Roll Pin Removal Tool:

PN 2872608
NOTE: Right front wheel can be removed to gain

better access to the propshaft roll pin.
7.23
FINAL DRIVE
Front Prop Shaft Installation 6. Reposition the front gearcase and install the four
1. Reverse the appropriate Front Propshaft Removal, bolts that secure the front gearcase to the frame.
page 7.23 procedure to reinstall the front propshaft. Torque bolts to specification.
2. Lubricate front gearcase shaft splines with Anti-

Seize.
3. Lubricate the front and rear prop shaft mid joint with
Polaris All Purpose Grease.
Front Gearcase Mounting Bolts:
4. Align the front and rear prop shafts as shown below 30 ft-lbs (41 Nm)
and slide them together.
Rear Prop Shaft Removal

1. Remove the center console.
1 Cap 3 Torx Screw

2 Shifter 4 Push Rivet
2. Remove the two fasteners 5 retaining the support

bearing cover 6 to the frame.
NOTE: Paint marks are applied to the front and

rear prop shafts to aid shaft alignment.
Reference these marks during installation if still
visible.
5. When installing the front prop shaft onto the front

gearcase, use a new roll pin.
3. While moving the prop shaft support bearing

assembly, slide the front prop shaft off the rear prop
shaft and remove it from the vehicle.
7.24
FINAL DRIVE
4. Once the front and rear prop shafts have been Rear Prop Shaft Installation
separated, slide the rear prop shaft forward to 1. Reverse the appropriate Rear Prop Shaft Removal
remove it from the transmission output shaft. procedure to reinstall the rear prop shaft.
2. Lubricate the transmission output shaft splines with
4. Slide the rear prop shaft forward from the left rear of
the machine just below the PVT cover. Install the rear
prop shaft on the transmission snorkel shaft.
5. Lubricate the support bushing with light oil to ease
installation and install the bushing on the rear prop
shaft bearing.
6. Align the front and rear prop shafts as shown below
and slide them together.
5. Remove the support bearing rubber bushing by

pulling it off the rear prop shaft.
6. Remove the rear prop shaft out of the left rear of the
vehicle.

rear prop shafts to aid shaft alignment.
Reference these marks during installation if still
visible.
7.25
FINAL DRIVE
7. Torque the support bearing fasteners to Rear Prop Shaft Removal XP 4
specification.
1. Remove all seats.
2. Remove the front and rear center consoles (see
Chapter 10 Rocker Panels, Rear Console and
Floor XP 4, page 10.24).
Support Bearing Fasteners: 3. Remove the fasteners 1 from center 2 and rear skid
35 ft-lb (47 Nm) plates 3 .
8. Align the front propshaft paint mark with the front

gearcase input shaft mark so the pin holes align.
Install a new roll pin.
4. Remove center and rear skid plates.

5. Remove the fasteners 4 securing the support
bearing cover 5 to the frame.
6. Move the prop shaft support bearing assembly to the

drivers side to slide the rear prop shaft yoke 6 off the
transmission output shaft.
7.26
FINAL DRIVE
Rear Prop Shaft Installation XP 4
1. Reverse the appropriate Rear Prop Shaft Removal
XP 4, page 7.26 procedure to reinstall the rear prop
shaft.
2. Lubricate the transmission output shaft splines with
4. Align the front and rear prop shafts and slide them
together.
7. Slide the prop shaft to the rear of the vehicle until the
front of the shaft clears the frame support and slide
the prop shaft forward out of the vehicle.

rear propshafts to aid shaft alignment. Reference
these marks during installation if still visible.
5. Torque the support bearing fasteners to specification.
Support Bearing Fasteners:

35 ft-lb (47 Nm)
7.27
FINAL DRIVE
Support Bearing Replacement 6. Using an appropriate bearing/bushing installation
1. Remove the rear prop shaft from the vehicle (see sleeve, drive the support bearing assembly onto the
Chapter 7 Rear Prop Shaft Removal, page 7.24). propshaft until it seats against the shoulder on the
shaft.
2. Using a rubber mallet, remove the rubber isolated
bearing support from the shaft to expose the bearing.
NOTE: Take care while installing the support

3. Using a commercially available 2-jaw puller, remove bearing assembly. Be sure to only drive on the
the bearing from the end of the propshaft. inner race of the bearing. Driving on the bearing
or support in any other location will damage the
4. Clean the bearing mounting surface on the shaft and bearing or support assembly.
apply Loctite 603 retaining compound to the
clean surface. 7. Wipe the bearing and shaft clean of any excess
retaining compound.
NOTE: Use care to not allow any of the Loctite
compound to get in the bearing.
8. Install the rear prop shaft into the vehicle (see

Chapter 7 Rear Prop Shaft Installation, page
7.25).
5. Install the new support bearing assembly onto the

end of the prop shaft.
NOTE: Do not attempt to separate the bearing
from the rubber isolated support assembly upon
installation.
7.28
FINAL DRIVE
Prop Shaft U-Joint Service
The prop shafts on this unit are not serviceable. If a cross
or yoke is worn, the prop shaft assembly needs to be
replaced.
7.29
FINAL DRIVE
FRONT GEARCASE / CENTRALIZED HILLIARD
Centralized Hilliard Assembly View
REF# DESCRIPTION QTY REF# DESCRIPTION QTY

1 O-Ring 1 17 Roll Cage 1
2 O-Ring 1 19 Hub / Race Assembly 2
3 Dowel Pin 1 20 Hub Sub-Assembly (Female) 1
4 Vent Hose Fitting 1 21 Hub Sub-Assembly (Male) 1
5 Ball Bearing 2 22 Rollers 20
6 Ball Bearing (Double Row) 1 23 Torsion Spring 1
7 Bushing 1 24 H-Clip Spring 20
8 Bushing 1 26 Nylon Spacer 2
9 Oil Seal 2 27 Backlash Spacer 1
10 Oil Seal 1 28 Ring Gear Spacer 1
11 Retaining Ring, Internal 1 29 Torsion Spring Retainer 1
12 Retaining Ring 1 30 Pinion Gear 1
13 Cover Screws, M6 (T30 Torx) 7 31 Armature Plate 1
14 Cover Plate Assembly 1 32 AWD Coil 1
15 Gearcase Housing 1 35 Fill Plug 1
16 Clutch Housing (Ring Gear) 1 36 Drain Plug, Magnetic 1
7.30
FINAL DRIVE
All Wheel Drive Operation the output hubs and ring gear by creating an over-
running condition for the rollers upon disengagement.
The AWD switch may be turned on or off while the
vehicle is moving, however, AWD will not enable until the
engine RPM drops below 3100. Once the AWD is
enabled, it remains enabled until the switch is turned off.
Engage the AWD switch before getting into conditions
where the front wheel drive may be needed. If the rear
wheels are spinning, release the throttle before switching
to AWD.
CAUTION
Switching to AWD while the rear wheels are spinning

may cause severe drive shaft and gearcase damage.
Always switch to AWD while the rear wheels have
traction or are at rest.
With the AWD switch off, the vehicle drives through the
rear wheels only (2 wheel drive). When the AWD is
enabled, the front drive acts as an on-demand AWD
system. This means, the front drive will engage once the
rear wheels have lost traction, and will remain engaged
until the torque requirement goes away (i.e. rear wheels
regain traction).
CAUTION
7
If the rear wheels are spinning, release the throttle
before turning the AWD switch on. If AWD is engaged
while the wheels are spinning, severe drive shaft and
front gearcase damage could result.
AWD Engagement: When the AWD switch is activated,

the AWD coil is powered by a 12 Vdc input which creates
a magnetic field. This magnetic field attracts an armature
plate 1 that is keyed to the roll cage 2 . When the ring
gear 3 and roll cage are spinning (vehicle is moving), the
energized coil and armature plate will apply drag to the
roll cage that indexes the rollers inside the ring gear to an
engagement position. While in the engagement position,
the front drive will be in an over-running condition (not
engaged), until the rear wheels lose traction. Once the
rear wheels begin to lose traction, the front drive will
engage by coupling the output hubs 4 to the ring gear
via the rollers. The front drive will remain engaged until
the torque requirement goes away (i. e. rear wheels
regain traction).
AWD Disengagement: Once the rear wheels regain
traction, the front wheels will return to the over-running
condition. The vehicle is now back to rear wheel drive
until the next loss of rear wheel traction occurs.
Torsion Spring Operation: The torsion spring 5 acts as
a return mechanism to help disengage the coupling of
7.31
FINAL DRIVE
AWD Diagnosis 4. Inspect armature plate 3 for a consistent wear
Symptom: AWD Will Not Engage pattern. There should be two distinct wear bands 4 .
If only one band of wear is present (or if there is wear
1. Check the gearcase coil resistance. To test the coil between the two bands), inspect the coil area as
resistance, measure between the power wire 1 (GY) indicated in Step 5. A wear band with an interrupted
and ground wire 2 (BN/WH). Measurement should wear mark may indicate a warped plate, which may
be within specification. cause intermittent operation.
5. Check to make sure the coil 5 is seated in the U-

shaped 6 insert that is pressed into the gearcase
cover 7 . The top of the coil should be seated below
the U-shaped insert. The U-shaped insert controls
the pole gap. If the top of the coil is above the
surface of the U-shaped insert it raises the armature
Front Gearcase Coil Resistance: plate, thereby increasing pole gap. If the pole gap
21 - 27 increases the coil will not be strong enough to
engage the AWD system. If this is found, replace the
2. Turn on ignition and AWD switches and place gear cover plate assembly.
selector in High or Low. Check for minimum battery
voltage at Gray and Brown/White chassis wires that
power the coil. Should have a minimum of 11 Vdc.
3. If electrical tests are within specification, remove
gearcase (see Chapter 7 Front Gearcase
Removal, page 7.33) and inspect components.
7.32
FINAL DRIVE
6. Inspect the roller surface on the inside of the ring Front Gearcase Removal
gear for gouging/rough spots. 1. Raise and support vehicle
2. Place gear selector in neutral.
3. Refer to FRONT DRIVE SHAFT, page and
remove both front drive shafts from the front
gearcase.
4. Remove the front section of the prop shaft (see
Chapter 7 FRONT PROPSHAFT SERVICE, page
7.23).
5. Disconnect the wire harness for the front gearcase
and remove the harness from the retaining dart.
6. Remove the vent line from the front gearcase and
plug vent line fitting.
7. Remove the four bolts 4 securing the front gearcase
to the frame.
7. Inspect the roll cage 9 assembly for cracks or
excessive wear. If damaged, replace the roll cage
assembly.
8. Inspect the rollers 10 for nicks and scratches. The
rollers must slide up, down, in and out freely within
the roll cage sliding surfaces and H-springs.
8. Rotate front of gearcase up so the input shaft is

facing down. Lift and remove the gearcase from the
front LH wheel well area and slide it out of the
vehicle above the upper A-arm.
7.33
FINAL DRIVE
Front Gearcase Disassembly / Inspection 4. Remove and inspect the armature plate. Refer to
1. Drain and properly dispose of gearcase fluid. AWD Diagnosis, page 7.32 for detailed inspection
Remove any metal particles from the drain plug process.
magnet.
2. Remove the seven cover screws and remove the
cover plate assembly.
5. Remove the torsion spring retainer and torsion

spring from the top of the ring gear.
3. Remove the LH output hub assembly from the clutch
housing or outer cover plate assembly.
NOTE: Nylon spacer is non-serviceable and

should not be removed.
7.34
FINAL DRIVE
6. Remove the clutch housing / ring gear and roll cage 8. Remove pinion seal, internal retaining ring and
assembly from the gearcase housing. pinion gear assembly from the gearcase housing.
Inspect and clean the gearcase housing and replace
all oil seals and O-rings.
7. Remove the RH output hub assembly from the

gearcase housing.
9. Inspect the pinion gear for chipped, broken or

missing teeth. Inspect the pinion bearing for signs of
wear and the pinion shaft seal surface for pitting.
7.35
FINAL DRIVE
10. Inspect the AWD coil located in the outer cover plate 14. Inspect the roll cage assembly (B) sliding surfaces
assembly. Refer to AWD Diagnosis, page 7.32 for and H-springs. The sliding surfaces must be clean
detailed inspection process. Replace the cover plate and free of nicks, burrs or scratches. If damaged,
seal and O-ring. replace the roll cage assembly.
11. Remove the roll cage assembly and rollers from the 15. Inspect both output hub assemblies. Inspect the
clutch housing. Use a shop towel to cover the bearings and replace if needed.
housing in order to retain all the rollers.
NOTE: Rollers are spring loaded. Take care not
to allow them to fall out or lose them upon
removal of the roll cage.
12. Thoroughly clean all parts and inspect the rollers (A)
for nicks and scratches. The rollers must slide up
and down and in and out freely within the roll cage
(B) sliding surfaces and H-springs.
16. Clean and inspect all remaining front gearcase

components. Check each for excessive wear or
damage.
NOTE: Refer to the Electronic Parts Catalog

for individual part availability. Most parts are to
be replaced as an assembly or as a complete kit.
13. Inspect clutch housing / ring gear (C) for a consistent

wear pattern. Inspect the ring gear for chipped,
broken, or missing teeth.
7.36
FINAL DRIVE
Front Gearcase Assembly 5. Carefully install the rollers into the roll cage
1. As mentioned during gearcase disassembly section, assembly while installing the assembly into the
replace all O-rings, seals and worn components. clutch housing.
2. Install pinion shaft assembly and install internal snap NOTE: Install roll cage so that the ring gear
ring. grooves line up with the roll cage windows (see
below). Be sure role cage top groove is facing
NOTE: If bearing replacement was required, upward.
press new bearing onto the pinion shaft and
install a new external snap ring.
3. Install a new pinion shaft seal into the pinion gear

housing. Using a universal seal installer, press the
new seal into the housing until the seal is just below
the housing chamfer.
6. Install the torsion spring by wrapping each leg of the

spring around the dowel pin on the ring gear.
7
4. Install the RH output hub into the gearcase housing.
7.37
FINAL DRIVE
7. Align spring retainer dowel pin with ring gear dowel 9. Install armature plate. Be sure all of the armature
pin and install the retainer on top of the torsion plate tabs are fully engaged into the roll cage
spring. assembly and that it is resting properly on the torsion
spring retainer.
8. Check the action of the torsion spring by rotating in

both directions to ensure the spring and retainer are
installed properly. NOTE: Verify armature plate tabs are in the roll
cage slots and that it rests properly on the spring
retainer.
10. Carefully install the ring gear and roll cage assembly
into the gearcase housing.
11. Install a new O-ring on the cover plate assembly.

NOTE: Be sure the square O-ring is placed flat
on the cover surface. If the O-ring is twisted fluid
leakage may occur.
7.38
FINAL DRIVE
12. Carefully install the LH output hub assembly into the Front Gearcase Installation
cover plate. Take care not to damage the new cover 1. Install the gearcase back into the vehicle through the
plate seal while installing the output hub. LH wheel well area, above the upper A-arm.
2. Lubricate the front gearcase splines with Anti-Seize.

13. Install the output cover assembly onto the gearcase
housing. Install the seven cover plate screws and 3. Install the prop shaft onto the front gearcase input
torque to specification. shaft. Use a NEW spring pin in the front propshaft.
4. Install the four bolts 1 that secure the front gearcase
to the frame and torque to specification.
7
Front Gearcase Mounting Bolts:
30 ft-lbs (41 Nm)
5. Install the vent line 2 .
Cover Plate Screws:

11 ft-lbs (15 Nm)
7.39
FINAL DRIVE
6. Connect the AWD wire harness.
7. Refer to FRONT DRIVE SHAFT - Drive Shaft

Installation, page 7.12 and install both front drive
shafts into the gearcase.
8. Add the proper lubricant to the front gearcase. Refer
to Chapter 2 for fluid fill and change information.
Recommended Front Gearcase Fluid:

Polaris Demand Drive
(PN 2877922) (Quart)
Capacity: 8.5 oz. (250 ml)
(fill on a level surface to bottom of threads on the fill
hole)
7.40
FINAL DRIVE
WHEEL HUBS
Front Hub Assembly View
Rear Hub Assembly View

7
7.41
FINAL DRIVE
Beadlock Rims (Desert Edition)
The RZR XP Desert Edition model comes with Walker
Evans beadlock rims. The beadlock does not come set
up from factory, but may be changed to use the beadlock Beadlock Screws:
feature. Step 1: 24 in-lbs (3 Nm)
To make the beadlock rim functional:
1. Deflate the tire.
2. Remove the beadlock screws and beadlock ring.
3. Dismount the tire on the side with the beadlock holes.

4. Place the beadlock ring so the tire is sandwiched
between the rim and the ring making sure the valve
stem is aligned with the slot in the ring.
5. Install bolts and thread them to 24 in-lbs (3 Nm).
6. Tighten in a criss-cross pattern to 7 ft-lbs (10 Nm).
NOTE: Beadlock bolts should be checked and

retorqued every 300 miles (450 km).
7. Seat bead and inflate to 16 psi.
7.42
CHAPTER 8
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3
MULTI-FUNCTION PLIERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3
STEERING / SUSPENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4
STEERING ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5
ASSEMBLY VIEW (NON-EPS MODELS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5
STEERING WHEEL REMOVAL (NON-EPS MODELS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6
STEERING SHAFT REMOVAL (NON-EPS MODELS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6
STEERING SHAFT BEARING REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7
ELECTRONIC POWER STEERING ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.9
ASSEMBLY VIEW (EPS MODELS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.9
UPPER STEERING SHAFT REMOVAL (EPS MODELS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.10
STEERING WHEEL REMOVAL (EPS MODELS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.11
POWER STEERING UNIT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.11
LOWER STEERING SHAFT REMOVAL (EPS MODELS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.13
LOWER STEERING SHAFT INSTALLATION (EPS MODELS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.13
POWER STEERING UNIT INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.14
UPPER STEERING SHAFT INSTALLATION (EPS MODELS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.15
FRONT A-ARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.16
FRONT A-ARM REMOVAL / REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.16
BALL JOINT SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.19
BALL JOINT SERVICE PREPARATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.19
BALL JOINT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.19 8
BALL JOINT INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.20
REAR RADIUS RODS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.21
RADIUS ROD REMOVAL / INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.21
REAR TRAILING ARM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.22
TRAILING ARM REMOVAL / INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.22
TRAILING ARM SPHERICAL BEARING REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.24
REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.25
REAR STABILIZER BAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.26
STABILIZER BAR REMOVAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.26
STABILIZER BAR INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.26
SHOCKS / SPRINGS / FASTENERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.27
FRONT SHOCK ASSEMBLY VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.27
REAR SHOCK ASSEMBLY VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.27
SHOCK REMOVAL / INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.28
SHOCK REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.28
WALKER EVANSSHOCK ASSEMBLY VIEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.29
WALKER EVANS 2.0" FRONT SHOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.29
WALKER EVANS 2.5" REAR SHOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.30
WALKER EVANS SHOCK SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.31
8.1
GENERAL SERVICE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.31
FRONT SHOCK SERVICE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.31
REAR SHOCK SERVICE INFORMATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.33
WALKER EVANS SHOCK REBUILD INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.35
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.36
VALVE SHIM ARRANGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.36
SHOCK PISTON ORIENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.36
WALKER EVANS SHOCK DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.36
WALKER EVANS SHOCK ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.39
8.2
GENERAL INFORMATION
SPECIAL TOOLS Multi-Function Pliers
PART Included in the tool kit, the multi-function pliers is
TOOL DESCRIPTION designed to remove the plastic push rivets used to fasten
NUMBER
body components.
2200421 Gas Shock Recharging Kit
Shock Spring Preload Spanner
2878925 Wrench (Walker Evans)
2876389 Multi-Function Pliers
Walker Evans: See Walker Evans Shock Service

later in this chapter, page 8.36
2233 or http://polaris.service-solutions.com
8.3
Steering / Suspension ITEM TORQUE VALUE
ITEM TORQUE VALUE Steering Rack Mounting 16 ft-lbs (22 Nm)

Bolts
Front A-Arm Bolt 42 ft-lb (57 Nm)
Hip Bolster Bolts 14 ft-lb (19 Nm)
Tie Rod End to Bearing
Carrier Housing Bolt (Not 15 ft-lbs (20 Nm) + 90
reusable)
Ball Joint Fastener 42 ft-lbs (57 Nm)
Front Shock Mount Bolts 44 ft-lb (60 Nm)
Rear Shock Mount Bolts 70 ft-lbs (95 Nm)
Wheel Hub Castle Nuts 110 ft-lbs (149 Nm)

Wheel Nuts (Cast
120 ft-lbs (163 Nm)
Aluminum Rims)
Tie Rod End Jamb Nut 14 ft-lbs (19 Nm)
Radius Rod Fasteners 40 ft-lb (54 Nm)

Bearing Carrier to Trailing 42 ft-lb (54 Nm)
Arm Bolts
Rear Stabilizer Bar Linkage 40 ft-lbs (54 Nm)
Rear Shock Reservoir
35 in-lb (4 Nm)
Mounting Clamps
Rear Stabilizer Bar
17 ft-lb (23 Nm)
Mounting Bracket Bolts
Rear Stabilizer Bar
10 ft-lb (14 Nm)
Locating Clamp Bolts
Shock Guard Screws 14 in-lbs (2 Nm)

Tilt Steering Shock 7 ft-lb (10 Nm)
Fasteners
Steering Pivot Tube
8 ft-lb (11 Nm)
Mounting Fasteners
Steering Wheel Nut 65 ft-lbs (88 Nm)
Steering Shaft to Power
Steering Unit (upper/lower) 15 ft-lbs (20 Nm)
(EPS models)
EPS Cover Screws 8 ft-lb (11 Nm)

Power Steering Unit to 30 ft-lb (41 Nm)
Mount Bracket Bolts
Lower Steering Shaft to
42 ft-lb (57 Nm)
Steering Rack
Power Steering Bracket to 16 ft-lb (22 Nm)
Frame Nuts
8.4
STEERING ASSEMBLY
Assembly View (Non-EPS Models)
8.5
Steering Wheel Removal (Non-EPS Models) Steering Shaft Removal (Non-EPS Models)
1. Remove the pinch bolt 1 retaining the lower portion
of the steering shaft 2 to the steering gear box
CAUTION assembly 3 .
This procedure should NOT be used on EPS models.

Using this procedure on an EPS model can
permanently damage the EPS unit and cause a Power
Steering Fault.
1. Remove the steering wheel cap.

2. Loosen the nut and back it half way off the steering
shaft.
3. With a glove on your hand, place it under the
steering wheel. Lift upward on the inner portion of
the steering wheel while using a hammer to strike
the steering shaft nut.
NOTE: If the steering wheel will not pop loose,
proceed to Steering Shaft Removal (Non-EPS
Models), page 8.6. 2. Remove the fastener retaining the upper portion of
the steering wheel tilt shock to the pivot tube.
4. Once the steering wheel pops loose, completely
3. Remove the two fasteners that retain the pivot tube.
remove the nut and lift the steering wheel off the
shaft. 4. Remove the steering shaft, pivot tube and steering
wheel from the vehicle as an assembly.
5. Refer to steps 11-13 of the Steering Shaft Bearing
Replacement, page 8.7 procedure for installation.
8.6
Steering Shaft Bearing Replacement 8. Apply Loctite 271 (Red) to the outer
circumference of the new upper bearing race. Slide
NOTE: Replacement pivot tube assembly comes the new upper bearing onto the steering shaft and
with new upper and lower bearings installed. Use press it into the pivot tube by hand.
this procedure if replacing just the bearings only.
NOTE: Use care not to allow any of the Loctite
1. Perform the Steering Shaft Removal procedure. to get in the bearing.
2. Remove the steering wheel cap and retaining nut. Bearings will be seated in the pivot housing
upon tightening the steering wheel nut in step
3. Press steering shaft out of the steering wheel and 14.
pivot tube.
9. Reinstall the upper washers and spacers in the order
4. Note the order and location of the washers and in which they were removed.
spacers between the steering wheel and pivot tube.
10. Install the steering wheel and hand tighten the nut.
5. Drive the bearings out of the pivot tube using a drift Apply Loctite 271.
punch.
11. Reinstall the steering shaft assembly in the vehicle.
6. Inspect the pivot tube bearing surfaces for signs of Install the lower portion of the steering shaft onto the
excessive wear or damage. steering gear box assembly (see Figure 5-16).
7. Apply Loctite 271 (Red) to the outer Torque the lower pinch bolt to specification.
circumference of the new lower bearing race. Slide
the new lower bearing onto the steering shaft and
install the steering shaft through the pivot tube.
NOTE: Use care not to allow any of the Loctite
to get in the bearing. Lower Steering Pinch Bolt:
42 ft-lb (57 Nm)
12. Install the two fasteners that retain the pivot tube
(see Figure 5-17). Torque fasteners to specification.
8
Pivot Tube Bolts:
8 ft-lb (11 Nm)
13. Install the fastener retaining the upper portion of the

steering wheel tilt shock to the pivot tube (see Figure
5-17). Torque fastener to specification.
1 Cap 7 Bearing
2 Nut 8 Bearing
3 Steering Hub Insert 9 Bushing
Tilt Shock Bolt:
4 Bushing 10 Bushing
7 ft-lb (10 Nm)
5 Bushing 11 Bushing
6 Bushing
Be sure the lower washers and spacers are still

on the steering shaft.
8.7
14. Be sure the front wheels are facing straight forward.
Remove the steering wheel and align as needed.
Torque the steering wheel nut to specification. Apply
Loctite 271
Steering Wheel Nut:

65 ft-lbs (88 Nm)
15. Wipe the pivot tube clean of any excess Loctite.

16. Install steering wheel cap and field test steering
operation.
8.8
ELECTRONIC POWER STEERING ASSEMBLY
Assembly View (EPS Models)
1 Steering Wheel 5 Steering Box 9 Tilt Steering Shock

2 Upper Steering Shaft 6 Tie Rod End 10 Tie Rod End Bolt (Do not reuse)
3 EPS Module 7 EPS Mount Bracket 11 Nut, Nylok (Do not reuse)
4 Lower Steering Shaft 8 EPS Cover
8.9
Upper Steering Shaft Removal (EPS Models) 4. Remove the steering shaft, pivot tube and steering
wheel from the vehicle as an assembly.
1. Remove the two Torx fasteners retaining the black
1
plastic cover and remove the cover from the vehicle.
5. If replacing the upper steering shaft or steering

wheel, refer to Steering Wheel Removal (EPS
2. Remove the pinch bolt retaining the upper steering Models), page 8.11.
shaft to the power steering unit.
3. Lift the steering wheel up and remove the four

fasteners 5 that retain the pivot tube.
8.10
Steering Wheel Removal (EPS Models) Power Steering Unit Removal
1. Remove the upper steering shaft, pivot tube and 1. Remove the upper steering shaft, pivot tube and
steering wheel as an assembly before attempting to steering wheel from the vehicle as an assembly.
remove the steering wheel. Refer to Upper Steering Refer to Upper Steering Shaft Removal (EPS
Shaft Removal (EPS Models), page 8.10. Models), page 8.10.
CAUTION CAUTION
Striking the steering wheel or steering shaft Striking the steering wheel or steering shaft while
while installed in the vehicle can permanently damage installed in the vehicle can permanently damage the
the EPS unit and cause a EPS unit and cause a power steering fault.
Power Steering Fault.
2. Disconnect the two electrical harnesses 1 from the
2. Remove the steering wheel cap. power steering unit .
3. Loosen the nut and back it half way off the steering
shaft. 3. Remove the pinch bolt 2 retaining the lower steering
shaft to the power steering unit .
4. Place the assembly in a vise. 8
5. Using a large bronze drift and hammer, strike the
steering shaft nut to pop the steering wheel off the
shaft taper.
6. Once the steering wheel pops loose, completely

remove the nut and lift the steering wheel off the
shaft.
8.11
4. While supporting the power steering unit, remove the 6. If replacing the power steering unit, remove the three
four nuts 3 from the mount bracket. bolts 4 that retain the power steering unit to the
mount bracket.
5. Carefully remove the power steering unit and mount

bracket from the vehicle as an assembly.
WARNING
Electronic Power Steering (EPS) units are programmed

to be vehicle specific and are not interchangeable
between product lines.
8.12
Lower Steering Shaft Removal (EPS Lower Steering Shaft Installation (EPS
Models) Models)
1. Use the steering wheel to position the front wheels 1. Install the lower steering shaft onto the gear box and
so they point straight ahead. align the marks made during step 2 of the Lower
Steering Shaft Removal (EPS Models) procedure.
2. Locate the lower steering shaft through the left front
wheel well. Mark the lower steering shaft, gear box 2. Install the pinch bolt that retains the lower steering
stub shaft and gear box to aid installation. shaft to the steering rack assembly and torque to
specification.
Lower Steering Shaft Pinch Bolt:

42 ft-lb (57 Nm)
3. Install the power steering unit and reassemble the

vehicle (see Chapter 8 Power Steering Unit
Installation, page 8.14).
3. Remove the power steering unit (see Chapter 8

Power Steering Unit Removal, page 8.11).
4. Remove the pinch bolt 1 retaining the lower steering
shaft 2 to the steering gear box assembly 3 .
5. Lift up on the shaft and remove it through the floor

panel.
8.13
Power Steering Unit Installation 5. Torque the four mount bracket nuts 6 to
specification.
1. If the power steering unit 1 was removed from the
mount bracket 2 , reinstall it prior to vehicle
installation. Torque the mounting bolts 3 to 2024 ft.

lbs. (2733 Nm)
2. Install the power steering unit into the vehicle and

align the skip-tooth spline on the power steering stub Power Steering Unit Mount Bracket Nuts:
shaft with the opening in the lower steering shaft. 16 ft-lb (22 Nm)
6. Proceed to Upper Steering Shaft Installation (EPS

Models), page 8.15 to complete the installation
procedure.
3. Place the power steering mount bracket over the top

of the brake pedal mount studs and finger tighten the
four nuts.
4. Position the lower steering shaft on the power
steering unit stub shaft and install the pinch bolt.
Lower Steering Shaft to EPS Unit Pinch Bolt:

15 ft-lbs (20 Nm)
8.14
Upper Steering Shaft Installation (EPS 4. Be sure the front wheels are pointing straight ahead
Models) and install the steering wheel and retaining nut.
Torque the nut to specification and reinstall the
NOTE: If steering wheel was removed, follow this plastic wheel cover.
procedure to ensure the upper steering shaft is
properly positioned on the power steering stub
shaft.
Steering Wheel Nut:

CAUTION 65 ft-lbs (88 Nm)
Striking the steering wheel or steering shaft 5. Install a new upper steering shaft pinch bolt and nut.
can permanently damage the EPS unit Torque pinch bolt to specification.
and cause a Power Steering Fault.
NOTE: Be sure upper steering shaft hardware is

positioned correctly (see Chapter 8 Assembly
View (EPS Models), page 8.9). Upper Steering Shaft Pinch Bolt:
15 ft-lbs (20 Nm)
1. Install the upper steering shaft and align the skip-
tooth spline 1 on the power steering stub shaft with
the opening 2 in the upper steering shaft. 6. Reconnect both electrical harnesses onto the power
steering unit. Be sure the connectors snap into
place.
7. Reinstall the black plastic cover over the power
steering unit and install the two Torx-head fasteners.
8. Turn the key switch on and test EPS operation.
2. Install the pivot tube and torque fasteners to

specification.
Pivot Tube Fasteners:

8 ft-lb (11 Nm)
3. Install the tilt shock and torque fastener to

specification.
Tilt Shock Fastener:

7 ft-lb (10 Nm)
8.15
FRONT A-ARMS 6. Loosen and remove the upper A-arm front through-
bolt fastener 3 and rear though-bolt fastener 4 .
Front A-arm Removal / Replacement Remove the upper A-arm from the vehicle.
The following procedure details upper and lower A-arm
removal and replacement on one side of the vehicle.
Upper A-Arm
1. Elevate and safely support the front of the vehicle
and remove the front wheel.
2. Remove lower shock fastener 1 from upper A-arm.
7. Examine A-arm bushings and pivot tube. Replace if

worn. Discard hardware.
WARNING
The locking agent on the existing bolts was destroyed

during removal. DO NOT reuse old hardware. Serious
3. Remove upper ball joint pinch bolt 2 from bearing injury or death could result if fasteners come loose
carrier. during operation.
8. If not replacing the A-arm, thoroughly clean the A-

arm and pivot tube.
9. Install new ball joint into A-arm. Refer to Ball Joint
Replacement section.
10. Insert new A-arm bushings and pivot tube into new
A-arm.
11. Install new upper A-arm assembly onto vehicle
frame. Torque new bolt to specification.
Front Upper A-arm Bolts:

42 ft-lb (57 Nm)
4. Using a soft face hammer, tap on bearing carrier to
loosen the upper A-arm ball joint end while lifting
upward on the upper A-arm. Completely remove the
ball joint end from the bearing carrier.
5. Remove the front bumper to allow A-arm bolt
removal.
8.16
12. Insert upper A-arm ball joint end into the bearing 16. Loosen and remove the lower A-arm front through-
carrier. Install upper ball joint pinch bolt into the bolt fastener 6 and rear through-bolt fastener 7 .
bearing carrier and torque bolt to specification. Remove the lower A-arm from the vehicle.
Front Ball Joint Pinch Bolts:

42 ft-lbs (57 Nm)
13. Attach shock to A-arm with fastener. Torque lower

shock bolt to specification.
Front Shock Mounting Bolts:

44 ft-lb (60 Nm)
17. Examine A-arm bushings and pivot tube. Replace if
worn. Discard hardware.
Lower A-Arm 18. If not replacing the A-arm, thoroughly clean the A-
arm and pivot tube.
14. Remove lower ball joint pinch bolt 5 from bearing 19. Install new ball joint into A-arm. Refer to Ball Joint
carrier. Replacement section.
20. Insert new A-arm bushings and pivot tube into new
A-arm. A light press force may be needed.
21. Install new lower A-arm assembly onto vehicle
frame. Torque new bolt to specification.
22. Insert lower A-arm ball joint end into the bearing
carrier. Install lower ball joint pinch bolt into the 8
bearing carrier and torque bolt to specification.
WARNING
Upon A-arm installation, test vehicle at low speeds

before putting into service.
15. Using a soft face hammer, tap on bearing carrier to

loosen the lower A-arm ball joint end while pushing
downward on the lower A-arm. Completely remove
the ball joint end from the bearing carrier.
Lower A-arm Bolts:
44 ft-lb (60 Nm)

42 ft-lbs (57 Nm)
8.17
8.18
BALL JOINT SERVICE Ball Joint Removal
1. Remove the retaining ring 7 from the ball joint 8 .
Ball Joint Service Preparation
NOTE: Do not reuse a ball joint if it has been
removed. If removed, it must be replaced. Use this
removal procedure only when replacing the ball
joint.
1. Properly lift and support the vehicle by the frame.

2. Remove the appropriate front wheel.
3. To service the upper ball joint:
4. Remove and discard the two front brake caliper

brake disc (see Chapter 9 Caliper Removal , page
9.23).
2. Place a proper sized driver on the ball joint and place
5. Remove and discard the upper ball joint pinch bolt. the A-arm in a press.
3. Carefully press the ball joint out of the A-arm and
6. If necessary, remove the lower front shock fastener discard the ball joint.
from the A-arm.
7. Remove the upper A-Arm to frame mounting bolts
and remove the A-arm from the chassis.
8. To service the lower ball joint:
9. Remove and discard the lower ball joint pinch bolt.
10. Remove both A-arm to frame mounting bolts and

remove the A-arm from the chassis.
8
8.19
Ball Joint Installation
1. By hand, install the NEW ball joint into the A-arm.
2. Using a press, carefully drive in the new ball joint into
the A-arm.
3. After the new ball joint 7 is fully installed into the A-
arm 5 , install a new retaining ring 6 .
4. Repeat the ball joint service procedure for any

additional A-arm ball joint replacements.
5. Insert upper / lower A-arm ball joint end into the
bearing carrier. Install new pinch bolts and nuts.
6. If needed, install new brake caliper mounting bolts
CAUTION
mounting bolts
upon assembly.

to specification.

42 ft-lbs (57 Nm)
Front Shock Mounting Bolts:

44 ft-lb (60 Nm)
Front Caliper Mounting Bolts:

40 ft-lbs (54 Nm)
Wheel Nuts (Alum):

120 ft-lbs (163 Nm)
8.20
REAR RADIUS RODS
Radius Rod Removal / Installation 7. Examine radius rod shafts, boots and spherical
The following procedure details upper and lower radius bearings. Replace entire radius rod if any excessive
rod removal and replacement on one side of the vehicle. wear is evident.
Repeat the following steps to remove the A-arm from the 8. Reverse this procedure to reinstall the radius rods.
opposite side.
9. Torque all fasteners to specification.
1. Raise and support vehicle by main frame.
NOTE: Use new attaching nuts upon installation
of the rear radius rods.
CAUTION
procedure.
Radius Rod Mounting Bolts:
2. Remove the rear wheel nuts and rear wheel. 40 ft-lb (54 Nm)
3. Identify / mark radius rods upper and lower.
4. Remove the nut, bolt and washer 1 & 2 attaching
the upper and lower radius rod to the bearing carrier.
Discard the nuts. WARNING
Upon radius rod installation, test vehicle at low speeds

before putting into service.
5. Remove bolts 3 & 4 attaching radius rods to the

vehicle frame. Discard the nuts.
6. Remove radius rods from vehicle.
8.21
REAR TRAILING ARM
Trailing Arm Removal / Installation 6. CAUTION: Do not hang the caliper by the brake line.
NOTE: Use new attaching nuts upon installation of brake line.
the rear trailing arm and bearing carrier.
1. Raise and support vehicle by main frame.
CAUTION
procedure.
2. Remove the four wheel nuts and remove the rear

wheel.
7. Remove the rear wheel hub and brake disk
assembly.
8. Remove the five remaining bolts 6 that attach the
rear bearing carrier to trailing arm. Discard the nuts.
4. Remove the lower radius rod mounting bolt 4 , nut

and washer from the bearing carrier. Swing radius
rod down. Discard the nut.
5. Remove the two brake caliper mounting bolts 5 .
8.22
9. Remove the bearing carrier from the rear drive shaft 15. Remove the front trailing arm bolt 8 . Discard the nut.
and trailing arm.
16. Remove trailing arm from vehicle. Visually inspect

10. Rotate bearing by hand and check for smooth trailing arm, bushings, o-rings and spherical bearing
rotation. Visually inspect bearing for moisture, dirt, or for wear. If bearing requires replacement, refer to
corrosion. Replace bearing if moisture, dirt, Trailing Arm Spherical Bearing Replacement, page
corrosion, or roughness is evident (see Chapter 7 8.24.
Rear Bearing Replacement, page 7.8).
17. Replace trailing arm if physically damaged.
11. Remove the four fasteners 7 that secure the brake
18. Reverse this procedure to reinstall rear trailing arm.
line retainers to the trailing arm.
12. Remove the lower stabilizer bar linkage fastener. NOTE: Use new fastener nuts upon installation
Discard the nut. of the rear trailing arm and bearing carrier.
13. Support trailing arm with suitable jack stand or 19. Torque all fasteners to specification.
support.
14. Remove the lower shock bolt. Discard the nut.
8
Trailing Arm to Main Frame:
(Trailing arm spherical bearing bolt)
70 ft-lb (95 Nm)
Rear Shock Mounting Bolts:

70 ft-lbs (95 Nm))
Rear Stabilizer Bar Linkage:

40 ft-lbs (54 Nm)
Radius Rod Mounting Bolts:

40 ft-lb (54 Nm)
Bearing Carrier to Trailing Arm Bolts:

42 ft-lb (54 Nm)
Rear Brake Caliper Mounting Bolts:

40 ft-lbs (54 Nm)
Rear Wheel Hub Castle Nut:

110 ft-lbs (149 Nm)
Wheel Nuts:
120 ft-lbs (163 Nm)
8.23
Trailing Arm Spherical Bearing
WARNING Replacement
1. Remove trailing arm (see Chapter 8 Trailing Arm
Upon rear trailing arm installation, test vehicle at low Removal / Installation, page 8.22).
speeds before putting into service.
2. Remove bushings and O-rings.
3. Remove snap ring 1 that retains the spherical
bearing.
4. Properly support the trailing arm and press the

spherical bearing out of trailing arm casting.
5. Be sure to only press on outer most surface of
bearing race, do not press on the center spherical
bearing.
6. Inspect trailing arm bearing housing for wear or

damage. Replace trailing arm if damaged.
7. Press in new bearing until fully seated into trailing
arm casting.
8. Install new snap ring, O-rings (not required) and
bushings.
8.24
Rear Suspension Assembly View
1 Radius Rod 2 Trailing Arm 3 Spherical Bearing

4 Bushing 5 Shock 6 Spring
7 Bearing Carrier 8 Stabilizer Bar 9 Stabilizer Bar Link
8.25
REAR STABILIZER BAR Stabilizer Bar Installation
1. Carefully install stabilizer bar through the LH wheel
Stabilizer Bar Removal well area.
1. Lift and support vehicle by main frame.
NOTE: Be sure fuel lines and shift cable are
2. Remove rear wheels nut and wheels. routed ABOVE the stabilizer bar.
3. Identify / mark top side of the stabilizer bar to 2. Fully install stabilizer bar, bushings, bracket and
reference during installation. bracket fasteners and stabilizer links. Center
4. Remove the fasteners retaining the stabilizer bar to stabilizer bar in the frame. Torque fasteners to
the linkage 1 on each side of the vehicle. specification (see below).
3. Install stabilizer bar locating clamps on the INSIDE of
the pivot bushing and brackets. There should be a
0.10 (2.5mm) gap between the bushing face and the
locating clamps. Torque locating clamps fasteners to
specification.
4. Torque all fasteners to specification (see below).
5. Lubricate stabilizer bar pivot bushings via grease
fitting (fittings are accessible through skid plate).
6. Install rear wheels and wheel nuts. Torque wheel
nuts to specification.
5. Remove the four fasteners retaining the stabilizer Rear Stabilizer Bar Linkage:
bar to the vehicle frame (see below). 40 ft-lbs (54 Nm)
6. Remove the bushing brackets and bushings for ease
of removal. Rear Stabilizer Bar Locating Clamp:
10 ft-lb (14 Nm)
7. Carefully remove the stabilizer from the LH wheel
well area of the vehicle. Wheel Lug Nuts:
8. Mark the location and remove the two stabilizer bar 120 ft-lbs (163 Nm)
locating clamps (if replacing stabilizer bar).
9. Inspect the stabilizer bar for straightness. Inspect the
pivot bushings and replace if needed.
8.26
SHOCKS / SPRINGS / FASTENERS
Front Shock Assembly View Rear Shock Assembly View
8.27
Shock Removal / Installation Shock Replacement
1. Elevate the vehicle off the ground to relieve the 1. Remove the shock and note the spring preload
suspension load. distance (see Chapter 2 Spring Adjustment, page
2.40).
2. Support under A-arm or trailing arm.
2. Loosen the jam nut (if applicable) and adjustment
3. Remove the upper and lower fasteners retaining the ring until the spring is loose. If needed, use a spring
shock and remove the shock from the vehicle. compressor to compress the spring far enough to
Discard nuts and replace with new upon installation.
remove the spring retainer.
4. Reverse the procedure to reinstall the shock. Torque 3. Remove the spring and spring retainer from the
new fasteners to specification (see Chapter 8
existing shock and install components onto the new
Front Shock Assembly View, page 8.27 and Rear
shock.
Shock Assembly View, page 8.27).
4. Install the spring(s) and spring retainer.
NOTE: The spring retainer gap should be 180
from the end of the spring upon installation.
Shock Mounting Bolts: 5. Tighten the spring adjustment ring to set the preload
Front: distance noted in Step 1 (see Chapter 2 Spring
44 ft-lb (60 Nm) Adjustment, page 2.40).
6. Reinstall the shock onto the vehicle and torque new
Rear: fasteners to specification.
70 ft-lbs (95 Nm)
8.28
WALKER EVANSSHOCK ASSEMBLY VIEWS
Walker Evans 2.0" Front Shock
8
REF DESCRIPTION REF DESCRIPTION REF DESCRIPTION
1. Body Cap Asm. 14. Piston Asm, Floating (IFP) 27. Shaft Spacer (1.235" x 1.985")
2. Seal Head Asm. 15. Reservoir End Cap 28. O-Ring
3. Internal Bump Stop 16. Reservoir Body 29. Screw (8/32")
Washer (1.50" x 0.125" x
4. Shaft Bushing (0.625") 17. 30. O-Ring
0.348")
5. O-Ring 18. Crimp Nut (7/16") 31. O-Ring
6. Seal 19. Snap Ring 32. Detent Spring
7. Wiper 20. Spherical Bearing 33. Detent Ball
8. O-Ring 21. Schraeder Valve 34. Shock Body
9. Piston, Clicker 22. Snap Ring 35. Spring Adjustment Nut
10. Clicker Bolt 23. Piston Wear Band (1.750" OD) 36. Shaft, Chrome
11. Clicker Knob 24. Bump Stop 37. 2-Piece Piston Asm.
12. Clicker Stud 25. N/A
13. Screw (10/32") 26. Shaft Loop
8.29
Walker Evans 2.5" Rear Shock
REF DESCRIPTION REF DESCRIPTION REF DESCRIPTION

1 Seal Head Asm. 16 Adjuster Mount 31 Schraeder Valve
2 Bearing w/ Needle Slot 17 Needle Shaft 32 Snap Ring
3 Spherical Bearing 18 Spacer 33 O-Ring
4 Spring Nut 19 End Cap 34 Wiper
5 Piston 20 Needle Bolt 35 Shaft Seal
6 Reservoir Piston 21 Adjuster Nut 36 Shaft Bushing (0.750")
7 Check Valve 22 Reservoir Body 37 O-Ring
8 Clicker Bolt 23 Bleed Screw 38 Detent Spring
9 Crimp Nut 24 Bump Stop 39 Detent Ball
10 Adjuster Knob 25 Wear Band 40 O-Ring
11 Ball (.250") 26 O-Ring 41 O-Ring
12 Retention Nut 27 Screw 42 Screw
13 9/16 Heim Shaftloop 28 O-Ring 43 Snap Ring
14 Shock Body 29 Needle
15 Hose 30 O-Ring
8.30
WALKER EVANS SHOCK SERVICE FRONT SHOCK DESIGN DETAILS
General Service Information Nitrogen Pressure 125 psi +/- 5%
Recommended Service Intervals Gas Shock Oil 2874124 (qt.)

Walker Evans Racing Shocks will perform the best if
serviced at regular intervals:
Every ride - Wash and dry the vehicle and
suspension
Every 100 hours - Visually inspect shock seals
Every 1500 miles or Annually - Change shock oil
and replace seals
NOTE: If leakage from a remote shock reservoir

hose fitting is evident, check for a loose fitting and
seal threads with Three Bond 1215 (PN 2871557)
Front Shock Service Information
FRONT SHOCK DESIGN DETAILS

Travel 8.42 (21.39 mm)
Extended Length 25.10 (63.75 mm)
IFP Location RZR XP 4
3.375 (85.7 mm)
1000 / High Lifter
IFP Location RZR XP 2.875 (73.02 mm)
1000 / Desert Edition
8.31
2014 Front Shock Valving RZR XP 1000 COMPRES-
REBOUND CLICKER
SION
COMPRES-
REBOUND CLICKER 1.30 x 0.015 1.45 x 0.008
SION
1.55 x 0.008 1.50 x 0.01 1.10 x 0.025 1.20 x 0.015 1.30 x 0.010
1.00 x 0.015 1.10 x 0.01 1.00 x 0.025 1.10 x 0.015 1.00 x 0.008
1.55 x 0.008 1.45 x 0.01 1.00 x 0.025 1.00 x 0.015 1.50 x 0.120
1.55 x 0.008 1.30 x 0.01 0.625 x 0.065 0.750 x 0.065
1.55 x 0.008 1.20 x 0.01 Piston Bleed Orifice: none
1.55 x 0.008 1.10 x 0.01

2015 Front Shock Valving RZR XP 1000 High
1.55 x 0.008 1.00 x 0.01 Lifter
1.45 x 0.010 0.90 x 0.01
COMPRES-
1.30 x 0.008 0.75 x 0.065 REBOUND CLICKER
SION
Piston Bleed Orifice: none 1.55 x 0.008 1.30 x 0.015 1.10 x 0.012
1.00 x 0.015 1.30 x 0.015 0.700 x 0.006
2014-2015 Front Shock Valving RZR XP 4
1.55 x 0.008 1.20 x 0.012 1.00 x 0.025
1000
1.55 x 0.008 1.10 x 0.012 0.625 x 0.065
COMPRES-
REBOUND CLICKER 1.55 x 0.008 1.00 x 0.012
SION
1.55 x 0.008 1.50 x 0.01 1.10 x 0.025 1.55 x 0.008 0.900 x 0.012
1.00 x 0.015 1.10 x 0.01 1.00 x 0.025 1.55 x 0.008 1.00 x 0.095
1.55 x 0.008 1.45 x 0.01 1.00 x 0.025 1.45 x 0.010
1.55 x 0.008 1.30 x 0.01 0.625 x 0.065 1.30 x 0.008
1.55 x 0.008 1.20 x 0.01 Piston Bleed Orifice: 0.100
1.55 x 0.008 1.10 x 0.01

Front Shock Valving RZR XP 1000 Desert
1.55 x 0.008 1.00 x 0.01 Edition
1.45 x 0.010 0.90 x 0.01
COMPRES-
1.30 x 0.008 0.75 x 0.065 REBOUND CLICKER
SION
1.20 x .012 0.900 x 0.008 0.900 x 0.015 1.10 x 0.025
1.10 x .012 0.900 x 0.010 0.900 x 0.012 1.00 x 0.025
Piston Bleed Orifice: none 1.45 x 0.010 1.45 x 0.015 1.00 x 0.025
0.900 x 0.008 1.45 x 0.015 0.625 x 0.065
2015 Front Shock Valving RZR XP 1000
1.45 x 0.015 1.45 x 0.008
COMPRES- 1.30 x 0.015 1.45 x 0.008
REBOUND CLICKER
SION
1.20 x 0.015 1.30 x 0.010
0.900 x 0.008 0.900 x 0.015 1.10 x 0.025
1.10 x 0.015 1.00 x 0.008
0.900 x 0.010 0.900 x 0.012 1.00 x 0.025
1.00 x 0.015 1.50 x 0.120
1.45 x 0.010 1.45 x 0.015 1.00 x 0.025
0.750 x 0.065
0.900 x 0.008 1.45 x 0.015 0.625 x 0.065
Piston Bleed Orifice: none
1.45 x 0.015 1.45 x 0.008
8.32
Rear Shock Service Information
8.33
REAR SHOCK DESIGN DETAILS 2014-2015 Shock Valving RZR XP 4 1000

Travel 12.09 (30.71 mm) COMPRES-
REBOUND CLICKER
SION
Extended Length 34.36 (87.27 mm)
1.55 x 0.008 1.50 x 0.01 1.00 x 0.015
IFP Location RZR XP 6.25 (158.8 mm)
1000 / Desert Edition 1.00 x 0.010 1.45 x 0.01 1.00 x 0.015
IFP Location RZR XP 4 1.55 x 0.008 1.30 x 0.01 0.90 x 0.015
7.25 (184.15 mm)
1000 / High Lifter
1.55 x 0.008 1.20 x 0.01 0.60 x 0.015
Nitrogen Pressure 125 psi (862 kPa) +/- 5% 1.55 x 0.008 1.10 x 0.01 0.60 x 0.015
Gas Shock Oil P/N 2874124 (qt.) 1.55 x 0.008 1.00 x 0.01
1.55 x 0.008 0.90 x 0.01
2014 Shock Valving RZR XP 1000 1.45 x 0.010 0.80 x 0.01
COMPRES- 0.75 x 0.065
REBOUND CLICKER 1.10 x 0.012
SION (top-out)
1.55 x 0.008 1.500 x 0.01 1.00 x 0.015 1.00 x 0.012
1.00 x 0.010 1.45 x 0.01 1.00 x 0.015 1.50 x 0.125
1.55 x 0.008 1.30 x 0.01 0.90 x 0.015 (top-out)
1.55 x 0.008 1.20 x 0.01 0.70 x 0.015 Piston Bleed Orifice: 0.100
1.55 x 0.008 1.10 x 0.01 0.70 x 0.015
2015 Shock Valving RZR XP 1000
1.55 x 0.008 1.00 x 0.01
1.55 x 0.008 0.90 x 0.01 COMPRES-
REBOUND CLICKER
SION
1.45 x 0.010 0.80 x 0.01
1.55 x 0.010 1.500 x 0.008 1.00 x 0.015
0.75 x 0.065
1.30 x 0.012 (top-out) 1.20 x 0.008 0.900 x 0.008 1.00 x 0.015
1.20 x 0.012 1.55 x 0.010 1.45 x 0.008 0.90 x 0.015
1.50 x 0.125 1.20 x 0.008 1.30 x 0.008 0.70 x 0.015

(top-out) 1.50 x 0.010 1.20 x 0.008 0.70 x 0.015
Piston Bleed Orifice: 0.100 1.45 x 0.010 1.10 x 0.008
1.30 x 0.010 1.00 x 0.008
1.20 x 0.010 0.900 x 0.008
0.75 x 0.065
1.10 x 0.012 (top-out)
0.900 x 0.012
0.800 x 0.012
1.50 x 0.125
(top-out)
No Piston Bleed Orifice
8.34
2015 Shock Valving RZR XP 1000 High Lifter COMPRES-
REBOUND CLICKER
SION
COMPRES-
REBOUND CLICKER No Piston Bleed Orifice
SION
1.85 x 0.010 1.50 x 0.010 1.00 x 0.015
1.75 x 0.010 1.45 x 0.010 1.00 x 0.015 Walker Evans Shock Rebuild Information
1.65 x 0.010 1.30 x 0.010 0.90 x 0.015 When performing maintenance on Walker Evans
shocks, use the Gas Shock Recharging Kit (PN
1.55 x 0.008 1.20 x 0.010 0.600 x 0.015 2200421), as it contains the necessary valves, pressure
gauge, and fittings to deflate and pressurize shocks.
1.00 x 0.010 1.10 x 0.010 0.600 x 0.015
1.55 x 0.008 1.00 x 0.010
1.55 x 0.008 0.90 x 0.010 WARNING
1.55 x 0.008 0.80 x 0.010
Walker Evans shocks contain high pressure nitrogen
1.55 x 0.008 gas. Extreme caution must be used while handling and
working with Walker Evans shocks and related high
1.55 x 0.008 pressure service equipment. The pressure must be
1.00 x 0.095 released from the shock before disassembly. It is
1.45 x 0.010 (top-out) strongly recommended you wear safety glasses and
ear protection during these procedures.
1.30 x 0.012
1.20 x 0.012
1.50 x 0.125
(top-out)
Piston Bleed Orifice: 0.100
2015 Shock Valving RZR XP 1000 Desert

Edition
COMPRES-
REBOUND CLICKER
8
SION
1.55 x 0.010 1.50 x 0.008 1.00 x 0.015
1.20 x 0.008 0.900 x 0.008 1.00 x 0.015
1.55 x 0.010 1.45 x 0.008 0.900 x 0.015
1.20 x 0.008 1.30 x 0.008 0.700 x 0.015
1.55 x 0.008 1.20 x 0.008 0.700 x 0.015
1.50 x 0.010 1.10 x 0.008
1.45 x 0.010 1.00 x 0.008
1.30 x 0.010 0.900 x 0.008
0.750 x 0.065
1.20 x 0.010 (top-out)
1.10 x 0.012
0.900 x 0.012
0.800 x 0.012
1.50 x 0.125
(top-out)
8.35
Special Tools Walker Evans Shock Disassembly
PART NOTE: To prevent damage or marks to the shock,

DESCRIPTION the use of special tools and a soft jaw vise is
NUMBER
recommended.
PS-45908 IFP Tool
PU-50979 Shock Body Holding Tool - Front WARNING
PU-50938 Shock Body Holding Tool - Rear
Walker Evans shocks contain high pressure nitrogen
2872429 Shock Rod Holding Tool - Front gas. Extreme caution must be used while handling and
working with Walker Evans shocks and related high
PS-50931 Shock Rod Holding Tool - Rear pressure service equipment. The pressure must be
released from the shock before disassembly. It is
PU-50939 Shock Seal Protector Sleeve - Front strongly recommended you wear safety glasses and
PU-50952 Shock Seal Protector Sleeve - Rear ear protection during these procedures.
1. Clean and carefully remove shock from the vehicle.

Valve Shim Arrangement 2. Back preload adjuster all the way down and carefully
Shown below is an example of how valving stacks are remove spring retainer and spring(s).
arranged.
NOTE: The rebound and compression valve stacks
will always be positioned as shown in the
illustration, regardless of how the shock assembly is
installed.
Shock Piston Orientation

The face of the piston with the greater number of relief
ports will always face the rebound valve stack.
3. Use the appropriate shock body holding tool to

properly secure the shock assembly into a vice for
service.
Front Shock Body Holding Tool: PU-50979

Rear Shock Body Holding Tool: PU-50938
4. Remove the valve cap from the valve fitting on the

top of the reservoir.
8.36
5. Carefully depressurize the shock. 8. Using a 1" open-end wrench or adjustable wrench,
loosen and remove the bearing cap from the shock
body.
6. Using a snap ring pliers, remove the retaining ring

from the reservoir.
9. Slowly lift up and remove the shock rod assembly
from the shock body.
7. Carefully remove the cap from the reservoir body.
8.37
10. Remove and properly dispose of the oil from the 14. Using an 11/16" socket, remove the nut retaining the
shock body. valve stack and piston.
NOTE: Insert the IFP Tool (PS-45908) and cycle NOTE: Keep the rebound and compression
the Internal Floating Piston (IFP) a few times to valve stacks in the order they were removed. If
purge the shock oil from the reservoir. unsure of order, refer to Shock Valving under
the Shock Service Information provided earlier
11. Remove the floating piston from the shock reservoir in this section.
using the IFP Tool (PS-45908).
12. Clean and inspect ALL parts and replace as needed. 15. Place the valve stack on a clean shop towel in order
of removal.
NOTE: Seal kits are available and should be
installed at this time if seals or O-rings are 16. Inspect the valves for kinks, waves, pits or foreign
damaged or worn. material.
17. Inspect the piston wear band and replace if damaged
13. Use the appropriate shock rod holding tool and a or worn.
vise to mount the shock rod vertically with the
threaded end upward. 18. Use the appropriate shock body holding tool to
Front Shock Rod Holding Tool: 2872429 service.
Rear Shock Rod Holding Tool: PU-50931
8.38
19. Front Shocks Only: Using a 9/16" socket w/ Walker Evans Shock Assembly
extension, remove the fastener retaining the clicker 1. Install new seals and O-rings on the seal head
valve stack. Place the valve stack on a clean shop assembly.
towel in order of removal.
2. Use the appropriate shock rod holding tool and a
vise to mount the shock rod vertically with the
threaded end upward.
Front Shock Rod Holding Tool: 2872429

Rear Shock Rod Holding Tool: PU-50931
3. Install the appropriate Shock Seal Protector Sleeve

over the shaft threads.
Front Shock Seal Protector Sleeve: PU-50939

Rear Shock Seal Protector Sleeve: PU-50952
4. Install seal head assembly onto the shock shaft.

5. Remove the Shock Seal Protector Sleeve.
6. Place the compression valve stack on the rod in the
reverse order of disassembly.
NOTE: Keep the valve stack in the order it was
removed. If unsure of order, refer to Shock 7. Place valve piston on top of the compression stack.
Valving under the Shock Service Information
provided earlier in this section.
20. Inspect the valves for kinks, waves, pits or foreign

material
21. Thoroughly clean all shock components and shock
body prior to assembly.
NOTE: If unsure of the valve stack order, refer to

Shock Valving under the Shock Service
Information provided earlier in this section.
8.39
8. Place a new lock nut onto the shock rod. Torque the 10. Turn the compression adjuster knob counter-
new lock nut to specification. clockwise (soft) until it stops, so damping is in the full
open position.
NOTE: Do not over torque the nut or damage to
the valve stack can occur.
Lock Nut:
14 ft-lbs (19 Nm)
NOTE: Make sure Top-Out washers are

orientated as shown.
11. Use the appropriate shock body holding tool to

service.

12. Fill the shock body and remote reservoir 1/2 full of
the recommended gas shock oil.
9. Front Shocks Only: Assemble the clicker valve

stack on top of the fastener and install the assembly
into the reservoir body. Tighten the valve stack
fastener securely.
Recommended Shock Oil:

Racing Gas Shock Oil (PN 2874124) (Quart)
10 Weight for Walker Evans Shocks
8.40
13. Using a 3/32" Allen wrench, remove IFP bleed screw. 16. Slowly cycle the IFP up and down.
Be sure to bottom out piston in the reservoir body.
Allow time for the bubbles to dissipate.
Repeat the process until all air has been removed.
17. Pull IFP up until its top is approximately 1" (2.54 cm)
from top of reservoir and remove the IFP Tool. Using
a 3/32" Allen wrench, install the IFP bleed screw.
14. Apply a thin film of oil to IFP O-ring and wear band.
Insert IFP into reservoir until completely submerged.
Allow air to escape as you install the piston.
NOTE: When the IFP Tool is removed, the IFP

must remain submerged in shock oil to prevent
air from getting under the floating piston.
18. Fill the shock body with oil approximately 1/4" below
the threads.
19. Apply a thin film of oil to the wear band on the 8
damping piston. Slowly insert the shock rod
assembly into the body until the damping piston
assembly is approximately 1" below the oil surface.
Move rod up and down slowly over a range of
15. Screw IFP Tool (PS-45908) onto the floating piston. about 1" until no air bubbles rise from damping
piston. Be careful to keep damping piston at least
1/4" below the surface of the oil during this
process.
While holding the shock rod, apply 2 - 3 sharp
blows to the rod eyelet with a rubber mallet driving
the piston down into the shock body. This opens
the valves on the damping piston. You will see the
released air bubbles come to the surface of the oil.
8.41
20. Add oil to the body tube until the surface of the oil is 26. Set the IFP depth to the specified length from the top
at the top of the shock body threads. of the reservoir.
NOTE: During installation, some shock oil will

over flow. Wrap a shop cloth around the shock
body to catch any oil overflow.
21. Pull the damping piston up until it is just below the

surface of the oil.
22. Hold the rod eyelet with one hand. With other hand,
slide the bearing cap down the shaft until contact
with the body is made. Oil will overflow from around IFP Depth:
the bearing cap. FRONT: 3.375 (85.7 mm)
23. Screw the bearing cap assembly into the shock body REAR RZR XP 1000: 6.25 (158.8 mm)
by hand, holding the rod up so that the bearing cap is REAR RZR XP 4 1000: 7.25 (184.2 mm)
in contact with the bottom of the damping piston
assembly. Be careful not to cross-thread the bearing 27. Using a long 3/32 Allen wrench, install the IFP bleed
assembly. screw.
24. Using a 1" open-end wrench, tighten the bearing NOTE: Apply grease to the end of the Allen
cap. wrench so the bleed screw sticks to it during
25. Using a 3/32" Allen wrench, remove the IFP bleed installation.
screw.
28. Pour the residual shock oil out of the reservoir into a
proper disposal container.
29. Install the reservoir cap. Push down on the reservoir
cap using even pressure until the retaining ring
groove is exposed.
30. Install the retaining ring and check to make sure
retaining ring is seated properly.
31. Push the shock rod assembly completely into the
shock body. It should go all the way down smoothly
without interference. If it does not, disassemble and
reassemble per this procedure.
32. Secure the shock body in a vise by its lower mount.
8.42
33. Pressurize the shock reservoir through the 37. Check shock for any leaks.
Schrader valve using the Gas Shock Recharging
Kit (PN 2200421). NOTE: If leakage from a remote shock reservoir
hose fitting is evident, check for a loose fitting
and seal threads with Three Bond 1215 (PN
2871557)
38. Reinstall the compression spring and the spring

retainer.
39. Thread the spring preload adjuster down against the
spring and set the preload to the specified
measurement (see Chapter 2 Spring Adjustment,
page 2.40).
40. Set the compression adjuster knob to the
recommended setting or the original setting upon
removal (see Chapter 2 Shock Compression
Adjustment, page 2.41).
41. Remove the shock from the vise.
42. Reinstall spherical bearing O-rings and polyurethane
34. Continue filling until the shaft has fully extended and bushings.
the reservoir pressure is at 125 psi.
NOTE: After installation, be sure to RIDE
SLOWLY initially to ensure the shock and the
vehicles suspension is performing correctly.
Nitrogen Pressure (Front and Rear):

125 psi (862 kPa) +/- 5%
WARNING
CHARGE THE SHOCK USING NITROGEN GAS

ONLY. DO NOT FILL WITH ANY OTHER GASES.
Doing so compromises the performance of the shock
and may be EXTREMELY DANGEROUS!
35. Reinstall the valve cap.

36. Clean all oil residue from the shock and reservoir
with solvent, and dry with low pressure compressed
air in a well ventilated area.
8.43
NOTES
8.44
BRAKE SYSTEM
CHAPTER 9
BRAKE SYSTEM
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4
BRAKE SYSTEM SERVICE NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4
BRAKE NOISE TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5
HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5
BRAKE SYSTEM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6
BRAKE SYSTEM ASSEMBLY VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6
MASTER CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.7
MASTER CYLINDER REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.7
MASTER CYLINDER INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.8
BRAKE BLEEDING / FLUID CHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.8
BRAKE PEDAL LEVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.10
BRAKE PEDAL REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.10
BRAKE PEDAL INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.10
PARKING BRAKE (INTL MODEL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.11
PARKING BRAKE ASSEMBLY VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.11
PARKING BRAKE INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.12
PARKING BRAKE CABLE ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.12
PARKING BRAKE CALIPER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.13
PARKING BRAKE DISC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.16
FRONT BRAKE PADS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.19
PAD REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.19
PAD INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.20
PAD ASSEMBLY / INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.20
BRAKE BURNISHING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.21
9
FRONT CALIPER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.22
CALIPER ASSEMBLY VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.22
CALIPER REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.23
CALIPER DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.24
CALIPER INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.25
CALIPER ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.25
CALIPER INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.26
FRONT BRAKE DISC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.27
DISC RUNOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.27
DISC INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.27
DISC REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.28
REAR BRAKE PADS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.29
PAD REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.29
PAD INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.30
PAD ASSEMBLY / INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.31
9.1
BRAKE SYSTEM
BRAKE BURNISHING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.32
REAR CALIPER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.33
CALIPER ASSEMBLY VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.33
CALIPER REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.34
CALIPER DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.35
CALIPER INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.35
CALIPER ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.36
CALIPER INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.36
REAR BRAKE DISC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.38
DISC INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.38
DISC REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.38
TROUBLESHOOTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.40
POOR BRAKE PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.40
PEDAL VIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.40
CALIPER OVERHEATS (BRAKES DRAG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.40
BRAKES LOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.40
9.2
BRAKE SYSTEM
GENERAL INFORMATION
SPECIAL TOOLS
PART NUMBER TOOL DESCRIPTION
2870975 Mity Vac Pressure Test Tool
Bosch Automotive Service Solutions:

1-800-345-2233 or http://polaris.service-solutions.com/
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
FRONT BRAKE SYSTEM
Item Standard Service Limit
Front Brake Pad Thickness 0.297 .007" (7.54 .178 mm) .180" (4.6 mm)
Front Brake Disc Thickness 0.188" (4.78 mm) .170" (4.32 mm)
Front Brake Disc Runout - .010" (.254 mm)
REAR BRAKE SYSTEM

Rear Brake Pad Thickness .298 .007" (7.57 .178 mm) .180" (4.6 mm)
Rear Brake Disc Thickness .188" (4.78 mm) .170" (4.32 mm)
Rear Brake Disc Runout - .010" (.254 mm)
PARK BRAKE SYSTEM (INTL MODEL)

Inboard - 0.300 (7.62 mm) 0.240 (6.10 mm)
Park Brake Pad Thickness
Outboard - 0.250 (6.35 mm) 0.190" (4.83 mm)
Park Brake Disc Thickness 0.175 - 0.185 (4.44 - 4.70 mm) 0.150" (3.81 mm)
9.3
BRAKE SYSTEM
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM TORQUE
Caliper Mounting Bolts (Front) 30 ft-lb (42 Nm)
Caliper Mounting Bolts (Rear) 46 ft-lb (62 Nm)
Brake Line Flare 15 ft-lb (20 Nm)
Brake Line Banjo Bolts 15 ft-lb (20 Nm)
Brake Switch 15 ft-lb (20 Nm)
Brake Bleeder Screw 48 in-lb (5 Nm)
Brake Disc to Hub Bolts 18 ft-lb (24 Nm)
Master Cylinder Mounting Bolts 23 ft-lbs (31 Nm)
Brake Pedal Mounting Bracket to Frame 18 ft-lb (24 Nm)
Park Brake Disc Mounting Bolt 14 ft-lb (20 Nm)
Park Brake Lever Mount Bolts 16 ft-lb (22 Nm)
Park Brake Caliper Assembly Bolts 37 ft-lb (50 Nm)
Wheel Hub Castle Nuts 110 ft-lbs (149 Nm)
Aluminum: 120 ft-lbs (163 Nm)
Wheel Lug Nuts
Steel: 60 ft-lb (81 Nm)
BRAKE SYSTEM SERVICE NOTES

Disc brake systems are light weight, low maintenance, and perform well in the conditions this vehicle will routinely
encounter. There are a few things to remember when replacing disc brake pads or performing brake system service to
ensure proper system function and maximum pad service life.
DO NOT over-fill the master cylinder fluid reservoir.
Make sure the brake pedal returns freely and completely.
Adjust stop pin on brake caliper(s) after pad service.
Check and adjust master cylinder reservoir fluid level after pad service.
Make sure atmospheric vent on reservoir is unobstructed.
Test for brake drag after any brake system service and investigate cause if brake drag is evident.
Make sure caliper moves freely on guide pins (where applicable).
Inspect caliper piston seals for foreign material that could prevent caliper pistons from returning freely.
Perform a brake burnishing procedure after installing new pads to maximize service life.
DO NOT lubricate or clean the brake components with aerosol or petroleum products. Use only approved brake
cleaning products.
9.4
BRAKE SYSTEM
BRAKE NOISE TROUBLESHOOTING
Dirt or dust buildup on the brake pads and disc is the most common cause of brake noise (squeal caused by vibration).
If cleaning does not reduce the occurrence of brake noise, Permatex Disc Brake Quiet can be applied to the back of
the pads. Follow directions on the package. This will keep pads in contact with caliper piston(s) to reduce the chance
of squeaks caused by dirt or dust.
Brake Noise Troubleshooting
POSSIBLE CAUSE REMEDY
Spray disc and pads with CRC Brakleen or an
equivalent non-flammable aerosol brake cleaner.
Dirt, dust, or imbedded material on pads or disc
Remove pads and/or disc hub to clean imbedded
material from disc or pads.
Pad(s) dragging on disc due to:
Improper adjustment Adjust pad stop (front calipers)
Master cylinder reservoir overfilled Set to proper level
Master cylinder compensating port restricted Clean compensating port
Master cylinder piston not returning completely Inspect. Repair as necessary
Caliper piston(s) not returning Clean piston(s) seal
Operator error (riding the brake) Educate operator
Loose wheel hub or bearings Check wheel and hub for abnormal movement.
Brake disc warped or excessively worn Replace disc
Brake disc misaligned or loose Inspect and repair as necessary
If noise does not change when brake is applied check
Noise is from other source (axle, hub, disc or wheel)
other sources. Inspect and repair as necessary
HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM OPERATION

The Polaris brake system consists of the following components or assemblies: brake pedal, master cylinder, hydraulic
brake lines, brake calipers, brake pads, and brake discs, which are secured to the drive line.
When the foot activated brake lever is applied it applies pressure on the piston within the master cylinder. As the
master cylinder piston moves inward it closes a small opening (compensating port) within the cylinder and starts to
build pressure within the brake system. As the pressure within the system is increased, the pistons located in the brake
calipers move outward and apply pressure to the moveable brake pads. These pads contact the brake discs and move
the calipers in their floating bracket, pulling the stationary side pads into the brake discs. The resulting friction reduces
brake disc and vehicle speed. 9
The friction applied to the brake pads will cause the pads to wear. As these pads wear, the piston within the caliper
moves further outward and becomes self adjusting. Fluid from the reservoir fills the additional area created when the
caliper piston moves outward.
Brake fluid level is critical to proper system operation. Too little fluid will allow air to enter the system and cause the
brakes to feel spongy. Too much fluid could cause brakes to drag due to fluid expansion.
Located within the master cylinder is the compensating port which is opened and closed by the master cylinder piston
assembly. As the temperature within the hydraulic system changes, this port compensates for fluid expansion or
contraction. Due to the high temperatures created within the system during heavy braking, it is very important that the
master cylinder reservoir have adequate space to allow for fluid expansion. Never overfill the reservoir! Do not fill
the reservoir beyond the MAX LEVEL line!
When servicing Polaris brake systems use only Polaris DOT 4 Brake Fluid (PN 2872189).
WARNING: Once a bottle is opened, use what is necessary and discard the rest in accordance with local laws.
Do not store or use a partial bottle of brake fluid. Brake fluid is hygroscopic, meaning it rapidly absorbs
moisture. This causes the boiling temperature of the brake fluid to drop, which can lead to early brake fade
and the possibility of serious injury.
9.5
BRAKE SYSTEM
BRAKE SYSTEM
Brake System Assembly View
9.6
BRAKE SYSTEM
MASTER CYLINDER 3. Place a container to catch brake fluid under the
master cylinder brake line banjo bolts 4 .
Master Cylinder Removal
1. Locate the master cylinder 1 above the left front tire CAUTION
in the wheel well area.
Brake fluid will damage finished surfaces.
Do not allow brake fluid to come in contact
with finished surfaces.
NOTE: Make note of front and rear brake line

locations to master cylinder.
4. Loosen the brake line banjo bolts and allow fluid to

drain.
NOTE: Dispose of fluid properly. Do not re-use.
5. Remove the two mounting fasteners 5 that secure

the master cylinder to the frame.
2. Remove the clip 2 from the clevis pin 3 that

attaches the master cylinder to the brake pedal lever.
9.7
BRAKE SYSTEM
Master Cylinder Installation BRAKE BLEEDING / FLUID CHANGE
1. Reverse Steps 1-5 for master cylinder installation.
NOTE: When bleeding the brakes or replacing the
fluid always start with the furthest caliper from the
master cylinder. This procedure should be used to
change fluid or bleed brakes during regular
maintenance.
Banjo Bolts
15 ft-lb (20 Nm)
CAUTION
Master Cylinder Mounting Fasteners
23 ft-lbs (31 Nm) Always wear safety glasses when handling chemicals
and fluids.
2. After installing the foot brake check pedal free-play.
Pedal free-play should not exceed .090 (2.286 mm).
CAUTION
Brake fluid will damage finished surfaces.

Do not allow brake fluid to come in contact
with finished surfaces.
1. Clean master cylinder reservoir cover thoroughly and

remove the cover 2 .
2. If changing fluid, remove old fluid from reservoir 1
with a Mity Vac pump or similar tool.
Mity Vac: PN 2870975
3. Add brake fluid to the indicated MAX level of

reservoir.
Polaris DOT 4 Brake Fluid

(PN 2872189)
4. Begin bleeding procedure with the caliper that is

farthest from the master cylinder. Install a box end
wrench on caliper bleeder screw. Attach a clean,
clear hose to fitting and place the other end in a
clean container. Be sure the hose fits tightly on
fitting.
9.8
BRAKE SYSTEM
5. Have an assistant slowly pump foot pedal until 12. Field test machine at low speed before putting into
pressure builds and holds. service. Check for proper braking action and pedal
reserve. With pedal firmly applied, pedal reserve
6. Hold brake pedal down to maintain pedal pressure,
should be no less than 1/2"(1.3 cm).
and open bleeder screw 3 . Close bleeder screw and
release pedal. 13. Check brake system for fluid leaks.
NOTE: Do not release foot pedal before bleeder

screw is tight or air may be drawn into master
cylinder.
7. Repeat procedure until clean fluid appears in bleeder

hose and all air has been purged. Add fluid as
necessary to maintain level in reservoir.
CAUTION
Maintain at least 1/2"(1.27 cm) of brake fluid in the
reservoir to prevent air from
entering the master cylinder.
8. Tighten bleeder screw securely and remove bleeder

hose. Torque bleeder screw to specification.
9
Bleeder Screw:
48 in-lb (5 Nm)
9. Repeat steps 5 - 8 for the remaining calipers.

10. Add brake fluid to MAX level inside reservoir.
Master Cylinder Fluid Level
Between MIN and MAX lines on reservoir.
11. Install master cylinder reservoir cover.
9.9
BRAKE SYSTEM
BRAKE PEDAL LEVER Brake Pedal Installation
1. Reverse the Removal steps to install brake pedal
Brake Pedal Removal lever. Brake pedal free-play should not exceed
1. Locate the brake pedal lever 2 and remove the clip 0.090 (2.28 mm).
1 and master cylinder clevis pin 4 .
Brake Pedal Free-play:

2. Remove the E-clip 3 from the pedal mount and 0.090 (2.28 mm)
remove the brake pedal lever 2 from the vehicle.
9.10
BRAKE SYSTEM
PARKING BRAKE (INTL MODEL)
Parking Brake Assembly View
9.11
BRAKE SYSTEM
Parking Brake Inspection Adjustment Procedure
1. Inspect parking brake cable and brake pads for wear. 5. Place the vehicle in neutral on a flat level surface.
2. Refer to Parking Brake Cable Adjustment, page 6. Locate the parking brake cable adjustment area
9.12 if adjustment is necessary. Refer to Parking where the cable attaches to the caliper mount
Brake Caliper, page 9.13 for brake pad replacement. bracket.
7. Use two open-end wrenches and loosen the outer

Parking Brake Cable Adjustment jam nut (D). Back out the outer jam nut (D) 1 1/2
turns.
When the parking brake is fully engaged and BRAKE is
displayed on the instrument cluster, engine speed is
limited to 1500 RPM while in gear. If throttle is applied,
this limiting feature prevents operation, which protects
the parking brake pads from excessive wear.
NOTE: Inspect parking brake cable tension after the
first 25 hours of operation and every 100 hours of
operation afterwards to ensure proper cable tension.
Loss of tension in the parking brake cable will cause

illumination of the parking brake indicator and activation
of the limiting feature. If this occurs, inspect and adjust
parking brake cable tension. If performing this service is
difficult due to conditions or location, temporarily
disconnect the parking brake switch electrical connector. 8. Now hold the outer jam nut (D) and turn in the inner
Reconnect the connector as soon as practicable and jam nut (C) clockwise, until the jam nut is tight
adjust the parking brake cable to proper tension. against the bracket.
1. Pull back on parking brake lever (located in the 9. Repeat Step 3 and Step 4 until the proper
dash). adjustment is obtained for the parking brake.
2. After 3 to 4 clicks BRAKE should display on the NOTE: See Chapter 10 Parking Brake Switch
instrument cluster and the wheels should not rotate (INTL Model), page for more information on
when turning by hand. After 8 full clicks of lever the parking brake switch.
travel, the vehicle should not roll while parked.
3. If the vehicle moves, adjustment is necessary.
4. Adjust the parking brake cable where it attaches to
the caliper mount / shift cable bracket. The mount
bracket is located on the right-hand side of the
transmission.
9.12
BRAKE SYSTEM
Parking Brake Caliper
9.13
BRAKE SYSTEM
Caliper Removal 1. Remove the two caliper assembly bolts (C).
NOTE: Do not get oil, grease, or fluid on the parking
brake pads. Damage to or contamination of the pads
may cause the pads to function improperly.
1. Remove the clip pin and pin (A) from the parking
brake cable.
NOTE: Be sure the parking brake is not engaged.
2. Slide the brake pads and springs from the assembly.

NOTE: Retain the lever and ball bearings for
reassembly.
3. Inspect brake pads for excessive wear. Replace as

needed.
4. Check the three steel balls for any signs of cracking.
Replace as needed.
2. Remove the two fasteners (B) retaining the parking 5. Check ball seats in lever and stationary actuator. If
brake caliper mount / shift cable bracket. excessively worn, replace parts as needed.
6. Measure thickness of the rear caliper parking brake
pads. Replace assembly or pads as needed. Refer to
the following image for brake pad specifications.
3. Lift the parking brake caliper off the brake disc and
remove it from the vehicle.
Caliper Disassembly / Inspection
NOTE: Refer to the Electronic Parts Catalog for
parking brake caliper replacement parts information.
9.14
BRAKE SYSTEM
New Pad Installation Brake Caliper Installation
1. Install new pads and assemble the caliper with one 1. Install the parking brake caliper over the brake disc.
shim. Align the caliper mounting sleeves with the holes in
the mount bracket.
2. Measure gap for the brake disc and compare to gap
specification. Disassemble and add shim(s) between 2. Install and tighten the two caliper mount / shift cable
thrust washer and the inside brake pad as needed to bracket fasteners to specification.
close the gap to .207-.217 in. (5.25-5.51 mm).
3. Once you have determined the correct amount of

shims to use, reassemble the caliper and apply an
Anti-Seize Lubricant to the thrust washer and shims.
4. Torque the caliper assembly bolts to specification. Parking Brake Caliper - Mount Bracket Bolts:
37 ft-lb (50 Nm)
3. Install the cable, pin and clip pin. Test the park brake
for proper function.
Parking Brake Caliper - Assembly Bolts:

37 ft-lb (50 Nm)
5. Ensure the parking brake assembly functions

properly by actuating the lever. Install the mounting
9
sleeves (D) before installation.
9.15
BRAKE SYSTEM
Parking Brake Disc
Disc Inspection
Measure the brake disc with a micrometer. If the
thickness of the disc is less than specified, replace the
brake disc (see Chapter 9 Disc Replacement, page
).
Disc Replacement
1. Remove the parking brake caliper from the disc (see
Chapter 9 ).
2. Using a 1/2 socket and ratchet, remove the brake
disc retaining bolt and flat washer.
3. Remove the disc from the transmission shaft.
4. Install the new brake disc. Install the mounting bolt
and flat washer. Torque the mounting bolt to
specification.
Parking Brake Disc Mounting Bolt:

14 ft-lb (20 Nm)
9.16
BRAKE SYSTEM
9.17
BRAKE SYSTEM
9.18
BRAKE SYSTEM
FRONT BRAKE PADS 5. Push caliper piston into caliper bore slowly using a
C-clamp or locking pliers with pads installed.
Pad Removal
1. Elevate and support front of vehicle.
CAUTION
Use care when supporting vehicle so that it
does not tip or fall.
Severe injury may occur if machine tips or falls.
2. Remove the wheel nuts and front wheel.

3. Loosen the pad adjuster screw 2-3 turns.
NOTE: Brake fluid will be forced through

compensating port into master cylinder fluid
reservoir when piston is pushed back into
caliper. Remove excess fluid from reservoir as
required.
6. Push the mounting bracket inward and slip the outer

brake pad out between the bracket and caliper body.
4. Remove the upper and lower caliper mounting bolts

and remove the caliper from the front hub.
NOTE: When removing caliper, use care not to
damage brake line. Support caliper to avoid
kinking or bending brake line.
7. Remove the inner pad from the bracket and caliper.
9.19
BRAKE SYSTEM
Pad Inspection Pad Assembly / Installation
1. Measure the thickness of the pad material. Replace 1. Lubricate mounting bracket pins 1 with a light film of
pads if worn beyond the service limit. silicone grease and install rubber dust boots.
2. Compress mounting bracket and make sure dust

boots are fully seated. Install pads with friction
material facing each other.
WARNING
If brake pads are contaminated with grease, oil, or

liquid soaked do not use the pads.
Use only new, clean pads.
3. Install caliper onto front hub and torque mounting

bolts 2 to specification.
Front Brake Pad Thickness:

0.297 0.007" (7.5 .178 mm)
Front Caliper Mount Bolt:

40 ft-lbs (54 Nm)
9.20
BRAKE SYSTEM
4. Slowly pump the brake pedal until pressure has been Brake Burnishing Procedure
built up. Maintain at least 1/2" (12.7 mm) of brake
fluid in the reservoir to prevent air from entering the It is required that a burnishing procedure be performed
after installation of new brake pads to extend service life
brake system.
and reduce noise.
5. Install the adjustment set screw and turn clockwise
Start machine and slowly increase speed to 30 mph.
until stationary pad contacts disc, then back off 1/2
Gradually apply brakes to stop machine. Allow pads and
turn (counterclockwise).
disc to cool sufficiently during the procedure. Do not
allow pads or disc to become hot or warping may result.
Repeat this procedure 10 times. Do not make more
than 3 stops per 1 mile (1.6 km).
6. Verify fluid level in reservoir is up to MAX line inside

reservoir and install reservoir cap.
Master Cylinder Fluid
Up to MAX line inside reservoir
7. Install wheel and torque wheel nuts to specification.
Wheel Nuts:
120 ft-lbs (163 Nm)
9
9.21
BRAKE SYSTEM
FRONT CALIPER SERVICE
Caliper Assembly View
9.22
BRAKE SYSTEM
Caliper Removal 6. Remove the two caliper mounting bolts 2 and
1. Elevate and safely support the front of the vehicle. remove the caliper assembly from the front hub.
2. Remove the four wheel nuts and the front wheel.
CAUTION
or fall. Severe injury may occur.
3. Clean caliper area before removal.

4. Place a container below the caliper to catch brake
fluid when removing the line 1 . Remove brake line
from caliper.
5. Loosen brake pad adjustment set screw 2-3 turns to

allow brake pad removal after the caliper is removed.
9.23
BRAKE SYSTEM
Caliper Disassembly 5. Once the pistons are removed, use a pick to
1. Remove both brake pads from the caliper (see carefully remove the square O-rings from the caliper.
Chapter 9 FRONT BRAKE PADS - Pad Removal, O-rings should be replaced during caliper service.
page 9.19).
2. Remove mount bracket assembly 1 and dust boots
2 .
6. Clean the caliper body, pistons and retaining bracket

3 with brake cleaner or alcohol.
3. Thoroughly clean the caliper before disassembly and

prepare a clean work area for disassembly.
4. Use a commercially available caliper piston pliers to
extract the pistons from the caliper.
NOTE: Be sure to clean seal grooves in caliper

body.
NOTE: Do not remove the caliper pistons with a

standard pliers. The piston sealing surfaces will
become damaged if a standard pliers is used.
9.24
BRAKE SYSTEM
Caliper Inspection 3. Inspect the brake disc and pads as outlined in this
1. Inspect caliper body for nicks, scratches, pitting or chapter.
wear. Measure bore size and compare to
specifications. Replace if damaged or worn beyond Caliper Assembly
service limit. 1. Install new O-rings 2 in the caliper body. Be sure the
grooves 1 are clean and free of residue or brakes
may drag upon assembly.
2. Coat pistons with clean Polaris DOT 4 Brake Fluid.

Install pistons with a twisting motion while pushing
Front Caliper Piston Bore I.D.: inward. Piston should slide in and out of bore
Std: 1.373 (34.87 mm) smoothly, with light resistance.
3. Lubricate the mounting bracket pins 3 with silicone
grease and install the rubber dust seal boots.
2. Inspect piston for nicks, scratches, pitting or wear.
Measure piston diameter and replace if damaged or
worn beyond service limit.
4. Compress the mounting bracket and make sure the

dust seal boots are fully seated. Install the brake
pads. Clean the disc and pads with brake parts
cleaner or denatured alcohol to remove any dirt, oil
or grease.
Front Caliper Piston O.D.:

Std: 1.370 (34.80 mm)
9.25
BRAKE SYSTEM
Caliper Installation 4. Install the adjustment set screw and turn clockwise
1. Install the brake line onto the caliper taking care not until stationary pad contacts disc, then back off 1/2
to allow any debris to enter the caliper. turn (counterclockwise).
2. Install the caliper and torque the mounting bolts to

specification.
NOTE: If disc scraper 1 was removed, reinstall
it upon caliper installation.
5. Perform brake bleeding procedure as outlined earlier

in this chapter.
Wheel Nuts:
120 ft-lbs (163 Nm)
Front Caliper Mount Bolt 2 :
40 ft-lbs (54 Nm) 7. Field test unit for proper braking action before putting
into service. Inspect for fluid leaks and firm brakes.
3. Torque the banjo bolt 3 to specification. Make sure the brake is not dragging when pedal is
released. If the brake drags, re-check assembly and
installation.
NOTE: If new pads are installed, refer to Brake
Burnishing Procedure, page 9.21.
Banjo Bolt
15 ft-lbs (20 Nm)
9.26
BRAKE SYSTEM
FRONT BRAKE DISC Disc Inspection
1. Visually inspect disc for scoring, scratches, or
Disc Runout gouges. Replace disc if deep scratches are evident.
1. Mount dial indicator as shown to measure disc 2. Use a 0-1 micrometer and measure disc thickness
runout. Slowly rotate the disc and read total runout at eight different points around the pad contact
on the dial indicator. Replace the disc if runout surface. Replace disc if worn beyond service limit.
exceeds specification.

New: .0188 (4.78 mm)
Brake Disc Thickness Variance

Service Limit: 0.002 (.051 mm)
difference between measurements
Brake Disc Runout:

9.27
BRAKE SYSTEM
Disc Replacement CAUTION
1. Remove the front brake caliper (see Chapter 9
Caliper Removal , page 9.23). Always use new brake disc mounting bolts. The bolts
have a pre-applied locking agent which is destroyed
2. Remove wheel hub cotter pin 4 , castle nut 3 and upon removal.
washers 2 .
3. Remove the wheel hub assembly from the vehicle 6. Install wheel hub assembly, washers, and castle nut.
and remove the four bolts 1 retaining the disc to the Torque castle nut to specification and install a new
hub. cotter pin.
Castle Nut:
110 ft-lbs (149 Nm)
7. Install the front brake caliper (see Chapter 9

FRONT CALIPER SERVICE, page 9.22).
8. Follow bleeding procedure outlined earlier in this
chapter.
9. Field test unit for proper braking action before putting
Make sure the brake is not dragging when pedal is
released. If the brake drags, re-check assembly and
4. Clean the wheel hub mating surface and install new
installation.
disc on wheel hub.
5. Install new bolts 5 and torque to specification.
Brake Disc Mounting Bolts 5 :

30 ft-lb (41 Nm)
9.28
BRAKE SYSTEM
REAR BRAKE PADS 5. Remove the two caliper mounting bolts and lift
caliper off the brake disc.
Pad Removal
1. Elevate and support rear of vehicle.
CAUTION
Use care when supporting vehicle so that it
does not tip or fall.
Severe injury may occur if machine tips or falls.
2. Remove the rear wheel.

3. Loosen pad adjuster screw 2-3 turns.
NOTE: When removing caliper, be careful not to

damage brake line. Support caliper to avoid
kinking or bending brake line.
6. Push caliper piston into the caliper bore slowly using

a C-clamp or locking pliers with pads installed.
4. Remove the lower radius rod outer mounting bolt,

radius rod down. Discard the nut.
9
NOTE: Brake fluid will be forced through
compensating port into master cylinder fluid
reservoir when piston is pushed back into
caliper. Remove excess fluid from reservoir as
required.
9.29
BRAKE SYSTEM
7. Push caliper mounting bracket inward and slip outer Pad Inspection
brake pad past the edge to remove. 1. Clean the caliper with brake cleaner or alcohol.
2. Measure the thickness of the pad material. Replace
pads if worn beyond the service limit.
8. Remove the inner brake pad.
Rear Brake Pad Thickness:

0.298 0.007 (7.57 mm .178 mm)
9.30
BRAKE SYSTEM
Pad Assembly / Installation 4. Install lower radius rod bolt, washer and new nut.
1. Lubricate mounting bracket pins with a light film of
1
silicone grease and install rubber dust boots 2 .
2. Compress mounting bracket and make sure dust

boots are fully seated. Install pads with friction
material facing each other.
Radius Rod to Bearing Carrier Bolt:
40 ft-lb (54 Nm)
WARNING
5. Slowly pump the brake pedal until pressure has been
built up. Maintain at least 1/2, (12.7 mm) of brake
If brake pads are contaminated with grease,
fluid in the reservoir to prevent air from entering the
oil, or liquid soaked do not use the pads.
brake system.
Use only new clean pads.
6. Install the adjustment set screw and turn clockwise
3. Install the caliper and torque the new mounting bolts until the stationary pad contacts the disc, then back
3 to specification. off 1/2 turn.
7. Verify fluid level in reservoir is up to the MAX line
inside reservoir and install reservoir cap.
Master Cylinder Fluid
Up to MAX line inside reservoir

9
Wheel Nuts:
120 ft-lbs (163 Nm)
Rear Caliper Mount Bolt 1 :

40 ft-lbs (54 Nm)
9.31
BRAKE SYSTEM
Brake Burnishing Procedure
It is required that a burnishing procedure be performed
after installation of new brake pads to extend service life
and reduce noise.
Start machine and slowly increase speed to 30 mph.
Gradually apply brakes to stop machine. Allow pads and
disc to cool sufficiently during the procedure. Do not
allow pads or disc to become hot or warping may result.
Repeat this procedure 10 times. Do not make more
than 3 stops per 1 mile (1.6 km).
9.32
BRAKE SYSTEM
REAR CALIPER SERVICE
Caliper Assembly View
9.33
BRAKE SYSTEM
Caliper Removal 6. Remove the two caliper mounting bolts and remove
1. Elevate and safely support the rear of the vehicle. the caliper.
CAUTION
or fall. Severe injury may occur.
2. Remove the four wheel nuts and rear wheel. Clean

caliper area before removal.
3. Place a container below the caliper to catch the
brake fluid when removing the line 1 . Remove brake
line from caliper.
4. Remove the lower radius rod outer mounting bolt,

radius rod down. Discard nut.
5. Loosen the brake pad adjustment set screw to allow

brake pad removal after the caliper is removed.
9.34
BRAKE SYSTEM
Caliper Disassembly Caliper Inspection
1. Remove brake pad adjustment set screw 9 . 1. Inspect caliper body for nicks, scratches or wear.
Measure bore size and compare to specifications.
2. Push upper pad retainer pin inward and slip brake Replace if damage is evident or if worn beyond
pads 1 past the edge and remove from the caliper. service limit.
3. Remove mount bracket 2 and dust boots 6 & 7 .
4. Using a hammer and a small punch, remove the

piston 5 from the caliper body 8 . Remove the
square O-rings 4 and 3 from the caliper body 8 .
5. Clean the caliper body, piston, and retaining bracket Rear Caliper Piston Bore I.D.:
10 with brake cleaner or alcohol. Standard: 1.505 (38.23 mm)
NOTE: Be sure to clean caliper body seal
grooves. 2. Inspect piston for nicks, scratches, wear or damage.
Measure diameter and replace if damaged or worn
beyond service limit.
Rear Caliper Piston O.D.:

Standard: 1.500 (38.10 mm)
9.35
BRAKE SYSTEM
3. Inspect the brake disc and pads as outlined in this Caliper Installation
chapter. 1. Install the rear caliper with new mounting bolts.
Torque mounting bolts 1 to specification.
Caliper Assembly
1. Install new caliper seals 1 in the caliper body 2 . Be
sure groove is clean and free of residue or brakes
may drag upon assembly.
2. Coat piston with clean Polaris DOT 4 Brake Fluid Rear Caliper Mount Bolt 1 :
(PN 2872189). Install piston 3 with a twisting motion 40 ft-lbs (54 Nm)
while pushing inward. Piston should slide in and out
of bore smoothly with light resistance. 2. Install brake line banjo bolt 2 and torque to
specification.
3. Lubricate the mounting bracket pins 4 with silicone
grease and install the rubber dust seal boots 5 . NOTE: Banjo Bolts:
15 ft-lbs (20 Nm)
4. Compress the mounting bracket and make sure the

dust seals are fully seated. Install the brake pads.
Clean the disc and pads with brake parts cleaner or
denatured alcohol to remove any dirt, oil or grease.
9.36
BRAKE SYSTEM
3. Install lower radius rod bolt, washer and new nut.
Radius Rod to Bearing Carrier Bolt:

40 ft-lb (54 Nm)
4. Install the pad adjustment screw and turn until

stationary pad contacts disc, then back off 1/2 turn.
5. Follow bleeding procedure outlined earlier in this
chapter.
Wheel Nuts:
120 ft-lbs (163 Nm)
9
NOTE: If new pads are installed, refer to Brake
Burnishing Procedure, page 9.32.
9.37
BRAKE SYSTEM
REAR BRAKE DISC Disc Replacement
1. Remove rear brake caliper (see Chapter 9 Caliper
Disc Inspection Removal, page 9.34).
1. Visually inspect disc for scoring, scratches, or 2. Remove wheel hub cotter pin 4 , castle nut 3 and
gouges. Replace disc if deep scratches are evident. washers 2 .
2. Use a 0-1 micrometer and measure disc thickness 3. Remove the hub assembly from the vehicle and
at eight different points around the pad contact remove the four bolts 1 retaining the disc to the hub.
surface. Replace disc if worn beyond service limit.
4. Clean the wheel hub mating surface and install new

disc on wheel hub.
5. Install new bolts and torque to specification.
New: 0.188 (4.78 mm)
Brake Disc Thickness Variance

Difference Between Measurements
3. Mount a dial indicator and measure disc runout.

Slowly rotate the disc and read total runout on the
dial indicator. Replace the disc if runout exceeds
specifications.
Brake Disc Runout:

CAUTION
Always use new brake disc mounting bolts. The bolts
have a pre-applied locking agent which is destroyed
upon removal.
Brake Disc Mounting Bolts:

30 ft-lb (41 Nm)
9.38
BRAKE SYSTEM
6. Install wheel hub assembly, washers, and castle nut.
Torque castle nut to specification and install a new
cotter pin.
Rear Wheel Hub Castle Nut:

110 ft-lbs (149 Nm)
7. Install rear caliper (see Chapter 9 REAR CALIPER

SERVICE, page 9.33). Bleed the brake system. (See
Chapter 9 BRAKE BLEEDING / FLUID CHANGE,
page 9.8.
8. Field test unit for proper braking action before putting
Make sure brakes do not drag when pedal is
released. If the brakes drag, re-check assembly and
installation.
9.39
BRAKE SYSTEM
TROUBLESHOOTING
Poor Brake Performance
Air in system
Water in system (brake fluid contaminated)
Caliper or disc misaligned
Caliper dirty or damaged
Brake line damaged or lining ruptured
Worn disc and/or friction pads
Incorrectly adjusted stationary pad
Worn or damaged master cylinder or components
Damaged break pad noise insulator
Brake pads dragging
Brake caliper dragging
Pedal Vibration
Disc damaged
Disc worn (runout or thickness variance exceeds
service limit)
Caliper Overheats (Brakes Drag)

Compensating port plugged
Pad clearance set incorrectly
Parking brake lever incorrectly adjusted (INTL
Model)
Brake pedal binding or unable to return fully
Parking brake left on (INTL Model)
Residue build up under caliper seals
Operator riding brakes
Brakes Lock
Alignment of caliper to disc
Caliper pistons sticking
Improper assembly of brake system components
9.40
BODY / FRAME
CHAPTER 10
BODY / FRAME
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.2
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.2
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.2
BODY ASSEMBLY VIEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.3
CAB FRAME ASSEMBLY XP / HIGH LIFTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.3
CAB FRAME ASSEMBLY XP 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.4
DOORS XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.5
DOORS XP 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.6
DOORS HIGH LIFTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.7
DASH INSTRUMENTS / CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.8
DASH INSTRUMENTS / CONTROLS HIGH LIFTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.9
HOOD / FRONT BODY WORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.10
CHASSIS / MAIN FRAME XP / HIGH LIFTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.11
CHASSIS / MAIN FRAME XP 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.12
SEAT ASSEMBLY FRONT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.13
SEAT ASSEMBLY REAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.14
FLOOR / ROCKER PANELS XP / HIGH LIFTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.15
FLOOR / ROCKER PANELS XP 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.16
REAR CARGO BOX / FENDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.17
REAR BUMPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.18
BODY COMPONENT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.19
SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.19
ENGINE SERVICE PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.19
FRONT BUMPER XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.19
REAR BUMPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.20
HOOD AND FRONT BODY WORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.20
REAR FENDER / FENDER FLARE REMOVAL XP / HIGH LIFTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.21
REAR FENDER FLARE / REAR FENDER REMOVAL XP 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.22
CARGO BOX ASSEMBLY REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.22
ROCKER PANELS, CONSOLE AND FLOOR XP / HIGH LIFTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.23
ROCKER PANELS, REAR CONSOLE AND FLOOR XP 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.24
10
DECAL REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.27
10.1
BODY / FRAME
GENERAL INFORMATION Torque Specifications
SPECIAL TOOLS ITEM TORQUE VALUE
PART Front A-Arm Bolt 42 ft-lb (57 Nm)
TOOL DESCRIPTION
NUMBER
Door Hinge Mount Nuts 8 ft-lb (11 Nm)
Shock Spring Preload Spanner Door Latch Screws 8 ft-lb (11 Nm)
2878925 Wrench (Walker Evans)
Front Bumper / Fender 8 ft-ln (11 Nm)
2876389 Multi-Function Pliers Screws
Walker Evans: See Walker Evans Shock Service Floor Screws 8 ft-lb (11 Nm)
later in this chapter, page 8.36
Trailing Arm to Frame Bolt 70 ft-lb (95 Nm)
2233 or http://polaris.service-solutions.com Seat Belt Mounting 40 ft-lbs (54 Nm)
Hardware
Seat Slider Plate 4 ft-lb (5 Nm)
Skid Plate Screws 8 ft-lbs (11 Nm)
Front to Rear Frame Bolts 40 ft-lb (54 Nm)
Cab Frame Bolts 40 ft-lb (54 Nm)

Visor Mounting Screws 8 ft-lb (11 Nm)
Seat Base to Frame (Front
14 ft-lb (19 Nm)
Bolts)
Seat Base to Frame (Rear
30 ft-lb (41 Nm)
Bolts)
10.2
BODY / FRAME
BODY ASSEMBLY VIEWS
Cab Frame Assembly XP / High Lifter
NOTE: Finger tighten all components until cab frame is completely assembled on vehicle then tighten to
specification.
1. Install hip bolster and secure the bottom mount with M8 x 1.24 x 20 bolts. Torque bolts to 14 ft-lb (19 Nm).
2. Install ROPS hoop to the hip bolster and frame with M10 x 1.25 x 55 bolts and nuts. Tighten fasteners to 40 ft-lb
(54 Nm)
3. Install the front ROPS to the frame with M10 x 1.5 x 45 screws and nuts. Install front ROPS to ROPS hoop with
M10 x 1.5 x 20 screws. Torque fasteners to 40 ft-lb (54 Nm).
4. Install rear ROPS to the ROPS hoop with M10 x 1.5 x 25 screws. Install rear ROPS to frame with M10 x 1.5 x 45
screws and nuts. Torque fasteners to 40 ft-lb (54 Nm).
5. Install deflector on front ROPS with M10 x 1.25 x 20 bolts. Torque bolts to 8 ft-lb (11 Nm)
10
10.3
BODY / FRAME
Cab Frame Assembly XP 4
NOTE: Finger tighten all components until cab frame is completely assembled on vehicle then tighten to
specification.
1. Install the ROPS mid-hoop to the frame with M10 x 1.5 x 65 screws and nuts 1 . Torque to 40 ft-lb (54 Nm).
2. Install hip bolsters onto the main frame with M8 x 1.25 x 20 bolts 2 . Torque bolts to 14 ft-lb (19 Nm)
3. Install ROPS rear hoop to frame with M10 x 1.25 x 55 bolts and nuts 3 . Torque to 40 ft-lb (54 Nm)
4. Attach ROPS main to the mid ROPS hoop and front main frame with M10 x 1.5 x 45 screws 4 . Torque to 40 ft-lb
(54 Nm).
5. Install rear ROPS to rear ROPS hoop and rear frame with M10 x 1.5 x 45 screws 5 . Torque to 40 ft-lb (54 Nm)
6. Install ROPS brace to ROPS mid hoop and ROPS rear hoop with M10 x 1.5 x 45 screws 6 . Torque to 40 ft-lb (54
Nm)
7. Install ROPS front to ROPS mains with M10 x 1.5 x 20 screws 7 . Torque to 40 ft-lb (54 Nm)
8. Install visor panel on front ROPS with M10 x 1.25 x 20 bolts. Torque to 8 ft-lb (11 Nm)
10.4
BODY / FRAME
Doors XP
1 Door Panel 4 Hinge Pin

2 Door Frame 5 Latch Release
3 Latch Striker 6 Latch
10
10.5
BODY / FRAME
Doors XP 4
1 Door Panel 5 Latch Release

2 Door Frame 6 Latch
3 Latch Striker 7 Door panel (Rear)
4 Hinge Pin 8 Door Frame (Rear)
10.6
BODY / FRAME
Doors High Lifter
1 Upper Door Panel 7 Latch Release

2 Lower Door Panel 8 Latch
3 Hip Bolster Panel 9 Latch Striker
4 Upper Door Frame 10 Latch Striker Screws (8 ft-lbs, 11 Nm)
5 Lower Door Frame 11 Hinge Screws (8 ft-lbs, 11 Nm)
10
6 Hinge Pin
10.7
BODY / FRAME
Dash Instruments / Controls
1 Instrument Cluster 4 Headlight Switch

2 Key Switch 5 AWD Switch
3 12V Accessory Port 6 Bezel
10.8
BODY / FRAME
Dash Instruments / Controls High Lifter
1 Instrument Cluster 5 AWD Switch

2 Key Switch 6 Winch Switch
3 12V Accessory Port 7 Bezel
4 Headlight Switch
10
10.9
BODY / FRAME
Hood / Front Body Work
1 Front Bumper 6 Hood

2 Right Front Fender 7 Grill
3 Right Front Fender Flair 8 Front Bumper Cover
4 Left Front Fender 9 Radiator Shroud
5 Left Front Fender Flair
10.10
BODY / FRAME
Chassis / Main Frame XP / High Lifter
10
10.11
BODY / FRAME
Chassis / Main Frame XP 4
10.12
BODY / FRAME
Seat Assembly Front
1 Seat Frame 12 Tube Spacer

2 Screw 48 in-lbs (5.4 Nm) 13 Flange Nut Nylok
3 Seat Base Assembly Slider 14 Slider Adjustment Plate
4 Seat Latch Lever 15 Carriage Bolt
5 Spring Seat Latch 16 Shoulder Bolt
6 Plate Seat Latch 17 Seat Slider Mounting Plate
7 Screw 4 ft-lb (5 Nm) 18 Spring
8 Screw 4 ft-lb (5 Nm) 19 Seat Slider Lever
10
9 Shoulder Bolt 20 Seat Bottom
10 Spring Lock Washer 21 Seat Back
11 Flat Washer
10.13
BODY / FRAME
Seat Assembly Rear
1 Seat Frame 7 Plate Seat Latch

2 Screw 4 ft-lb (5 Nm) 8 Screw 4 ft-lb (5 Nm)
3 Seat Base Assembly 9 Bolt
4 Seat Latch Lever 10 Seat Bottom
5 Spring Seat Latch 11 Seat Back
6 Plate Seat Latch
10.14
BODY / FRAME
Floor / Rocker Panels XP / High Lifter
1 Upper Floor RH Rocker

7
10
2 T27 Screws 8 Push Rivots
3 LH Rocker 9 Console Cover
4 U-Type Nuts 10 Seat Belt Boot
5 Block Off Flap 11 Shifter Boot
6 Lower Floor
10.15
BODY / FRAME
Floor / Rocker Panels XP 4
1 Main Floor Upper 9 B-Pillar Cover LH

2 Rocker LH 10 Console Front
3 Rivet 11 Shifter Boot
4 U-Type Nuts 12 Seat Belt Boot Front
5 Block Off Flap 13 Console Rear
6 Main Floor Lower 14 Lower Rear Close-off Panel
7 Rocker RH 15 Upper Rear Close-off Panel
8 B-Pillar Cover RH 16 Floor Rear
10.16
BODY / FRAME
Rear Cargo Box / Fenders
10
10.17
BODY / FRAME
Rear Bumper
10.18
BODY / FRAME
BODY COMPONENT REMOVAL Front Bumper XP
1. Remove the ten T-40 Torx screws retaining the front
Seats bumper.
1. To remove any of the seats, lift upward on the latch
lever 1 located behind the seat bottom.
2. Disconnect the front headlight connectors.
2. Lift upward and forward on the seat while lifting up 3. Remove the ten Torx screws retaining the upper,
on the latch lever and remove the seat from the middle and lower portion of the bumper.
vehicle. 4. Pull out on the front bumper to remove the bumper,
headlights and radiator deflector as an assembly.
Engine Service Panel 5. If replacing the front bumper, remove both headlights
1. Remove the seats: and the radiator deflector.
Remove the driver and passenger seats
2. Lift the panel upward and towards the front of the
vehicle to remove the panel 1 .
10
10.19
BODY / FRAME
Rear Bumper Hood and Front Body Work
1. Disconnect the harness connectors at the tail lights. Hood Removal
2. Remove the zip ties retaining the harness to the rear 1. To remove the hood, turn both 1/4 turn latches 1 to
bumper. disengage the rear portion of the hood.
3. Remove the seven (two lower and five upper) T-27
Torx screws retaining rear bumper to the cargo box.
2. Lift rear of hood and slide forward to disengage the

front tabs and remove the hood from the vehicle.
4. Remove rear bumper from vehicle. Dash Removal
3. Remove the hood as previously described.
4. Remove the two T-40 Torx screws retaining the
Upper Dash cover between the front fenders 2 .
5. Disconnect the instrument cluster, AWD switch,

headlight switch, and ignition switch. Note their
location and wire routing. Remove the upper dash.
Lower Dash Removal
6. Back out the blue LED light from the lower dash.
7. Remove the two T-40 Torx screws retaining the dash
and the one T-40 retaining the back of the dash to
the bracket..
10.20
BODY / FRAME
8. Remove the dash assembly from the vehicle. Rear Fender / Fender Flare Removal XP /
NOTE: The lower dash is also held by clips. Pull
High Lifter
the dash straight out to disengage the clips.. 1. Remove the four T27 Torx screws 1 . Remove the
three plastic rivets on the lower side of the rear
fender flare.
Front Fender Flair Removal
9. Remove the six T40 Torx screws and remove fender
flairs 1 from the dash assembly.
NOTE: Two of the screws will be longer than the
others. Note this for reassembly.
2. Remove the fender flare 2 from the vehicle.

3. Remove the four plastic rivets (one of them hidden
on the inside) retaining the rear fender.
4. Remove the one T-40 Torx screw on the top rear of
the fender.
5. Remove it from the vehicle.
Front Body
10. Remove the hood, upper dash and fender flairs as
previously stated.
11. Remove the two T-40 Torx screw that were hidden
beneath the fender flair (one on the outside of the
fender and one on the inside).
12. Remove the front portion of the cab frame assembly.
Refer to appropriate Cab Frame Assembly XP /
High Lifter, page 10.3 procedure for assembly torque
specifications.
10
13. Remove the front fender.
10.21
BODY / FRAME
Rear Fender Flare / Rear Fender Removal 4. Remove the plastic rivets 4 and one T40 Torx
XP 4 fastener 5 retaining the rear fender.
1. Remove the three plastic rivets on the lower fender
flare 1 . Remove the four T40 Torx screws 2 .
5. Remove fender from the vehicle.
2. Remove the fender flare from the vehicle. Cargo Box Assembly Removal
3. Remove air intake cover 3 if removing left side 1. Remove both seats.
fender. 2. Remove the PVT pre-filter (driver side) and air intake
pre-filter (passenger side) assembly.
3. Remove the T-25 Torx screw retaining each shock
reservoir hose cover and remove the cover..
4. Loosen the shock reservoir clamps and maneuver
the reservoir through the hole in the box.
NOTE: Do NOT let the reservoir hang by the
hose. Use a wire or string to restrain the
reservoir.
5. Remove the four bolts retaining each rear cab frame

and remove it from the vehicle. Remove the bolts
retaining the hip bolsters to the cab frame hoop.
6. Remove the eight fasteners retaining the rear cab

frame to the frame and to the front cab frame.
Remove the rear cab frame from the vehicle.
10.22
BODY / FRAME
7. Remove the engine access panel and the panel Rocker Panels, Console and Floor XP / High
locking pin 1 . Lifter
Rocker Panel Removal
1. Remove the push rivets and Torx screws retaining
the rocker panel and remove panel from the vehicle.
Console and Lower Floor Removal
2. Remove both seats and rocker panels (see Chapter
10 Floor / Rocker Panels XP / High Lifter, page
10.15).
3. Remove the T27 screws 1 retaining the console 5
to the floor.
4. Remove shift handle knob and remove the console.
8. Remove the 17 Torx screws in the bed of the cargo

box.
5. Remove the Torx screws retaining the upper floor 8
to the lower floor 9 .
9. Remove the seven T-40 Torx screws on the cab side

of cargo box.
10
6. Remove the Torx screws 7 retaining the rear portion

of the floor and remove the lower floor from the
vehicle.
10. Remove the cargo box half from the vehicle.
10.23
BODY / FRAME
Rocker Panels, Rear Console and Floor XP 5. Remove three Torx T40 fasteners 5 from top of
4 fender flare. Remove two torx T40 fasteners 6 & 7 .
Note length and location of fasteners. Remove fender
Rocker Panel Removal flare.
1. Remove rear fender flare. (See Chapter 10 Rear
Fender Flare / Rear Fender Removal XP 4, page
10.22).
2. Remove rear fender. (See Chapter 10 Rear Fender
Flare / Rear Fender Removal XP 4, page 10.22).
3. Remove the four Torx T40 rear door mounting
fasteners 1 and remove door.
6. Remove three push rivets 8 and five Torx T40

fasteners 9 retaining the rocker panel. Remove
rocker panel from the vehicle.
4. Remove two push rivets 2 . Remove two Torx T40

door striker fasteners 3 and remove striker. Remove
one Torx T27 fastener 4 retaining the b-pillar cover
and remove cover.
Console and Lower Floor Removal

1. Remove seats and rocker panels (see Chapter 10
Floor / Rocker Panels XP 4, page 10.16).
10.24
BODY / FRAME
2. Remove four Torx T40 screws 1 and five push rivets 6. Remove two M10x1.25x20 bolts from the rear seat
2 retaining the front console to the floor. frame 5 and two M10x1.50x55 6 bolts from the rear
seat frame assembly.
3. Remove shift handle knob and remove the front

console. 7. Remove the seat frame.
4. Remove the Torx T40 screws 3 and push rivets 4 8. Disconnect negative and positive battery cables.
retaining the rear console to the rear floor. Remove the battery.
9. Remove two fasteners retaining the fuse panel to the
lower rear close off panel.
10. Remove two fasteners retaining the voltage regulator
to the back of the lower rear close off panel.
11. Remove two Torx T40 screws 7 and four push rivets
8 retaining the lower rear close off panel.
5. Remove the rear console.
10
10.25
BODY / FRAME
12. Remove four Torx T40 screws 9 and four push rivets 15. Remove the Torx screws 15 retaining the main floor
10 retaining the upper rear close off panel. Remove and remove the main floor from the vehicle.
the upper close off panel.
13. Disconnect the shift cable 11 from the front seat base.
Remove two M8x1.25x20 bolts 12 and two
M10x1.25x55 bolts 13 from the front seat base.
Remove front seat base assembly.
14. Remove four Torx T40 screws 14 retaining the rear

floor and remove the rear floor.
10.26
BODY / FRAME
DECAL REPLACEMENT
WARNING
The following procedure involves the use of an open

flame. Perform this procedure in a well ventilated area,
away from gasoline or other flammable materials. Be
sure the area to be flame treated is clean and free of
gasoline or flammable residue.
WARNING
Do not flame treat components that are installed on the

vehicle. Remove the component from the vehicle
before flame treating.
The body cab components are plastic polyethylene

material. Therefore, they must be flame treated prior to
installing a decal to ensure good adhesion. The flame
treating procedure can also be used to reduce or
eliminate the whitish stress marks that are sometimes
left after a fender or cab is bent, flexed, or damaged.
CAUTION
Do not flame treat painted plastic components. Painted

plastic surfaces should only be wiped clean prior to
decal adhesion.
To flame treat the decal area:

1. Pass the flame of a propane torch back and forth
quickly over the area where the decal is to be applied
until the surface appears slightly glossy. This should
occur after just a few seconds of flame treating. Do
not hold the torch too close to the surface (2-3 inches
from the flame tip is recommended). Keep the torch
moving to prevent damage. 10
2. Apply the decal on one edge first. Slowly lay down
remainder of the decal while rubbing lightly over the
decal surface to eliminate any air bubbles during the
application.
10.27
BODY / FRAME
NOTES
10.28
ELECTRICAL
CHAPTER 11
ELECTRICAL
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3
2015 RZR TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3
ELECTRICAL SERVICE NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3
UNDER-DASH COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4
OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4
RIDER INFORMATION DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.6
INFORMATION DISPLAY AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.7
DIAGNOSTIC MODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.10
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER PINOUTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.11
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.12
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.12
SWITCHES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.13
BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.13
HEADLAMP SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.13
IGNITION (KEY) SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.14
AWD / 2WD SWITCH (MODELS WITHOUT TURF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.14
TRANSMISSION (GEAR POSITION) SWITCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.15
SEAT BELT SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.16
ALL WHEEL DRIVE COIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.17
OPERATION OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.17
DIAGNOSING SYSTEM FAILURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.17
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.18
SPEED SENSOR LOCATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.18
SPEED SENSOR TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.18
IGNITION COIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.19
OPERATION OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.19
IGNITION COIL / HT LEAD REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.19
IGNITION COIL TESTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.20
LIGHTING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.21
HEADLIGHT ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.21
HEADLAMP REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.22
HEADLAMP INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.23 11
TAILLIGHT REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.23
DASH LIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.24
COOLING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.25
FAN CONTROL CIRCUIT OPERATION / TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.25
FAN CONTROL CIRCUIT BYPASS TEST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.25
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR (ECT) OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.25
ECT SENSOR TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.26
ECT SENSOR REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.26
11.1
ELECTRICAL
FUSE / RELAY BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.27
OVERVIEW / OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.27
FUSE BOX DETAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.28
RELAY OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.29
CHARGING SYSTEM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.31
CURRENT DRAW - KEY OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.31
CHARGING SYSTEM BREAK EVEN TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.31
CHARGING SYSTEM STATOR (ALTERNATOR) TESTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.32
STATOR (ALTERNATOR) REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.33
REGULATOR / RECTIFIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.33
CHARGING SYSTEM TESTING FLOW CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.34
BATTERY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.35
BATTERY SPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.35
GENERAL BATTERY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.35
BATTERY REMOVAL / INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.36
BATTERY OFF SEASON STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.36
BATTERY TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.36
OCV - OPEN CIRCUIT VOLTAGE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.36
LOAD TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.37
BATTERY CONDUCTANCE ANALYZER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.37
CHARGING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.37
STARTING SYSTEM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.38
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.38
VOLTAGE DROP TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.38
STARTER MOTOR REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.39
STARTER MOTOR INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.39
STARTER SOLENOID BENCH TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.40
STARTER SOLENOID OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.40
CONDITION: STARTER FAILS TO TURN OVER THE ENGINE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.40
ELECTRONIC POWER STEERING (EPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.41
EPS OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.41
PROPER EPS SYSTEM DIAGNOSING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.41
EPS SYSTEM BREAKOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.42
EPS TROUBLESHOOTING (POWER STEERING NON-FUNCTIONAL WITH MIL ON) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.43
EPS TROUBLESHOOTING (POWER STEERING NON-FUNCTIONAL WITH MIL OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.44
EPS TROUBLESHOOTING (USING DIGITAL WRENCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.45
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM BREAKOUT DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.46
AWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.46
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.47
COOLING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.48
UNSWITCHED CHASSIS POWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.49
KEY-ON BATTERY POWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.50
LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.51
CHARGING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.52
11.2
ELECTRICAL
GENERAL INFORMATION Electrical Service Notes
Keep the following notes in mind when diagnosing an
Special Tools electrical problem:
PART NUMBER TOOL DESCRIPTION Refer to wiring diagram for stator and electrical
component resistance specifications.
PV-43568 Fluke 77 Digital Multimeter
When measuring resistance of a component that
PV-43526 Connector Test Kit has a resistance value under 10 Ohms, remember
to subtract meter lead resistance from the reading.
2870630 Timing Light Connect the leads together and record the
PU-50338 Battery Hydrometer resistance. The resistance of the component is
equal to tested value minus the lead resistance.
2460761 Hall Effect Sensor Probe Harness
Become familiar with the operation of your meter.
2871745 Static Timing Light Harness Be sure leads are in the proper jack for the test
being performed (i. e. 10A jack for current
Battery Conductance Analyzer readings). Refer to the Owners Manual included
PU-50296 (MDX-610P) with your meter for more information.
PU-49466 Relay Bypass Voltage, amperage, and resistance values
included in this manual are obtained with a
Digital Wrench (see Chapter 4 Fluke 77 Digital Multimeter (PV-43568). This
- DIGITAL WRENCH OPERATION, meter is used when diagnosing electrical
page 4.46) problems. Readings obtained with other meters
may differ.
Pay attention to the prefix on the multimeter
reading (K, M, etc.) and the position of the decimal
point.
2015 RZR Torque Specifications
For resistance readings, isolate the component to
be tested. Disconnect it from the wiring harness or
ITEM TORQUE
power supply.
Coolant Temperature 17 ft-lb (23 Nm)
Sensor Under-Dash Components
The following switches and components can be
Starter Mounting 7 ft-lb (10 Nm) accessed underneath the instrument / dash panel:
Fasteners
Speedometer
AWD Switch
Oxygen Sensor 13 ft-lb (18 Nm)
Headlamp Switch
12 Vdc Accessory Power Point
Ignition Switch
LED Ambiance Light
11
11.3
ELECTRICAL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Overview
The instrument cluster displays critical vehicle information to the user. Reference the following page for display
functions and descriptions.
NOTE: Some features are not applicable to all models.
The use of a high pressure washer may damage the instrument cluster. Wash the vehicle by hand or with a
garden hose using mild soap. Certain products, including insect repellents and chemicals, will damage the
instrument cluster lens. Do not use alcohol to clean the instrument cluster. Do not allow insect sprays to
contact the lens. Immediately clean off any gasoline that splashes on the instrument cluster.
The rider information display is located in the instrument cluster. All segments will light up for 1 second at start-up.
NOTE: If the instrument cluster fails to illuminate, a battery over-voltage may have occurred and the
instrument cluster may have shut off to protect the electronic speedometer.
11.4
ELECTRICAL
1 Vehicle Speed Display - Analog display of vehicle speed in MPH or km/h.

Information Display Area - Odometer / Trip Meter / Tachometer / Engine Temperature / Engine Hours
2 / Service Info / Clock - LCD display of the service hour interval, total vehicle miles or km., total engine
hours, a trip meter, engine RPM and engine temperature.
3
MPH / KM/H Display - MPH is displayed when the instrument cluster is in the Standard mode. KM/H is
displayed when the instrument cluster is in the Metric mode.
4 High Beam Indicator - LED icon illuminates whenever the Headlamp switch is in the high beam position.
5
Fuel Level Indicator - LCD bar graph indicating current fuel level. All segments will flash when the fuel
level is very low.
6 Clock - Displays current time in either 12-hour or 24-hour formats.
Engine Temperature Indicator - LED icon illuminates when the ECM determines the engine is
7 overheating. The indicators will initially flash to indicate the engine is overheating. The indicators will stay lit
and not flash if a severe overheating condition exists.
Service Interval Indicator - Preset at the factory and adjustable by the user, a flashing wrench symbol
8 alerts the operator that the preset service interval has been reached and maintenance should be
performed. The wrench icon will flash for 10 seconds upon start-up once it reaches 0.
9
Check Engine MIL - Illuminated when the ECM has detected a Diagnostic Trouble Code in the engine
management system.
10 AWD Indicator - Illuminated when the AWD / 2WD switch is in the AWD position.
11
Differential Unlocked Indicator - If equipped with Turf Mode, will illuminate when the AWD switch is in
Turf mode..
12 Neutral Gear Indicator - LED icon illuminates when gear selector is in the neutral (N) position.
Gear Position Indicator - Displays gear selector position.
P = Park
R = Reverse
N = Neutral
13
D = Drive
3 = 3rd Gear
2 = 2nd Gear
1 = 1st Gear
= Gear Signal Error (shifter stuck between gears)
14
Power Steering System MIL - LED icon illuminates when a fault has occurred in the EPS system. This
indicator also turns on momentarily when the key is turned on.
15
Turn Signal / Hazard Lamp Indicator - If equipped with turn signals, the LED icon illuminates whenever
the left, right or hazard blinker is activated.
Helmet / Seat Belt Indicator - LED icon illuminates for several seconds when the key is turned to the ON
16 position as a reminder for the riders to properly use safety equipment. The lamp stays illuminated until the 11
drivers seat belt is properly latched.
17 Hours Indicator - Illuminates when Hours are being displayed on the Information Display
18 Mode Button - Used to move through the menu features.
11.5
ELECTRICAL
Rider Information Display 13. Gear Position Indicator - Displays gear selector
The rider information display is located in the instrument position.
cluster. All segments will light up for 1 second at start-up. H = High
NOTE: If the instrument cluster fails to illuminate, a L = Low
battery over-voltage may have occurred and the
N = Neutral
instrument cluster may have shut off to protect the
electronic speedometer. R = Reverse
1. Vehicle Speed Display - Analog display of vehicle P = Park

speed in MPH or km/h. = Gear Signal Error (shifter stuck between gears)
2. Information Display Area - Odometer / Trip Meter 14. Power Steering System MIL - LED icon illuminates
/ Tachometer / Engine Temperature / Engine when a fault has occurred with the power steering
Hours / Service Info / Clock - LCD display of the system. This indicator illuminates when the key is
service hour interval, total vehicle miles or km., total turned to the ON position and goes off when the
engine hours, a trip meter, engine RPM and engine engine is started (EPS Option Only).
temperature.
15. Turn Signal / Hazard Lamp Indicator - LED icon
3. MPH / KM/H Display - MPH is displayed when the illuminates whenever the LH, RH or hazard lamps
instrument cluster is in the Standard mode. KM/H is are activated (INTL Models Only).
displayed when the instrument cluster is in the Metric
mode. 16. Helmet / Seat Belt Indicator - LED icon illuminates
for several seconds when the key is turned to the ON
4. High Beam Indicator LED icon illuminates position. The lamp is a reminder to the operator to
whenever the Headlamp switch is in the high beam ensure all riders are wearing helmets and seat belts
position. before operating the vehicle.
5. Fuel Level Indicator - LCD bar graph indicating 17. Hours Indicator - Illuminates when Hours are being
current fuel level. All segments will flash when the displayed on the Information Display
last segment is cleared indicating a low fuel warning.
18. Mode Button - Used to move through the menu
6. Clock - Displays current time in either 12-hour or 24- features.
hour formats.
7. Engine Temperature Indicator - LED icon
illuminates when the ECM determines the engine is
overheating. The indicators will initially flash to
indicate the engine is overheating. The indicators will
stay lit and not flash if a severe overheating condition
exists.
8. Service Interval Indicator - Preset at the factory
and adjustable by the user, a flashing wrench symbol
alerts the operator that the preset service interval
has been reached and maintenance should be
performed. The wrench icon will flash for 10 seconds
upon start-up once it reaches 0.
9. Check Engine MIL - Illuminated when the ECM has
detected a Diagnostic Trouble Code in the engine
management system.
10. AWD Indicator - Illuminated when the AWD / 2WD
switch is in the AWD position.
11. TURF Indicator - Illuminated when the AWD / TURF
switch is in the TURF position (INTL Model Only).
12. Neutral Gear Indicator - LED icon illuminates when
gear selector is in the neutral (N) position.
11.6
ELECTRICAL
Information Display Area 2. To reset to 0, push and hold the MODE button until
The LCD portion of the instrument cluster is the the distance display changes to 0.
information display area. Information displayed in this Tachometer (RPM)
area includes: odometer, trip meter, engine RPM, engine
hours, service interval, clock, engine Diagnostic Trouble
Codes (DTCs) and power steering DTCs.
Odometer
Engine RPM can be displayed digitally.

Engine Temperature
The odometer records and displays the total distance

traveled by the vehicle. The odometer can not be reset.
Trip Meter
Engine temperature can be displayed in F or C.

Refer to Units of Measurement to change the
format.
Engine Hours
The trip meter records the miles traveled by the vehicle
on each trip. To reset the trip meter:
1. Toggle the MODE button to TRIP 1.
11
Engine hours are logged anytime the engine is

running. Total hours can not be reset.
11.7
ELECTRICAL
Programmed Service Interval 8. Press and hold the MODE button until the hour
segment flashes. Release the button.
9. With the segment flashing, tap the MODE button to
advance to the desired setting.
10. Press and hold the MODE button until the next
segment flashes. Release the button.
11. Repeat steps 3-4 twice to set the 10 minute and 1
minute segments. After completing the 1-minute
segment, step 4 will save the new settings and exit
the clock mode.
Units of Measurement
STANDARD METRIC
DISPLAY DISPLAY
The initial factory service interval setting is 50 hours. Kilometers (KM/
Distance Miles (MPH)
Each time the engine is started, the engine hours are H)
subtracted from the service interval hours. When the
service interval reaches 0, the LCD wrench icon will Time 12-Hour Clock 24-Hour Clock
flash for approximately 10 seconds each time the Tempera-
engine is started. Fahrenheit Celsius
ture
To change the hour setting or reset the function,
follow these steps: To change between Standard and Metric units of
measurement, follow these steps:
3. Toggle the MODE button until the wrench icon is
displayed in the information area. 12. Turn the key to the OFF position.
4. Press and hold the MODE button until the 13. Press and hold the MODE button while turning the
information display area begins to flash. key to the ON position.
5. Toggle the MODE button to increase the service
interval hours in 5 hour increments to a maximum of
100 hours.
6. To turn off the service interval function, toggle the
MODE button until OFF is displayed.
Clock
The clock displays the time in a 12-hour or 24-hour

format. Refer to Units of Measurement to change
the format (Standard 12-hour / Metric-24 hour). To
set the clock, follow these steps:
7. Toggle the MODE button until the odometer is
displayed.
11.8
ELECTRICAL
14. When the display flashes the distance setting, tap 16. Repeat the procedure to change remaining display
the MODE button to advance to the desired setting. settings.
Under / Over Voltage
This warning usually indicates that the vehicle is
operating at an RPM too low to keep the battery
charged. It may also occur when the engine is at idle
and a high electrical load is applied (lights, cooling
fan or other accessories).
If battery voltage drops below 11 volts, a warning
screen will display Lo and provide the present
battery voltage. If voltage drops below 8.5 volts, LCD
backlighting and icons will turn off.
If battery voltage rises above 15 volts, a warning

screen will display OV and provide the present
battery voltage. If voltage rises above 16.5 volts,
15. Press and hold the MODE button to save the setting LCD backlighting and icons will turn off.
and advance to the next display option.
Park Brake Indicator (INTL Model Only) 11

This warning is used to notify the operator that the
park brake lever is engaged.
When the park brake is fully engaged, BRAKE
appears in the rider information display. Engine
speed is limited to 1500 RPM in all gears, except
11.9
ELECTRICAL
neutral. If throttle is applied, this limiting feature Diagnostic Mode
prevents operation, which protects the park brake The diagnostic mode is accessible only when the check
pads from excessive wear. engine MIL has been activated.
Use the following procedure to display diagnostic trouble
codes that were activated during current ignition cycle
causing the MIL to illuminate. Diagnostic trouble codes
will remain stored in the gauge (even if MIL turns off) until
the key is turned off.
1. If the trouble code (s) are not displayed, use the
MODE button to toggle until CK ENG displays on
the information display area.
2. Press and hold the MODE button to enter the

diagnostics code menu.
11.10
ELECTRICAL
3. A set of three numbers will appear in the information Instrument Cluster Pinouts
area.
The first number (located far left) can range from 0
to 9. This number represents the total number of
trouble codes present (example: 2 means there
are 3 codes present).
The second number (located top right) can be 2 to
6 digits in length. This number equates to the
suspected area of fault (SPN).
The third number (located bottom right) can be 1
to 2 digits in length. This number equates to the
fault mode (FMI).
FUNCTION PIN
CAN High 1
CAN Low 2
Switched Power (Vdc) 3
Constant Power (Vdc) 4
Ground 5
High Beam Input 8
Fuel Level Sensor 11
Ambient Air Temperature 15
International Models Only
Turn Signal Input, LH 6
4. Use the trouble code reference table in the EFI
Chapter for a description of each code (see Chapter Turn Signal Input, RH 7
4 Trouble Code Display (ETC), page 4.40).
5. If more than one code exists, press the MODE
button to advance to the next trouble code.
6. To exit the diagnostic mode, press and hold the
MODE button or turn the ignition key OFF once the
codes are recorded.
NOTE: If there is a diagnostic problem with the
power steering system, the power steering MIL
will illuminate and blink in place of the check
engine MIL.
11
11.11
ELECTRICAL
Instrument Cluster Removal Instrument Cluster Installation
1. Spray a soap and water mixture onto the outer
NOTE: Do not allow alcohol or petroleum products surface area of the instrument cluster. This will help
to come in contact with the instrument cluster lens. the instrument cluster slide into the rubber mount
more easily.
1. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the
back side of the instrument cluster.
2. Push the instrument cluster 3 out from the back side
of the dash while securely holding the dash 1 and
rubber mount 2 .
2. Be sure the rubber mount inside the dash is fully

installed and that the indexing key on the rubber
mount is lined up with the keyway in the dash.
3. Hold the dash securely and insert the instrument
cluster into the dash. Twist the instrument cluster
gently in a clockwise motion to properly seat the
instrument cluster into the rubber mount. Apply
NOTE: Do not remove the rubber mount from pressure on the bezel while pressing down on the
the dash panel. Only remove the rubber mount if instrument cluster.
necessary. The bezel 4 is a snap-on assembly
and is a serviceable part.
11.12
ELECTRICAL
SWITCHES
Brake Light Switch Headlamp Switch
1. The brake light switch is located on the front brake
1 1. Disconnect the headlamp switch harness by
line banjo bolt of the master cylinder. The brake depressing the connector locks and pulling on the
switch can be accessed through the left front wheel connector. Do not pull on the wiring.
well opening.
2. Test between the 3 sets of outputs (OFF / LOW /
HIGH). If any of the tests fail, replace headlamp
switch assembly.
Move the switch to HIGH. There should be
continuity between switch pins 2 and 3; 5 and 6.
Move the switch to LOW. There should be
Move the switch to OFF. There should be
2. Disconnect wire harness from switch and connect an

ohmmeter across switch contacts. The reading
should be infinite (OL).
3. Apply the brake and check for continuity. If there is
no continuity or if resistance is greater than 0.5
ohms, clean the switch terminals. Re-test and
replace switch if necessary.
4. For switch replacement, refer to Chapter 9 Brakes.
NOTE: Pins 7 and 8 provide power and ground

to light the switch lamp.
11
11.13
ELECTRICAL
Ignition (Key) Switch AWD / 2WD Switch (models without Turf)
1. Disconnect the key switch harness by depressing 1. Disconnect the AWD / 2WD switch harness by
the connector lock and pulling on the connector. Do depressing the connector locks and pulling on the
not pull on the wiring. connector. Do not pull on the wiring.
2. Test between the 3 sets of outputs (OFF / ON / 2. Test between the 2 sets of outputs (AWD / 2WD). If
START). If any of the tests fail, replace ignition any of the tests fail, replace the switch assembly.
switch assembly.
Move the switch to AWD (ON). There should be
Turn the ignition key to ON. There should be continuity between switch pins 2 and 3.
continuity between switch pins C and D.
Move the switch to 2WD (NONE / OFF). There
Turn the ignition key to START. There should be should be no continuity between any pins.
continuity between switch pins A and B; C and D.
11.14
ELECTRICAL
Transmission (Gear Position) Switch 3. Test the transmission switch continuity readings for
each gear position and compare to the specification
1. The transmission (gear position) switch is located
1
table below.
on the RH side of the transmission and can be
accessed through the RH wheel well area.
2. Disconnect the transmission switch harness by lifting

the connector lock and pulling on the connector. Do
not pull on the wiring.
RESISTANCE VALUE
GEAR
WHEN MEASURED AT
POSITION
SWITCH TERMINALS A AND B
HIGH 24
LOW 75
NEU 160
REV 300
PARK 620
11
11.15
ELECTRICAL
Seat Belt Switch
Location
Found on the drivers seat belt latch
Functionality
If the circuit is open (buckle undone) vehicle speed will
be limited to 15mph. If the circuit is closed (buckle
inserted), the vehicle will function normally.
Testing:
1. Disconnect the harness 1 running to the seat belt.
2. Using a multi-meter, measure between both pins on

switch.
SEAT BELT SEAT BELT
DISENGAGED ENGAGED
Measure
between both (OL) <1
pins on switch
11.16
ELECTRICAL
ALL WHEEL DRIVE COIL
Operation Overview Diagnosing System Failures
When the key switch is ON, 12 VDC power is Verify the AWD switch is functional and that a
present at the hub coil. minimum of 11 volts is present at the hub coil.
When the AWD switch is ON, and if the criteria is Verify the AWD hub coil is functional. Test the
met, the Engine Controller provides a ground path AWD hub coil using an ohm meter. See
(brown/white wire). When this occurs the AWD specifications below:
icon should display in the instrument cluster.
The AWD system must be grounded to operate.
AWD Hub Coil Resistance:

24 5%
Verify the wiring harness, wiring, connectors,

connector pins and grounds are undamaged,
clean and connect properly.
Verify continuity of wire connections with a known
good volt/ohm meter.
NOTE: Verify all wires and wiring connections
have been tested properly with a known good
volt/ohm meter before suspecting a
component failure. 80% of all electrical issues
are caused by bad/failed connections and
grounds.
11
11.17
ELECTRICAL
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
Speed Sensor Location Speed Sensor Testing
The speed sensor 1 is located on the RH side of the 1. Disconnect the 3 wire harness from the speed
transmission, accessed through the rear RH wheel well. sensor and remove the sensor from the
transmission.
2. Connect the wires from the Static Timing Light
Harness (2871745) to the sensor 3 pin connector
using the Hall Sensor Probe Harness ( 2460761).
3. Pass a screwdriver back and forth in front of the
sensor tip.
4. Be sure connections are good and 9V battery is in
good condition. If the light flashes, the sensor is
good.
11.18
ELECTRICAL
IGNITION COIL
Operation Overview Ignition Coil / HT Lead Replacement
The ignition coil 1 is used to provide high voltage to fire
NOTE: The engine will misfire if the spark plug
the spark plugs. When the ignition key is on, DC voltage
wires are installed incorrectly. The spark plug wires
is present in the primary side of the ignition coil windings.
are marked with PTO and MAG from the factory and
During engine rotation, an AC pulse is created within the
should be installed to the corresponding cylinder
crankshaft position sensor for each passing tooth on the
and ignition coil post.
flywheels encoder ring. The encoder ring missing tooth
creates an interrupt input signal, corresponding to
1. Remove the seats and engine service panel to
specific crankshaft position. This signal serves as a access the ignition coil.
reference for the control of ignition timing. The ECU then
calculates the time interval between the consecutive 2. Disconnect the ignition coil harness and remove the
pulses, and determines when to trigger the voltage spike high tension leads from the coil.
that induces the voltage from the primary to the
3. Remove the fastener retaining the ignition coil and
secondary coil windings to fire the spark plugs.
remove it from the vehicle. If replacing the high
tension lead(s), remove the other end of the lead(s)
from the spark plug.
4. Install the new ignition coil and/or high tension lead
(s).
Ignition Coil Retaining Bolt: 75 in-lbs (8.5 Nm)
11
11.19
ELECTRICAL
Ignition Coil Tests
The ignition coil can be tested by using an ohm meter.
Use the following illustration and specification table to
test the ignition coil resistance.
RESIST-
TEST PIN CONNECTION
ANCE
Primary Between 1 & 2

0.4
Between 2 & 3
Secondary Between High Tension
(PTO) Lead Caps 7.0 k 5%
Secondary Between High Tension

(MAG) Lead Caps 7.4 k 5%
Primary Test
Secondary Test
11.20
ELECTRICAL
LIGHTING SYSTEM
Headlight Adjustment 6. Adjust the beam to desired position. Repeat the
The headlight beams are adjustable. procedure to adjust the other headlight.
1. Place the vehicle on a level surface with the

headlight approximately 25 ft. (7.6 m) from a wall.
WARNING
Due to the nature of light utility vehicles and where they

are operated, headlight lenses become dirty. Frequent
washing is necessary to maintain lighting quality. Riding
with poor lighting can result in severe injury or death.
2. Measure the distance from the floor to the center of

the headlight and make a mark on the wall at the
same height.
3. With the machine in Park, start the engine and turn
the headlight switch to the LOW position.
4. The most intense part of the LOW beam headlight
beam should be aimed 2 in. (5 cm) below the mark
placed on the wall in Step 2.
NOTE: Rider weight must be included in the seat
while performing this procedure.
5. Adjust the beam to the desired position by loosening

or tightening the three T-25 adjustment screws and
moving the lamp to the appropriate height.
11
11.21
ELECTRICAL
Headlamp Replacement 3. Carefully lift and remove headlamp assembly from
1. Disconnect wire harness from headlamp assembly. the bumper.
Be sure to pull on the connector, not on the wiring.
2. Remove the three T-25 headlamp mounting screws

1 and three adjustment preload springs 2 .
NOTE: The front bumper can be removed and

placed face down on a suitable workbench to
ease headlamp replacement (see Chapter 10
Front Bumper XP, page 10.19).
11.22
ELECTRICAL
Headlamp Installation Taillight Replacement
1. Install the headlamp adjustment springs onto the Before replacing the taillight(s), use a digital multi-meter
front bumper mounting bosses. to test the harness to ensure the lamp is receiving 12
volts and that a ground path is present.
2. Insert the three T-25 headlamp mounting screws into
the headlamp assembly mounting holes. 1. Disconnect the wire harness 1 .
3. Maneuver the headlamp assembly into position. Be
sure all three headlamp springs 2 and mounting
screws 1 are properly aligned with mounting bosses
3 on the front bumper.
2. While holding the taillight assembly, remove the

three nuts 2 retaining the taillight assembly and
remove it from the rear fascia.
4. Fully tighten all three headlamp screws until the

headlamp assembly is fully seated. Back headlamp
mounting screws off 1/8 to 1/4 (2-3 turns).
5. Install the front bumper as shown in Chapter 5 if
previously removed.
6. Connect headlamp electrical connector to the
headlamp assembly.
7. Perform the Headlight Adjustment procedure as
shown in this chapter.
11
11.23
ELECTRICAL
Dash Light
The LED light will remain ON for approximately 30
seconds after key has been switched to the OFF
position.
11.24
ELECTRICAL
COOLING SYSTEM
Fan Control Circuit Operation / Testing Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECT)
Power is supplied to the fan via the Orange/Black wire Overview
when the relay is ON. The ground path for the fan motor Mounted in the thermostat housing, the engine
is through the Brown harness wire. Refer to Relay temperature sensor 1 measures coolant temperature.
Operation, page 11.29 later in this chapter for more The engine temperature sensor is a Negative
information on fan functions. Temperature Coefficient (NTC) type sensor, as the
temperature increases the resistance decreases.
CAUTION
Keep hands away from fan blades during operation.

Serious personal injury could result.
NOTE: The fan may not function or operation may

be delayed if coolant level is low or if air is trapped in
the cooling system. Be sure cooling system is full
and purged of air.
Fan Control Circuit Bypass Test

1. Disconnect harness from coolant temperature
sensor on the engine cylinder head (see Chapter 4).
2. With the transmission in Park, start the engine. After Coolant passes through the thermostat housing and by
a few seconds, the fan should start running and the the sensor probe, varying a resistance reading which is
Check Engine indicator should display on the relayed to the ECU. This signal is processed by the ECU
instrument cluster. This indicates all other and compared to its programming for determining the
components are working properly. fuel and ignition requirements during operation. The ECU
3. If the fan does not run or runs slowly, check the fan also uses this signal to determine when to activate the
motor wiring, ground, motor condition, circuit breaker cooling fan during operation.
and mechanical relay for proper operation. Repair or
replace as necessary. If the fan runs with the sensor
harness disconnected, but will not turn on when the
engine is hot, check the coolant temperature sensor
and connector terminals.
11
11.25
ELECTRICAL
ECT Sensor Test ECT Sensor Replacement
To quickly rule out other components and wiring related 1. Remove the throttle body. (see Chapter 4 Throttle
to the ECT, disconnect the harness from the ECT sensor Body Removal, page 4.34).
and start the engine. After a few seconds, the fan should 2. Be sure the engine has cooled enough to work on.
turn on and the Check Engine indicator should display
on the instrument cluster. This indicates all other 3. Disconnect the vehicle harness from ECT sensor.
components are working properly.
4. Drain the coolant so the level is below the sensor
(see Chapter 2 Coolant Drain / Fill, page 2.29).
5. Using a wrench, remove and replace the sensor,
applying a light coating of thread sealant to aid
installation.
Refer to Chapter 3 and 10 for additional ECT sensor

information. Polaris dealers can test the sensor by using
Digital Wrench Diagnostic Software (dealer only).
TEMPERATURE F (C) RESISTANCE

68 F (20 C) 2.5 k 6% 6. Torque the new ECT sensor to specification and
connect the vehicle harness to the sensor.
86 F (30 C) 1.7 k 6%
104 F (40 C) 1.2 k 6%
122 F (50 C) 834 6%
140 F (60 C) 596 6% ECT Sensor:
17 ft-lb (23 Nm)
158 F (70 C) 435 6%
7. Reinstall the throttle body.
176 F (80 C) 323 6%
8. Add the required amount of coolant and bleed the
194 F (90 C) 243 6% system (see Chapter 3 Cooling System Bleeding
Procedure, page 3.18).
212 F (100 C) 186 6%
11.26
ELECTRICAL
FUSE / RELAY BOX
Overview / Operation
Located in the fuse box under the dash, the fuses provide overload protection for wiring and components such as the
instrument cluster, ECU, EFI system, main harness, lights, accessories and power steering. The relays assist with
component operation like the cooling fan, fuel pump, EFI system, drive system and electronic power steering. A
separate 20-amp circuit breaker protects the fan motor circuit. Two separate relays located under the dash operate the
headlights and the flash to pass function on INTL models.
11
11.27
ELECTRICAL
Fuse Box Detail
11.28
ELECTRICAL
Relay Operation COLOR FUNCTION
Located in the fuse box under the dash, the relays assist 20-Amp circuit breaker protected
with component operation like the cooling fan, fuel pump Red 12 Vdc constant battery power.
and EFI system, drive system and EPS.
ECU ground input to enable
NOTE: The Rear Diff Solenoid Relay (INTL) is Orange / White
relay.
mounted separately, attached to the lower airbox
bracket, accessed through the right rear wheel well. 12 Vdc switched power from EFI
Red / Dark Blue relay.
The Headlight Relay (INTL) and Flash to Pass Relay
(INTL) are also mounted separately, located under Provides 12 Vdc power for fan
the dash. Orange / Black
operation.
CHASSIS RELAY provides power to the following

FUEL PUMP RELAY provides power to the following
systems:
system:
Lights (Headlights / Taillights)
Fuel Pump
Drive (AWD)
Accessory (12V Receptacles / Accessory Options) COLOR FUNCTION
10-Amp fuse protected 12 Vdc
COLOR FUNCTION Red / Green battery voltage.
30-Amp fuse protected 12 Vdc Dark Green / ECU ground input to enable
Red constant battery voltage. Yellow relay.
Brown Relay coil ground. 12 Vdc switched power from EFI
Red / Dark Blue relay.
12 Vdc power input from key
Orange
switch to enable relay. Provides 12 Vdc power for fuel
Red / Blue pump operation.
Provides 12 Vdc power for lights,
White drive and accessory circuits.
EPS RELAY (OPT) provides power to the following
system:
EFI RELAY provides power to the following systems:
Electronic Power Steering Unit
Fuel Injectors
Ignition Coil COLOR FUNCTION
Fan Relay
Red constant battery voltage.
Fuel Pump Relay
Brown Relay coil ground.
COLOR FUNCTION
12 Vdc power input from key
20-Amp fuse protected 12 Vdc Orange
Red / White switch to enable relay.
constant battery voltage.
Provides 12 Vdc power for EPS
Dark Green / ECU ground input to enable Orange
operation.
Yellow relay.
11
20-Amp fuse protected 12 Vdc REAR DIFF SOLENOID RELAY (INTL) provides power
Red / White constant battery voltage. to the following system:
Provides 12 Vdc power for EFI Rear Differential Solenoid
Red / Dark Blue system circuits.
FAN RELAY provides power to the following system:

Fan Motor
11.29
ELECTRICAL
COLOR FUNCTION
Red / Dark Green battery voltage.
Dark Green / ECU input to enable relay.
White
Relay switched power to operate
Red
the Rear Diff Solenoid.
Ground to energize the Rear Diff
Blue
Solenoid.
HEADLIGHT RELAY (INTL) provides power to the

following system:
Headlights
COLOR FUNCTION
Red / Yellow battery voltage.
White / Red Key switch input to enable relay.
Yellow / Dark Relay switched power to operate

Green the Headlights.
FLASH TO PASS RELAY (INTL) provides power to the

following system:
Momentary High Beam Headlight Operation
COLOR FUNCTION
12 Vdc switched power from
headlight relay used to operate
Dark Green low beam headlights during
normally closed relay
operation.

High beam input to open relay
and disable low beam headlights
Yellow in order to operate high beam
headlights momentarily.
Normally closed relay output to
Dark Green operate low-beam headlights.
11.30
ELECTRICAL
CHARGING SYSTEM
Current Draw - Key Off Charging System Break Even Test
CAUTION CAUTION
Do not connect or disconnect the battery cable or Do not allow the battery cables to become
ammeter with the engine running. Damage will occur to disconnected with the engine running. Follow the steps
electrical components. below as outlined to reduce the chance of damage to
electrical components.
Connect an ammeter in series with the negative battery
cable. Check for current draw with the key off. If the draw The break even point of the charging system is the
is excessive, loads should be disconnected from the point at which the alternator overcomes all system loads
system one by one until the draw is eliminated. Check (lights, etc.) and begins to charge the battery. Depending
component wiring as well as the component for partial on battery condition and system load, the break even
shorts to ground to eliminate the draw. point may vary slightly. The battery should be fully
charged before performing this test.
WARNING
Never start the engine with an ammeter connected in

series. Damage to the meter or meter fuse will result.
Do not run test for extended period of time.
Do not run test with high amperage accessories.
1. Using an inductive amperage metering device, (set

to DC amps) connect to the negative battery cable.
2. With engine off, key switch and lights in the on
position, the ammeter should read negative amps
(battery discharge).
3. Shift transmission into park and start the engine.
With the engine running at idle, observe meter
Current Draw - Key Off: readings.
Maximum of .01 DCA (10 mA)
4. Increase engine RPM while observing ammeter and
tachometer. Note the RPM at which the battery starts
to charge (ammeter indication is positive).
5. With lights and other electrical loads off, the break
even point should occur at approximately 1500
RPM or lower.
11
11.31
ELECTRICAL
Charging System Stator (Alternator) Tests 3. Each test should measure: Open Line (OL)
Three tests can be performed using a multi-meter to
CONNECT
determine the condition of the stator (alternator). OHMS
TEST METER
READING
LEADS TO:
Battery Charge Y1, Y2, or Y3 Open Line
Coil to Ground (Infinity)
NOTE: Any measurement other than Infinity

(open) will indicate a failed or shorted stator leg.
TEST 3: Measure AC Voltage Output of Each

Stator Leg at Charging RPM
4. Set the selector dial to measure AC Voltage.
5. Start the engine and let it idle.
6. While holding the engine at a specified RPM,
separately measure the voltage across each leg of
TEST 1: Resistance Value of Each Stator Leg the stator by connecting the meter leads to the wires
leading from the alternator (Y1 to Y2, Y1 to Y3, Y2 to
1. Measure the resistance value of each of the three Y3).
stator legs: Y1 to Y2, Y1 to Y3, and Y2 to Y3. Each
test should measure: 0.07 - 0.13 7. Refer to the following table for approximate AC
Voltage readings according to RPM. Test each leg at
CONNECT the specified RPM in the table.
OHMS
TEST METER
READING
LEADS TO:
8. Example: The alternator current output reading
Battery Charge should be approximately 21 VAC at 1300 RPM
Y1 to Y2 0.07 - 0.13
Coil between each leg.
Battery Charge NOTE: If one or more of the stator leg output AC
Y1 to Y3 0.07 - 0.13
Coil voltage varies significantly from the specified
Battery Charge value, the stator may need to be replaced.
Y2 to Y3 0.07 - 0.13
Coil
AC VOLTAGE (VAC)
NOTE: If there are any significant variations in RPM READING
READING
ohm readings between the three legs it is an
indication that one of the stator legs may be 1300 21 VAC 25%
weak or failed. 3000 47 VAC 25%
5000 79 VAC 25%
TEST 2: Resistance Value of Each Stator Leg to
Ground
2. Measure the resistance value of each of the stator
legs to ground: Y1 to Ground, Y2 to Ground, Y3 to
Ground.
11.32
ELECTRICAL
Stator (Alternator) Replacement NOTE: If the regulator / rectifier case temperature
exceeds 230 F or 110 C, the unit will turn itself off
Refer to Chapter 3 Stator Cover Removal / Inspection, to cool down. The unit will turn on again after it has
page 3.44 procedure to service the stator.
cooled down to at least 212 F or 100 C. If it turns
NOTE: The stator cover can be removed with the off, verify the cooling fins are clean, free from debris
engine installed in the chassis. and that adequate airflow is present.
Be sure to thoroughly clean the area around the
stator cover prior to removal.
Regulator / Rectifier
The regulator / rectifier 1 is located in the left rear wheel
well area in front of the left rear shock. It is mounted
under the LH panel divider.
11
11.33
ELECTRICAL
Charging System Testing Flow Chart
Whenever charging system problems are suspected, proceed with the following system check after verifying that all
wires are in good condition, connected and not exposed or pinched.
11.34
ELECTRICAL
BATTERY
Battery Specifications General Battery Information
Type Polaris / Johnson Controls 575

Sealed - Maintenance Free
WARNING
Voltage 12 Vdc
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:
Nominal Capacity
30 AH Batteries, battery posts, terminals and related
@ 10 HR Rate
accessories contain lead and lead compounds, and
CCA 575 other chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
Nominal Open harm. WASH HANDS AFTER HANDLING.
Circuit Voltage 12.8 Vdc or more.
Recommended 1.8A @ 5-10 HR or 6.0A @ 1

Charging Rate HR
WARNING
NOTE: Never attempt to open the battery. If the seal Battery electrolyte is poisonous. It contains acid!
is broken, the battery will be ruined and will fail Serious burns can result from contact with the skin,
within a few weeks. eyes, or clothing.
ANTIDOTE:
External: Flush with water.
Internal: Drink large quantities of water or milk. Follow

with milk of magnesia, beaten egg, or vegetable oil. Call
a physician immediately.
Eyes: Flush with water for 15 minutes and get prompt

medical attention.
Batteries produce explosive gases. Keep sparks, flame,

cigarettes, etc. away. Ventilate when charging or using
in closed space. Always shield eyes when working near
batteries.
Keep out of reach of children.
1. Check battery voltage with a volt/ohm meter. A fully

charged battery should be 12.8 V or higher.
2. If the voltage is below 12.6 V, the battery will need to
be recharged (see Chapter 11 Charging
Procedure , page 11.37).
To service a Maintenance Free battery:
3. Remove battery from the vehicle (see Chapter 2
Battery Removal, page 2.34).
11
4. Test battery with a voltage meter or load tester to
determine battery condition. This will determine the
length of time required to charge the battery to full
capacity. Refer to OCV table (see OCV - Open
Circuit Voltage Test, page 11.36).
5. Charge the battery as recommended (see Chapter
11 Charging Procedure , page 11.37).
11.35
ELECTRICAL
Battery Removal / Installation OCV - Open Circuit Voltage Test
See Chapter 2 Battery Removal, page 2.34 and Battery voltage should be checked with a digital
Battery Installation, page 2.35 procedures. multitester. Readings of 12.6 volts or less require further
battery testing and charging. See the following chart and
Battery Off Season Storage Load Test.
Whenever vehicle is not used for a period of three NOTE: Maintenance Free batteries should be kept at
months or more, remove the battery from the vehicle, a high state of charge during storage. If the battery is
ensure that it's fully charged, and store it out of the sun in stored or used at a low state of charge, hard crystal
a cool, dry place. Check battery voltage each month sulfation will form on the plates, reducing the
during storage and recharge as needed to maintain a full efficiency and service life of the battery.
charge. Use a volt/ohm meter to test battery voltage.
NOTE: Battery charge can be maintained by using a
Polaris battery tender charger or by charging once a OPEN CIRCUIT VOLTAGE
month to make up for normal self-discharge. Battery
tenders can be left connected during the storage STATE OF CHARGE VOLTAGE
period, and will automatically charge the battery if
the voltage drops below a pre-determined point. 100% 12.8 V and up
75% Charged 12.6 V
Battery Testing 50% Charged 12.3 V
Whenever a service complaint is related to either the 25% Charged 12.0 V
starting or charging systems, the battery should be
checked first. 0% Charged 11.8 V or less
The following are two tests which can easily be made on
a sealed Maintenance Free battery to determine its
condition: OCV Test and a Load Test.
11.36
ELECTRICAL
Load Test Charging Procedure
If battery voltage is 12.6 Vdc or less, the battery may
CAUTION need recharging. When using an automatic charger, refer
to the charger manufacturers instructions for recharging.
To prevent shock or component damage, remove spark Do not exceed 6 amps when charging the 4011224
plug high tension leads and connect securely to battery.
engine ground before proceeding. NOTE: Charge the battery using an automatic
charger that will not exceed 14.6 Vdc. An automatic
A battery may indicate a full charge condition in the OCV charger will signal when charging is complete.
test, but still may not have the storage capacity Allow the battery to stand disconnected for at least
necessary to properly function in the electrical system. 1-2 hours after being properly charged. If the voltage
For this reason, a battery capacity or load test should be drops below 12.6 volts, charging was ineffective or
conducted whenever poor battery performance is the battery needs to be replaced.
encountered.
To perform this test, use a load testing device that has an
adjustable load. Apply a load of three times the ampere-
hour rating. At 14 seconds into the test, check battery WARNING
voltage. A good 12V battery will have at least 10.5 volts.
If the reading is low, charge the battery and retest. An overheated battery could explode, causing severe
injury or death. Always watch charging times carefully.
Battery Conductance Analyzer Stop charging if the battery becomes very warm to the
touch. Allow it to cool before resuming charging.
Conductance describes the ability of a battery to conduct
current. A conductance tester functions by sending a low
frequency AC signal through the battery and a portion of
the current response is captured, from this output a STATE OF VOLTAGE CHARG-
(DC) ACTION
conductance measurement is calculated. Conductance CHARGE E TIME
testing is more accurate than voltage, specific gravity, or None, check
load testing. 12.8 or None
100% again in 3 Required
more
Authorized Polaris dealers/distributors are required to months
use the conductance analyzer when testing 12V Polaris 75% - May need
batteries. 12.6 - 12.8 slight charge 3 - 6 hrs
100%
Needs
50% - 75% 12.3 - 12.6 Charge 5 - 11 hrs
Needs At least
25% - 50% 12.0 - 12.3 Charge 13 hrs
Needs At least
0% - 25% 12.0 or less Charge 20 hrs
NOTE: Follow the charger instructions supplied by

the manufacture regarding the order or connections,
switch positions and when to connect the charger to
an outlet.
11
Polaris MDX-610P
Bosch PN: PU-50296
11.37
ELECTRICAL
STARTING SYSTEM
Troubleshooting Voltage Drop Test
Starter Motor Does Not Run The Voltage Drop Test is used to test for bad
connections. When performing the test, you are testing
Battery discharged the amount of voltage drop through the connection. A
Loose or faulty battery cables or corroded poor or corroded connection will appear as a high
connections (see Chapter 11 Voltage Drop Test, voltage reading. Voltage shown on the meter when
page 11.38) testing connections should not exceed 0.1 VDC per
connection or component.
Related wiring loose, disconnected, or corroded
To perform the test, place the meter on DC volts and
Poor ground connections at battery cable, starter place the meter leads across the connection to be tested.
motor or starter solenoid (see Chapter 11 Refer to the voltage drop tests on the starter system in
Voltage Drop Test, page 11.38) this chapter.
Faulty key switch
Voltage should not exceed
Faulty starter solenoid or starter motor 0.1 DC volts per connection
Engine problem - seized or binding (can engine be
rotated easily)
Starter Motor Turns Over Slowly

Battery discharged
Excessive circuit resistance - poor connections
(see Chapter 11 Voltage Drop Test, page 11.38)
Engine problem - seized or binding (can engine be
rotated easily)
Faulty or worn brushes in starter motor
Starter Motor Turns - Engine Does Not Rotate

Faulty starter drive
Faulty starter drive gears or starter motor gear
Faulty flywheel gear or loose flywheel
11.38
ELECTRICAL
Starter Motor Removal Starter Motor Installation
1. Remove driver side seat and disconnect the battery. 1. Inspect and replace starter motor O-ring if needed.
2. Raise and support rear of vehicle. 2. Lubricate starter motor O-ring with fresh engine oil.
3. Remove the RH rear wheel. 3. Install the starter motor onto the engine case.
4. Remove (+) positive wire from starter motor terminal. 4. Hand tighten the upper starter mounting bolt / stud.
5. From the RH side wheel well using an 8mm flex 5. Install and torque the lower mounting bolt to
socket, remove the negative battery cable nut and specification.
the two fasteners securing the starter motor to the
engine. NOTE: Tighten the lower starter bolt first, as the
bottom hole acts as a pilot hole to properly align
the starter drive (bendix) with the flywheel. This
helps prevent binding and starter damage.
6. Torque upper starter mounting screw to specification.

7. Install (-) negative battery cable to the upper starter
mounting bolt / stud. Torque nut to specification.
Starter Mounting Bolts and Nut:

7 ft-lb (10 Nm)
NOTE: The (-) negative battery cable is mounted

to the engine using the upper starter mounting
bolt / stud.
6. Remove the starter from the engine.
11
11.39
ELECTRICAL
Starter Solenoid Bench Test Starter Solenoid Operation
Test the start solenoid by powering the solenoid using To energize the Starter Solenoid the following must
battery voltage for a maximum of 5 seconds. With the occur:
solenoid energized, resistance should read about 0 - 0.5
ohms between terminals (A) and (B). If resistance The brake must be applied to provide a ground
measurement is out of specification, replace the starter path via the Orange wire.
solenoid. The key switch must be turned to the start
position to provide 12V power via the Green /
White wire.
Once the pull-in coil is energized, the solenoid
provides a current path for 12V power to reach the
starter motor.
NOTE: See ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
BREAOUTS: Starter-Interlock provided in this
chapter for starter solenoid operation.
Condition: Starter fails to turn over the

engine.
11.40
ELECTRICAL
ELECTRONIC POWER STEERING (EPS)
EPS Operation
WARNING
The EPS module is an intelligent electronic power
steering system that operates off of the vehicles 12V
electrical system. It calculates steering assist by sensing Electronic Power Steering (EPS) units are not
the difference between the input torque of the steering interchangeable between ATV and RANGER product
post and the output torque required to turn the wheels, lines.
and then provides assist by energizing an electric motor.
The process provides a smooth, seamless assist.
NOTE: See Chapter 5 ELECTRONIC POWER
The system is continuously running diagnostic checks STEERING ASSEMBLY, page 8.9 for power
and monitoring factors such as battery voltage, ground steering unit removal and installation
speed and engine speed. In the event an internal or procedures.
external issue that affects the EPS system is detected,
the system will illuminate a fault indicator and transition
to a normal mechanically coupled steering system. The
WIRE COLOR FUNCTION
system is Polaris Digital Wrench compatible for
simplified diagnostics and system troubleshooting ORANGE (2-Pin) Main Power (30A Protected)
through the vehicles diagnostic port.
BROWN (2-Pin) Ground
With the engine off and the key on, the power steering
unit will operate for up to five minutes. After the five ORANGE (8-Pin) Key-On Battery Voltage
minutes, you will need to cycle the key switch and restart
the engine to regain power steering operation. YELLOW (8-Pin) CAN High Signal
NOTE: To conserve battery power, the EPS unit will GREEN (8-Pin) CAN Low Signal
shut down 5 minutes after the engine has stopped if
the key remains in the ON position. At this point, the
EPS Malfunction Indicator Light will illuminate to Proper EPS System Diagnosing
indicate the EPS has shut down and will set a fault
code in Digital Wrench. READ BEFORE YOU REPLACE THE EPS UNIT!
NOTE: Verify the EPS unit has the latest software
The Power Steering 30A Fuse. version and calibration loaded before replacing the
EPS unit. If not, update to the latest version for each
If the fuse fails, the Power Steering Malfunction and follow the guided diagnostic procedure (s)
Indicator Light (MIL) on the instrument cluster will available in Digital Wrench.
illuminate. During this time, the vehicle will have
no power steering operation. You will be able to
connect and communicate with the vehicles
Engine Controller, but not the Power Steering
Controller, while using Digital Wrench.
NOTE: DO NOT SPLICE OR CUT INTO THE
CAN CIRCUITS.
11
11.41
ELECTRICAL
EPS System Breakout
11.42
ELECTRICAL
EPS Troubleshooting (Power Steering Non-Functional with MIL ON)
11
11.43
ELECTRICAL
EPS Troubleshooting (Power Steering Non-Functional with MIL OFF)
11.44
ELECTRICAL
EPS Troubleshooting (Using Digital Wrench)
11
11.45
ELECTRICAL
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM BREAKOUT DIAGRAMS
AWD
11.46
ELECTRICAL
Vehicle Speed Sensor
11
11.47
ELECTRICAL
Cooling System
11.48
ELECTRICAL
Unswitched Chassis Power
11
11.49
ELECTRICAL
Key-On Battery Power
11.50
ELECTRICAL
Lights
11
11.51
ELECTRICAL
Charging System
11.52
A Installation ......................................................... 9.10
Removal............................................................ 9.10
Air Box Brake System IX
Assembly View .................................................. 2.16 Assembly View .................................................... 9.6
Air Filter Troubleshooting ................................................. 9.40
Assembly View .................................................. 2.16 Brakes
Pre-Filter Service ............................................... 2.14 Bleeding / Fluid Change........................................ 9.8
Service .............................................................. 2.15 Brake Burnishing Procedure ............................... 9.32
Air Intake Duct Drain.............................................. 2.15 Brake Hose and Fitting Inspection ....................... 2.43
Alignment Brakes Lock....................................................... 9.40
Wheel................................................................ 2.38 Hydraulic Brake System Operation ........................ 9.5
Authorization Master Cylinder Installation ................................... 9.8
Reflash.............................................................. 4.51 Master Cylinder Removal...................................... 9.7
AWD Overheating....................................................... 9.40
Diagnosis .......................................................... 7.32 Pedal Vibration .................................................. 9.40
Operation .......................................................... 7.31 Performance Issues ........................................... 9.40
AWD/2WD Switch................................................ 11.14 Special Tools ....................................................... 9.3
Torque Specifications ........................................... 9.4
Troubleshooting Brake Noise ................................ 9.5
B Break Even Test .................................................. 11.31
Balance Shaft Break-In Period ....................................................... 2.3
Installation ......................................................... 3.70
Removal / Inspection .......................................... 3.50
Ball Joint C
Service .............................................................. 8.19
Cab Frame
Battery
Assembly / Removal...................................10.310.4
Installation ......................................................... 2.35 Camshaft
Load Test......................................................... 11.37 Installation / Timing............................................. 3.79
Maintenance ...................................................... 2.34
Removal............................................................ 3.33
Removal............................................................ 2.34 Sprocket Inspection............................................ 3.35
Storage ........................................................... 11.36 Camshaft Timing - Quick Reference........................ 3.83
Tester .............................................................. 11.37
Cargo Box
Testing ............................................................ 11.36
Removal.......................................................... 10.22
Battery Charging Procedure ................................. 11.37 Centralized Hilliard
Belt Inspection....................................................... 5.16
Assembly View .................................................. 7.30
Belt Installation...................................................... 5.16
Charging System
Belt Removal......................................................... 5.15 Stator Tests ..................................................... 11.32
Bleeding Testing Flow Chart............................................ 11.34
Cooling System.................................................. 3.18
Chassis .................................................... 10.1110.12
Brake Burnishing ................................................... 9.21 Clutch
Brake Caliper Starter One Way ................................................ 3.75
Assembly (Front)................................................ 9.25
Clutch Chart .................................................... 1.11, 5.3
Assembly View (Front)........................................ 9.22
Combustion Chamber ............................................ 3.40
Inspection (Front) ............................................... 9.25 Connecting Rod Assembly ..................................... 3.66
Installation (Front) .............................................. 9.26
Connecting Rod Inspection .................................... 3.60
Rear.................................................................. 9.33
Console
Removal (Front) ................................................. 9.23 Removal................................................ 10.2310.24
Brake Disc Conversion Table................................................... 1.23
Front ................................................................. 9.27
Coolant
Rear.................................................................. 9.38 Drain / Fill .......................................................... 2.29
Brake Fluid Inspection ........................................... 2.42 Level Inspection ................................................. 2.26
Brake Light Switch ............................................... 11.13
Coolant Flow Diagram ........................................... 3.17
Brake Pad
Cooling Fan
Installation (Front) .............................................. 9.20 Circuit Breaker ................................................. 11.27
Thickness .......................................................... 9.20
Cooling Fan Bypass Test...................................... 11.25
Brake Pad Inspection............................................. 2.42
Cooling System
Brake Pads Assembly View .................................................. 3.17
Rear.................................................................. 9.29 Bleeding Procedure............................................ 3.18
Removal (Front) ................................................. 9.19
Coolant Strength and Type.................................. 2.26
Brake Pedal Hoses................................................................ 2.27
IX.1
Pressure Cap Test.............................................. 3.14 Bushing Service ................................................. 5.23
Pressure Test.............................................2.27, 3.13 Button to Tower Clearance .................................. 5.20
Specifications .................................................... 3.13 Cover Bushing ................................................... 5.23
CPS ..................................................................... 4.32 Disassembly ...................................................... 5.18
Crankcase Moveable Sheave Inspection .............................. 5.23
Assembly........................................................... 3.71 Needle Bearing .................................................. 5.19
Disassembly / Inspection .................................... 3.48 Roller and Pin Inspection .................................... 5.21
Crankshaft Shift Weights ..................................................... 5.20
Connecting Rod Bearing Selection ...................... 3.63 Spider Removal ................................................. 5.21
Connecting Rod Inspection ................................. 3.60 Spring ............................................................... 5.18
Installation ......................................................... 3.68 Drive Shaft
Main Bearing Selection ....................................... 3.63 Boot Inspection .................................................. 2.31
Removal / Inspection .......................................... 3.51 CV Joint Handling .............................................. 7.16
Crankshaft Position Sensor (CPS) .......................... 4.32 Installation (Front) .............................................. 7.12
CV Joint / Boot Installation (Rear)............................................... 7.14
Replacement (Outer) .......................................... 7.17 Removal (Front) ................................................. 7.11
Cylinder Removal (Rear).................................................. 7.13
Inspection.......................................................... 3.55 Driven Clutch
Installation ......................................................... 3.67 Assembly........................................................... 5.32
Removal............................................................ 3.56 Assembly View .................................................. 5.36
Cylinder Head Bushing Service ................................................. 5.31
Assembly........................................................... 3.77 Disassembly ...................................................... 5.28
Disassembly ...................................................... 3.38 Service .............................................................. 5.28
Installation ......................................................... 3.78 DTC ..................................................................... 4.40
Removal............................................................ 3.37
Warp ................................................................. 3.37
Cylinder Leakdown Test ......................................... 2.20 E
ECU ..................................................................... 4.18
Replacement .............................................4.18, 4.51
D EFI
Dash Diagnostic Trouble Codes ................................... 4.40
Removal.......................................................... 10.20 Operation Overview............................................ 4.17
Dash Instruments / Controls ................................... 10.8 Service Notes ...................................................... 4.5
Decal Replacement ............................................. 10.27 EFI System
Decimal Equivalent Chart ....................................... 1.26 Assembly View .................................................... 4.6
Diagnostic Trouble Codes ...................................... 4.40 Component Locations........................................... 4.7
Diagnostic Trouble Codes (ETC)............................. 4.40 Electrical
Differential AWD Breakout Diagram.................................... 11.46
Assembly...................................................6.21, 6.41 Charging System Breakout Diagram .................. 11.52
Bushing Replacement ................................6.19, 6.39 Chassis Power Breakout Diagram ..................... 11.49
Disassembly ..............................................6.18, 6.38 Cooling System Breakout Diagram .................... 11.48
Operation ..................................................6.16, 6.31 Key-On Power Breakout Diagram...................... 11.50
Digital Wrench Lights Breakout Diagram .................................. 11.51
Communication Errors ........................................ 4.48 Speed Sensor Breakout Diagram ...................... 11.47
Diagnostic Connector ......................................... 4.48 Torque Specifications ......................................... 11.3
ECU Reprogramming ......................................... 4.51 Electronic Control Unit (ECU) ................................. 4.18
Guided Diagnostics ............................................ 4.49 Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) ............................ 4.36
Overview ........................................................... 4.46 Engine
Serial Number.................................................... 4.49 Assembly View ............................................3.93.12
Updates............................................................. 4.47 Balance Shaft Removal / Inspection..................... 3.50
Doors ................................................................... 10.5 Bearing Selection Identification ........................... 3.62
Doors XP 4 ........................................................... 10.6 Break-In Period .................................................. 3.32
Drive Belt Breather Hose Inspection.................................... 2.19
Inspection.......................................................... 5.16 Camshaft Installation / Timing ............................. 3.79
Installation ......................................................... 5.16 Camshaft Removal............................................. 3.33
Removal............................................................ 5.15 Camshaft Sprocket Inspection............................. 3.35
Drive Clutch Connecting Rod Bearing Selection ...................... 3.63
Assembly........................................................... 5.25 Cooling System Troubleshooting ......................... 3.90
Assembly View .................................................. 5.17 Crankcase Assembly.......................................... 3.71
IX.2
Crankcase Disassembly / Inspection.................... 3.48 Torque Specifications ........................................... 7.2
Crankshaft Installation ........................................ 3.68 Floor................................................................... 10.15
Crankshaft Main Bearing Selection ...................... 3.63 Removal................................................ 10.2310.24 IX
Crankshaft Removal / Inspection ......................... 3.51 Floor / Rocker Panels XP 4................................... 10.16
Cylinder / Piston Installation ................................ 3.67 Flywheel
Cylinder / Piston Removal ................................... 3.56 Installation ......................................................... 3.76
Cylinder Head Assembly..................................... 3.77 Removal............................................................ 3.46
Cylinder Head Disassmebly ................................ 3.38 Front A-arm
Cylinder Head Installation ................................... 3.78 Replacement ..................................................... 8.16
Cylinder Head Removal ...................................... 3.37 Front Body
Cylinder Head Warp ........................................... 3.37 Removal.......................................................... 10.20
Cylinder Inspection............................................. 3.55 Front Bumper
Exhaust Valve Lash - Tappet Selection Matrix....... 3.87 Removal.......................................................... 10.19
Flywheel Installation ........................................... 3.76 Front Caliper, Piston Bore I.D. ................................ 9.25
Flywheel Removal.............................................. 3.46 Front Gearcase
Installation ......................................................... 3.28 Assembly........................................................... 7.37
Intake Valve Lash - Tappet Selection Matrix.......... 3.86 Disassembly / Inspection .................................... 7.34
Lower End Assembly.......................................... 3.62 Installation ......................................................... 7.39
Lower End Disassembly / Inspection.................... 3.44 Lubrication......................................................... 2.24
Mounting ........................................................... 3.31 Removal............................................................ 7.33
Oil and Filter Change.......................................... 2.18 Front Gearcase, Centralized Hilliard........................ 7.30
Oil Flow Chart ...................................................... 3.5 Front Propshaft
Oil Level ............................................................ 2.17 Installation ......................................................... 7.24
Piston / Connecting Rod Assembly ...................... 3.66 Removal............................................................ 7.23
Piston Disassembly / Inspection .......................... 3.57 Fuel Filter.............................................................. 2.13
Piston Ring Installation ....................................... 3.64 Fuel Injector .......................................................... 4.20
Piston Ring Installed Gap.................................... 3.59 Troubleshooting ................................................. 4.20
Piston Ring Removal / Inspection ........................ 3.58 Fuel Line............................................................... 2.13
Removal............................................................ 3.24 Fuel Lines
Service .............................................................. 3.24 Removal / Installation ......................................... 4.10
Service Specifications .......................................... 3.6 Fuel Pump ............................................................ 4.25
Special Tools ....................................................... 3.3 Replacement ..................................................... 4.27
Specifications ...................................................... 3.6 Fuel Sender
Starter Drive Installation...................................... 3.76 Test................................................................... 4.25
Stator Cover Installation...................................... 3.76 Fuel System .......................................................... 2.12
Top End Assembly.............................................. 3.77 Fuel Tank Vent Line and Filter ............................. 2.12
Top End Disassembly / Inspection ....................... 3.33 Priming / Starting Procedure ............................... 4.17
Troubleshooting ................................................. 3.89 Principal Components ........................................ 4.17
Valve Cover Removal ......................................... 3.33 Troubleshooting ................................................. 4.45
Valve Inspection................................................. 3.39 Fuel Tank
Valve Sealing Test .............................................. 3.40 Assembly View .................................................... 4.9
Valve Seat Reconditioning .................................. 3.41 Installation .................................................4.13, 4.16
Engine Coolant Temp. Sensor (ECT)..................... 11.25 Removal....................................................4.10, 4.14
Engine Serial Number Location ................................ 1.4 Fuse Box ............................................................ 11.27
Engine Service Panel........................................... 10.19 Fuse Box Detail ................................................... 11.28
Engine, Camshaft Timing - Quick Reference............ 3.83
Engine, Valve Cover Installation.............................. 3.88
EPS G
Breakout Diagram ............................................ 11.42
Operation ........................................................ 11.41 Ground
Troubleshooting ............................................... 11.43 Engine / Chassis ................................................ 2.35
ETC...................................................................... 4.36
Exhaust Valve Lash - Tappet Matrix......................... 3.87
H
Headlight Switch.................................................. 11.13
F High Altitude Clutch Chart ................................ 1.11, 5.3
Fan Control Circuit Bypass Test ............................ 11.25 Hood
Fan Control Circuit Operation ............................... 11.25 Removal.......................................................... 10.20
Final Drive Hood / Front Body................................................ 10.10
IX.3
I O
Ignition Coil ......................................................... 11.19 Oil Pressure Test ..................................................... 3.4
Replacement ................................................... 11.19 Open Circuit Voltage Test ..................................... 11.36
Test................................................................. 11.20 Oxygen Sensor ..................................................... 4.39
Ignition Switch ..................................................... 11.14
Instrument Cluster ................................................. 11.4
Diagnostic Mode .............................................. 11.10 P
Information Display Area..................................... 11.7
Installation ....................................................... 11.12 Parking Brake
Pinouts.............................................................11.11 Adjustment (INTL) ............................................. 9.12
Removal.......................................................... 11.12 Assembly View (INTL) ....................................... 9.11
Rider Information Display.................................... 11.6 Caliper (INTL) ................................................... 9.13
Intake Valve Clearance - Tappet Selection Matrix ..... 3.86 Disc (INTL) ....................................................... 9.16
Inspection (INTL)............................................... 9.12
Pedal Position Sensor (PPS) .................................. 4.37
K Piston
Disassembly / Inspection .................................... 3.57
Key-off Current Draw Test .................................... 11.31 Installation ......................................................... 3.67
Keys Removal............................................................ 3.56
Replacement ....................................................... 1.5 Ring Groove Clearance ...................................... 3.58
Ring Installation ................................................. 3.64
Ring Installed Gap.............................................. 3.59
L Ring Removal / Inspection .................................. 3.58
Piston to Cylinder Clearance .................................. 3.59
Leakdown Test ...................................................... 2.20 Plunging Joint / Boot
Lower Steering Shaft Replacement (Inner)........................................... 7.19
Removal (EPS) .................................................. 8.13 Power Steering
Lower Steering Shaft (EPS) Assembly View .................................................... 8.9
Installation ......................................................... 8.13 Power Steering Unit
Lubrication Grease Points ........................................ 2.8 Installation ......................................................... 8.14
Lubrication Specifications......................................... 3.3 Removal............................................................ 8.11
Lubrication Specifications (Engine) ......................... 3.32 PPS...................................................................... 4.37
Pre-Ride / Daily Inspection ..................................... 2.10
Propshaft
M Support Bearing Replacement ............................ 7.28
Main Frame............................................... 10.1110.12 U-Joint Service .................................................. 7.29
Maintenance Publication Numbers................................................ 1.5
50 - 500 Hour ....................................................... 2.5 PVT
Battery .............................................................. 2.34 Drying ............................................................... 2.30
Brake System .................................................... 2.42 Filter Service...................................................... 2.30
Cooling System.................................................. 2.26 PVT Covers and Ducting Components
Electrical and Ignition ......................................... 2.34 High Lifter .......................................................... 5.10
Engine............................................................... 2.17 PVT System
Fuel System....................................................... 2.12 Assembly........................................................... 5.13
General Vehicle Inspection ................................. 2.10 Belt Break-In........................................................ 5.5
Pre-Ride - 50 Hour ............................................... 2.4 Disassembly ...................................................... 5.11
Quick Reference Chart .................................. 2.62.7 Drive Clutch Operation ......................................... 5.4
Service Products and Lubricants ........................... 2.9 Driven Clutch Operation........................................ 5.5
Steering............................................................. 2.37 Maintenance ........................................................ 5.6
Transmission and Gearcases .............................. 2.23 Overheating Diagnostics....................................... 5.7
Maintenance Chart .................................................. 2.3 Overview ............................................................. 5.4
Master Torque Table .............................................. 1.21 Service ................................................................ 5.8
Metric Bolt Torque Specification .............................. 1.24 PVT Troubleshooting ............................................. 5.37
Model Number Designation ...................................... 1.2
R
N Radiator
ne Removal / Installation ......................................... 3.14
Valve Clearance Adjustment ............................... 3.84 Radiator Inspection / Cleaning ................................ 2.28
IX.4
Radius Rod Engine................................................................. 3.3
Service .............................................................. 8.21 Final Drive ........................................................... 7.2
Rear Bumper Shock................................................................ 8.36 IX
Assembly View ................................................ 10.18 Transmission ....................................................... 6.2
Removal.......................................................... 10.20 Specification
Rear Cargo Box) ................................................. 10.17 Wheel Toe-Out................................................... 2.38
Rear Fender Flare Removal ....................... 10.2110.22 Specifications
Rear Fenders ...................................................... 10.17 Brakes................................................................. 9.3
Rear Propshaft Camshaft........................................................... 3.35
Installation .................................................7.25, 7.27 Cooling System.................................................. 3.13
Removal....................................................7.24, 7.26 Engine................................................................. 3.6
Rear Stabilizer Bar................................................. 8.26 Engine Lubrication .......................................3.3, 3.32
Rear Suspension Engine Oil Pressure ............................................. 3.4
Assembly View .................................................. 8.25 Transmission and Front Gearcase ....................... 2.23
Reflash Authorization............................................. 4.51 Specifications, Walker Evans 2.0 Shocks ................ 8.31
Regulator / Rectifier Location................................ 11.33 Spring
Relays ................................................................ 11.29 Adjustment ........................................................ 2.40
Rocker Panel Springs ................................................................. 8.27
Removal................................................ 10.2310.24 Standard Bolt Torque Specification ......................... 1.24
Rocker Panels..................................................... 10.15 Starter
Rocker Panels XP 4............................................. 10.16 Drive Installation ................................................ 3.76
One-Way Clutch Assembly ................................. 3.75
One-Way Clutch Disassembly ............................. 3.47
S One-Way Clutch Inspection................................. 3.46
Starter Motor
Seat Installation ....................................................... 11.39
Removal.......................................................... 10.19 Removal.......................................................... 11.39
Seat Assembly Front............................................ 10.13 Starter Solenoid
Seat Assembly Rear ............................................ 10.14 Operation ........................................................ 11.40
Seat Belt Test................................................................. 11.40
Switch ............................................................. 11.16 Starter System
Sensor Troubleshooting ............................................... 11.38
Oxygen ............................................................. 4.39 Stator
Sensor, Pedal Position ........................................... 4.37 Cover Installation ............................................... 3.76
Service Panel...................................................... 10.19 Stator Cover.......................................................... 3.44
Shift Cable Stator Tests......................................................... 11.32
Adjustment .......................................................... 6.5 Steering
Inspection............................................................ 6.5 Assembly View (Non-EPS).................................... 8.5
Inspection and Adjustment .................................. 2.10 Inspection.......................................................... 2.37
Shift Lever Maintenance ...................................................... 2.37
Installation ........................................................... 6.4 Steering / Suspension
Removal.............................................................. 6.4 Special Tools ...............................................8.3, 10.2
Shock Steering Shaft
Disassembly ...................................................... 8.36 Bearing Replacement ........................................... 8.7
Replacement ..................................................... 8.28 Removal (Non-EPS) ............................................. 8.6
Special Tools ..................................................... 8.36 Steering Wheel
Valve Shim Arrangement .................................... 8.36 Removal (Non-EPS) ............................................. 8.6
Walker Evans 2.0 Assembly View........................ 8.29 Steering Wheel (EPS)
Walker Evans Rebuild Information ....................... 8.35 Removal............................................................ 8.11
Walker Evans Service......................................... 8.31 Steering Wheel Freeplay........................................ 2.37
Shock Piston Orientation, Walker Evans.................. 8.36 Suspension
Shock, Walker Evans 2.5, Assembly View ............... 8.30 Compression Adjustment.................................... 2.41
Shock, Walker Evans, Assembly............................. 8.39 Spring Adjustment.............................................. 2.40
Shocks ................................................................. 8.27 Walker Evans..................................................... 2.40
Spark Plug Service ................................................ 2.36 Switch
Special Tools........................................................... 1.6 Brake Light ...................................................... 11.13
Body/Steering/Suspension............................8.3, 10.2 Seat Belt.......................................................... 11.16
Brakes................................................................. 9.3 Switches
Clutching ............................................................. 5.2 AWD/2WD ....................................................... 11.14
EFI...................................................................... 4.3 Gear Position ................................................... 11.15
Electrical ........................................................... 11.3
IX.5
Headlamp........................................................ 11.13 Fuel System....................................................... 4.45
Ignition ............................................................ 11.14 Transmission ..................................................... 6.53
Transmission Shifting Difficulty ............................ 6.53
T
Tap / Drill Sizes (Metric) ......................................... 1.25
U
Tap / Drill Sizes (SAE) ............................................ 1.25 Upper Steering Shaft (EPS)
Temperature / Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor Installation ......................................................... 8.15
(TMAP) ............................................................... 4.31 Removal............................................................ 8.10
Thermostat Replacement ....................................... 3.15
Throttle Body......................................................... 4.34
Throttle Pedal V
Inspection.......................................................... 2.14
Tie Rod End Inspection .......................................... 2.38 Valve
Tire Clearance Adjustment ........................................ 3.84
Inspection.......................................................... 2.32 Inspection.......................................................... 3.39
Pressure............................................................ 2.32 Sealing Test ....................................................... 3.40
TMAP ................................................................... 4.31 Seat Reconditioning ........................................... 3.41
Toe Adjustment ..................................................... 2.39 Valve Clearance
Torque Specifications Exhaust Valve Lash - Tappet Selection Matrix....... 3.87
Body / Frame ..................................................... 10.2 Intake Valve Lash - Tappet Selection Matrix.......... 3.86
Brakes................................................................. 9.4 Valve Clearance Inspection .................................... 2.20
Clutching ............................................................. 5.2 Valve Cover
Electrical ........................................................... 11.3 Removal............................................................ 3.33
Engine Components ............................................. 3.8 Valve Cover Installation.......................................... 3.88
Final Drive ........................................................... 7.2 Valve Spring Removal............................................ 3.38
Steering / Suspension........................................... 8.4 Vehicle Identification
Transmission ....................................................... 6.2 Model Number Designation................................... 1.2
Wheel and Hub .................................................. 2.31 Vehicle Identification Number ................................... 1.3
Trailing Arm VIN......................................................................... 1.3
Service.............................................................. 8.22 VIN Location ........................................................... 1.4
Spherical Bearing Replacement .......................... 8.24 Voltage Drop Test ................................................ 11.38
Transmission
Assembly........................................................... 6.23
Assembly (INTL) ............................................... 6.43 W
Assembly View .................................................. 6.29 Water Pump
Disassembly ...................................................... 6.12 Housing Removal............................................... 3.45
Disassembly (INTL) ........................................... 6.32 Installation ......................................................... 3.19
Gear / Shaft / Bearing Inspection ......................... 6.22 Removal............................................................ 3.19
Installation ........................................................... 6.9 Service .............................................................. 3.21
Lubrication......................................................... 2.23 Wheel
Lubrication Specifications ..................................... 6.2 Installation ......................................................... 2.32
Mounting and Torque Values ................................. 6.3 Removal............................................................ 2.31
Output Shaft Backlash (INTL) ............................. 6.43 Wheel Alignment ................................................... 2.38
Output Shaft Backlash Procedure........................ 6.23 Wheel Bearing
Removal.............................................................. 6.6 Rear Service........................................................ 7.8
Snorkel Shaft Removal ....................................... 6.12 Wheel Hub
Troubleshooting ................................................. 6.53 Assembly View .................................................. 7.41
Transmission Lubrication ......................................... 6.2
Transmission Switch ............................................ 11.15
Trouble Codes....................................................... 4.40
Instrument Cluster (ETC) .................................... 4.40
Troubleshooting
Brake Noise ......................................................... 9.5
Brake System .................................................... 9.40
Clutch................................................................ 5.37
Cooling System.................................................. 3.90
Engine............................................................... 3.89
Fuel Injector....................................................... 4.20
IX.6
2014 RZR XP 1000 (Chassis)
2014 RZR XP4 1000 (Chassis)
2014 RZR XP 1000 / XP4 1000 (Box)
2014 RZR XP 1000 INTL (Chassis)
2014 RZR XP 1000 INTL (Box)
2015 RZR XP 1000 / XP4 1000 (Box)
2015 RZR XP 1000 INTL (Box)

2014-15 Ranger RZR-1000 XP XP4 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information2014-15 Ranger RZR-1000 XP XP4 Full Service Manual

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

2014-15 Ranger RZR-1000 XP XP4 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2014-15 Ranger RZR-1000 XP XP4 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2014-2015 RZR XP 1000 / RZR XP4 1000

Publication Printed August 2014 (PN 9925724 R01)

NOTE provides key information by clarifying instructions.

Loctite, Registered Trademark of the Loctite Corporation

Nyogel, Trademark of Wm. F. Nye Co.

Fluke, Registered Trademark of John Fluke Mfg. Co.

Mity-Vac, Registered Trademark of Neward Enterprises, Inc.

Torx, Registered Trademark of Textron

Hilliard, Trademark of the Hilliard Corporation

Warn, Trademark of Warn Industries

FOX, Registered Trademark of FOX RACING SHOX

RydeFX, Registered Trademark of ArvinMeritor

ENGINE / COOLING SYSTEM 3

Model Number Designation

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) Designation (2015+)

SERIES# PART NUMBER

2870910-A 2870975 2871056 2871226 2871282

2871351 2871358-B 2871702 2871745 2872085

2872608 2876389 2877408 8700226 9314177-A

PU-47471 PU-48951 PU-49466 PU-50105 PU-50296

PU-50338 PU-50518 PU-50562 PU-50563 PU-50564

PU-50565 PU-50566 PU-50578 PU-50624 PU-50625

PV-1253 PV-43513-A PV-43526 PV-43531 PV-43568

PV-43570 PV-48656 PW-47053 PW-47054

CATEGORY DIMENSION / CAPACITY

Gross Vehicle Weight 2200 lbs. / 998 kg

Cargo Box Capacity 300 lbs. / 136 kg

740 lbs. / 335.6 kg

Hitch Towing Capacity

RZR XP 1000 CLUTCH CHART

Gross Vehicle Weight 2560 lbs. / 1161 kg

Cargo Box Capacity 300 lbs. / 136 kg

900 lbs. / 408 kg

Hitch Towing Capacity This vehicle is not equipped with

2014-2015 RZR 1000 XP4

CATEGORY DIMENSION / CAPACITY

Gross Vehicle Weight 2470 lbs. / 1120 kg

Cargo Box Capacity 300 lbs. / 136 kg

740 lbs. / 335.6 kg

Hitch Towing Capacity The tow loop on the rear of the

2015 RZR XP 1000 Desert Edition

CATEGORY DIMENSION / CAPACITY

Gross Vehicle Weight 2200 lbs. / 998 kg

Cargo Box Capacity 300 lbs. / 136 kg

740 lbs. / 335.6 kg

Hitch Towing Capacity This vehicle is not equipped with

pounds (lb) x 0.454 = kg

cubic centimeters (cc) x 0.061 = cubic inches

GRADE 2 GRADE 5 GRADE 8

1/4-20 5 (7) 8 (11) 12 (16)

1/4-28 6 (8) 10 (14) 14 (19)

5/16-18 11 (15) 17 (23) 25 (35)

5/16-24 12 (16) 19 (26) 29 (40)

3/8-16 20 (27) 30 (40) 45 (62)

3/8-24 23 (32) 35 (48) 50 (69)

7/16-14 30 (40) 50 (69) 70 (97)

7/16-20 35 (48) 55 (76) 80 (110)

1/2-13 50 (69) 75 (104) 110 (152)